JP2019165892A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To accurately capture a detection signal of a sensor.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: game control means for executing a periodic process every predetermined cycle; first detection means; and second detection means. The game control means includes conversion means for converting a signal from the first detection means to a serial signal, a serial input port to which the serial signal is input, and a general-purpose input port to which signals of the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input. The first detection means determines the signal level on the basis of a result of detecting the signal once in one periodic process, and the second detection means determines the signal level on the basis of a result of detecting the signal a plurality of times in one periodic process. The signal of the first detection means is input to the serial input port via the general-purpose input port or the conversion means, and the signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 237

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  The pachinko machine controls the progress of the game using various signals input to the main control MPU. In the pachinko machine described in Patent Document 1, the main control means has a serial input port and a parallel input port, and transmits a sensor signal to the serial port of the main control means. Moreover, the pachinko machine described in Patent Document 2 has a main control device that outputs data for display on the accessory ratio display by serial communication. Further, in the pachinko machine described in Patent Document 3, an inspection connector is connected to the MPU of the main control board, and the inspection connector is connected to the MPU, the notification / production control device, the drive unit, and the external terminal board. The signal is branched from the route, and signals output from the MPU to the notification / production control device, the drive unit, and the external terminal board are also input to the inspection connector.

JP 2006-22262 A JP-A-2018-361 JP, 2006-123464, A

  When the main control MPU has both a parallel signal input / output function and a serial signal input / output function, the main control MPU includes a signal from a game ball detection sensor, a signal from various operation switches, and a signal from an abnormality detection sensor. However, it is necessary to devise a combination of input / output signal types and input / output functions, that is, which signals are assigned to parallel signal input / output functions and which signals are assigned to serial signal input / output functions. It is. In particular, since the timing for reading a signal differs between the parallel signal input function and the serial signal input function, the performance of the gaming machine differs depending on which signal input function is used to read the signal.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can accurately take in a detection signal of a sensor.

  According to the present invention, there is provided a game control means for executing a periodic process at predetermined intervals, a first detection means and a second detection means for detecting an event relating to the progress of the game in order to control the progress of the game. The gaming control means comprises a conversion means for converting a signal from the first detection means into a serial signal, a serial input port to which a serial signal is input, and the first detection means or A general-purpose input port to which the signal of the second detection means is individually input, and the first detection means has a signal level based on a result of detecting the signal once in the periodic process of one time. Wherein the second detection means determines a signal level based on a result of detecting the signal a plurality of times within one periodic process, and the first detection means The signal of the detecting means is the general-purpose input port. Or to the serial input port via the conversion means, the signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port, and the game control means The signal level is determined by detecting the signal of the second detection means a plurality of times within the regular processing (see, for example, paragraphs 2137 to 2208, FIGS. 237 to 243, etc.).

  According to the present invention, even when data is transferred by serial communication in the main control board, the signal level is determined based on the result of detecting the signal a plurality of times within one periodic process (so-called twice reading). ) Since the necessary signal is input to the general-purpose port, the detection signal of the sensor can be accurately captured.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view which shows an example of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from back. It is the front view which cut | disconnected the front structural member and table | surface unit in the game board at the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area | region. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure in main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the arithmetic circuit in main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of a serial communication circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an accessory ratio calculation and a display process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the accessory ratio calculation / display process of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement | positioning of the program (code) stored in ROM, RAM, and data which were incorporated in main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area | region for an accessory ratio calculation. It is a figure which shows the structure of an accessory ratio display. It is a figure which shows the structure of a driver circuit. FIG. 6 is a timing diagram of data input to a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of main control MPU and an accessory ratio display. It is a figure which shows a load register selection table. It is a figure which shows a character generator decoding table. It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of an accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of an accessory ratio. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of base calculation and a display process. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of a prize ball number, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of a prize ball number, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of a prize ball number, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of a prize ball number, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of a prize ball number, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation and display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation and display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation and display process. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area | region for base calculation. It is a front view which shows another example of a game board. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation and display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation and display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation and display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation and display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display selection process. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation and display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base calculation process 1. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base calculation process 2. FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation process 1; 10 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation process 2. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a timer interruption process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation process 3. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation process 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base display process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation process 3. 10 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation process 4. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base display process. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows arrangement | positioning of a frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows arrangement | positioning of a frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the example of a connection of a discharge ball sensor and a main control board. It is a front view which shows an example of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a main control input circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the main control I / O port. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the main control I / O port. FIG. 98 is a timing chart in the configuration example of the main control I / O port shown in FIG. 97. It is a figure which shows the change of the state (section) concerning calculation of a base value. It is a figure which shows the example of the character displayed on a base display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base calculation process. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the base calculation process of FIG. 105. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base display data generation process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a base calculation process. It is a figure which shows calculation of a base when a gaming state switches. It is a figure which shows the structure regarding a storage area among the internal structures of main control MPU1311. It is a figure which shows an example of the program of a timer interruption process and a base calculation process. It is a figure which shows an example of the program of a timer interruption process and a base calculation process. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement | positioning of the program (code) stored in ROM, RAM, and data which were incorporated in main control MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history recorded on a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the example of an error screen. It is a figure which shows the example of an error signal. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a figure which shows an example of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game history. It is a block diagram which shows a periphery control board and the structure of the periphery. 3 is a block diagram showing a peripheral configuration of a peripheral control SRAM. FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game log | history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows the modification of game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of game history. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which has a setting part from the back in the opened state. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 from back in the closed state. It is a figure which shows the setting part of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of a setting part. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board which has a setting part from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown in FIG. 135 from back. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a fluctuation pattern selection determination process. (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is off. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. FIG. 43 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24-29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). FIG. 145 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). FIG. 145 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of effects executed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern in the variation pattern table in FIG. 144 (A). FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects executed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is a short-time state and the result of the special lottery is out of play. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is a short-time state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of the main control board. It is a figure which shows another example of mounting of the main control board. It is A-A 'sectional drawing in FIG. 151 (B). It is a figure which shows another example of mounting of the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting confirmation process. It is a timing diagram of a security signal. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a setting confirmation process. It is another example of a fluctuation pattern table. It is an example of the last reserved color table. 160 is a table showing the appearance ratio of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 1 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reservation color table of FIG. It is an example. 160 is a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. It is an example. 160 is a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 5 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. It is an example. It is an example of a notice production table. It is an example of a dialogue production table. It is another example of a notice production table. It is an example of a setting suggestion effect table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of a setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect. (A) is an example of an effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode, and (B) is an example of an effect restriction table when an error occurs. It is an example of a new start winning effect restriction table. It is an example of the process table. It is an example of the process table. It is an example of the process table. It is an example of the process table. It is an example of the process table. It is an example of the process table. It is a flowchart of a power-on process. It is a flowchart of a power-on process. It is a flowchart of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a performance display process. It is a figure which shows an alerting | reporting aspect. It is a figure which shows alerting | reporting priority. It is a flowchart of a power-on process. It is a flowchart of a power-on process. It is a flowchart of the main process on the main control side. It is a flowchart of initialization processing at the time of RAM abnormality. It is a flowchart of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a setting process. It is a flowchart of a setting display process. It is a flowchart of a power-on setting process. It is a flowchart of the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of switch input processing 1. 198 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table, and FIG. 198 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch input level / edge data area. FIG. 199 (A) is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table, and FIG. 199 (B) is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch input level / edge data area. It is a flowchart of a setting change / confirmation process. FIG. 201A is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the switch input port 2, and FIG. 201B is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the setting state management area. 202A is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command, FIG. 202B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command, and FIG. 202C is a power diagram. FIG. 202D is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a return-to-input command, and FIG. 202D is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a set value command. It is a figure which shows the transmission order of a command. It is a figure which shows the state transition of a setting state management area. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit determination threshold value table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit determination threshold value table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit determination threshold value table. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center role object and front effect unit of the front unit of a game board, and was seen from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which light-displayed the 1st pattern in the table | surface production | presentation unit. It is a front view which shows the state which light-displayed the 2nd pattern in the front effect unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of the reflection part provided in the light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of the reflection part provided in the light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure showing a mode that the pattern planarly viewed by a light-guide plate is displayed. It is a figure showing a mode that the pattern planarly viewed by a light-guide plate is displayed. It is a figure showing a mode that the pattern stereoscopically viewed by the light-guide plate is displayed. It is a figure showing a mode that the pattern stereoscopically viewed by the light-guide plate is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a circuit diagram around the synchronous serial interface of the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the connection of a serial / parallel conversion circuit and LED. It is a figure which shows arrangement | positioning on the main control board of main control MPU and peripheral components. It is a figure which shows arrangement | positioning of the port in main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the timing of the output and taking-in of the data by a synchronous serial signal. It is a figure which shows another arrangement | positioning of the main control board in a main control board box. It is a figure which shows another arrangement | positioning of the main control board in a main control board box. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front member opened. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the various mechanism elements with which the slot machine was equipped, electronic devices, an operation member, etc. It is a figure which shows the memory area provided by ROM, RAM, etc. in this embodiment, and the detail of a ROM area. It is a figure which shows the detail of the RAM area | region in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area | region for an accessory ratio calculation. It is a figure which shows the detail of the parameter information setting area | region of this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the procedure of the system reset starting process performed when a slot machine is reset. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a regular process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the information signal N output process.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 9, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main frame and the main frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame 3, the game board 5, the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2, and FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine as the door frame 3, the game board 5, It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled into the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, and was seen from back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 that has a quadrangular outer shape in front view and penetrates back and forth, and a lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball attached to the upper right portion 201 of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201 A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the player into the game area of the game board 5, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 A foul cover unit 520 that receives a game ball that has been attached to the game unit and missed into the game area and discharges it to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a game ball on the upper plate 201 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base unit 100. A ball feed unit 540 for sending to the ball launcher 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560. ing.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are attached to the right side of the main body frame base as viewed from the front. And door 3 and a locking unit 700 that locks between the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped payout that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. The unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980.

  Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 is provided for performing control related to the progress of the game performed in the pachinko machine 1. The main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio indicator 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be provided not on the main control unit 1300 but on the payout control board unit 950.

  Further, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 without providing a separate display device for displaying the accessory ratio. In this case, if the accessory ratio is constantly displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the player can be notified of the accessory ratio, and the player may be able to confirm the state of the pachinko machine.

  As will be described later, the ratio of the winning combination can be calculated by the number of winning balls divided by the total number of acquired balls. For example, a pachinko machine with a high value of the winning ratio (for example, 90%) has many winning balls depending on the jackpot. Since it is obtained, it can be said that it is in good condition. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low value of an accessory ratio (for example, 10%) can be said to be in a bad condition because there are few jackpot games and few winning balls in the jackpot. Therefore, the player can select a pachinko machine to play in consideration of the numerical value of the accessory ratio.

  As a mode for notifying the player of the bonus rate, the numeric value of the bonus rate may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, when the ratio of an accessory is 70% or more, the numerical value is displayed in red, the frame lamp is lit red or flashes, and when it is 69% to 30%, the numerical value is displayed in green, and the frame lamp is lit green or flashes. To do. The numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in such a manner that it is not mistaken for a decorative design. For example, it may be displayed in such a manner that it is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative symbol when it is not changed, or the size of the number indicating the accessory ratio is made smaller than that of the decorative symbol. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

  Further, the player may be informed of the accessory ratio by changing the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 according to the value of the accessory ratio. For example, when the ratio of the actors is 70% or more, the decoration pattern is displayed in red, the frame lamp is lit red or blinks, and when it is 69% to 30%, the decoration pattern is displayed in green, and the frame lamp is lit green. Or blink. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

  Further, it may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 provided in the door frame 3. In that case, the display mode mentioned above may be changed, and it may be displayed together with other information as well as the accessory ratio. The other information includes the number of jackpots, the number of consecutive jackpots (the so-called consecutive number of times), the number of balls and the remaining balance.

  Further, not only the accessory ratio, but also a continuous accessory ratio and a base value, which will be described later, may be displayed by changing the mode as described above. The display mode of the combination ratio, the continuous combination ratio, and the base value may be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin main control board box 1320 sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed, and is placed on the printed board. Can be seen from the outside. Further, for example, when the back cover 980 is formed of a transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio indicator 1317 provided in the main control unit 1300 is displayed on the pachinko machine. It can be seen from the back side of the machine 1. By enclosing the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in the main control board box 1320, unauthorized modification of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 for making the pachinko machine 1 appear to be less radiant can be prevented. Can display euphoria.

  When the back cover 980 is made of an opaque resin, a hole is formed in the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 or the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is made transparent, The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be seen from the back side of the machine 1.

  Even when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is formed flat, or the back cover 980 is thinly formed. The ratio indicator 1317 may be easily seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  Below the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, there is provided a discharge port for collecting the game balls that have flowed out of the game area 5a via the out port 1111 and the winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006, etc., and discharging them to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. Note that the game ball discharged from the discharge port is supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island facility. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a discharge ball sensor 3060 for detecting a game ball discharged from the discharge port.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the display switch 1318 can be operated. It may be displayed (printing, engraving, sticking, etc.) that the switch is for operating the display of the ratio of the objects on the printed circuit board in the vicinity of the display switch 1318 or the main control board box 1320. Note that the display switch 1318 is preferably provided near the accessory ratio display 1317, but even if it is not the main control unit 1300, any other board (for example, the effect control board 4700) may be used if it is easy to operate. , The power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200. It may be provided on a relay board provided separately from the peripheral control unit 1500 or the main control unit 1300, a power board in the power board box 930 on the frame side, or a payout control board unit 950. Further, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it by mistake.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on an instruction from a payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) accommodated in the payout control board unit 950, the payout apparatus 830 pays out one by one, and is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and is discharged by the payout apparatus 830. The upper full-ball path unit 850 that guides the game balls downward and discharges the game balls from either the normal discharge port or the full-discharge port according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the tray unit 200. And a normal guide path that is attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 and that guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port of the upper full-ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through-ball path 526 of the door frame 3. And a full tank guide path that guides the game balls released from the full tank outlet to the front and guides the game balls from the front end to the full tank receiver 530 of the door frame 3. A lower Kalimantan ball path unit 860, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side when viewed from the front of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball is housed inside. A payout control board unit 950. .

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is to be shot, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed above the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that are guided to the front, a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100 A box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board 1310 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning holes that are attached to the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and can receive game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a. A table unit that (illustration is omitted), and a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the upper of the substrate holder 1200, the.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 5a is received in a prize opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received prize opening. . Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the right front, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 16 is a front view in which the front structural member and the front unit in the game board are cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. In addition, the game board 5 has a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. A board-like gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by driving a game ball into the gaming area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel Peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start opening 2002 that is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery drawn, and a first special lottery drawn by receiving game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 There are provided a first grand prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006 that allow game balls to be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second big prize opening 2006 is composed of two big prize winning openings, a second upper big prize opening 2006a and a second lower big prize opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which game balls circulate (see FIG. 16).

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted immediately above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a first grand prize port 2005, The side unit 2100 is attached to the left side of the front view along the inner rail 1002 and is attached to the lower side unit 2200 having three general winning ports 2001, and the side unit lower 2200 is attached to the upper left end of the front view. A frame-like shape that is attached to the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a second major winning port 2006. A center accessory 2500.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape that is open at the front, and has a back box 3010 that has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and is arranged at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A mechanism 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 that is attached to the right end in front view in the back box 3010 and discharges a game ball received in the general winning port 2001 or the second start port 2004 of the center accessory 2500; It is attached in the back box 3010 near the front end of the lower right corner when viewed from the front. Lower right ball passage unit 3035 for discharging accepted gaming balls out port 2543C, and a.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010, the upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear box 3010 to be rotatable. The box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, the effect drive board 3043 accommodated in the effect drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. And a panel relay board cover 3045 covering the rear side.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back-under-back movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back-upper left-movement production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box The rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and the back top attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable effect unit 3400 and lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below opening 3010a in back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[2-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001, and a stop portion 1006 with which a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 contacts is provided.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  On the back side of the game board 5 in the vicinity of the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (desirably immediately after passing through the backflow prevention member 1007), a launch ball sensor 1020 for detecting a game ball driven into the game area 5a is provided. For example, the launch ball sensor 1020 includes a magnetic sensor, and outputs a signal when a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and has flowed into the game area 5a is detected. Note that the launch ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position where the game ball always passes within the game area. By fixing the position of the launch ball sensor 1020 on the game board 5, the specifications can be shared among a plurality of models, and inspection at the manufacturing site and inspection after installation in the hall are facilitated.

  Further, the launch ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the game area 5a such as the vicinity of the exit of the rails 1001 and 1002 detects the out ball before the winning port sensor detects the winning of the game ball. That is, since the game balls are detected in the order of out balls and prize balls, it is possible to accurately calculate the base value without detecting the prize balls due to the game balls not counted as out balls.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 so that it can be detached from the rear side. The panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes and positioning holes for mounting the back unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  In a state where the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding unit 1003 and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[2-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 14) can be discharged downward.

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents, game ball payout, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in the drawing, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has two LEDs based on a status indicator composed of one LED for displaying a gaming state and a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in a lighting manner according to the normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variably displayed by blinking control of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol variation display related to the passage of the game ball with respect to the gate part 2003 Among them, a normal hold indicator composed of two LEDs for indicating the number of hold, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition of change display has not yet been established, and the reception of a game ball to the first start opening 2002 (start winning prize) After the first special symbol is variably displayed by controlling blinking of the eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result drawn by The first special symbol display that displays the LED in the lighting mode according to the first special lottery result and the variation display of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 is still a variation display By receiving a game ball in the second start port 2004 (occurrence of a start winning) by a first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying a hold number that is the number of variable displays for which the start condition is not satisfied. A second special that displays the eight special LEDs in a lighting manner according to the second special lottery result after the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by controlling blinking of the eight LEDs based on the lottery second special lottery result. Displaying the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which the variable display start condition has not yet been established, among the variable displays of the second special symbol related to the reception of the game ball to the second start port 2004 L The number of repetitions of the opening / closing pattern of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006 when the second special holding number indicator consisting of D and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result are “big hit” or the like And a round indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying (number of rounds). In addition, you may comprise a part display (for example, 1st special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 by 7 segment LED.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image (see FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Main liquid crystal display]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 that protrude outward from the left side surface in front view, and a right fixing piece that protrudes outward from the right side surface in front view. 1602. This main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixed pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of the box 3010, the right fixed piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixed piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is moved downward. Is attached to the back box 3010.

[2-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and FIGS. 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. Projecting rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game balls, and the game balls are gated The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the section 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 A first grand prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006 that allow game balls to be received either in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  A plurality (four in this case) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the other one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed substantially directly below the stop portion 1006 at the upper right in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed right below the gate portion 2003 from the front view. Of the plurality of general winning ports 2001 described above, the general winning port 2001 disposed in the vicinity of the upper right in the front view in the game area 5a is disposed immediately above the second starting port 2004. The first grand prize winning port 2005 is disposed between the first starting port 2002 and the out port 1111. The second grand prize winning port 2006 is arranged on the right side of the first starting port 2002 in front of the first grand prize winning port 2005.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the second big prize opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 includes a second upper big prize opening 2006a and a second lower big prize opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which game balls circulate. It is comprised by. In the second big prize opening 2006, the second upper big prize opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right in front of the game area 5a, and the second lower big prize opening 2006b is a front view of the second upper big prize opening 2006a. Located on the left side below.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted immediately above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a first grand prize port 2005, The side unit 2100 is attached to the left side of the front view along the inner rail 1002 and is attached to the lower side unit 2200 having three general winning ports 2001, and the side unit lower 2200 is attached to the upper left end of the front view. A frame-like shape that is attached to the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a second major winning port 2006. A center accessory 2500.

[2-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described. In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1111 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starter unit 2100 has a first starter port 2002 and a first grand prize port 2005.

  The starting port unit 2100 is a rectangular unit base 2101 that is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extends in the left-right direction and has a first big winning port 2005 that penetrates back and forth. A ball receiving portion 2102 that protrudes forward from the upper portion of the center in the left-right direction above the big prize opening 2005 and that forms the first starting port 2002, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101, and the first starting port. A ball guiding portion 2103 for guiding the game ball received in 2002 downward, a first start port sensor 2104 attached to the ball guide portion 2103 for detecting the game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a first A first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big prize opening 2005.

  The first attacker unit 2110 of the start opening unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big prize opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is opened to the front with the same size as the first big prize opening 2005. The box-shaped unit case 2111 and the first big prize opening door which are horizontally long and flat and are supported by the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the lower side is pivotable so that the first big prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 attached to the unit case 2111 for opening and closing the first big prize opening door member 2112, and a first case winning prize opening 2005 attached to the unit case 2111. A first grand prize opening sensor 2114 for detecting a game ball and a first attached to the upper surface of the unit case 2111. The moving port sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, the first big prize winning port sensor 2114 and the start port unit relay board 2115 which relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the lower part of the unit case 2111 are attached to the first big. And a starter unit decoration board (not shown) for decorating the winning opening 2005 with light emission.

  The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size that can receive only one game ball at a time. The first grand prize opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 is open to the front with a size that allows a plurality of (for example, four to six) game balls to be received at a time.

  The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 formed by a ball receiving portion 2102 that opens upward, and a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is unit-based by a ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided downward on the rear side of 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 2104, the first attacker unit 2110 can be passed through and discharged downward. In the present embodiment, two first start port sensors 2104 are provided. When the two first start port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range on the main control board 1310, the first start port sensor 2104 is provided. In 2002, it is determined that a game ball has been accepted. As a result, it is possible to detect an illegal act due to an unauthorized insertion of a tool into the first start port 2002.

  In the start port unit 2100, the first big prize winning door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened to the unit base 2101 by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101. The first big prize opening 2005 is closed by being inserted into the mouth 2005 from behind. The first grand prize opening door member 2112 is mounted in an upright state in which the first big prize opening 2005 is closed, and the left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111. The first big prize opening 2005 can be changed from a closed state to an open state by rotating the head so as to move downward.

  The first big prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (a state where the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized) and closes the first big prize opening 2005. When the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first big prize opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly higher than the lower side. It will be in the position. That is, the first grand prize opening door member 2112 is inclined so as to become higher from the lower side of the first big prize opening 2005 toward the front.

  In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first grand prize opening 2005 and contacts the first big prize opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game balls is changed from below by the inclination of the first big prize opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear, is accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. The game balls received in the first grand prize opening 2005 are detected by the first big prize opening sensor 2114 and then discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effect devices in the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and an upper plate liquid crystal based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls display of the effect image on the display device 244 and the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the release of the game ball by rotating the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311 that is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, and an input / output device (I Main control I / O port 1314 as a / O device), a main control input circuit 1315 to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, and a main control A RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the MPU 1311. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1311 has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 includes a first start port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2551, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting a gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2547 for detecting a gaming ball passing through the gate 2003, and a gaming ball received in the first big winning opening 2005 A first top prize opening sensor 2114, a second top prize opening 2006a as a second big prize opening 2006, and a second top prize opening sensor 2554 for detecting a game ball received in the second lower prize opening 2006b; Detecting illegal magnetism in the second lower prize winning opening sensor 2557, the discharge ball sensor 3060, the launch ball sensor 1020, and the game area 5a Magnetic detection sensor, the detection signal from the like are input via the respective main control I / O port 1314.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit, whereby the start port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, or the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display, and the first special symbol memory of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port 1314. A drive signal is output to a display device, a second special symbol memory display device, a normal symbol display device, a normal symbol memory display device, a game state display device, a round display device, or the like.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big prize port sensor 2114, the second upper big prize port sensor 2554, and the second lower big prize port. The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, while the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. Further, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened (or expanded), and the game balls are frequently played. In order to enter the game, detection of a game ball by the first big prize opening sensor 2114, the second upper big prize opening sensor 2554, and the second lower big prize opening sensor 2557 frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and a long life are also used for the first big prize opening sensor 2114, the second upper big prize opening sensor 2554, and the second lower big prize opening sensor 2557. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning a prize opening sensor 3015.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU 1311 sends various commands related to control of game effects executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. To the peripheral control unit 1511. When receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1311 shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply board for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. ). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1311 can store various types of information in the RAM 1312 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 951.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a drop in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I / O port 1314, the power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

  An accessory ratio indicator 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position that is visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The accessory ratio display 1317 displays the accessory ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a display switch 1318. The display switch 1318 may be a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be another type of switch. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, and the display content may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration within the main control MPU 1311.

  The main control MPU 1311 includes a CPU 13111, a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, a random number generation circuit 13112, a parallel input port 13113, a serial communication circuit 13114, a timer circuit 13115, an interrupt controller 13116, an external bus interface 13117, a clock circuit 13118, a verification block 13119, Information 13120, an arithmetic circuit 13121, and a reset circuit 13122 are included.

  The CPU 13111 executes a program stored in the ROM 1313. The RAM 1312 stores data necessary for executing the program.

  The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides a random number for determining the lottery result of the variable display game result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the effect of the variable display game. The random number generation circuit 13112 is so-called hard random number generation means for outputting a random number updated at the timing of a clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311, for example. The hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is used for a lottery for a special symbol, a lottery for a special symbol variation display game, or a lottery for a normal symbol.

  The parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

  The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits / receives various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to / from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits / receives various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout of the game ball to and from the payout control board 951 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the accessory ratio to the accessory ratio display 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interruption and various time control. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts (general interrupt, NMI that cannot be masked by software) to the CPU 13111. That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to the vector table defined for each interrupt type and jumps to the address set in the vector table.

  The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. An I / O request (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit address (A0 to A15), and 8-bit data (D0 to D7) can be input / output from the external bus interface 13117.

  The clock circuit 13118 generates an internal clock of the main control MPU 1311 from the input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). The clock circuit 13118 divides the input clock signal by a set number and outputs it to the outside from the CLKO terminal. For example, a clock signal supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be output.

  The verification block 13119 is a functional block for verifying whether the ROM 1313 has been tampered with using a predetermined code. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311 and is written so as not to be rewritable when the chip is manufactured.

  The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function that does not depend on a program recorded in the ROM 1313. This calculation function is fixedly written when the chip is manufactured.

  The reset circuit 13122 has a non-designated travel prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an address outside the predetermined address in the ROM 1313, the non-designated travel prohibition circuit estimates that the access is based on an unauthorized program and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer time elapses, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 by a reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

  FIG. 19 is a block diagram illustrating a detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121.

  The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function that does not depend on a program for the arithmetic result, and includes a multiplication circuit 131111 and a division circuit 131215.

  The multiplication circuit 131111 is an arithmetic circuit that outputs a 32-bit product by multiplying two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits), and converts an input value (multiplier, multiplicand) into a product by a multiplication function. Functions as a conversion circuit for output.

  The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a multiplier and a multiplicand of 16 bits or less in the multiplication input register A 131212 and the multiplication input register B 131213. The multiplication circuit 131111 reads the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at a predetermined timing, and stores the result obtained by multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214. The CPU 13111 acquires the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214. The process from writing a value to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the calculation result in the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock), and the CPU 13111 has the multiplication input register 131212. , 131213, and after a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the multiplication result can be obtained by referring to the multiplication result register 131214.

  The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that divides a dividend of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) and outputs a quotient of 32 bits and a remainder of 32 bits. It functions as a conversion circuit that outputs the quotient and remainder conversion of the input value (divisor, dividend) by function.

  The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a dividend of 32 bits or less in the division input register A131216, and stores a divisor of 32 bits or less in the division input register B131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that a value is stored in both of the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, the division circuit 131215 reads the stored value at a predetermined timing and calculates the quotient obtained by dividing the dividend by the divisor. The result is stored in the division result register A131218, and the remainder is stored in the division result register B131219. When the division circuit 131215 reads the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, the division circuit 131215 may delete the read values and clear the registers. Further, the division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 at the timing when the start instruction is input, and store the division results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219. In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may not be erased at the read timing. Further, the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may be overwritten even if values are already stored (without clearing the stored values).

  The CPU 13111 acquires the division result from the division result registers 131218 and 131219. The process from writing a value to the division input register 131216, 131217 to storing the calculation result in the division result register 131218, 131219 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks). After the values are stored in the registers 131216 and 131217 and a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the division result registers 131218 and 131219 can be referred to to obtain the quotient and the remainder, respectively.

  As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment requires a division process to calculate the base value, and the CPU 13111 executes the program by a plurality of multiplications and subtractions. It is such a thing. For this reason, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process for each timer interrupt process, and it is difficult to display the base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for the calculation of the base value can be shortened, and the base value can be calculated a plurality of times in one timer interrupt process (see FIGS. 75 and 80). . In addition, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for division processing from the time of writing a value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the time of reading the calculation result from the division result register A 131218, other processing can be executed. The base calculation process during the timer interrupt process can be executed efficiently.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114.

  The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmission / reception circuits, and each data transmission / reception circuit transmits / receives data for one channel to / from a predetermined device. In FIG. 20, only the data transmission circuit is illustrated, and the description of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel is mounted) is omitted.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is configured such that the channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the proportion of the objects. Three channels of channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317 are used, and channel 3 is unused.

  The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. 3149.

  Data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then stored in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is configured by a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds the error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted, and stores it in the transmission shift register 3144.

  The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at a rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data in accordance with the transmission clock signal.

  The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission state.

  The communication setting register 3146 stores a command for controlling data transmission. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores a baud rate setting for defining a data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

  Hereinafter, these settings will be described in detail. A communication format for each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, the presence / absence of use of FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bits, and parity (whether parity is used, even parity or odd parity) are set. For example, in channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, the FIFO mode, the stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 × 1010B meaning even parity In channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317, the FIFO mode, the stop bit = 1 bit, and 1xxx1000B, which means that parity is not used, are set.

  In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. In addition, since the gaming machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set a parity when transmitting data at a high speed outside the main control board 1310.

  Since the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the influence of noise is small as compared with communication with other boards via communication wires. Further, since the amount of data to be transmitted / received is small, the communication speed may be low and the need to use parity is scarce. It should be noted that along the pattern for transmitting a signal between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, the left and right and / or the thickness direction of the signal line provided on the surface or inner layer of the printed circuit board) A layer adjacent to the ground pattern) is provided with a ground pattern, and noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern can be reduced by the shielding effect of the ground pattern.

  The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. Specifically, when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the bit of the status register, it can be confirmed whether or not the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 has a free space, and the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 can be determined.

  Note that the bit of the status register can be used to determine whether there is an abnormality in the transmission FIFO. For example, even if data is not written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the bit of the status register is not set, the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 does not have an empty space. Error processing (for example, error notification) may be executed by determining that data is not transmitted from the FIFO.

  The baud rate register 3148 determines the data transmission rate. For example, 19200 bps is set for channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, 1200 bps is set for channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. In channel 2 used for communication with the network, 1200 bps is set.

  Thus, the transmission rate is changed according to the data transmitted on each channel. This is because the game ball is rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuit of the gaming machine is susceptible to noise. For this reason, data is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so that the data for controlling the outgoing ball directly related to the profit given to the player is reliably transmitted. On the other hand, since the peripheral control board 1510 has a large amount of data to be transmitted and is not related to the outgoing ball, it transmits data at a high rate. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal. If it is determined that the command is abnormal, the peripheral control board 1510 does not operate the peripheral control board 1510 or executes an abnormal process (for example, communication error notification). Request retransmission of. When it is determined that the retransmitted command is normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored using the normal command. For this reason, communication with the peripheral control board 1510 can transmit data at a high rate. Further, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player can recognize the delay from the winning of the start opening to the start of the change of the symbol, and there is a possibility that the interest is lowered.

  Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is a data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510), or at a low rate (1200 bps, which is a data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). Good. In addition, the communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed at a high rate (19200 bps which is a data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps which is a data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). A rate between and may be used. If the data transmission rate is increased, this may cause malfunction in other circuits due to switching noise of transistors of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the data transmitted due to noise, the same data is retransmitted for each timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated. If the retransmitted command is normal, the contents displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 This is because it is not necessary to make the transmission rate extremely low.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission state. For example, each bit is defined as follows.
Bit 7: SnTC is a flag indicating completion of transmission. 0 indicates that transmission is in progress and 1 indicates completion of transmission. Bit 6: SnTDBE In the normal mode (communication mode not using FIFO), a flag indicating transmission data empty, 0 indicates no transfer to the transmission shift register, and 1 indicates transfer to the transmission shift register. That is, it is set when data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and no transmission data is stored in the transmission data register 3142.

In the SnTTTL FIFO mode, this is a flag indicating the transmission FIFO trigger level. 0 is the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is greater than or equal to the trigger level, 1 is stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 The amount of transmitted data is below the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, at the time of communication in the FIFO mode, after confirming that the bit is 1, data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.
Bits 5 to 2: Not used (fixed to 0)
Bit 1: SnTCL This bit is used to clear the transmission buffer and break code transmission, empty transmission data, or set the transmission FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), and is written from the outside. For example, when the contents of the buffer are forcibly cleared, 1 is set to the bit. More specifically, the command is written in the FIFO, but is used when transmission of the written command is stopped due to some circumstances (for example, occurrence of an abnormality). Even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

  With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 can perform asynchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. Each transmission / reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, or may be provided with a serial communication circuit for asynchronous communication and a serial communication circuit for synchronous communication.

  Although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating data capture timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the description of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. The payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like is not shown in detail, but performs a discharge control by a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls relating to payout and a launch solenoid 682, and a ball by a ball feed solenoid 551. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED indicator that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that cancels an error displayed on the error LED indicator, a ball tank 802, a tank rail 803, a ball guidance unit 820, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[3-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 952 that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 951 is not shown in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the apparatus 830, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball break detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. The

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Of the signals output from the external terminal board 784, the signals generated by the main control board 1310 are output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. The signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without going through the payout control board 951.

  The error LED display is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number “2” is displayed, it is “ball check” (specifically, the blade Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, it is informed that the payout vane and the game ball are engaged in the payout passage of the payout device 830 and the payout vane is difficult to rotate, and the number “3” is displayed. Is a "counting switch error" (Specifically, a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and when the number “5” is displayed, it is a “retry error”. (Specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is informed that the game ball is full), and when the number “7” is displayed, “CR not connected” (Electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock” ( Ingredients Manner to have informed yet that the ball number of game balls no payout has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner, and this signal is received at the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Is done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining level on the display unit. Entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 551 is omitted in detail, but a launch control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on the clock signal, and the firing reference pulse A launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 682, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the firing timing control circuit after being input to the firing control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  This firing solenoid drive circuit receives, based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507, a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle lever 504. In response to this, it outputs to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 when the ball feed reference pulse is input, thereby playing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the ball. One ball is received in the feeding unit 540, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball launcher 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

  The power supply board for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 even when the power is shut off in the power-off process. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

[3-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the effect driving board 3043, or the gaming board The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the door Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a vibration device 242 or a door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the frame 3, and each device of the door frame 3 Door-side drive light emission data composed of door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on the substrate is used as a frame decoration drive board serial I / O. Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the port to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 from the liquid crystal control unit serial I / O port. In addition to transmitting to 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. . Further, detection signals from the touch panel 246 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 of the effect operation unit 220 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 The operation is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and plays music and music adapted to various effects from the speakers 921 provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. Control is performed so that sound effects and the like flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding backward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a sound signal as sound information) is sent to the plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side and the low-frequency speaker 921 of the main body frame 4. By transmitting a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, a plurality of data different from the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, and display command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect driving board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

  The effect driving board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or the received gaming board side lighting / flashing command. The lighting signal or the flashing signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

  In addition, the effect drive board 3043 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, etc. Or output to

[3-3b. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU enters a state in which interrupt permission is set. For example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, the peripheral control MPU outputs commands from the main control board 1310 and pachinko machines related to the control of game effects. Various commands such as commands relating to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying hour, minute and second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and the calendar information storage unit as current calendar information is acquired in the peripheral control RAM. And set in the time information storage unit as the current time information.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed in response to the input of a V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be received. The value 1 is set in the interrupt process. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp driving board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the peripheral I / O port serial transmission is performed by using the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, the operation button 220C is operated based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220 in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. Based on the various information obtained, the presence / absence of operation of the operation button 220C is monitored, and whether or not the operation state of the operation button 220C is reflected in the game effect is appropriately determined.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (for one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP by the display data creation process described later is displayed on the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side. Output to the decorative substrate 233. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the production control program outputs the sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP in the sound data creation process described later to the speaker 921 and notifies in addition to the music and sound effects. Sound data such as sound and notification sound is output to the speaker 921.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, in order to instruct which screen data from the top screen data is output to the sound source built-in VDP, Update the pointer.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct the number of light emission data from the top light emission data to be used as the light emission modes of various LEDs among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. , Update the pointer.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound data such as music and sound effects and sound command data indicating the sound data of notification sound and notification sound arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The pointer is updated to indicate what sound command data is output from the command data to the VDP with built-in sound source.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data, the number of the drive data from the head drive data is output. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to do so.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program is information transmitted from the game board side decorative board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, which will be described later in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command The receiving unit) analyzes various commands received (command analyzing unit).

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into predetermined notification displays, various abnormality notifications are issued. The peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like set in the abnormal display mode for execution. Alternatively, it is extracted from the peripheral control RAM and set in the peripheral control RAM. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is classified into various commands such as status display, for example, In the case of an error canceling navigation command (second error canceling command), for example, a game board side decorative board 3053 (effect device), door frame side is controlled by controlling to a mode different from a normal performance mode accompanying the rendering operation. The decorative board 233 (effect device) and the lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and the speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 despite being in the gaming state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information and time information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM and stored in the calendar information storage unit. Update the time information. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Peripheral control of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emission data to be performed It is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the unit 1511, set in the peripheral control RAM, and lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is stored in the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral Was created by extracting from your RAM, it is set to peripheral control RAM.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation. Are extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, thereby creating a game board side decorative board 3053. In addition, drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the door frame side decorative substrate 233 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM and controls the sound source by controlling the sound source. In addition to incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the data, an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the production control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM externally attached to the backup first area and the backup second area, The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM externally attached to the peripheral control MPU are copied and backed up in the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively.

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts from the fact that the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. An interrupt timer activation process is performed, and each process of steps S1012, S1014,..., And step S1036 is performed. Set to to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above. The interval at which is inputted is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

  Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received as shown in FIG. 61 is input from the VDP with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 60 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 as shown in FIG. S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in the routine control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above. The interval at which is inputted is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the number of 1 ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next V blank signal generation, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, pointers out of drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM. In accordance with the drive data instructed by the motor, an electric drive source such as various motors and solenoids is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and each time this motor and solenoid drive process is executed, Update the pointer.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, thereby detecting history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, original position history information). , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, the original positions and the movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220 are input, thereby detecting history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, operation Button 220C operation history information) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

  Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side effect receiver IC of the door frame side decorative board 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the door frame side decorative substrate 233 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey the fact.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied to the backup first area and the backup second area for backup, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are backed up. Copy to 1 area and backup 2nd area to backup.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 60, the various processes related to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. is doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233, and the peripheral control MPU and the sound source built-in VDP are mounted. Even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt, A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[3-4. Liquid crystal display controller]
Next, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not illustrated in detail, but as a microprocessor. Display control MPU, display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) for controlling display of main liquid crystal display device 1600 and upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and main liquid crystal Image ROM for storing various screen data displayed on display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper liquid crystal display device 244, and image RAM to which various data stored in this image ROM are transferred and copied And.

  The display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600, Drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes control programs (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 in addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. And a plurality of schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) and non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding thereto. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is defined. Has been. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. The non-resident area transfer data includes various screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The order in which data is transferred is specified.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input to the VDP, the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate are extracted. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. In addition, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. To do. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer. In this method, the held drawing data for one line is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored. This affects the drawing speed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when various persons (characters) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a vertical relationship (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition order”) when the sprites are arranged on the screen or when the sprites overlap with each other, and are set in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device. 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 are drawn.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially perform main scanning that sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel from the left to the right when viewed from the front. And sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeated in a direction crossing the one direction. When the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 receive the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, When viewed from the front of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the pixels are sequentially output to the pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as the sub-scan, and similarly, drawing data for the next line is input. Then, on the basis of the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially applied from the left to the right as viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 as main scanning. Output to each minute pixel.

[4. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 10, FIG. 16, FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. The game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. That is, a game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). By abutting, the flow-down speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

  When a game ball that has been thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front surface of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 from the highest position, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down while abutting on the center. Then, when the game ball flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 that is open on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory passes through the warp passage 2521. The warp outlet 2522 opened in the frame of 2500 is supplied to the stage 2530 through the guide path 2523.

  The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and the central guiding portion 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or the side guiding portions 2532 at the left and right thereof. From either of them. When a game ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the central guiding portion 2531 is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and thus the game released from the central guiding portion 2531. The ball is received at the first start port 2002 with a high probability. When a game ball is received at the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guide portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the opened first big winning port 2005, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center object 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is drawn toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening of the lower side unit 2200 There is a possibility that it may be received in 2001, the first start port 2002, or the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, in the game area 5a, a game ball that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters (is driven into) the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. ) And enters the right upper distribution space 2541 of the right hit game area 2540. In the upper right circulation space 2541, although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted, and a game ball abuts against the obstacle nails and circulates while changing the flow direction in various ways. In the upper right circulation space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at the upper portion, and a second start opening 2004 that is closed by a general winning opening 2001 and a second start opening door member 2549 is provided at the lower portion.

  The game ball that has flowed down in the upper right circulation space 2541 enters the lower right circulation space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side. The game balls that have entered the lower right circulation space 2543 are the second upper prize opening that closes the second upper prize winning opening 2006a and the second lower prize winning opening 2006b, which are lined up on the left and right as the second prize winning opening 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower grand prize opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a that forms the bottom surface, and enters the game area 5a from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side when viewed from the front. Released. The downstream end (release plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball is directed to the first big prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100, and the first big prize opening 2005 is open. When a game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is received at the first big prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

  The game balls flowing through the right flow path 2542 and the lower right flow space 2543 flow down while the increase in the flow speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, the lower right circulation space 2543 may enter a discharge passage 2543b branched near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a. It is discharged out of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned to the inside.

  When a game ball that hits the right and enters the upper right circulation space 2541 passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, it is a normal random number that is updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. A normal lottery is performed by obtaining one ordinary random number from the list and comparing the obtained ordinary random number with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table. If the result of the normal lottery is “normal hit” when the time reduction control described later is not executed, the second start port door member 2549 rotates once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second start port 2004 is opened, and a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time-shortening control is being executed, it is determined whether the “normal hit” is “first normal hit”, “second normal hit”, or “third normal hit” in the normal lottery. If the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is “first normal hit”, “second normal hit”, or “third normal hit” when the time-shortening control is being executed, the second start port door member 2549 By turning in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and opening the second start port 2004, the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 for a predetermined period of time. Opening / closing control is made a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5) by turning counterclockwise and closing the second starting port 2004 so that the game ball cannot be received in the second starting port 2004. ) Times. In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery becomes “per 1st normal”, the second start port 2004 is set to be in a state where the game ball can be received, and “0.3 second” is set as the five periods. , “0.28 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, and the normal lottery result of the normal lottery becomes “per second ordinary” The second start port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be received five times, “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “1.1 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”. When the normal lottery result of the normal lottery becomes “per third ordinary”, the second starting port 2004 is allowed to accept game balls. The period is “0.3 second”, “0.28 second”, “0.3 second”, “0.28 second”, “1.1 second”, “per second ordinary” and “third ordinary” Ri "In advantageous to the player than the" first normal per "has become a (acceptance of game balls to the second start-up port 2004 is easy) Atari. When a game ball is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The

  In the present embodiment, in the normal symbol variation display performed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passing of the game ball through the gate part 2003, the normal symbol variation display is started after the normal symbol variation display is started. A certain amount of time is set until the stop display is made (until the normal lottery result is suggested) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). At the second start port 2004, the second start port door member 2549 is rotated and opened after the normal variation time has elapsed. In addition, during execution of the time-shortening control which will be described later, control for shortening the normal variation time is executed as compared with normal (a state where time-shortening control is not executed). Further, the opening time for turning the second start port door member 2549 to open the second start port 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, time reduction control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second start port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time-shortening control is executed.

  In addition, after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, until a normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped (until the normal lottery result is suggested), a new game ball is added to the gate unit. After passing 2003, the normal symbol display cannot be started again on the normal symbol display. Therefore, the normal symbol change display is started until the previous normal symbol change display ends (the normal lottery result). Until the suggestion is over). Specifically, the normal random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 is stored, and the normal symbol variation display can be started. Until normal symbols change display starts. It should be noted that the number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to 4 and the upper limit is discarded even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 without being retained. . This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball received in the first start port 2002 is detected by the first start port sensor 2104, the main control board 1310 is updated within a predetermined numerical range. An advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”) is obtained by acquiring one first special random number from one special random number and comparing the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table. , “Small hit”, etc.) are generated for the first special lottery result. Then, the first special lottery result after the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink over a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the lottery first special lottery result. The first special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying it in a lighting mode according to (displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the first special lottery result after variably displaying the first special symbol). Note that the first special lottery results that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first starting port 2002 include “out of”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “8R big hit”, and “10R big hit”. Yes, by comparing the acquired first special random number with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which of these is, and after the jackpot game is normal (low probability state: in this example with a probability of about 1/395) Probability improvement control (high probability state (also called probabilistic state): wins the jackpot with a probability of about 44/44 in this example) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) than winning the jackpot) Whether or not to execute (whether or not it is a promising big hit), and whether or not to execute time-short control (time-short state) that shortens the fluctuation time more than usual when the result of the first special lottery is off And short-time control Period to execute: a (time-reduction times special symbol (number of times of the change in the first special punching pattern and the second special symbol)), so that also is determined. The winning probability of “small hit” is always constant regardless of the gaming state (in this example, about 1/300).

  Further, when a game ball received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310 is selected. The second special random number is acquired, and the acquired second special random number is collated with a predetermined jackpot determination table to obtain an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, “small hit”, etc. ) To generate the second special lottery result. Then, the second special lottery result after the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the lottery second special lottery result. The second special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying it in a lighting mode according to (displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the second special lottery result after variably displaying the second special symbol). In addition, the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting a game ball at the second starting port 2004 includes “out of”, “2R big hit”, “4R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “6R big hit”, There are “7R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, and “16R jackpot”, which is determined by comparing the acquired second special random number with the jackpot determination table. Low probability state: In this example, the probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as probabilistic state)) that improves the probability of winning a big hit (winning probability) rather than a win of about 395 in this example: this example (If you win a big hit with a probability of about 1/44) or not (whether it is a promising big hit or not), and at least if the second special lottery result is out of time, the time-saving control to shorten the fluctuation time than usual (Short time ) Is executed (whether or not it is a short and large hit) and the time period during which the time reduction control is executed (the number of time reductions: special symbol (the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate)) It has become.

  When the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state After the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the 8 LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting manner according to the special lottery result, and then the first grand prize opening Either 2005 or the second grand prize winning hole 2006 is in a state where a game ball can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 when the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state, the payout device is provided by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. A predetermined number of game balls from 830 (for example, 11 if a game ball is received in the first grand prize opening 2005 or 15 if a game ball is accepted in the second big prize opening 2006). Is dispensed to the upper plate 201. Accordingly, when the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second major prize opening 2006 are capable of receiving game balls, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 accept many game balls. The ball can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the result of the special lottery is “small hit” or “2R big hit”, the first big prize opening 2005 will play the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that is closed after the accepting open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery results are "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit" A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the first big prize opening 2005 is predetermined. If any of the following conditions are satisfied: a number (for example, 7) of game balls are received or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are received in the second big prize opening 2006 Then, an opening / closing pattern (a single opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) for making the game ball in an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating four rounds for “4R big hit”, five rounds for “5R big hit”, and 16 rounds for “16R big hit”. In addition, the opening / closing pattern (the first big prize opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit”. In the meantime, in the open / close pattern in which the game ball is opened after being opened, the game ball is substantially difficult to enter the first big prize opening 2005. On the other hand, when the special lottery results are "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit" (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the first big prize opening 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls is received or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is received in the second big prize opening 2006. If such a condition is satisfied, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 in an open / close pattern in which the game ball is in an unacceptable closed state). If the special lottery results are "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit" A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the mouth 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the first big prize opening 2005 is determined in advance. Either a certain number (for example, seven) of game balls is accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of game balls is accepted into the second grand prize winning opening 2006 is satisfied. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening / closing pattern for closing the game ball to be unacceptable is executed may be a substantial special lottery result. 7) If any of the conditions for accepting a game ball or accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls into the second grand prize opening 2006 is satisfied, the closed ball that cannot accept the game ball is closed. Open / close pattern to be set and open / close pattern executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big win” (the first big prize opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds) And an opening / closing pattern in which the game ball is opened after being opened and can be closed) may be provided. For example, as a result of the special lottery, “8R big hit that is substantially 4R” is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted into the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening If any of the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is received in 2006 is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern for closing the game balls in an unacceptable state is repeated four times. Opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit” (the first big prize opening 2005 is for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds), The opening / closing pattern that is closed after the game ball can be received may be repeated four times.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the second big prize opening 2006 is composed of a second upper big prize opening 2006a and a second lower big prize opening 2006b arranged in the left and right, and the second big prize winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of “big hit”, for example, in the first round (1R), the second upper prize opening 2006a is opened to accept the game ball, and it is closed by satisfying the condition that the game ball cannot be accepted, and then accepted. Until the second lower big prize opening 2006b is opened and the next round (2R) that allows the reception of game balls is started, and the second lower big prize opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval has passed in the meantime, the second upper prize winning opening 2006a is opened again to allow the game ball to be received. Then, the second upper big prize opening 2006a and the second lower big prize opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are consumed. Thereby, in the second attacker passage 2543a, during the “big hit”, either the second upper prize winning port 2006a or the second lower major prize winning port 2006b is in a state where it can receive the game ball. When the player hits the right and distributes the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball is surely received in the second big prize opening 2006, and the player can entertain the player without missing the game ball. Can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of some of the above-mentioned types of big hits, whether or not to execute the time-shortening control after completion of the big hit game is made different depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. For example, when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in the non-time-short state (the state where the time reduction control is not executed), the short time control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is 8R normal big hit in the time-short state (state where time-short control is executed), the time-short control is executed after the big hit game. Further, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in the non-time-short state (the state where the time reduction control is not executed), the short time control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit in the time saving state (the state in which the time reduction control is executed), the time reduction control is executed after the big hit game. In addition, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are executed after the big hit game in the low-probability non-short-time state (both probability improvement control and time-shortage control are not executed: also referred to as normal state). In the case of 2R probability variable big hit, the time-shortening control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, in the state where the probability improvement control is being executed or the time reduction control is being executed, that is, in the state other than the normal state, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game. In the case of a big hit, the short time control is executed after the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol change display executed by the first special symbol display by the reception of the game ball at the first start port 2002 and the reception of the game ball at the second start port 2004 are the first. The change display of the second special symbol executed by the two special symbol indicators is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator is stopped and displayed (the first special lottery result is suggested) by receiving the game ball at the first starting port 2002 and The first start until the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display by receiving the game ball at the second start port 2004 is stopped (until the second special lottery result is suggested). When a new game ball is received at the mouth 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display starts to display the first special symbol or the second special symbol variable display. Since it is not possible to change the display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) until the end of the variable symbol display of the first special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (first special lottery) Until the results and suggestions for the second special lottery are complete ) Are to be held. More specifically, the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received by the first start port 2002 by the first start port sensor 2104, and the second start port sensor 2551. And the second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 by the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) The variable display start of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until it becomes possible to start the variable display of symbols. In addition, the upper limit of the number of first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to 4 respectively. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without being put on hold. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold. The first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are digested with priority given to the second special random number. That is, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended regardless of the timing of accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the symbol.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display 1600 (the sub liquid crystal display 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the above eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are turned on / off repeatedly for a predetermined time. It blinks and then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and a special lottery result is suggested by a combination of LEDs that are lit at the time of the stop.

  On the other hand, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is displayed by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative symbol sequences composed of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a state where a plurality of columns (for example, three columns of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol) are displayed. The display of the decorative symbol sequence is started, and then it is stopped in sequence (in this example, it is displayed in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol), and finally all decorative symbol sequences are stopped. When displayed, a lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. In other words, depending on the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) acquired when the start prize is generated, a plurality of decorative symbol sequences fluctuate. An effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest a special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) after being displayed is displayed. The decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is better than the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol string fluctuates to confirm the image) The time until the function display unit 1400 is set to be shorter.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center object 2500, the back left side according to the lottery special lottery result The interior decoration unit 3050, the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. are used as appropriate. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[5. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. Specifically, a system / user reset process executed at power-on of the gaming machine and a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined period (4 ms in the present embodiment) by a timer activated by the system / user reset process explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the initialization process of the main control board in the embodiment of the present invention.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and enables writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Specifically, “00H” indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates a built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, “03H” indicating mode setting is written to the watchdog timer control register, and “03H” indicating activation of the watchdog timer is further written. Further, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether a predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not increase immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. A power failure warning signal is input. In the wait process, a predetermined monitor wait value is set, and the process is waited for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) while starting the watchdog timer.

  If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated since the time required for starting the sub board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) has passed (step S18). . When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work ratio calculation work area (function ratio calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is deleted (step S30). ), And proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the internal RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off through normal processing, such as when a power failure occurs (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

  As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power shutdown and the step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

  As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. The portion other than the combination ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 is executed. Proceed to

  Subsequently, it is determined by using the check code whether the work area for calculating an accessory ratio (area for calculating an accessory ratio 13128) is normal (step S24). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the work ratio calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the work item ratio calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

  When one or a plurality of backup areas are provided in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code. If the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup area 1 The data in the backup area, which is determined in the order of 2, N, and first determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Thereafter, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

  For the accessory ratio calculation area, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined time, separately from the check code determination result when the power is turned on. In addition, for each predetermined operating amount (for example, every predetermined number of shot balls, every predetermined number of winning balls, every predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, every bonus game of a predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is different for each data type (the game control data 13132 and the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136). Erase by condition. That is, by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed-up character ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased. If the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be deleted at an arbitrary timing. For this reason, the backed-up character ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, and the erase of the character ratio calculation / display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall staff is prevented. , It is possible to prevent the concealment of the state where the ratio of the accessory is abnormal. For this reason, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been remodeled to a state where the ratio of the bonuses is high or low.

  The main control MPU 1311 executes initial setting for setting various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the RAM work area is set for power recovery or RAM initialization processing is executed (step S28). In the initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, first, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) is initially set and an interrupt is permitted. Further, the serial communication port and test signal output port are initialized. Start the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951, and the accessory ratio display 1317 is set. Further, after the operation of the serial communication circuit 13114 is started, the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is initialized.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process of setting a power-on command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command creation process, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. In generating a power-on command, a power-on state reference command is set as reference command data, and command addition data corresponding to the command to be generated is added.

  The power-on command includes a power-on state buffer command and a special symbol / electrical accessory action number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command for notifying the gaming state at the time of return after power-off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol / electric accessory action number command notifies the execution status of the special symbol variable display.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the pachinko machine 1 is completed by the processing from power-on of the pachinko machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal (step S36), and determines whether or not the power failure notice signal is ON (step S38). If the power failure notice signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is “No”), that is, random number update processing is executed (step S40). In the random number update process of step S46, random numbers other than the random numbers for performing the winning determination mainly in the special lottery or the normal lottery are updated. Note that the random number update process for performing the winning determination in the special lottery or the normal lottery is executed by a timer interrupt process to be described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until a power failure notice signal is detected, and these processes are set as main processes on the main control side (normal means after initial setting).

  On the other hand, when a power failure notice signal is detected (the result of step S38 is “Yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes a power-off process (power-off setting means). In the power-off process, a process for backing up data for returning to the state before the occurrence of the power failure is executed. Specifically, first, the execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312 can be prevented, and rewriting of game information can be protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, an output port for controlling a solenoid or motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption of the time until the main board side power-off process is completed, and to reliably end the main board-side power-off process.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46). Further, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal.

  Subsequently, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data of the work item ratio calculation work area (the item ratio calculation region 13128) (step S50). When the check code is a fixed value, it is not necessary to calculate the check code in step S50. Note that the check code may be calculated and stored every time data is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process instead of the main board power-off process.

  Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

  Subsequently, the data of the main area of the work for calculating an accessory ratio (object ratio calculating area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also copied. The backup may be performed as appropriate (for example, every time data is updated) not by the main board side power-off process but by the accessory ratio calculation / display process.

  In this way, by storing the data used for the calculation of the accessory ratio in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the accessory ratio is retained even when the power is shut off. In addition, it is possible to calculate the ratio of an accessory during long-term operation.

  Further, a value indicating that the backup is normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed. Finally, "01H" indicating write prohibition is output to the RAM protect register to prohibit writing to the RAM 1312 (step S58) and wait until recovery from a power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70). The main control board 1310 in this embodiment has a bank 0 and a bank 1 and is switched and used every time a timer interrupt process is executed.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect a game ball that has entered a winning opening such as a general winning opening, detection signals from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraud using a magnet, and winning ball control processing The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 that informs the payout control board 951 that the payout control board 951 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in step S1 is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area. In the switch input process, detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the fire ball sensor 1020 are read, and the number of out balls is counted.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs timer update processing (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, which will be described later, the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the symbol variation display pattern, a payer ACK signal is transmitted to inform that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). Time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the signal is input is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes random number update processing 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process of step S40 in the system / user reset process (main control side main process) shown in the figure, and the small hit The initial random number for design determination is also updated.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, based on the result of calculating the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created, and a self-check for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and calculates an accessory ratio calculation area 13128 in the main control built-in RAM 1312. (See FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). The process of step S81 can be skipped when there is no prize ball to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a frame command reception process (step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error canceling navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status display by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to that effect is sent to the payout control board 951 and stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 as output information. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 shapes a command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame status display command, an error release notification command, etc.), and transmits the above-mentioned transmission information Store in the information storage area. In the prize ball discharge process, the number of prize balls discharged is recorded in a storage area (see FIG. 27) defined by the gaming state of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

  The bonus ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S89). .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a fraud detection process (step S84). In the fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the game is not in the big hit gaming state, when it is detected by the count switch that a game ball has entered the big winning opening 2005, 2006, etc., the main control program Creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation state based on the jackpot symbol random number value. Then, when the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the state is subsequently shifted to the probability variation state, while when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the state is shifted to a gaming state other than the probability variation state. Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches with the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (“ Normal lottery ”). Then, it is determined whether to open / close the second start door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second start port door member 2549 is in an open (or enlarged) state, and a game state in which a game ball can be received in the start port 2004 becomes a game advantageous to the player. Transition to the state.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the display switch 1318 is operated, and if the display switch 1318 is operated, calls the accessory ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 24 and 25), and the accessory ratio An accessory ratio is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls stored in the calculation area 13128. The calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S89). Thus, by calling the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, it is possible to confirm the accessory ratio (pachinko of the pachinko machine 1) based on the latest data.

  Note that, if the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2 regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, the ratio of the accessory may be displayed. . Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. Also good. Since the display switch 1318 is provided on the back side of the game board, if the display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game is stopped. As described above, when the accessory ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, CPU resources are not consumed by division or subtraction for calculating the accessory ratio during the game, and the load on the CPU can be reduced.

  Details of the accessory ratio calculation / display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. A specific example of the method for displaying the accessory ratio will be described later. Note that when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (combination ratio, continuous combination ratio, cumulative total, and total cumulative) may be calculated. You may calculate only a certain value. In addition, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated. If the display switch 1318 is operated, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317.

  Even when the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and stops the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) and the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89) are executed. Regardless of whether or not fraud has been detected, by executing these processes, it is possible to check the ratio of the accessory even during fraud notification.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or a big hit game When it is in a state, it outputs a drive signal to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to a start-port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start-port (second start-port door member 2549), a probability variation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, and a normal symbol display information output Various games related to signals such as signals, short and medium information output information, start opening prize information output signal, etc. Broadcast and outputs a (game information) signal to the payout control board 951.

  In the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal having a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 for every predetermined number of out balls (such as 10 balls).

  In the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection apparatus connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a gaming state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a special symbol stop symbol (information signal output means).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the transmission information, various commands created by the timer interrupt processing which is this routine are stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum with the mode regarded as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL clears the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process is completed, the timer interrupt process is terminated and the process before the interrupt is restored.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the timer interrupt process. An object ratio calculation process may be executed. In this case, the main control board 1310 may transmit a command for displaying an accessory ratio or a continuous accessory ratio to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511. A command for displaying an accessory ratio or a continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted.

[5-3. Property ratio calculation / display processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The accessory ratio calculation / display process is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation / display process. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, when the calculated accessory ratio is within a predetermined range (or outside the range), the effect in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the ratio of the bonuses exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold value smaller than the reference value), the notice effect may be changed and the notice effect that is more interesting than the normal notice effect may be performed.

  First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140). The calculated check code is It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the main area is normal. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). More specifically, the feature ratio is calculated by the number of winning characters divided by the total number of acquired balls, and the consecutive feature ratio is calculated by calculating the number of consecutive winning characters divided by the total number of acquired balls. The fractional part (value after the decimal point) of the calculated character ratio and continuous character ratio should be rounded down or rounded off. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

  In step S156, the updated value may be copied to the backup area every time the combination ratio and / or continuous combination ratio in the combination ratio calculation area 13128 is updated.

  When the number of bits to be stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, in the calculation of the accessory ratio, the lower bits of the acquired sphere number are omitted and division is performed. May be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of acquired balls is 32 bits, a numerical value from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, if the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8- or 16-bit operations, it takes the lower 16 bits from the most significant bit with a value of 1 out of the number of acquired balls stored in 32 bits. It is good to divide by storing in the register for register (16 bits). If the number of acquired balls is equal to or less than the maximum number of bits that can be used for calculation (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be extracted and used for the calculation.

  Further, dividing the total number of acquired balls by 100 (rounding down the fractional part) and using it as a dividend (number to be divided) can calculate a bonus ratio, thereby avoiding a decimal calculation.

  Further, the upper limit of the accessory ratio may be set to 99, and 99 may be set when the calculation result of the accessory ratio is 100 or more.

  On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal, so the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 1. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. (Step S146). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is normal and the data in the backup area 1 is copied to the main area (step S148). ), An accessory ratio calculation process is executed, and an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

  On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the backup area 1 is abnormal, so the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 2. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. (Step S152). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is normal and the data in the backup area 2 is copied to the main area (step S154). ), An accessory ratio calculation process is executed, data in the main area is read, and an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

  If there is another backup area, similarly, it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio are calculated from the normal backup area data.

  If the data in the main area and all the backup areas are abnormal, the work ratio calculation work area (function ratio calculation area 13128) is initialized and the abnormality is notified (step S158).

  Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process because the power failure flag and the checksum are not calculated in the initialization process because the power failure flag and the checksum are not calculated when resetting in the middle of the main board power-off process. The backed up data is initialized, but if the check code is periodically calculated and stored in the ratio calculation / display process, the ratio calculation work area will be available even if the pachinko machine is turned on again. This is because the data in the (actual object ratio calculation area 13128) can remain without being erased.

  Subsequently, the backup area distribution counter value is updated by adding 1 (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area distribution counter value is an odd number (step S166). If the backup area distribution counter value is an odd number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area distribution counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 2 (step S170). By distributing the copy destination of the data in the main area by the backup area distribution counter value and writing the data only in a part of the backup areas, it is possible to prevent abnormal values from being written in a plurality of backup areas.

  When three or more backup areas are provided, the backup area into which data is written may be distributed by the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area distribution counter value by the number of backup areas.

  Subsequently, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of the accessory ratio and the calculated value, the conversion table (not shown) is referred to obtain data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory ratio display 1317, The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of the accessory ratio is an accessory ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the first two digits, and if the calculated accessory ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the lower two digits.

  In the accessory ratio calculation process (step S156) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process, the data on the number of acquired balls is read from the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the accessory ratio calculation work area shown in FIG. 27). The data cannot be written in the storage area related to the acquired number of balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processes of steps S156 and S172 are configured by a common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data in the storage area related to the acquired number of balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. In addition, data can be written in the storage area of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio.

  As explained above, the data for calculating the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio calculation / display process is duplicated in the backup area, so when normal power-off processing is not executed due to an abnormal reset etc. , The data for calculating the ratio of actors can be protected.

  In addition, since the process of step S156, S172 is common regardless of the kind of game machine, it is good to comprise by one or several common program modules. In this case, the process for determining whether the check code for the main area and the check code for the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side separately from the common program module. This is because the data check and backup methods differ for each model. However, if the data check and backup methods are shared among the models, they may be arranged in a common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM 1313 will be described. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

  The ROM 1313 stores game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debug (inspection function) code 13133, debug (inspection function) data 13134, accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135, and accessory ratio calculation / display. An area for storing the use data 13136 is included. In the ROM 1313 of this embodiment, a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as a game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133 are stored. Debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134 And an accessory ratio calculation area (third storage area) for storing a program used for calculating an accessory ratio, such as an accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and an accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136. Is assigned.

  When an empty area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, and displayed in a dump list format In addition, the game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the code for debugging (inspection function) 13133 and the head address of the code 13135 for calculating the ratio of the actors, When displayed in the dump list format, the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. Note that the value stored in the free area may be a fixed value that is the same value, and may be set to a value that is different from the value set in the game area or the debug area or a value that is less frequently. The value stored in the free area may be an instruction that the CPU does nothing, such as a No Operation code. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

  Further, the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the character ratio calculation / display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without dividing the debug (inspection function) area and the character ratio calculation area. Good. That is, it is only necessary that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, an accessory ratio calculation area (an accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 or an accessory that is a process not directly related to the control of the progress of the game) The ratio calculation / display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid a risk that a defect (such as a bug) in the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 affects the game control.

  The debug (inspection function) area stores target programs and data that are not directly related to the game. A code 13133 for outputting the inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) codes 13133 are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. In addition, the object ratio calculation area stores a program for calculating an object ratio that is not directly related to the progress of the game.

  The game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The game control code 13131 can be read from and written to the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable, and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be performed. In this manner, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. The processing based on the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed. However, the game control code 13131 can be executed from the debug (inspection function) code. Is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be increased, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. .

  Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311. The accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown in the figure, the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 is designed separately from the game control code 13131 and stored in a separate area, thereby checking the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. The inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

  FIG. 26B is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may include a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored. . There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or set every time the main area data is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process. You may set in 22 steps S50-S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined that the initialization process is normal or data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power-off process (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. If a predetermined value is set for the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

  When it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it is determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data of the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). In the main control side power-off process, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Further, in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, the updated data may be copied to the backup area every time the value of the main area is updated (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

  Unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digits of the address.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Data on the number of balls acquired in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is written in a timer interruption process (FIG. 23) timed by the main control MPU 1311, and an accessory ratio calculation process (step in FIG. 24) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. It is read in S156). In this way, the bonus ratio calculation / display process reads the acquired ball number data from the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) acquires the bonus ball data in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. Can be completely separated from the game control program and the program for executing the accessory ratio calculation / display process, and the game for the ratio calculation / display process of the accessory ratio can be made common to gaming machines of different specifications. .

  It should be noted that the accessory ratio calculation processing (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the accessory ratio calculation / display processing uses the calculated accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio as the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Write to the ratio storage area. The data of the calculated feature ratio and the continuous feature ratio is read in the feature ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 25) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process when displaying the accessory ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 and the consecutive accessory ratio storage area.

  FIG. 27A shows the structure of the work area of the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (A), the number of acquired bonus balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of acquired balls, the bonus ratio, and the consecutive bonus ratio are stored. The number of winning winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a winning action (for example, the open large winning opening 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004 with the second starting opening door member 2549 open). is there. The number of consecutive winning characters is the number of winning balls for winning a winning combination when the winning combination is in continuous operation (for example, the winning opening is open in the big hit series). The total number of winning balls is the total number of winning balls paid out to the player. The bonus rate can be calculated by the number of winning balls divided by the total number of acquired balls. The consecutive character ratio can be calculated by the number of consecutive character acquisition balls divided by the total number of acquired balls. The number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the winning ratio and the consecutive winning ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt process. Stored.

  Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (A), the number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls and the total number of acquired balls correspond to the total cumulative number in FIG. It is a 4-byte storage area and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. In addition, the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and numerical values up to 255 in decimal can be stored.

  FIG. 27B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (B), the number of winning characters acquired, the number of other acquired balls, the number of consecutive winning characters, the total number of acquired balls, the winning proportion, and the consecutive winning proportion are stored. Each data storage area is constituted by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n = 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls). When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers of all data move, and the storage area in which the data is updated changes. Then, after data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when data other than the total number of acquired balls (such as the number of winning characters, the number of fired balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol variation display games, the number of special symbol variation display game jackpots, etc.) reaches a predetermined number, The writing pointer may be moved.

  Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. Also, the read pointer moves as the write pointer moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is to calculate the ratio of the bonuses using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

  The total of each data is the total value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the total value of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is a value calculated from the total value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the accumulated value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the total ratio of the feature ratio calculated from the cumulative value and the continuous total ratio is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Even if the ring buffer goes round and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

  Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (B), the number of winning characters, the number of consecutive winning characters, the ratio of the winning features, and the consecutive winning ratio are the same as those in FIG. 27 (A). The number of other winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a prize other than a bonus item (a winning opening that does not open or close, for example, a general winning opening 2001). The total number of acquired balls is the total number of winning balls paid out to the player. When this value reaches a predetermined number, the writing pointer moves. As for the number of winning balls, the number of other acquired balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls, the data in the storage area where the write pointer is stored is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and The physical ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 27C shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27C, more detailed data than that shown in FIG. 27B can be acquired, and the number of acquired ordinary electric combination, special electric combination, and start opening acquisition. In addition, the number of winning mouth winning balls, the number of consecutive feature winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the bonus rate and the consecutive bonus rate are stored. The storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of acquired balls is When the predetermined number (6000) is reached, the write pointer moves to change the storage area in which data is updated. Then, after data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the number of data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired special electric bonuses, the number of fired balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol variation display games, the number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number In addition, the write pointer may be moved.

  The total of each data is the total value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the total value of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is a value calculated from the total value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and is cleared to one storage area of the ring buffer in order to write new data, the accumulated value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past. The cumulative value of the ratio of consecutive items and the ratio of consecutive features is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Even if it is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the total accumulated value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

  Of the work area structure shown in FIGS. 27B and 27C, the number of winning balls in the ring buffer, the number of other winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of acquired balls, the ordinary electric winning ball The number, the number of special electric accessory acquired balls, the number of starting port acquired balls, and the number of other winning port acquired balls are 2-byte storage areas, and numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal numbers. Number of winning balls, number of other winning balls, number of consecutive winning points, total number of acquired balls, number of normal electric winning points, number of special electric winning points, starting point and other winning points The total number is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal. Since the total is the total of data for 6000 prize balls × n (60000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. Number of winning balls, number of consecutive winning balls, total number of winning balls, total number of winning balls, ratio of winning points, ratio of consecutive winning points, number of normal electric winning points, number of winning special electric winning points, starting point The total number of acquired balls and the total number of other winning holes acquired is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 can be stored in decimal. Since the total total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. In addition, the cumulative total and the total cumulative of the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio are each a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

  Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (C), the total number of acquired balls, the ratio of winning combinations, and the ratio of consecutive winning combinations are the same as those explained in FIG. 27 (B). The number of other winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a prize other than a bonus item (a winning opening that does not open or close). The number of balls obtained for the ordinary electric accessory is a prize ball obtained by winning a prize for the ordinary electric accessory being operated (the second start opening 2004 with the second start opening door member 2549 open) according to the result of the lottery based on the normal symbol. Is a number. The number of special electric accessory winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a prize for a special electric accessory that is in operation (for example, the big winning opening 2005, 2006 being opened) according to the result of lottery with a special symbol. The starting-port acquired ball number is the number of winning balls acquired by winning a winning at the starting port (first starting port 2002). The number of winning balls earned for winning a prize is the number of winning balls that are obtained by winning a prize winning opening (general winning opening 2001) that is not an accessory (does not operate) and does not trigger a special symbol lottery. In step S81 of the timer interrupt process, the number of balls acquired by the electric motor, the number of balls acquired by the special electric game, the number of balls acquired by the starter, the number of balls acquired by other winning mouths, the number of balls acquired by the continuous winning combination, and the total number of balls acquired are counted. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated, and the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

  In the data structure shown in FIG. 27A, when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. Data will not be erased when For this reason, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total accumulation in FIGS. 25B and 25C may be deleted every predetermined period.

  Also, the data of the feature ratio calculation area 13128 and the calculated feature ratio are abnormal values (for example, the feature ratio is more than 100%, and the calculation result of the feature ratio is greatly changed from the previous calculated value. In this case, the abnormal value may be deleted. In addition to the abnormal value, all data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, when the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that it is abnormal. In addition, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, and after the normal backup area data is copied to the main area, the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Composition of an accessory ratio display]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio display 1317.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 includes a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, the 7 segment LED 13172 is composed of 4 digits.

  The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are preferably housed in one package, but both may be housed in another package.

  The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, and CLOCK).

  The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and a signal for setting the operation state of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating the data capture timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operation cycle of the driver circuit 13171 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

  The driver circuit 13171 and the 7 segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit signals for lighting the LED elements (7 segments and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit a control signal indicating which digit signal of the 7-segment LED 13172 is transmitted through the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The direction of the signal (current) shown is different depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is an anode common type or a cathode common type, but an example of the anode common type is shown.

  A resistor 13174 that determines a current value to be passed through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 is connected to the R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the light emission luminance of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

  The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, a 16-bit data latch 3172, 8-bit data latches 3173A to D, an 8 × 4 data selector 3174, a decoder 3175, a 2 × 8 data selector 3176, a constant current driver 3178, a driver 3179, A latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, a digit-limit control unit 3181, a duty ratio control unit 3182, a data selector control unit 3183, a standby mode control unit 3184, and an oscillator 3185 are included.

  The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds 16-bit data, and sends it to the 16-bit data latch 3172 as parallel data. The four bits D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode (see FIG. 35) of the driver circuit 13171, and the four bits D11 to D8 are data for selecting a register corresponding to the operation mode. (Refer to FIG. 33), D7 to D0 (LSB) are data of the detailed setting.

  The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and D15 to D8 are controlled by each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit / Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control). Unit 3183 and standby mode control unit 3184), and D7 to D0 are sent to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184). The 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 among the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

  The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15 to D8 and selects the 8-bit data latch 3173 for storing the display data (8 bits of D7 to D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180 has 8 bits of data register 0, that is, Digit-A. A signal for selecting the 8-bit data latch 3173 is sent so that the data latch 3173A stores data.

  The 8-bit data latch 3173 is provided by the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits). According to the selection signal from the latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, the data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED is fetched. Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

  The 8 × 4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at a predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends the data to the decoder 3175 and the 2 × 8 data selector 3176.

  The decoder 3175 converts the input data into a character to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172 using the character generator decode table (see FIG. 34), and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to the 2 × 8 data selector 3176.

  The 2 × 8 data selector 3176 refers to the decode setting, selects data from the decoder 3175 when the mode using the decoder is set, and 8 × when the mode is set not to use the decoder. The data from the 4 data selector 3174 is selected. The selected data is input to the constant current driver 3178.

  The constant current driver 3178 uses the data from the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to output current signals for lighting each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. As described above, the current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal.

  The driver 3179 receives the sink current of the current output from the constant current driver 3178 in order to light each segment of the 7-segment LED 13172. The driver 3179 determines which 7-segment LED (digit) is displayed by controlling the current suction timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3.

  The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of digits to be lit from 1 to 4 digits by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to xxx0011B, all four digits are set in the digit-limit control unit 3181 of the digit-limit control unit 3181. Is written. X indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

  The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by setting from the outside, and controls the brightness at which the 7-segment LED 13172 is lit. The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, by setting D15 to D8 to 0010000B and inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182 has 16-stage duty of 0/16 to 15/16. The ratio setting is written.

  The data selector control unit 3183 controls setting of the decoder. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether to use the decoder 3175 according to the setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001xxxxxxx, settings for using the decoder are written to the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000xxx. By inputting the data as XXB, the setting of NO DECODER not using the decoder is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when it is set to use the decoder, and 2 when it is set not to use the decoder. Control is performed so that the × 8 data selector 3176 selects data from the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

  The standby mode control unit 3184 controls the standby mode setting and the data clear setting. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to the standby mode by setting from the outside. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0000B. In the standby mode, the setting at that time is maintained as it is, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

  In addition, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all data held inside by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all data held in the registers and latches are cleared and initialized.

  The oscillator 3185 generates a clock used in the driver circuit 13171.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of mounting of the main control board 1310. In the drawing, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is indicated by a dotted line.

  FIG. 31A shows the main control board box 1320 of the first mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed without being broken and cannot be opened once closed. (Seal sticking, engraving, printing, etc.) and an opening seal are affixed. The opening seal is a seal that records a history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

  The mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31B shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. In the mounting example 1, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same direction.

  The main control board 1310 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320 and constitutes the main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is disposed at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that inappropriate modification has not been made. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it is possible to easily confirm from the outside that inappropriate modification has not been made by not arranging parts around it.

  The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is disposed on the main control board 1310 at a position where it can be visually recognized from the outside. The direction of the numbers displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 may be in the same direction as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the model number display 1320 on the main control board box. Further, it is preferable to mount so that the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same direction. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the gaming machine in a landscape orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 or the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are the same. It is preferable to mount an accessory ratio display 1317 and a main control MPU 1311 so as to be. In addition, when the main control board 1310 is mounted on the gaming machine in a portrait orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317 or the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are 90 degrees. An accessory ratio display 1317 and a main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so as to be oriented.

  Further, the connectors CN1 and CN2 for drawing out signal lines from the main control board 1310 are aligned with the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in the longitudinal direction, and are end portions along the long side of the main control board 1310 (the upper length in the figure). The upper end portion along the side may be mounted on the lower end portion along the lower long side or the end portion along the left and right sides). That is, it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged at positions where the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps with the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and does not hinder the visual recognition of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. .

  Further, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the unsealed seal attached to the main control board box 1320 are attached to positions that do not overlap with either the main control MPU or the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

  By mounting the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in this way, the model number display of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 is displayed in the correct orientation, improving the visibility of these, and improving the manufacturing process and the playground. Even in the inspection after installation, it is possible to check the ratio of the accessory and the presence / absence of modification of the main control MPU 1311 without taking an excessive posture.

  In another mounting example shown in FIG. 31C, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted such that the model number display and the accessory ratio display 1317 are in the same direction, but circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 are mounted. The direction of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the direction of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal attached to the main control board box 1320. This is because the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are less important when inspecting unauthorized modification, and therefore, it is not meaningful to make the directions arranged on the main control board 1310 the same.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be unstable due to the influence of noise. For this reason, it is desirable to arrange the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 as close as possible.

  For example, as illustrated, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 (the length of the wiring 13101). L1) It arrange | positions so that it may become shorter. That is, L1 becomes larger than L2.

  Further, as described above, no parts are arranged around the main control MPU 1311 in order to easily confirm from the outside that inappropriate modification has not been made, as indicated by a dotted line. For this reason, the wiring length L1 becomes a certain length, but L2 is made as short as possible.

  Note that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or in another package, and in any case, L1 is mounted to be larger than L2.

  FIG. 32B is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another implementation example, and FIG. 32C is the implementation example shown in FIG. It is sectional drawing of a printed circuit board.

  As shown in FIG. 32B, ground patterns 13102 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13101 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, in the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13106 in which no signal pattern is provided is provided on the back surface and inner layer of the signal line 13101. A ground pattern 13107 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern may be provided on at least one of the back surface and the inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13106.

  The arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example will be described. For example, the signal line 13103 that supplies a clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13103 and the signal line 13101 are Arranged so as not to intersect. Further, the signal line 13104 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through the back surface or the inner layer through the through hole 13105. Also in this case, the signal line 13104 is arranged avoiding the prohibited region 13106 (that is, the signal line 13104 and the signal line 13101 do not intersect).

  The main control board 1310 is generally formed of a two-layer board having a pattern on the front surface and the back surface and no inner layer from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification. The present invention can also be applied to a multilayer substrate (4 layers, 6 layers, etc.) having an inner layer.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171. As shown in FIG.

  The load register selection table is a table for determining a register for storing data input to the driver circuit 13171.

  The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182 to set a duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172. For example, when D15 to D8 are 0010000B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the duty ratio, and is written in the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

  The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181, and the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence / absence of decoding and the number of display digits are set. The decode register and the digit number register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the presence / absence of decoding or data for setting the number of display digits, and is decoded by the data selector control unit 3183. It is written into the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

  The data register is used by the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D, and data to be displayed in each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100010B to 00100101B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for lighting the 7-segment LED, and is written in the data registers in the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

  The duty ratio, the presence / absence of decoding, and the number of display digits set in the register described above do not need to be set every time the accessory ratio is displayed, and may be set once. Therefore, the initial setting is performed in step S28 of FIG. Set as Note that when the initial setting is set only once, the setting may be changed after the initial setting due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, every time the opening of the body frame 4 is detected, the switch button It may be reset every time () is pressed. Thereby, even if the setting is switched due to noise, correct display can always be performed.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using the character generator decoding table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. Further, when displaying numbers, D5 to D0 match the displayed numbers, so that the calculation result can be input to the driver circuit 13171 without conversion and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172.

  The lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

  35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display example of the accessory ratio display 1317.

  The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states: an initial state, a data input completed state, an LED lighting state (0000), an LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and an LED lighting state (all lighting). Has been prepared.

  In order to control these five states, there are blank, normal operation, register write, full lighting, and standby mode setting commands. The blank command cuts off the output of the constant current driver 3178 and the output of the driver 3179. The normal operation command displays the 7-segment LED 13172 after completion of each setting. When a normal operation command is input without setting display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays the number 0 in all digits. The register write command sets the number of used digits, sets the duty ratio, sets whether the decoder is used or not, and inputs display data. A register to which data is written is selected in D11 to D8, and contents to be set in the register are input in D7 to D0 (see FIG. 33). The all lighting command turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side and lights all the segments of the 7 segment LED 13172. The standby instruction is divided into two according to parameters, and includes a standby instruction for transitioning to a standby state and a clear instruction for transitioning to an initial state. The standby command maintains the setting at that time, stops the operation of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. The clear command clears and initializes all data held in the registers and latches, and turns off the display.

  Since the blank command is a kind of display command, in this specification, “display” includes any of the 7-segment LED all on, the partial segment on and all off.

  A display example in each state described above will be described with reference to FIG.

  At the time of power-on of the gaming machine, the initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 is not completed or the display data is not set, so that it is in the initial state (ALL BLANK), and as shown in FIG. All the segments of are turned off. Further, when the main body frame 4 is closed and a game is possible, the accessory ratio display 1317 cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, the standby mode is set, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, and the power consumption of the gaming machine is reduced.

  When display data is input after the control data is set in the various control registers in the driver circuit 13171 and the initial setting is completed, a predetermined display is displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. In this predetermined display, as shown in FIG. 36B, “-” may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit. It is preferable that the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be confirmed by this predetermined display.

  Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display in all the digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), “-” may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

  When the display switch 1318 is operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED is turned on (lights according to the input data). Specifically, it becomes the accessory ratio display state, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED 13172, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the two right digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36C, “y175” is displayed, which indicates that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. In addition, when the displayed ratio of an accessory is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display that fact. For example, all digits (or numbers) are displayed blinking, or the decimal point is lit or blinked.

  Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display content of the 7-segment LED 13172 is changed. That is, the ratio of another type of accessory is displayed. In this case as well, a code indicating the display contents is displayed in the left two digits, and a value of an accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36D, “y263” is displayed, which indicates that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. In this case as well, a display that can identify that the displayed ratio of an accessory is an abnormal value out of the specified range is preferable as described above. A more specific display example of the combination ratio will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is performed (FIG. 36E). After a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. Turn off the light and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. The state of non-display of the accessory ratio is the same as that after completion of the initial setting, but may be a different aspect as long as it is distinguishable from the display of the ratio of the accessory.

  FIG. 36E shows a display example when there is an abnormality in the accessory ratio display 1313 or the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be lit or flashing, or may be displayed differently for each digit. Further, the abnormality display may be in a different form from that shown in the figure, and may be any form that can be distinguished from the normal accessory ratio display to indicate that the accessory ratio display is not possible.

  In any state, when an all lighting command is input, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit. In any state, when a blank command or standby command is input, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are extinguished while retaining the data. In any state, when a data clear command is input, all data held in the registers and latches are cleared, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit, and the initial state is restored.

[8. Display of ratio
Next, a method for calculating and displaying an accessory ratio will be described.

  As described above, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As described above, the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is constituted by, for example, a four-digit 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal display device, and displays the numerical value of the accessory ratio in the last two digits and the type of the numerical value in the upper two digits. Is displayed.

  Moreover, you may comprise the accessory ratio display 1317 by 2 digits 7 segment LED. In this case, it is good to display the numerical value of an accessory ratio and the kind of the said numerical value alternately.

  The display mode of the numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the comparison result between the accessory ratio and a predetermined reference value. For example, when the ratio of an accessory exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (green when normal, red when exceeding the reference). By changing the display mode according to the comparison result with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the accessory ratio is abnormal.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may be composed of one or a plurality of LED lamps. When the accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by one LED lamp, the comparison result between the accessory ratio and a predetermined reference value is displayed in a different manner. For example, when the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and when the accessory ratio is greater than the reference value, it is displayed in red. Further, when the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is turned on, and when the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold value, it is blinked.

  When the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, ten) LED lamps, the accessory ratio is displayed with one LED lamp as 10%. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, different display modes (display colors) may be displayed depending on the display contents (such as an accessory ratio or a continuous accessory ratio, the latest data display or the medium-term data display, etc.).

  In addition, when the total number of balls acquired is less than 6000, the prize ball data collection period is short, and the value of the ratio of the objects may not be converged, so the display is performed in different display modes (display color, blinking, etc.) May be. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of acquired balls is smaller than the threshold and the display mode when the above-described reference value is exceeded are different from each other.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may switch and display the latest data display, medium-term data display, and long-term data display. The most recent data display is an accessory ratio calculated using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. The medium term data display is an accessory ratio calculated by using the cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. The long-term data display is an accessory ratio calculated using the total total in the ring counter shown in FIGS.

  The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may also be used as the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the gaming status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. Although the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to quickly switch from the accessory ratio display to the display of the game state. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol fluctuation display game, the ratio of the actors is displayed. it can. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol stops at the timing when the special symbol variation display on the function display unit 1400 stops. For this reason, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, the player can be configured not to feel uncomfortable.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may display other than the accessory ratio. For example, you may display the number of winnings and the number of awarded balls for each type of winning opening. The unit time may be switched and displayed by operating the display switch 1318 such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, and 10 hours.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may display a base. The base is the normal payout rate excluding the special award (medium hit), and can be calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls. The number of shot balls (the number of out balls) is detected by a shot ball sensor 1020. As described above, the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided in the vicinity of the outlets (backflow prevention member 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game ball from the ball launcher to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Further, the number of out balls may be detected by the discharge ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharge ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game ball flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). Further, an out-port passing ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) for detecting a game ball passing through the out port 1111 provided in the lower portion of the game area 5a is provided, and the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021; The number of out balls may be detected by the sum of the number of game balls detected by the start port sensors 2104 and 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, and 2557. Furthermore, a launch supply ball sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball supplied to the ball launcher 680, and a game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 but not reaching the game area 5a (so-called foul ball) A foul ball sensor (not shown) that detects the number of game balls supplied to the ball launcher 680 detected by the launch supply ball sensor is subtracted from the number of game balls and the number of out balls (number of shot balls) is obtained. It may be detected.

  The number of out balls may be counted by any of the methods described above. That is, it is sufficient that either the discharge ball sensor 3060 or the fire ball sensor 1020 is provided among the illustrated sensors.

  The number of safe balls is equal to the number of prize balls paid out. Also, the base may be defined as a payout rate for each gaming state (during normal gaming, during electric support, during probability fluctuation, during time reduction), and may be calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of outballs for each gaming state . By displaying the base on the accessory ratio display 1317, it is possible to check the deviation from the design value of the starting performance during operation for each gaming machine on the spot. In addition, since it is possible to check the performance of the ball without using the hall control, it becomes easy to inspect each gaming machine at the on-site inspection of the game hall.

  The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is information relating to other winnings and winning balls in the base (the number of winnings to the general winning opening 2001, the number of winning balls by the winning, the number of winnings to the starting port 2002, the number of winning balls by the winning, The number of winning prizes to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, the number of winning balls by the winning, etc.) may be displayed.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio by operating the display switch 1318, even if the accessory ratio is always displayed. For example, when the display switch 1318 which is a push button switch is pressed, the display of the ratio of the accessory is started, and after the display for a predetermined time, the display is turned off. Note that if the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, even if the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317. Good. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame is open, the accessory ratio indicator 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

  The display content may be changed every time the display switch 1318 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, A7 indicating the bonus rate (cumulative) is displayed in the first two digits, and the bonuses for a predetermined number (for example, 60000) of prize balls are displayed. The ratio is displayed in the last two digits. When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the first two digits switches to A6 which means a continuous character ratio (cumulative total), and the continuous character ratio for a predetermined number (for example, 60000) award balls is decreased by 2 It may be displayed in a digit (FIG. 37B). Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, y7 representing the ratio of the bonuses (6000 prize balls) is displayed in the upper two digits, and the bonus rate based on the latest data is displayed in the lower two digits (the latest data display). (FIG. 37C). When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the upper two digits switches to y6 which means the bonus rate (cumulative), and the bonus rate for a predetermined number (for example, 60000) prize balls is reduced to the lower 2 digits. Display (mid-term data display) may be performed (FIG. 37D).

  The display switch 1318 may be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510 without being provided as an independent switch. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as a display switch 1318 when operated during operation of the pachinko machine 1. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the display switch 1318 into one switch, there is only one switch operated by a game attendant, and it is possible to reduce erroneous operations by inexperienced attendants.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the ratio of the actors in the operating gaming machine and to confirm the gambling characteristics of the operating gaming machine.

  Further, since the data on the number of prize balls is accumulated as the data for calculating / displaying the ratio of an accessory 13131 and the data for calculating / displaying the ratio of an accessory 13131 is deleted when the check code is abnormal, the display of the incorrect ratio of an accessory is displayed. Can be avoided.

  In addition, since the data for calculating the ratio of the proportions 13136 is deleted under a condition different from the condition for deleting the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, the correct number of winning balls is retained. It is possible to calculate an accurate character ratio.

  In addition, since the character ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the character ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not mistakenly erased by the operation of the staff in the game hall. Since the object ratio calculation / display data is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the data is not erased by an erroneous operation of a staff member at the game hall. In addition, since the game place cannot intentionally delete the data for calculating / displaying the accessory ratio, the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is increased, and concealment of a state where the accessory ratio is high can be prevented.

[9. View Base
[9-1. Basic configuration of gaming machine displaying base]
So far, the embodiment of the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the ratio of the accessory has been described. Next, an embodiment of the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value will be described. In this embodiment, a pachinko machine that exclusively calculates and displays a base value will be described. However, an accessory ratio may be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

  In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball wins at the start opening (first start opening 2002, second start opening 2004), a lottery with a random number is performed and a special symbol variation display game is executed. . The variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation display game is a relatively short variation pattern (a normal variation pattern of about 10 seconds, a shortened variation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is easily selected when the number of holdings is large). There is also a relatively long time fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern such as a super reach exceeding 1 minute). When the base value is calculated by the pachinko machine, the notification of the base value is less urgent than the notification of the error, so that it can be notified at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is switched to the next variation display game. However, if the fluctuation display time is long, the waiting time of one special symbol fluctuation display game is not completed, and the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the number of out balls (number of shot balls) or the number of prize balls (paid balls) If the number) changes), it is preferable to calculate the base value and update the display. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game (for example, even during the special symbol variation display game) (for example, the number of out balls (number of shot balls) or the number of prize balls (number of payout balls) ) Is changed), the base value is calculated and displayed. Next, a specific configuration of the pachinko machine that performs such an operation will be described.

  FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing a configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays the base value.

  The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration represented by reference numeral 1317 is a base indicator instead of an accessory ratio indicator. The base indicator 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment may use, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED as shown in FIGS. 4 and 28, and may have other numbers of digits (for example, 2 digits). A 7 segment LED may be used.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires the number of winning balls and the number of out-balls in the area ratio calculation area update process (step S81) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89), the base value is calculated and displayed. In the following description, the “object ratio calculation area update process” in step S81 in FIG. 23 is replaced with “base calculation area update process”, and the “object ratio calculation / display process” in step S89 is “base”. It will be described as “calculation / display processing”. Also, the “actual object ratio calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 26 is read as “base calculation area 13128”, and the “actual object ratio calculation / display code 13135” is read as “base calculation / display code 13135”. The “object ratio calculation / display data 13136” will be read as “base calculation / display data 13136”.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation region update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To do. In particular, the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39 uses the award ball number calculated in the award ball control process (step S80) in order to calculate the base value every timer interruption period. Is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822).

  First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The game state is being awarded a special prize opening 2005, 2006 is open, and the player can acquire a lot of prize balls. However, including the opening and ending time of the jackpot game Good. When the big winning opening 2005, 2006 repeats opening and closing in one big hit, the time from closing of the big winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810 means that the condition device is in operation, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Moreover, all the times during the right-handed instruction may be included.

  Further, in the start ports 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include time reduction, probability change (during ST), and electric support. Furthermore, in game states other than time saving, during probable change (during ST), and during electric support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting port 2004 is closed (for example, until a ball won at the starting port is detected as an out ball) The required number of seconds may be included in the special prize.

  The electric operating tool provided in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is classified into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, during the special prize relating to the big prize opening 2005, 2006 is operating the condition device (for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated based on the number of winning balls and out-balls other than during the special prize, a normal (so-called big hit) winning in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, in the start port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening / closing member, winning balls and winning balls other than during the special prize (when the probability is low or when the time is short) are used for calculating the base value. That is, some of the electrically-operated actors (large winning awards 2005 and 2006) use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls to calculate the base value regardless of the gaming state (whether or not a special prize is being awarded). The other bonuses (starting port 2004) are not used, and whether the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls are used for calculating the base value or not are switched according to the gaming state (whether or not a special prize is being given). It will be. The number of winning balls and the number of winning balls is not used in the calculation of the base value. In addition to not counting the number of winning balls that have been paid out in (the number of winning balls other than the special prize that is the dividend in the calculation of the base value) This includes not generating edge information for paying out a winning ball by the winning signal even if a winning signal is input.

  In addition, the special winning opening 2005, 2006 may be opened (so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. Generally, a small hit occurs in a short time, and since it is less likely to win a game ball because it is opened for a short time, it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, it is also possible to generate a small hit other than during the special prize (normal time) and to release it for a time when the possibility that the game ball will win is high. In this case, the winning ball and the winning ball to the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 in the small hits other than during the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of small hits other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly cope with the standard of the base value, and to improve the degree of freedom of design.

  If the gaming state is a special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent out payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives the reception confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951, and the number of prize balls (the number of payout prize balls) received from the payout control board 951 of the payout completion report may be used. This variation will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Then, the acquired number of winning balls is added to the total number of winning balls to update the total number of winning balls (step S814). Note that it is determined whether there is a prize ball. If there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped. In addition, the game balls are won at the start ports 2002 and 2004, but the hold is the upper limit value, and even if the win at the start port is not held, the award balls are paid out, so the total number of winning balls is updated. Also, in a gaming state in which no winning ball is generated even if a gaming ball wins a winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), no winning ball due to the winning is generated, and the number of winning balls to be acquired is Since it is 0, the total number of winning balls is not updated. The total number of winning balls is recorded in a total winning ball number storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of winning balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of winning balls is calculated.

  Thereafter, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the like. In the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal of the sensors, the number of out balls is out. Get the number of balls = 1. The total number of out balls is recorded in the total number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 (see FIG. 52). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39, every time an out ball is detected, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (FIG. 40), so the base value is displayed without delay. Yes, it can be judged without delay whether the base is normal or abnormal.

  Note that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and a prize ball abnormality notification is issued. May be stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes base value calculation processing in the timer interrupt processing, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute base value calculation processing. In this case, a command for informing the base may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or a command for informing the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511. May be sent.

  Also, even if information on both winning and out winning balls is acquired in one timer interruption process, the number of winning balls is changed to the total number of winning balls (or a winning ball buffer in the embodiment described later). The number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (or an out ball number buffer in the embodiment described later). In addition, even if information on winnings to a plurality of winning openings is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the total number of winning balls by a plurality of winnings is calculated as a total winning ball number (or a winning ball buffer in an embodiment described later). ). For this reason, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, when a winning combination with a winning mouth sensor with five winning balls and a winning mouth sensor with three winning balls is detected, a total of eight winning balls are used as the total number of winning balls. (Or prize ball number buffer).

  In addition, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when a game ball is detected to be launched. In other words, only the number of prize balls related to winnings detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the firing ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or prize ball number buffer). Further, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops operating). Only the number of prize balls related to winnings detected during a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the prize ball number buffer. Further, when the player is operating the firing handle, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or prize ball number buffer). That is, only the number of winning balls related to a winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that the palm or finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is obtained as the total number of winning balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer. If it does in this way, reflection to the base value of a prize ball by abnormalities which detect a prize ball in the state where a game ball is not fired, or cheating can be prevented, and display of an incorrect base value can be prevented. Further, when the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the base was calculated by excluding the number of winning balls and out balls in the special prize, but even during the special prize, the number of winning balls due to winning in the general winning opening and starting hole is counted. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated by counting the number of out balls excluding the number of balls that have won the big prize opening.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interruption period).

  First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). When the total number of winning balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value may not be calculated. Further, when an abnormal base value is calculated (for example, when the total number of winning balls is larger than the total number of outs and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), the base value is not calculated. Also good. When the base value is expressed as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total number of winning balls / total number of out balls by 100. Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outballs is stored in the division input register B131217.

  The predetermined number multiplied by the total number of winning balls stored in the division input register A131216 controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is set to 100, the base value is calculated to the order of 1 at 100 minutes, and the decimal number is not calculated. If this predetermined number is 10000, the base value is calculated up to two decimal places at a rate of 100 minutes. That is, when the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit is divided by 100, a base value of 100 fractions of two decimal places can be calculated.

  Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. It should be noted that the main control MPU 1311 does not perform any processing and waits for other processing during the 32-clock wait time from writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to reading data from the division result register A131218. May be performed. For example, a random number for determining whether or not to win a jackpot may be updated between data writing to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and data reading from the division result register A131218. More specifically, the hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is updated at the timing of the clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random number is also updated.

  That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, even when the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic process, other processes relating to the game can be executed in parallel. The other process related to the game includes at least a process of updating a random number for determining a win. In addition, during the calculation (division) process in the arithmetic circuit 13121, the random number that affects the game result is updated one or more times.

  Further, when the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 becomes an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee. The base notification command may be simply a notification of the base value or a notification of abnormality of the base value. The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value is larger or smaller than a design value (normal value) exceeding a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that a plurality of stages of tolerances may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages depending on the degree of deviation of the base value.

  There are various methods of base notification, and either one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. For example, the base value may be reported constantly or at a predetermined timing by the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244. If the base value is notified to the player, the player may be able to confirm the condition of the pachinko machine. In that case, you may apply the display mode demonstrated by the accessory ratio to a base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage notation on the above-described display or display device. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. On a display device capable of displaying an image such as the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. May be.

  When the base value is displayed on the base display 1317 composed of 7 segment LEDs, the main control MPU 1311 inputs display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates display data set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as a base notification command. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 designates digits for displaying numerical values in D15 to D8 by “data n setting” and data in which display contents are designated in D7 to D0. Is written to the shift register 3171.

  Further, when displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%) is provided for the base value, and when the reference value is exceeded, the display mode may be changed. . For example, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (green when normal, red when exceeding the reference). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, or less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages, and the display may be performed by changing the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. Also, at each stage, you may display a masochistic comment when the base value is low, such as “I'm fine”, “I'm feeling down”, “It ’s not bad” or “It ’s amazing in a way”. If the base value exceeds the reference value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected and there is a possibility of fraud. For this reason, the display by the aspect which shows warnings, such as red, is desirable. The display mode may be the same as or similar to a weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, the same means that at least one of the display, the lamp, and the sound is the same.

  Further, the range of the base value (such as whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.) may be reported for various lamps, liquid crystal display devices, sounds, and the like. Further, if the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command for displaying the base notification impossibility on the liquid crystal display device may be generated. By transmitting the notification command to the generated sub-board, it is possible to notify the state of the base with the stage device controlled by the sub-board, so that a wider variety of notifications can be made than the notification on the main board, and the load on the main board can be reduced. Can be reduced. Further, by notifying that the base display is impossible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to distinguish between the failure of the base display 1317 and the absence of the base value to be displayed. Further, by displaying the abnormality of the base value on the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to know the abnormality of the base value without looking at the back side of the game board provided with the base display 1317.

  The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317. In this case, a specific LED lamp (or 7 segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 may be used to notify constantly. Moreover, it is good to alert | report at predetermined timing (For example, when the special symbol fluctuation | variation display game is complete | finished while the main body frame 4 is open | released).

  The base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall. In this case, the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of winning balls and for each predetermined number of out balls) as in the base calculation / display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, etc.) described later. Good.

  The base information output from the external terminal board 784 may be a binary (high, low) signal indicating whether the calculated base value is higher or lower than a predetermined threshold. A signal having a length indicating the outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, a pulse of 30 milliseconds when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%). Further, the number of continuous pulses indicating the outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, three continuous pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

  Even if the base value is not updated, the base notification command may be generated. When the base value is not updated, the base notification command may not be generated. Even if the base notification command is not generated, the display of the base value is continued.

  Also, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 56 and the like, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal, a base notification command for informing the base value abnormality is generated, and the base abnormality is notified to the player or hall employee. You may notify.

  Moreover, you may determine whether to alert | report the base to a player according to a game state (game situation). This is because, if the base value is always informed to the player, the player's attention to the effect of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be neglected, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. It is.

  Further, based on the calculated base value, the effect of the special symbol fluctuation display game being executed or executed in the future may be changed. For example, a plurality of display selection tables may be prepared, and an effect may be selected from different display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) depending on the base value.

  In addition, during the special symbol variation display game, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold (for example, 30%). For this reason, when the threshold value is exceeded or falls below the special symbol variation display game, the effect of the special symbol variation display game may be changed. When the base value rises above a predetermined threshold and when it falls, the effect may be changed in the same manner, or the effect may be changed in a different manner.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of the update timing of the number of winning balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the number of award balls is updated by the base calculation area updating process at step S81, and the base value is calculated by the base ratio calculation / display process at step S89.

  Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of winning balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base In the area update process (step S81), the prize ball number buffer is updated. Thereafter, the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89), and a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90).

  When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the winning ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. Of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control processing (step S80), the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When backing up the number of unpaid prize balls on the payout control board 951, the payout control board 951 needs to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of the payout of balls. Absent. On the other hand, when backing up the number of unpaid prize balls on the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of the payout of balls, but sends out a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. There is no need.

  In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the state of the game machine can be known in real time. For this reason, abnormality of a gaming machine can be discovered at an early stage. For example, if it is determined that the base is abnormal if the base value is lower or higher than a predetermined threshold, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol variation display game, and abnormally rises and falls across the predetermined threshold Even if it is determined that the base value is calculated, the base value calculation process is continuously executed regardless of the abnormality determination without stopping the game. For example, special symbol fluctuation display games include short-time games such as normal fluctuations and long-time games such as reach fluctuations, and the base value is calculated between the start and end of one special symbol fluctuation display game. When the condition to be satisfied is satisfied a plurality of times, the base value may be calculated each time, and the base value may be updated and displayed each time. This limits the calculation of the base value during the special symbol variation display game (for example, the base value is calculated and updated only once at the end of the variation display). This is because the time is not noticed, and information necessary for hall operation is not output at an appropriate timing, and the hall may be inconvenienced.

  In addition, if the launched game ball has not won the starting opening or the general winning opening, the base value decreases. In this state, since the player has lost, for example, an additional effect (for example, an effect related to a winning that is not related to a change in the base value or a change in the base value appears in the effect performed on the liquid crystal) A specific effect) or a prediction effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot (within a performance that is not related to a change in the base value, a notification effect with a high expectation such as the next notification effect or a change in the base value A notice effect with a high expectation degree (for example, a base value is displayed in rainbow display) among the specific effects that appear. Thereby, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning at the start opening and the general winning opening, and can provide motivation to continue the game.

  On the other hand, if many of the launched game balls win a start opening or a general winning opening (if they win more than the average number of past winnings), the base value increases. In this state, even if the result of the big hit lottery is lost, the player receives a larger amount of game balls than usual, so the disappointment of the player is reduced. The production of the variable display game may be changed to a production with low expectation.

[9-2. Variations in the number of award ball updates and base value calculation timing]
Next, variations in the award ball number update timing and the base value calculation timing will be described with reference to FIGS. The outline of the update timing of the number of winning balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation are as follows.
-Fig. 41: Calculation of the number of winning balls-> Updating the number of winning balls-> Base value calculation-> Sending out a payout command-Fig. 42: Calculation of winning balls-> Updating the number of winning balls-> Sending out a paying command-> Base value calculation-Fig. 43: Calculation of the number of winning balls → Sending out command transmission → Updating the number of winning balls → Calculation of base value ・ Figure 44: Calculation of winning ball number → Sending out paying command → Checking command reception → Updating the number of winning balls → Calculation of base value ・ Figure 45: Calculation of winning ball number → Sending out paying command → Payout completion notification → Prize ball number update → Base value calculation The variations in FIG. 41 to FIG. 44 are not limited to the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39 and the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. The present invention can be applied to any base calculation area updating process and base calculation / display process.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update process (step S81) is executed at the illustrated position, and the base ratio calculation is performed after the output data setting process (step S90). -Display processing (step S89) is executed.

  That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of winning balls determined for each winning mouth in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base calculation area. In the update process (step S81), the total number of winning balls (or a winning ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. Thereafter, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90), and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

  When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the winning ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the number of unpaid prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, the payout command reception confirmation or Any of the ball payout completions may be omitted.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23, after the output data setting process (step S90), the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89). Execute.

  That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process In step S90, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Thereafter, in the base calculation area updating process (step S81), the total number of winning balls (or a winning ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the number of winning balls corresponding to the sent out payout command, and the base ratio calculation / The base value is updated in the display process (step S89). The award ball number buffer may be updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command (even if the payout command has not been sent), instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command.

  When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the winning ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the number of unpaid prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, the payout command reception confirmation or Any of the ball payout completions may be omitted.

  Note that the timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830. The order of step S81) and base ratio calculation / display processing (step S89) is not limited.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the procedure of the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

  That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process In step S90, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

  When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

  When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update processing (step S81), the main control MPU 1311 receives the total number of prize balls (the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the command reception confirmation has been received ( Alternatively, the winning ball number buffer in the embodiment described later is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

  Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the winning ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the data on the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up on the payout control board 951 in order not to lose the data on the number of unpaid prize balls when a power failure occurs. For this reason, command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310 is necessary, but the ball payout completion notice may be omitted.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the procedure of the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

  That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process In step S90, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

  When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the winning ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout.

  When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) receives the total number of winning balls (or in the embodiment described later) as the number of winning balls that have been paid out. The award ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, data on the number of unpaid prize balls is not backed up when a power outage occurs, so the main control board 1310 backs up the data on the number of unpaid prize balls. For this reason, the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310 is necessary, but the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

  As described above, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment updates the number of winning balls and the number of out balls, which are parameters used for calculating the base value, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the processing shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, when the winning mouth sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input processing (step S74), the number of winning balls is updated. In the process shown in FIG. 43, the number of prize balls is updated when a payout command is transmitted. Also, in the process shown in FIG. 44, when the receipt of the payout command is confirmed, the number of prize balls is updated. In the process shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of prize balls is completed.

  In the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls in the special prize cannot be accurately counted due to a difference between the determination timing as to whether the gaming state is a special prize and the update timing of the number of prize balls. In particular, the problem increases when the time from winning a prize to updating the number of winning balls is long. For this reason, a flag is attached to the winning prize in the special prize, and the flag is taken over for the number of winning balls, the payout command, the reception confirmation, and the payout completion notice. Then, using the flag, it is determined whether the winning ball is a special prize at each stage. In this way, even if it takes a long time from winning the winning opening to updating the number of winning balls, it is possible to accurately count and update the number of winning balls in the special prize.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine of a present Example, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are updated by these opportunities, and a base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known by a single gaming machine, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and inspection process can be shortened, and the gaming machine can be manufactured efficiently.

  In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls.

  When the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning port sensor detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port where the winning is detected is not yet determined. Add to the number of balls to be paid out. The number of unpaid balls may have a predetermined upper limit, but may not have an upper limit. In this case, each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated, the prize ball number buffer or the total number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. Further, the number of prize balls may be updated after a payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

  On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning hole from which the winning is detected when the winning hole sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74). The payout command is sent to the payout control board 951. Even when the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, a payout command is transmitted and the number of unpaid balls is held by the payout control board 951. In this case, each time a payout command is transmitted, the winning ball buffer or the total winning ball number for calculating the base value may be updated.

  Further, when the payout control board 951 receives a payout command, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. Note that this prize ball number may have a predetermined upper limit, but may not have an upper limit. Also, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated every time the prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

  Further, as will be described later in FIG. 47, without comparing the award ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1, every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Steps S891 and S892 may be executed.

  As described above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various timings. However, when the number of prize balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay, and the base indicator 1317 displays the real time. The base value may be calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing of renewing the number of winning balls and calculating the base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
FIG. 39 and FIG. 40: Base value is calculated every time the timer interruption period. FIG. 46 and FIG. 47: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of winning balls. FIG. 48 and FIG. 49: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of out balls. Calculation-Fig. 50 and Fig. 51: Base value is updated when one of the number of award balls and the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation region update processing (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 46 records the number of prize balls in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls meets a predetermined condition (step S813). In FIG. 46, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as those in the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 39) described above, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is a special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process advances to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811).

  Then, it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, whether the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more (step S812). As a result, if there is no prize ball, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the prize ball number. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813). Each time it is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In this case, the threshold value Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls means that there are many prize balls at a predetermined time other than during the special prize (for example, a prize corresponding to ten or more prizes per minute, considering the number of prize balls at the general prize opening or the start opening). Sphere) is obtained. Note that a plurality of stages of allowable ranges may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages depending on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of winning balls. If there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, it is not necessary to add the acquired number of winning balls to the winning ball number buffer in step S813, and subtract the number of winning balls added to the winning ball number buffer in step S813. Also good.

  As a result, if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) to notify the player or hall employee that the winning ball is abnormal. There are various methods for notifying abnormality, and one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more methods may be combined. For example, the abnormality of the number of prize balls may be notified by various lamps, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sound, or the like. Further, the abnormality of the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall. Furthermore, the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal may not be used for calculating the base value. In this case, a prize ball may be paid out to the player. In addition, when the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and the above-described notification means (sound, lamp, LED, liquid crystal display device, information output from the external terminal board 784, etc.) is notified, the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal is displayed. It may be used to calculate a base value. Further, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all data in the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, the game is started from the operation confirmation in the initial state. As another method for stopping the game, the game is temporarily stopped (for example, the special symbol variation display is stopped), and then the error state is stopped and then the original state is restored and the game is restarted. For this reason, even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a drop in the power supply voltage, a power failure detection signal is output, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and stops the game. After the error notification is completed, the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area, and the game is resumed. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 in the state as it is, so the suspended game is resumed by resuming the operation of the main control board 1310. Nonetheless, 100 game balls (that is, out balls) are fired into the game area 5a, and all game balls may win a general winning opening or starting hole, so an abnormality in the number of winning balls is reported. The mode to perform is preferably a modest mode (for example, smaller volume or lower light intensity than normal error notification) that is less urgent than a normal error (such as a magnetic sensor error). Also, the display time may be the same as a normal error or may be a short time. In some cases, the notification time may be 0 seconds and the notification may not be performed.

  Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

  Thereafter, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer started in step S817 has expired (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825). In step S824, the end of notification is determined by the time of a timer for notifying a prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the notification end is determined so as to notify a prize ball abnormality for a predetermined number of shot balls. May be. Moreover, you may continue alert | reporting abnormality until a hall employee confirms.

  In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 46, it is determined in step S985 whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, but after acquiring the number of out balls, there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls in comparison with the number of out balls. (That is, whether there is an abnormality in the base value). For example, when the number of prize balls exceeding the number of out balls at a given time is counted, or when considering the number of prize balls at the general prize opening or start opening, the percentage of out balls is won at a high rate (for example, 50% or more). This is the case.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated at a timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 47, the same steps as those in the above-described base calculation / display process (FIG. 40) are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the award ball number buffer value may be compared with a threshold Th1, or may be determined by a predetermined bit value in the award ball number storage area (specifically, the award ball number storage area may be 8 bits). If the most significant bit is 1, the number of out balls can be determined to be 128 or more). In addition, a determination result obtained by comparing the number of prize balls and the threshold Th1 in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) is recorded in a flag. In the base calculation / display process (FIG. 47), the prize ball number buffer value is determined by the flag. May be determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1.

  If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing for calculating the base value, and the base calculation / display processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). That is, if the game situation is such that the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1), the fractional part of the number of prize balls is calculated. Remaining (the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the prize ball number buffer is left in the prize ball number buffer), the other part is stored in the memory (the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number), and used for calculating the base value Execute the process. Specifically, when the threshold Th1 is 100, the number of winning ball buffers is 99, and when five winning balls are generated by winning a general winning opening, the number of winning ball buffers is 104. However, 100 are moved to the total number of winning balls and used for calculating the base value, and the remaining four are left in the winning ball number buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls remaining in the prize ball number buffer is used to calculate the base value when the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold value Th1. Further, although the threshold Th1 = 100 has been described, other numerical values such as 1000 may be used. However, if a large threshold Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if the jackpot is obtained, fraudulent discovery may be delayed, so the threshold Th1 is equal to or less than the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot (multiple types If there is a big hit (for example, a big win of 4 rounds and 8 rounds), it may be set to be equal to or less than the minimum value of the number of winning balls for the big win. Moreover, it is good to update a base value frequently from a viewpoint of discovering fraud early. For example, the threshold Th1 is preferably 10 instead of 100 in that the base value is frequently updated.

  It should be noted that steps S891 and S892 may be executed for each predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) without comparing the award ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. Further, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer that operates in the main control MPU 1311 or may be measured by an output of an RTC (real time clock).

  Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outballs is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 becomes an error (or indefinite), so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

  In addition to the case where the total number of out balls is 0, when the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the base value does not need to be calculated and the base calculation area 13128 need not be updated. For example, if the total number of out balls is less than or equal to the total number of winning balls, the base value is 100% or more, and the number of winning balls equal to or more than the number of fired balls (out balls) has been obtained. Therefore, it is not necessary to calculate the base value without storing numerical values in the division input registers 131216 and 131217. When the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, the base calculation area 13128 need not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

  Further, abnormality of the base value may be determined with 1500% as a threshold value. Since the upper limit of the theoretical base value of a pachinko machine with a maximum number of 15 winning balls for a winning opening is 1500%, a base value exceeding 1500% is impossible and the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. In this case, the base value may not be calculated, or the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

  Further, the threshold value for determining the abnormality of the base value may be another value. If the normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in the normal operation of the pachinko machine is determined and is outside the range of the normal value, the base calculation area 13128 is set with the value read from the division result register A131218. The display of the base value may not be updated without updating.

  Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal base value may be displayed.

  Note that the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative numbers since the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 52, but the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are the same. You may initialize at a timing (for example, every predetermined number of winning balls, every predetermined number of out balls).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee.

  As described above, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal every time the number of prize balls is acquired, so that an illegal act can be detected early. This means that during a normal game, a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of shot balls) will not win in the general winning opening 2001 or the starting openings 2002 and 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, it is determined and notified of an abnormality of winning in the winning opening (the general winning opening 2001 or the start opening 2002, 2004) that is always open.

  Further, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition, so that an accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, since the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number, the amount of calculation required for calculating the base value (for example, compared with the case where the base value is calculated for each prize ball) The load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified. Until then, the conventional base value is notified. Is done.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation region update processing (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 48 records the out ball number in the out ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the out ball number satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 48, the same steps as those in the base calculation area updating process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If the result of determination in step S812 is that there is a winning ball, the acquired winning ball number is added to the total winning ball number (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 48, every time the number of winning balls is calculated, the total number of winning balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

  Thereafter, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

  Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. For this reason, for example, when it is determined that a game ball wins at the start opening and a pre-reading effect is generated, and the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a different mode (blinking display, red hold, etc.), The player expects that the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the pre-read hold will be a big hit, but if the special symbol variation display game is lost, the player is disappointed. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of winning balls as in this embodiment, the player's discouragement as described above can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the award ball generation timing, so that the base value increased by the award ball due to winning at the start opening is notified. That is, even if it is determined that the pre-reading effect is executed at the time of winning at the start opening, even if the number of prize balls paid out at the winning at the start opening is added, the predetermined number (for example, threshold Th1 = 100) is added. If not, the base value is not updated. That is, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should rise (only the lower numerical value changes due to the number of display digits, and the display may not change). For this reason, even if the pre-reading effect described above is off, the player thinks that the base value will increase later (that is, the tone is good) and can suppress a decrease in interest. In other words, even when it is determined to execute the pre-reading effect, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value has not reached the predetermined number (threshold value Th1). Further, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is to be executed and the prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number next time. .

  Note that the player may be able to select whether the calculation of the base value is delayed or calculated without delay. For example, the operation button 220C can be selected at the start of the game. Further, the base value calculation timing may be determined by lottery. In addition, when it is determined to perform the pre-reading effect, it is preferable to execute an effect capable of notifying a delay in calculation of the base value. Note that if the special symbol variation display game hold memory has reached the upper limit, even if the winning entry is won, the jackpot lottery is not executed. Even in this case, the prize balls are paid out in accordance with the winning at the start opening, so that the number of prize balls is counted and used to calculate the base value. In the event of a specific error, if the winning ball is not paid out even if it is won at the starting gate or general winning gate, and the winning ball is not paid out, the number of winning balls will not be counted, and the base value will depend on the winning. Will not be updated.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at a timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 49, the same steps as those in the base calculation / display process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out-ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the number of out balls may be compared with a threshold Th2, or may be determined by a value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of out balls may be configured with 8 bits. If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). In addition, a determination result obtained by comparing the number of out balls and the threshold Th2 in the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 48) is recorded in a flag. In the base calculation / display process (FIG. 49), the number of out balls is determined by the flag. It may be determined whether it is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2.

  If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not time to calculate the base value, so the base calculation / display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out ball count (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball count buffer (step S900). Note that steps S899 and S900 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) without comparing the out-ball number buffer value with the threshold Th2.

  Thereafter, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outballs is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 becomes an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

  The total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative numbers since the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1, but the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are the same timing (for example, a predetermined prize) It may be initialized (for each number of balls, for each predetermined number of out balls).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee. The base notification command may be simply a notification of the base value, a notification of the base value with a specific effect, or a notification of an abnormality in the base value.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed every time the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that pursues fun.

  In addition, the number of winning balls is added to the total number of winning balls every time a winning ball (winning detection, payout command transmission, payout command arrival, winning ball payout completion, etc.) is obtained. This is because the base value may not be calculated correctly if it is confirmed whether a predetermined condition is satisfied when adding the number of prize balls (for example, if there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball). For example, even if the firing is not performed for a predetermined time (about 1 minute), the ball-hanging state caused by the game ball being caught by the nail disposed in the game area is resolved, and the game ball is delayed at the winning opening. This is because there is a case of winning a prize. For this reason, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of the presence or absence of out balls.

  When both the out ball count and the out ball count buffer value are smaller than the threshold Th2, it may be displayed that the out ball count buffer value is a fraction smaller than the threshold Th2, or the out ball count buffer value may be displayed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, since the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, it is necessary to calculate the base value rather than calculating the base value every time an out ball is detected. The amount of calculation (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified. Until then, the conventional base value is notified. Is done.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation region update processing (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 50 records the number of prize balls in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition. Record the number of out balls in the out ball number buffer. In FIG. 50, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as those in the base calculation area updating process described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the obtained prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

  Thereafter, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition. In FIG. 51, the same steps as those in the base calculation / display process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total winning ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball number buffer value is added to the total out ball number (step S893), and the out ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or every predetermined time without comparing the winning ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

  Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outballs is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 becomes an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee. The base notification command may be simply a notification of the base value or a notification of abnormality of the base value. Note that the base notification command may be generated every time the base value is calculated, or the base notification command may not be generated even if the base value is calculated.

  In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of winning balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

  The data on the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 is obtained from the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process (FIGS. 39, 46, 47, 48, and 48) executed by the main control MPU 1311. 49, FIG. 51, etc.) and read by the base calculation / display processing (FIG. 40, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Also, the data of the winning ball number buffer and the out ball number buffer in the base calculation area 13128 are written by the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46, FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and the base calculation is performed. Read out by display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, 51, etc.) For this reason, the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process can be configured separately from the timer interrupt process (game control program). it can.

  FIG. 52A shows an example of the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52A, a winning ball number buffer, a total winning ball number, an out ball number buffer, a winning ball number buffer, a specific winning ball number buffer, a total out ball number, and a base are stored. The award ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of award balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize, and is based on a case where the award ball number satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of award balls). Is used to calculate The total number of winning balls is the total number of winning balls that are paid out to the player other than during the special prize. The out ball buffer is the number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the out ball number satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of out balls). It is done. The winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls won in the general winning opening and the starting opening. The specific winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls won in a specific general winning opening or start opening. The winning ball number buffer is used when the number of out balls is counted based on the number of balls passing through the outlet (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific winning ball number buffer is used when the number of out balls is corrected by the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total number of out-balls is the total number of game balls that the player has launched other than during the special prize. The base is calculated by total number of winning balls / total number of out balls × 100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, and is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation / display processing.

  Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52A, the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls correspond to the total areas of FIG. 52B, which will be described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. A numerical value up to 16777215 or 4294967295 can be stored as a decimal number. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. The base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total total of the base shown in FIG. 52B described later, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. A capacity that can be recorded with a decimal base value may be allocated.

  FIG. 52B shows another example of a work area structure using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (B), a winning ball number buffer, a total winning ball number, an out ball number buffer, a winning ball number buffer, a specific winning ball number buffer, a total out ball number, and a base are stored. Each data item is the same as the description in FIG. The storage area for the total number of winning balls and the total number of out-balls is n storage areas (for example, for every 6000 winning balls) for every predetermined number of winning balls (or every predetermined number of out-balls, every predetermined time). n = 10 storage areas), and when the number of award balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer for all data moves, and the storage area in which the data is updated changes. . Then, after data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. Note that the writing pointer may be moved when data other than the number of winning balls (the number of out balls, a predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

  Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. Also, the read pointer moves as the write pointer moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the base value is calculated using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

  The total of the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the base total value is the total of the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls. When the ring buffer goes around and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the accumulated value is excluded by excluding the data in the cleared area. Recalculated. The total total of each data is the total value of all data collected in the past, the value of the base total total calculated from the total value is the value calculated from the total total value of each data, and the ring buffer Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total accumulated value including the original data in the cleared area is calculated.

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (B), the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the ring buffer are each a 2-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the sum of the data for 6000 prize balls × n (60000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. The total of the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 can be stored in decimal. Since the total total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. Each of the base total and total is a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. A capacity that can be recorded with a decimal base value may be allocated.

  In the data structure shown in FIG. 52A, the stored data is not erased. Therefore, even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased every predetermined period (for example, 1 day, 1 week, 1 month, etc.). Good. Similarly, the total accumulation in FIG. 52B may be deleted every predetermined period.

  Further, when the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but all data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, it may be notified that the data in the base calculation area 13128 and the calculated base value are abnormal. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated again after checking the data in the backup area using the check code and copying the data in the normal backup area to the main area.

[9-4. Base value display]
The base value calculated as described above may continue to be displayed while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but when the main body frame 4 is closed and a game is possible, the base indicator 1317 is visually recognized. Since this is not possible, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. Of course, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation / display process (step S89) are executed even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off.

  The base indicator 1317 may always display the base value or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318 which is a push button switch is pressed, the display of the base value is started, and after the display for a predetermined time, the display is turned off. When the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the base value may be displayed on the base indicator 1317. That is, if the main body frame 4 is not open, the base indicator 1317 does not display the accessory ratio even if the display switch 1318 is operated.

  Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all the digits so that it can be confirmed that the base display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), “-” may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

  When the body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the base indicator 1317 is performed (FIG. 36E). After a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. The power consumption of the gaming machine may be reduced. This base non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed (FIG. 36B), but may be a different mode as long as it is distinguishable from the displayed base value.

  The base display 1317 may be shared by the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the gaming status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, it is possible to quickly switch from the base display to the display of the game state when the main body frame 4 is closed. For example, the base value is displayed when the main frame 4 is opened during the special symbol variation display game, but if the main frame 4 is closed before the variation time elapses, the variation can be displayed for the remaining time. . Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol stops at the timing when the special symbol variation display on the function display unit 1400 stops. For this reason, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, the player can be configured not to feel uncomfortable.

  Further, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-described embodiment, the accessory ratio) may be displayed on the base indicator (the accessory ratio indicator) 1317. If it does in this way, since a base value (commodity ratio) can be checked, without opening the main body frame 4, the fall of operation of a game machine can be suppressed. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the main body frame 4 is open. In addition, in an island facility where pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side is opened, the back side of the pachinko machine installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such a gaming machine, by opening the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side, it is possible to check the bases (role ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back. Further, when the base value is displayed even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value is displayed in a form that can be recognized by the player (for example, a display device that displays the effect of the special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). Should be displayed. This is because the base value can be used as a barometer representing the tone of the pachinko machine and is worth seeing by the player. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the base value is calculated by the payout control board 951, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via the relay board.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the light amount (luminance) of the base display 1317 is not changed even when the energy saving mode is entered. This is because if the light amount of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it is difficult to check the base value by the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine other than the opening time.

  Specifically, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is in a standby state when a predetermined time elapses after a game ball is not won in any winning opening and the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is consumed. . In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs BGM output with so-called normal fluctuation. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the standby state, the demo state is entered. In the demo state, a video showing the motif of the gaming machine is played, or the gaming machine is explained. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the demo state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the demo state and the energy saving mode). In the energy saving mode, the light amounts of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 are reduced in order to reduce power consumption. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (function display unit 1400 and base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, the amount of light of these display devices is not reduced. Also good. Also, if the light quantity of the function display unit 1400 is not reduced, a player who wants to play on an empty board can easily see the result of the previous lottery.

  In addition, even if the game ball does not win the start opening or the general winning opening, if the game ball is launched toward the game area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value can be recalculated and updated. There is sex. Even if game balls are fired and the number of out balls increases, if the number of prize balls does not increase, the calculated base value decreases, but some players burn in revenge.

  By informing such a player of the state of the game with the function display unit 1400 that also serves as the base display 1317, the interest of the game can be revived. That is, even if the mode is switched to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, the display mode of the display on which the base value is displayed is maintained at the light amount before shifting to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, or the player increases the light amount. It is good to be able to confirm the base value properly.

  As described above, the maintenance or increase of the light amount of the display unit on which the base value is displayed has been described. However, even if the light amount of the display unit on which the base value is displayed is decreased or turned off, emphasizing the viewpoint of reducing energy consumption. Good. For example, a predetermined operation during the energy saving mode (a launch stop button for forcibly stopping the launch, an operation button for changing the displayed effect, a RAM clear button for clearing the contents of the RAM, power supply to the gaming machine When an operation of an operation means provided in a gaming machine such as a supply adjustment button for switching presence / absence of the presence / absence is detected, the light amount of the display on which the base value is displayed may be reduced. Furthermore, not only in the energy saving mode, but if the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, the light quantity of both the lamp that reduces power consumption and the indicator that displays the base value during the energy saving mode is reduced or turned off. Also good.

  When the light intensity of both the lamp and the display unit displaying the base value is reduced or turned off, the light intensity of the lamp or the like that reduces power consumption during the energy saving mode is reduced before the display unit displaying the base value. In this case, the amount of light of a lamp or the like with high power consumption is reduced first, and the power consumption is greatly reduced. In addition, the indicator that displays the base value may be turned off before the lamp or the like, and the light quantity of the indicator that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off. In this case, the gorgeousness of the gaming machine is maintained even in the energy saving mode. There is an effect. In addition, the lamp that reduces power consumption and the indicator that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time during the energy saving mode. In this case, the amount of power consumption can be increased and the energy saving effect is high. . In addition, before and after the time in these explanations (meaning “first” or “simultaneously”) includes the order of internal processing timing and the order of appearance from the player.

  Further, the display mode of the base value may be set in a plurality of stages, and the display mode of each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, or less than 10%. Divide into multiple stages. A display for displaying the base value may be configured by a multi-color LED, and may be displayed by changing the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. In addition, the display unit that displays the base value is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and the base value is low at each stage, such as “Good condition”, “Good condition”, “Not good”, “In some sense, great” Sometimes a masochistic comment may be displayed. Furthermore, without changing the display mode of the display that displays the base value, the effect of adding the comment as described above may be executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 on which the decorative design is displayed.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of balls passing through the outlet]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the processing described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out balls is calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the outlet, and the base value is calculated. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
54 and 40: Base value is calculated every time the timer interruption period. FIG. 55 and FIG. 56: Base value is calculated for every predetermined number of winning balls and every predetermined number of out balls. The description of the pattern for calculating the base value and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls is omitted, but can be realized by combining FIGS.

  If the out ball is detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 provided in the vicinity of the out-port 1111, there is a problem that the exact number of out-balls cannot be counted. This is because the game ball launched toward the game area 5a flows out of the game area 5a via the general winning port 2001, the starting port 2002, and the big winning ports 2005 and 2006, in addition to the out port 1111. For this reason, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls fired toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the number of out balls is accurately calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the outlet, and the base value is accurately calculated.

  FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

  The game board of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment has substantially the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. 10, but is provided at the lower part of the game area 5a and flows out of the game area 5a through the out port 1111 (out An out-mouth passing ball sensor 1021 for detecting the number of passing balls) is provided. The out port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position where the player can see through the out port 1111. By installing the out mouth passing ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out mouth 1111, it is possible to make it aware that the out balls have been counted, that is, the base has been calculated.

  Further, the outlet opening ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position that is not seen by the player, such as a collective basket in which game balls flowing down from the gaming area 5a through the outlet slot 1111 are aligned. If the player is installed at a position where the player cannot visually recognize, it is not necessary for the player to be conscious of counting out balls. Moreover, by providing the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the out-port 1111, a sufficient place for placing the liquid crystal display device and the accessory (movable body) can be secured, and the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5 is improved. it can. Further, in order to prevent double counting of the game balls, the game balls that have passed the out-portion passing ball sensor 1021 are prevented from bouncing back on the rolling surface on which the game balls have passed. It is better to add a slope or a curved surface.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, the number of winning balls, the number of passing out-out balls, and the number of winning balls are acquired in order to calculate the base value using the number of out-port passing balls for each timer interruption period. In FIG. 54, the same parts as those in the base calculation area updating process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of winning balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of winning balls is calculated. Note that it is determined whether there is a prize ball. If there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped.

  Thereafter, the number of out-passage balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of out mouth passing balls and the number of winning balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, every time an out ball or a winning ball is detected, the total number of out balls used for calculation of the base value is updated.

  Note that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the above-described base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

  After recording the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 55 records the number of prize balls in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition. The number of balls passing through the outlet is recorded in the out ball buffer, and the number of winning balls is recorded in the winning ball buffer. In FIG. 55, the same parts as those in the base calculation area updating process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the obtained prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

  Thereafter, the number of out-portion passing spheres is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out-portion passing spheres is added to the out-ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning balls is added to the winning ball number buffer (step S821).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

  In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of out-passing balls and winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. Then, the acquired number of out-passage balls and the number of winning balls are added to another storage area (out ball buffer, winning ball buffer). As described above, the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in another storage area.

  Also, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, when the acquired out-or-out pass ball number and the winning ball number are recorded in different storage areas, the out-ball number increases by 1 when winning in the winning port. The counting of the number of balls passing through the outlet and the counting of the number of winning balls are executed simultaneously (within one timer interrupt process), but the base value is calculated after updating both the out ball number buffer and the winning ball number buffer. At that time, if both the out-ball number buffer and the winning ball number buffer cannot be updated within one timer interrupt process, whether to count the number of out-passing balls or the number of winning balls Should be determined in advance, rather than determined by lottery. At that time, if the process relating to the prize ball is prioritized over the other processes, the prize ball payout process can be executed quickly, but may be determined as appropriate according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition. In FIG. 56, the same steps as those in the base calculation / display process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total winning ball number, so the process proceeds to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball number buffer value is added to the total out ball number (step S893), and the out ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or every predetermined time without comparing the winning ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of out-passage balls stored in the out-ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball-number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S896). ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, which is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to update the total number of out balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out balls is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S897), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, the winning ball number buffer value is added to the out ball number buffer, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted (step S901). . Note that steps S896 to S901 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or every predetermined time without comparing the number of out balls (out ball number buffer value + winning ball number buffer value) and the threshold value Th2.

  Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outballs is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 becomes an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee.

  In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of winning balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of winning balls is calculated by adding the number of winning balls to the number of balls passing through the outlet, so the number of out balls is accurately counted and the base value is accurately calculated. it can. Further, by confirming the base value in the manufacturing process and inspection process of the gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether the winning opening switch, the base indicator 1317 and the process for calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Announcement of base abnormality]
The process described above generates a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, a process for determining abnormality of the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
Fig. 57: Base value is calculated every timer interruption period Fig. 58: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of winning balls and predetermined out number of balls The description of the pattern for calculating the base value for each number of out balls is omitted, but can be realized by combining FIG. 57 and FIG.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

  First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outballs is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 becomes an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value is larger or smaller than a design value (normal value) exceeding a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that a plurality of stages of tolerances may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages depending on the degree of deviation of the base value. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated. As a method for notifying the abnormality of the base, the same method as the above-described notification of the base can be adopted.

  For example, one or more of the methods described below may be combined. Specifically, an abnormality of the base value may be notified by the base display (7 segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, or the like. If the player is informed of the abnormality of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality of the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be displayed as a percentage notation on the above-described display or display device to notify the abnormality of the base value. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. On a display device capable of displaying an image such as the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. May be.

  Further, when the base value is displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the display mode may be changed if the base value is abnormal. For example, the value is displayed by blinking or changing the color (green during normal operation, red during abnormal operation). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, or less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages, and the display may be performed by changing the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage.

  Further, the range of the base value (such as whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.) may be reported for various lamps, liquid crystal display devices, sounds, and the like. The function display unit 1400 may notify the abnormality of the base value. Further, information on abnormality of the base may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall.

  In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 57, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area updating process to be updated.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition. In FIG. 58, the same steps as those in the base calculation / display process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total winning ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball number buffer value is added to the total out ball number (step S893), and the out ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or every predetermined time without comparing the winning ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

  Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outballs is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 becomes an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value is larger or smaller than a design value (normal value) exceeding a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that a plurality of stages of tolerances may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages depending on the degree of deviation of the base value. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated.

  In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of winning balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

  In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 54, the total number of winning balls and the number of out balls are directly updated using the acquired number of winning balls and out balls. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area updating process.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so that the player can know the state of the gaming machine, and the hall employee It is possible to know the possibility of an unauthorized operation on the gaming machine. Further, it is possible to detect and notify an abnormality of a gaming machine that cannot be found by conventional error detection.

[9-7. Notification of base change]
Next, an embodiment of a gaming machine that notifies a change in the calculated base value will be described.

  Naturally, the base value calculated by a pachinko machine goes up and down. Since the base value represents the state of the gaming machine, the player who is playing the game is concerned about the change of the base value in addition to the base value itself. For this reason, notification of the change of the base value to a player is desired. When a display indicating the upper and lower base values appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 59, the history of the calculated base value is recorded in order to compare the current base value with the history of the past base value. In FIG. 59, the same parts as those in the base calculation / display process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total winning ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball number buffer value is added to the total out ball number (step S893), and the out ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or every predetermined time without comparing the winning ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

  Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outballs is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 becomes an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the base value management timer has expired (step S904). If the base value management timer is not up, it is not time to store the base value in the base history, and the base calculation / display processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the base value management timer is up, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

  The base value management timer is a timer used for recording a base value every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores the current base value in the base history every time the base value management timer expires. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128, or a plurality of base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When a plurality of base histories are stored in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be formed in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time × 10 base values may be stored. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer for the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls is configured in the base calculation area 13128, for example, a predetermined time × n number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are stored, The base value may be calculated as necessary.

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the display selection process. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 60).

  First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the latest past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. Is determined (step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is referred to determine whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the base value decrease. (Step S10302). If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the base decrease, an effect table in which the base is decreasing is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of base reduction, an effect table in which base reduction is continuing is selected (step S10304).

  On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not smaller (equal or larger) than the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is reset (step S10305), and the display selection table in which the base is increasing is selected (step S10306). ).

  In the display selection process described above, it is determined in step S10301 whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value, but the current base value is compared with the base history value to determine whether the current base value is larger, equal, or smaller. May be. Since the base value is obtained by division, it is generally a decimal value. For this reason, it is preferable to determine whether the base history value is equal to the current base value in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

  64 to 68 are diagrams showing examples of the display selection table. These display selection tables are used to select the effects of the special symbol variation display game based on the random number selected in response to a winning at the start opening (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). The display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is increasing or when the base value is not changed, and the display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are selected while the base value is decreasing. Selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease.

  Each display selection table includes items of production number, production content, variation time, remarks, and distribution. The effect number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the effect selected in the display selection table. The production content is the name of the production. The variation time is the time from the start to the end of the variation of the special symbol due to the effect. The remarks are information describing the outline of the production so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is a probability that the production is selected, and is defined by a numerator with 65536 as a denominator.

  The display selection table 1 shown in FIG. 64 (missing) is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is missing and the base value is increasing or has not changed. Is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is a normal big hit that does not lead to a probability variation state, and the base value is rising or there is no change. The display selection table 1 (win 2) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the big hit lottery result is a probable big hit that derives a probable change state and the base value is rising or there is no change.

  The display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease.

  As shown in the figure, the display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2 which are effects in which the symbols do not vary, and the freeze effect is selected with high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the effect is determined.

  Further, if the base value is reduced even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease, an effect is selected using the display selection table 3, and the selected effect is obtained. You may switch.

  In addition, whether to display a specific effect informing the change in the base value may be determined according to the gaming state (gaming situation). This is because if the change of the base value is always notified to the player, the player's attention to the effect of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be unclear, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Because there is.

  For example, during the execution of a special symbol variation display game (game situation in which the result of the jackpot lottery is not shown), the special symbol variation display game is preferentially executed. It is preferable to display a specific effect (effect that serves as an indication of a change in the base value) at the time or at the time of descent.

  The specific effect may be displayed at a timing when the special symbol variation display game is not executed for a predetermined time. In this case, if the specific effect is displayed immediately after the special symbol variation display game is over, the player's feeling of tension persists and fatigue is accumulated. When a game ball wins at the start opening in a state where the specific effect is displayed, the display of the specific effect is stopped and the effect of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because it is better to let the player pay attention to the special symbol variation display game because the big winning lottery is performed and the special symbol variation display game is started with the winning of the start opening.

  The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of prize balls has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th1) or a situation in which the number of out balls has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th2). Further, the specific effect may be displayed according to the result of the lottery, but may be always executed if the same condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the specific effect is not displayed when the base value increases, but may be displayed only when the base value decreases. This is because if the player is informed of an increase in the base value, the player's expectation increases, and if the base value does not increase to the extent expected by the player, the player may be discouraged due to a gap with the expectation. is there. On the other hand, if the player is informed of the decrease in the base value, there are players who increase the fighting spirit to increase the base value.

  In this embodiment, the display selection table is changed while the base value is decreasing and when the base value is decreasing (rising, steady), but the display is divided into three states: the base value is decreasing, steady, and rising. A selection table may be defined to notify the player that the base is rising. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the base value is in a steady state (whether the base history value is equal to the current base value) in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

  Further, the specific effect may be displayed during the special symbol variation display game. In this case, there is a higher possibility that the base value will be lower when the special symbol variation display game is displayed than when the special symbol variation display game is displayed.

  Note that the base value usually decreases in a state where the game ball does not win the starting opening and the special symbol variation display game is not performed. If the special symbol variation display game is not played for a predetermined time, a demonstration screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 69A shows a display example of normal reach, where the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 69 (B) is a display example of special reach 1, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed at the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are fighting against each other, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the Janken. FIG. 69C shows a display example of special reach 2, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed at the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are competing, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the battle.

  FIG. 69 (D) is a display example of freeze effect 1. The stopped decoration symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value decreases at a position that does not interfere with the recognition of the decoration symbol (for example, the lower right corner of the screen). The display is recognizable. FIG. 69 (E) is a display example of freeze effect 2. The stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value decreases at a position that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol (for example, at the bottom of the screen). Display that can recognize continuation. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be an arbitrary position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol. Further, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design. For example, a display that pops up in the center of the display screen may be used.

  Although the example in which the degree of change of the base value is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has been described above, the lighting mode of the decorative lamp may be changed. Further, the change in the base value may be displayed as a numerical value instead of the upward or downward tendency of the base value.

  The change in the displayed base value is the total cumulative value of the base value calculated before the predetermined time, even if the base value calculated during the time interval before the predetermined time is compared with the base value calculated during the current time interval. It may be a result of comparison between the total cumulative total of the latest base values.

[9-8. Calculation based on a specific general winning slot]
Next, a process for accurately calculating the base value in consideration of winning in a specific general winning opening will be described.

  In the pachinko machine, the player aims to win a particular winning opening (for example, the winning opening 2005, 2006 that has been opened) in which the game ball is easy to win during the jackpot. Adjust the firing strength. Even during big hits, games that aim at the big prize opening 2005 by launching a game ball aiming at the same place as the so-called normal hit, or aiming at the big prize winner 2006 by so-called right hit with the maximum strength of the launch. There are variations. In such a variation, a game board may be designed such that a start opening and a general winning opening are arranged downstream of the big winning opening, and a ball spilled from the big winning opening is picked up.

  Here, the downstream (lower part) in the pachinko machine to be hit right during the big hit will be described in detail. During the big hit, the player makes a right turn in order to win the game ball in the open big opening. Many of the game balls launched toward the game area win the open big prize opening 2006. As described above, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment is provided with the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the big winning opening 2005 as shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, and the right-handed game ball is open. When the grand prize opening 2006 is not won, the general prize opening 2001 is won. That is, it can be said that the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the big winning opening 2005 wins only when the right-handed game ball does not win the open big winning opening 2006.

  The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning at the start opening and the general prize opening when 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 5a (that is, paying for 100 out balls). The percentage of the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the starting and general winning entrances (highly likely to win the big winning entrance) When counting to (number of out balls), it is assumed that when calculated as the base value, it deviates from the actual base value.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the big winning opening 2005 is defined as a specific general winning opening, and the number of balls won in the specific general winning opening during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. To calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning opening is as follows.
FIG. 70 and FIG. 40: Base value is calculated every time the timer interruption period. FIG. 71 and FIG. 72: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of winning balls and every predetermined number of out balls. The description of the pattern for calculating the base value and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, but can be realized by combining FIGS.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70 calculates the base value using the number of out balls corrected by the number of winning balls to a specific general winning slot at each timer interruption period. Get the number of balls and the number of specific winning balls. In FIG. 70, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the base calculation area updating process described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70, every time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated. Note that it is determined whether there is a prize ball. If there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped.

  Thereafter, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls (specific winning ball number) to a specific general winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, a value obtained by subtracting the number of specific winning balls from the number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70, every time an out ball or winning ball is detected, the total number of out balls used for calculation of the base value is updated.

  Note that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the above-described base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

  After recording the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation region update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 71 records the number of prize balls in the prize ball number buffer and calculates the number of out balls in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. Record the number in the out ball buffer. In FIG. 71, the same parts as those in the base calculation area updating process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the obtained prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

  Thereafter, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether the winning opening relating to the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning opening, and the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls for the specific general winning opening is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific number of winning balls recorded in the specific winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 72, the same steps as those in the base calculation / display process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total winning ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball number buffer value is added to the total out ball number (step S893), and the out ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or every predetermined time without comparing the winning ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of out-passage balls stored in the out-ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning-ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, which is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to update the total number of out balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out balls is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S897), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific number of winning balls is subtracted from the total number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 is added (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

  Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outballs is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 becomes an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value is larger or smaller than a design value (normal value) exceeding a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that a plurality of stages of tolerances may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages depending on the degree of deviation of the base value. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated.

  In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls or the total number of out balls is not updated. That is, if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, the base value remains the same, and if the total number of winning balls or the total number of out balls is updated, The base value is updated to a different value. Note that the base value may be calculated at a timing when one of the total number of winning balls or the total number of out balls is updated, or the base value may be calculated at a timing when both are updated.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated by excluding the game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the start opening and the general winning opening, so there is a difference from the actual base value. A small base value can be calculated accurately.

  Further, a case has been described in which a pachinko machine that makes a right hit during a big hit and a general winning opening 2001 is located downstream of the big winning opening 2006, but the invention according to the present embodiment aims at the big winning opening 2005 during a normal hit. Even a pachinko machine can be applied to a gaming machine in which a start opening or a general winning opening is arranged downstream of the big winning opening 2005.

  In the game area 5a, game winning balls 2005 and 2006 are arranged, which normally do not accept game balls, but can accept game balls in accordance with the jackpot lottery result. You may exclude from the calculation of a base value the prize ball by winning to this big winning opening 2005, 2006. In this case, the game ball wins the start opening 2002, 2004 and the special symbol variation display game starts, and from the time the special symbol is confirmed until the big winning opening 2005, 2006 is opened (big hit opening), the big winning opening The detected out ball is excluded from the number of out balls as a special prize is given during the period from the closing of 2005 and 2006 until the start of the next special symbol variation display game (a jackpot ending). In this way, it is possible to count the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the special prize without determining whether or not the special prize is being given in step S810 in FIG. In the case where the big prize opening 2005, 2006 repeats opening and closing with one jackpot, the time between the closing of the big prize opening 2005, 2006 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. That is, the special prize means that the conditional device is in operation, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Moreover, all the times during the right-handed instruction may be included. Further, in the start ports 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include time reduction, probability change (during ST), and electric support. Furthermore, in game states other than time saving, during probable change (during ST), and during electric support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting port 2004 is closed (for example, until a ball won at the starting port is detected as an out ball) The required number of seconds may be included in the special prize.

  In addition, in the game area 5a, a second start port 2004 that normally does not accept a game ball but can accept a game ball according to a lottery result of a normal symbol is arranged. You may exclude from the calculation of a base value the prize ball by the winning to this 2nd starting port 2004. In this case, a game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and a normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol variation display game is started, and after the normal symbol is confirmed until it is released (opening), the second starting port 2004 is started. During the period until the next normal symbol variation display game is started (ending) after closing, the out ball detected is excluded from the number of out balls. When the second starting port 2004 repeats opening and closing according to the normal symbol lottery result, the time between the closing of the second starting port 2004 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. In this way, all winnings for the second starting port 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value in addition to the time saving.

  As described above, it is possible to accurately count the number of award balls and the number of out balls other than during a special prize (big hit, short time, etc.) without determining whether or not a special prize is being received in step S810 in FIG.

  In this way, the base value can be accurately calculated by accurately excluding the number of out balls and the number of prize balls while the player is making a right strike.

  In addition, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play a left-handed game in a state that is neither big hit nor short-time (so-called normal state), and to play a right-handed game during a big hit or short-time. In such a gaming machine, a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002 for winning when left-handed, a general winning port 2001, and a second starting port 2004 for winning when right-handed are provided. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning holes in the center from the left side of the game area 5a (area where the game ball rolls when left-handed) and the right side of the game area 5a (area where the game ball rolls when right-handed) Depending on the arrangement and the position of the nail, the winning rate for each winning opening differs. In other words, the base value for left-handed and the base value for right-handed are different.

  The base value of the pachinko machine is set on the assumption that the player makes a left strike in the normal state. However, as described above, when the base value differs between left-handed and right-handed (for example, when the right-handed base value in the normal state is designed to be lower than left-handed) If the player hits right in the normal state, a low base value is calculated.

  Hall considers that pachinko machines with a low base value are abnormal and checks them, or judges that they are gaming machines with poor performance. Even in a pachinko machine that is judged to have a poor ball performance (lower than the assumed base), the hole judges that the player is making a left-hand hit. Make adjustments to increase the entrance rate of the general winning opening. Then, the nail having the abnormality is adjusted to increase the base value. If left-handed with the gaming machine adjusted in this way, many prize balls can be obtained even in the normal state. In other words, many lotteries can be received for a small amount. In other words, even if the left-handed base is not different from the one assumed by the hole, the hole is misunderstood and adjustments are made to increase the entrance rate of the starting opening and the general winning opening for winning when left-handed. Since the hole may be disadvantaged by such bad intention of the player, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value for left-handed and the base value for right-handed.

  By the way, the pachinko machine that makes a right turn in a short time, the second start opening 2004 that opens and closes according to the gaming state, and the gate part 2003 for performing the normal symbol lottery for opening the second start opening 2004 are It is arranged in the area where the game ball rolls. In addition, when a game ball passes right through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state, even if the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal winning probability is made extremely low so that the second starting port 2004 is not opened. Even if the symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second start port 2004 is shortened, and it is difficult to win the second start port 2004 in the normal state.

  Here, in order to increase the base value in the right-handed state in the normal state, the entrance rate to the second starting port 2004 is increased. However, since the second start port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first start port 2002, increasing the ball entry rate into the second start port 2004 presses the profit of the hall. Therefore, when the base ball is calculated by counting the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 in the normal state, it is preferable to calculate the corrected base value using the number of passing balls of the gate unit 2003.

  Specifically, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls that have been struck toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. By reducing the number of out balls, a high base calculation value can be obtained. For example, when a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate part 2003, an extremely high base value is calculated. Note that the degree of the correction process may be appropriately determined based on the design value (performance) of the gaming machine.

  Furthermore, the passage of the gate part 2003 is monitored, and when a game ball passes the gate part 2003 (a case where a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls pass the gate part 2003 without winning the starting opening, The number of out balls counted at a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots after passing through the gate part 2003 (or before and after) may not be used for calculation of the base value. In this way, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When the passage of the gate unit 2003 is detected, a display or sound such as “please return to the left” may be output without actively notifying the player that the result is not reflected in the calculation result of the base value. Further, when the passage of the gate part 2003 is detected, the hall may be notified that the right hand is being made. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, the lighting mode may be changed, or the right terminal may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall.

  As described above, by removing the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when right-handed) from the out-ball number, the right-hand strike in the normal state The hour base value can be corrected to a larger value. For this reason, the fluctuation | variation of the calculation value of a base by a player's game style can be prevented.

[9-9. Base value initialization]
In view of the role of the base value for confirming the operating status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable to maintain the calculated base value for a long period of time. Further, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily deleted. For this reason, the base calculation / display data 13136 is erased under a condition different from the data erase condition related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. As a result, it is possible to maintain accurate number-of-award data and to calculate an accurate bonus rate.

  Specifically, the base calculation / display data 13136 is not erased depending on the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation), but the backup power supplied to the main control MPU 1311 is shut off and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. All data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased by the second operation of blocking. In the second operation, one switch for realizing this operation may be provided, or an employee of the amusement shop pulls out the connector of the backup power line supplied to the main control board 1310, and the pachinko machine 1 You may shut off the power.

  In other words, two operations are prepared for erasing the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. In the first operation, only data related to the progress of the game is erased, but in the second operation, the calculated base value And erase all data including data related to game progress.

  By configuring in this way, the base calculation / display data 13136 is not erased due to an erroneous operation of an attendant at the game hall, so that the reliability of the displayed bonus rate can be improved and concealment of a state where the bonus rate is high can be prevented. .

[9-10. Calculation based on winning abnormalities]
FIG. 73 and FIG. 74 are flowcharts of the base calculation area update process in consideration of the prize winning abnormality.

  In the pachinko machine 1, a prize abnormality may be detected in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above. For example, when a winning is detected in a special symbol variation display game other than when the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened, or when a winning is derived in a normal symbol variation display game 2004 If a winning is detected except during the opening of the game, the winning is abnormal. That is, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and is mainly a case where many prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, a winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a case where a winning in a state where a winning is impossible or a large number of winnings are detected in a predetermined time.

  Since the winning ball associated with the winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to correct this amount and accurately calculate the base. For this reason, in the base calculation area update process in consideration of the winning abnormality, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of winning balls related to the detected winning abnormality.

  Normally, the winning prize openings 2005 and 2006 and the start opening 2004 are won only during the special prize, so the winning balls to these winning openings are not counted as out balls for calculating the base. There is no need to consider abnormalities.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To do. In particular, the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73 is the same as the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, in order to calculate the base value every timer interrupt period, in order to obtain a prize ball control process (step S80). The total number of winning balls is directly updated using the number of winning balls calculated in (Step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (Step S822). In FIG. 73, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the base calculation area updating process described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG.

  If the gaming state is a special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent out payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives the reception confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951, and the number of prize balls (the number of payout prize balls) received from the payout control board 951 of the payout completion report may be used. This variation has been described with reference to FIGS.

  Then, the acquired number of winning balls is added to the total number of winning balls to update the total number of winning balls (step S814). Note that it is determined whether there is a prize ball. If there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped. In addition, the game balls are won at the start ports 2002 and 2004, but the hold is the upper limit value, and even if the win at the start port is not held, the award balls are paid out, so the total number of winning balls is updated. Also, in a gaming state in which no winning ball is generated even if a gaming ball wins a winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), no winning ball due to the winning is generated, and the number of winning balls to be acquired is Since it is 0, the total number of winning balls is not updated. The total number of winning balls is recorded in a total winning ball number storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 73, every time the number of winning balls is calculated, the total number of winning balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

  Thereafter, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). Then, it is determined whether a winning abnormality is detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827). Specifically, as described above, a case where a prize at the big prize opening 2005, 2006 is detected in addition to the special prize (during the operation of the condition device) caused by deriving the jackpot in the special symbol variation display game, In the normal symbol variation display game, when the winning at the starting port 2004 is detected even though it is not being released due to the winning of winning, it is determined that the winning is abnormal.

  If one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, it may be determined that the winning is abnormal, or if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality is detected, it may be determined that the winning is abnormal. Further, if a predetermined number of winning balls relating to a winning abnormality is detected continuously, it may be determined that a winning abnormality is detected, or if a predetermined number of winning balls relating to a winning abnormality is detected within a predetermined time, it is determined that a winning abnormality is detected. May be.

  Then, the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the firing ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the like, and is acquired by reading the detection signals of these sensors in the switch input process of step S74. At this time, the value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls for winning abnormality from the acquired number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, and after adding the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls, The number of winning balls that are abnormal may be subtracted from the total number of out balls. The total number of out balls is recorded in the total number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 (see FIG. 52). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 73, every time an out ball is detected, the total number of out balls used for calculation of the base value is updated. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (FIG. 40), so the base value is displayed without delay. And can determine whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay.

  Note that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 74) described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and a prize ball abnormality notification is issued. May be stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes base value calculation processing in the timer interrupt processing, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute base value calculation processing. In this case, a command for informing the base may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or a command for informing the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511. May be sent.

  Also, even if information on both winning and out winning balls is acquired in one timer interruption process, the number of winning balls is changed to the total number of winning balls (or a winning ball buffer in the embodiment described later). The number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (or an out ball number buffer in the embodiment described later). In addition, even if information on winnings to a plurality of winning openings is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the total number of winning balls by a plurality of winnings is calculated as a total winning ball number (or a winning ball buffer in an embodiment described later). ). For this reason, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, when a winning combination with a winning mouth sensor with five winning balls and a winning mouth sensor with three winning balls is detected, a total of eight winning balls are used as the total number of winning balls. (Or prize ball number buffer).

  In addition, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when a game ball is detected to be launched. In other words, only the number of prize balls related to winnings detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the firing ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or prize ball number buffer). Further, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops operating). Only the number of prize balls related to winnings detected during a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the prize ball number buffer. Further, the prize ball number may be added to the total prize ball number (or prize ball number buffer) only when the player operates the launch handle. That is, only the number of winning balls related to winnings detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that the touch detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is touched is calculated as the total number of winning balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer. If it does in this way, reflection to the base value of a prize ball by abnormalities which detect a prize ball in the state where a game ball is not fired, or cheating can be prevented, and display of an incorrect base value can be prevented. In this case, when the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that an increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 74 records the out ball number in the out ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the out ball number satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 74, the same parts as those in the base calculation area updating process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If the result of determination in step S812 is that there is no prize ball, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether the prize ball number is abnormal (step S815). If there is no abnormality in the prize ball number, the acquired prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number (step S814). . That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 74, every time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

  On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817).

  Thereafter, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether a winning abnormality is detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

  In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, the out balls are corrected by the number of all the winning balls related to the winning abnormality, but the out balls are corrected for the winning balls related to a certain kind of winning abnormality, It is not necessary to correct the out ball in a winning ball related to a certain type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of winning ball associated with a winning abnormality, a winning ball for the winning ball may or may not be paid out. Whether or not to pay out a winning ball for this winning abnormality may be determined for each winning opening. In this case, for a winning abnormality in which no winning ball is paid out, the winning ball is not counted as a total out ball and should not be used for calculation of the base value. On the other hand, with respect to a winning abnormality in which a winning ball is paid out, the winning ball may be counted as a total out ball, and the winning ball to be paid out may be counted as the total number of winning balls and used for calculating the base value. Note that even if the winning ball is paid out abnormally, the winning ball is not counted as the total out ball, the paid out ball is not counted as the total number of winning balls, and may not be used for calculating the base value.

  For example, as a result of maintenance of a gaming machine failure (releasing ball clogging, etc.), a hall employee may manually insert a game ball into the starting port to compensate for the ball exit so that the player does not lose. In this case, a prize ball is paid out for winning at the start opening. The winning at the starting port is detected as an abnormal winning, but a winning ball is paid out. When a winning ball is paid out in this way, it should be reflected in the base value, so it is not necessary to determine that the winning is abnormal. In this case, the winning ball (start opening 2002, 2004) reflected in the calculation of the base value pays out a winning ball, the winning abnormality is not determined, and the winning ball is not received at the other winning ports (large winning holes 2005, 2006). It is good to judge a prize abnormality without paying out. A winning opening for determining a winning abnormality is one that receives fewer prize balls for winning a prize than a winning opening that does not determine a winning abnormality (three starting balls for the starting opening and 15 winning balls for the large winning opening). For this reason, although the prize winning abnormality is determined at the big winning opening, even if the abnormal winning is not determined at the starting opening, it is not a large security hole from the viewpoint of defense against fraud. In this manner, by determining the winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the out ball and the number of winning balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls using the number of winning balls associated with a winning abnormality that does not generate a winning ball, the number of winning balls and the out ball that causes the winning ball can be matched.

  As described above, a winning abnormality can be determined at various winning openings, and a specific implementation example on a pachinko machine will be described.

  First, the prize winning abnormality may not be determined at the general winning opening 2001, and the winning abnormality may be determined at a winning opening other than the general winning opening 2001 (large winning opening 2005, 2006, start opening 2002, 2004). Since it is difficult to win a plurality of game balls at the same time, the general prize opening improves the security tolerance of the gaming machine against fraudulent acts, and the large prize winning holes 2005 and 2006 and the start opening 2002 (opening and closing holes 2002) The player can be compensated for the ball by entering the general winning opening 2001 (total 4) provided more than the total 3). In addition, since the general winning opening 2001 can be easily identified by the employees of the hall, operations for the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and the compensation for the pitching are easy. The reasons why the employees of the hall can easily identify the general prize opening 2001 are that the general prize opening 2001 is often arranged in a game area (in a separate area), and the electric prize (large prize opening) 2005, 2006, start opening 2002, 2004) and the decorative member (appearance) are different. In addition, when the number of winning balls for a single winning of the general winning opening is small, there is an effect of improving the security tolerance of the gaming machine against fraudulent acts. It should be noted that a winning abnormality may not be determined only with a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end), and a winning abnormality may be determined with another general winning opening.

  In addition, the winning prizes 2005 and 2006 having a large number of winning balls are not judged to be abnormal, and the winning prizes other than the winning prizes 2005 and 2006 (general winning mouths 2001 and starting holes 2002 and 2004 having a small number of winning balls) are won. An abnormality may be determined. Since the number of winning balls for a single winning ball is large, the base value varies greatly even with a small number of winning balls. For this reason, it is convenient that the change of the base value can be easily inspected when the pachinko machine is inspected. It should be noted that a winning abnormality may not be determined only with a specific big winning opening (for example, a large winning opening 2005 where a game ball can be easily put by hand), and a winning abnormality may be determined with another large winning opening (for example, 2006). .

  Further, the start opening 2002, 2004 may not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning opening other than the starting opening 2002, 2004 (the general winning opening 2001, the big winning opening 2005, 2006) may be determined. Since the starting port has fewer prize balls for winning one ball than the large winning port, it is possible to compensate the player for the ball while improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against Goto. Note that a winning abnormality may not be determined only with a specific starting port (for example, the starting port 2002 provided in the center of the game board is easy to understand), and a winning abnormality may be determined with other starting ports 2004.

  In addition, at the prize winning opening and the starting opening, the opening / closing member of the winning opening is in a position where it can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the hall entrance makes it easy for the employee to operate the opening / closing member. Without being open, the opening / closing member of the winning opening may be in a position where it cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the winning abnormality may be determined at the winning opening where the employee of the hall has difficulty operating the opening / closing member. For example, an opening / closing member that is vertically positioned in the closed state is inclined to an oblique position, so that a hall employee can easily operate the winning opening (so-called electric tulip) in which the opening / closing member picks up a game ball. On the other hand, in the closed state, the winning opening is closed with a flat plate member, and when the flat member is retracted to the back, the entrance to the winning port is opened (so-called “velocity”), the employee of the hall Is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is eased only for the winning holes used to compensate for the player's participation in the game, so that it is easy for the employees of the hall to understand and the security tolerance of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Further, the detected winning abnormality may be notified. The method for notifying the winning abnormality may be the same as the method for notifying the abnormal number of prize balls described above (for example, output of a security signal to the external terminal board, warning display on a display device such as a liquid crystal, game board or frame The notification of winning abnormality may be looser than other abnormality notifications such as lighting or blinking of decoration lamps, output of sound, sound effect, warning sound, and the like. Specifically, the time for anomaly notification is short, characters for anomaly notification are small, the lamp does not light at the time of anomaly notification, or the anomaly alert sound is smaller than the volume of the alert sound for other anomalies (suppressed) )

  In addition, in the notification of the winning abnormality, the abnormality notification is made for a predetermined time after the winning abnormality is detected, and even if a winning abnormality is further detected during the predetermined time, the predetermined time is not extended and is initially set. The notification may be ended at a predetermined time or the notification mode may be changed. In this way, when a winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is maintaining the gaming machine, not an illegal act by the player. For this reason, if the winning abnormality is notified for a predetermined time and the notification is not continued thereafter, maintenance work of the gaming machine by the hall is not hindered, and work efficiency can be improved. Further, by changing the notification mode after a predetermined time, it can be seen that the maintenance work of the gaming machine is not hindered and the work is being continued correctly. Specifically, the notification by the display device or the lamp is continued, but the notification by sound may be stopped (or the volume is reduced).

  In summary, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a correcting means for correcting the number of out balls by the number of winning balls, and the correcting means classifies a plurality of winning holes into a plurality of types (starting holes, large winning holes). For the first type of winning mouth, the number of out balls is corrected based on the winning ball detected when the predetermined condition is not established (during special prize), and for the second type of winning mouth, The number of out balls is not corrected based on the winning ball detected except when the condition is satisfied (special prize). As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent deviation of the number of out balls at the time of compensation to the player due to maintenance of the gaming machine, and it is possible to accurately calculate the number of out balls. In addition, an abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the base value can be adjusted as the adjustment (maintenance). Thereby, an accurate base value can be calculated and displayed.

  Up to this point, we have explained the detection of winning abnormalities and the exceptional handling of detecting abnormal winnings (when not detected), but the game balls that are determined to be winning abnormal are not the winning balls acquired in the game, Since there is a high possibility of being used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is desirable that the winning ball determined to be abnormal for winning is not reflected in the number of out balls and should not be used for calculating the base value.

  Also, the winning abnormality detected in the base calculation area update process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be notified. For example, in the fraud detection process (step S84) of the timer interrupt process, a prize abnormality display command is created with the prize abnormality as an abnormal state and transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). The notification of the winning abnormality may be performed when one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, or may be performed when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality is detected. In addition, when a predetermined number of winning balls related to a winning abnormality is detected continuously, a notification of a winning abnormality may be made, or when a predetermined number of winning balls related to a winning abnormality is detected within a predetermined time, Notification may be performed.

  Furthermore, the notification of winning abnormality may be ended after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be ended when the winning opening is opened (the condition device is activated).

  In addition, it is not necessary to notify the winning abnormality.

[9-11. Base value calculation process utilizing the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs a division process for calculating the base value, the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processes than when the CPU 13111 executes the division by the program. The base calculation process described so far has not made use of this characteristic.

  That is, in relation to the calculation of the base value, in the above-described timer interrupt process (FIG. 23), in the switch input process (step S74), the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the shot ball sensor 1020 are read, and the number of out balls And the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). Thereafter, in the base calculation area update process (step S98), the number of winning balls and the number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

  Thereafter, in the base calculation / display process (step S89), the base value is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

  The timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined time. However, since the predetermined process must be terminated for each timer interrupt, a slow division process by a program includes a time-consuming process in the timer interrupt process. That is, it is difficult to include a plurality of base calculation processes in the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for the calculation of the base value can be shortened, the base value can be calculated a plurality of times in one timer interrupt process, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

  In addition, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division process from the time when the value is written to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 until the calculation result is read from the division result register A131218. In other words, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the dividend and the divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be used effectively, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the dividend and the divisor and the output timing of the quotient are different, the degree of freedom of the base value calculation processing in the timer interrupt processing is improved.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing utilizing the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) described above except for the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98), and thus the description of the same process is omitted.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, the number of out balls is read by detecting a detection signal from a sensor for detecting a winning ball, a detection signal from a switch for detecting fraud, or a detection signal from a discharge ball sensor 3060 or a launch ball sensor 1020. Count.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 1 (step S97). In the base calculation process 1, the total number of out balls is updated using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 1 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 78.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes timer update processing (step S76) and random number update processing 1 (step S78).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 2 (step S98). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of winning balls is updated using the number of winning balls calculated in step S80, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 79.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a frame command reception process (step S82), an illegal act detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), a normal symbol and an ordinary electric accessory. A control process (step S88) is executed. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL clears the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process is completed, the timer interrupt process is terminated and the process before the interrupt is restored.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is a special prize, it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the total number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

  Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of outballs is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). After a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total prize ball number / total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9709).

  Thereafter, similarly to the above-described step S908, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base (base value or abnormality of the base value) is notified to the player or hall employee. The base notification command is a display command for the peripheral control unit 1511 when the base value is notified by the display device (liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244) controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 or the speaker 921. And sound output command. When the base display 1313 or the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 is used for notification, these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs and LED lamps, so that the base notification command is sent to the LED elements. It is a drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by the driver, a drive signal including a character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver) is the base notification command. Further, when the 7-segment LED is directly driven, a drive signal for lighting each LED element is a base notification command.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG.

  As a result, if the gaming state is a special prize, the base ball is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated because the winning ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of winning balls is updated (step S9809). When the number of prize balls cannot be acquired or when the number of prize balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be terminated immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of outballs is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). When the total number of winning balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value may not be calculated. Further, when the total number of winning balls is larger than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value may not be calculated. Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of winning balls / total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9813).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee.

  Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed for each timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may be executed in a timer interrupt process every predetermined time (for example, one minute longer than the timer interrupt process) without being executed for each timer interrupt process. By not executing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, it is possible to reduce the amount of calculation required for calculating the base value (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311), compared to the case where the base value is calculated for each timer interrupt process.

  Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. The base calculation process shown in FIGS. 78 and 79 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out balls and each predetermined number of winning balls.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is a special prize, it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired out number is added to the out number buffer so as to be added. The ball number buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2. For example, the out-ball count buffer value may be compared with the threshold Th2, or may be determined by a predetermined bit value in the out-ball count storage area (specifically, the out-sphere count storage area may be 8 bits). If the most significant bit is 1, the number of out balls can be determined to be 128 or more).

  If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing for calculating the base value, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the out ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total out ball number is updated so that the out ball number buffer value is added to the total out ball number (step S9705), and the out ball number buffer is set to 0. It sets (step S9706).

  Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of outballs is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). After a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total prize ball number / total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9709).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is a special prize, the base ball is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated because the winning ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there is a prize ball, that is, the number of prize balls acquired is one or more. Is determined (step S9803). As a result, if there is no prize ball, the process advances to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805). If there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the prize is awarded so that the obtained prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer. The ball number buffer is updated (step S9804).

  On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player or hall employee that the winning ball is abnormal. There are various methods for notifying abnormality, and one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more methods may be combined. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 in FIG. 46 can be used.

  An anomaly in the number of winning balls is, for example, a large number of winning balls at a predetermined time other than during a special prize (for example, a prize corresponding to 10 or more winnings per minute in consideration of the number of winning balls at a general winning opening or a starting opening) Sphere) is obtained. Note that a plurality of stages of allowable ranges may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages depending on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of winning balls.

  Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the award ball number buffer value may be compared with a threshold Th1, or may be determined by a predetermined bit value in the award ball number storage area (specifically, the award ball number storage area may be 8 bits). If the most significant bit is 1, the number of out balls can be determined to be 128 or more).

  If the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing for calculating the base value, so the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball number is updated so that the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Setting is performed (step S9810).

  Each time it is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In this case, the threshold value Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of outballs is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of winning balls / total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9813).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer started in step S9807 has expired (step S9815). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S9816). In step S9815, the end of notification is determined based on the time of a timer for notifying a prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the notification end is determined so as to notify a prize ball abnormality for a predetermined number of shot balls. May be. Moreover, you may continue alert | reporting abnormality until a hall employee confirms.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the timer interrupt process (FIGS. 23 and 75) described above except for the base calculation process (steps S93 and S94) and the base display process (step S95). Is omitted.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the firing ball sensor 1020 are read, and the number of out balls is counted.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 3 (step S93). In the base calculation process 3, the total number of out balls is updated using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and a parameter for calculating a base value is written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 84.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes timer update processing (step S76) and random number update processing 1 (step S78).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of winning balls is updated using the number of winning balls counted in step S80, and parameters for calculating the base value are written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a frame command reception process (step S82), an illegal act detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), a normal symbol and an ordinary electric accessory. A control process (step S88) is executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base display process for generating a command for reading out the base circuit and informing the base (step S95).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL clears the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process is completed, the timer interrupt process is terminated and the process before the interrupt is restored.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 81 is obtained by removing steps S9709 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is a special prize, it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the total number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out balls is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

  Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 3 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing steps S9813 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is a special prize, the base ball is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated because the winning ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of winning balls is updated (step S9809). If the number of prize balls cannot be acquired or the number of prize balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

  In step S9708 in FIG. 81, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217. In step S9812 in FIG. 82, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is calculated. And the total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display process (step S95).

  The main control MPU 1311 reads out the calculation result (total number of winning balls / total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and sets it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee.

  Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display process shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may be executed in a timer interrupt process every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) without being executed for each timer interrupt process.

  Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. The base calculation process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out balls and each predetermined number of winning balls.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 84 is obtained by removing steps S9709 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is a special prize, it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired out number is added to the out number buffer so as to be added. The ball number buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out balls is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2. For example, the out-ball count buffer value may be compared with the threshold Th2, or may be determined by a predetermined bit value in the out-ball count storage area (specifically, the out-sphere count storage area may be 8 bits). If the most significant bit is 1, the number of out balls can be determined to be 128 or more).

  If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing for calculating the base value, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the out ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total out ball number is updated so that the out ball number buffer value is added to the total out ball number (step S9705), and the out ball number buffer is set to 0. It sets (step S9706).

  Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 85 is obtained by removing steps S9813 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criterion as that described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is a special prize, the base ball is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated because the winning ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there is a prize ball, that is, the number of prize balls acquired is one or more. Is determined (step S9803). As a result, if there is no prize ball, the process advances to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805). If there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the prize is awarded so that the obtained prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer. The ball number buffer is updated (step S9804).

  On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player or hall employee that the winning ball is abnormal. There are various methods for notifying abnormality, and one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more methods may be combined. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 in FIG. 46 can be used.

  An anomaly in the number of winning balls means that, for example, a large number of winning balls (for example, 10 or more winnings per minute in consideration of the number of winning balls at the general winning opening or starting port) are obtained at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. This is the case. Note that a plurality of stages of allowable ranges may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages depending on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of winning balls.

  Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the award ball number buffer value may be compared with a threshold Th1, or may be determined by a predetermined bit value in the award ball number storage area (specifically, the award ball number storage area may be 8 bits). If the most significant bit is 1, the number of out balls can be determined to be 128 or more).

  If the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing for calculating the base value, so the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball number is updated so that the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Setting is performed (step S9810).

  Each time it is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In this case, the threshold value Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

  In step S9708 in FIG. 84, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 in FIG. 85, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is input to the division input register A131216. And the total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

  The main control MPU 1311 reads out the calculation result (total number of winning balls / total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and sets it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer started in step S9807 of the base calculation process 4 has expired (step S8903). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S8904). In step S8903, the end of notification is determined based on the time of a timer for notifying a prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of notification is determined so as to notify a prize ball abnormality for a predetermined number of shot balls. Also good. Moreover, you may continue alert | reporting abnormality until a hall employee confirms.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt process of this embodiment, before the timer interrupt process ends (before the timer interrupt period elapses and the next timer interrupt process starts), the arithmetic circuit At a timing at which the division result can be read from 13121, an input value (divisor or dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is written. Specifically, the timing for writing the input value (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is the first half of the timer interrupt process, the random number update process (step S78), or a special symbol or a normal symbol. Prior to the control process (steps S86, S88).

  Further, whether or not to execute the process of calculating the base value may be determined based on the number of game media (prize balls) to be given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of winning balls determined for each winning opening, it may be switched whether to use the number of winning balls or the number of out balls for calculation of the base value. For example, a winning ball for giving a maximum winning ball to one winning ball may not be used for calculating the base value.

  Specifically, the number of award game media (award balls to be paid out for one winning ball) to be awarded when a gaming medium determined for each winning opening provided in the gaming area wins is 1, 3 In the case of three types of pieces, five pieces, it is not necessary to use the maximum number of five winning balls and the number of out balls corresponding thereto for the calculation of the base value. This is because if a winning with a large number of balls is used to calculate the base value, the change in the calculated base value will increase, and the lower digits of the calculated base value will be rounded by the processing means (rounding, rounding up, rounding down, etc. Even if displayed, the displayed value may change frequently. This is because in such a case, it is difficult to determine whether the pachinko machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether the pachinko machine is in accordance with the set payout rate).

  In addition, the minimum number of winning balls and the number of out balls corresponding thereto may not be used for calculating the base value. This is because the change in the base value due to winning with a small number of prize balls is small, so even if the single prize ball is not used for calculating the base value, the lower digits of the base value calculated by the processing means are rounded off. This is because the displayed base value may not change if it is displayed (by rounding, rounding up, rounding down, etc.), and processing that does not contribute to the change in display may be omitted.

  Further, although the case where the number of winning balls is the maximum and the case where the number is the minimum is described, the intermediate number of winning balls between the maximum and the minimum may not be used for the calculation of the base value. In this case, since the maximum and minimum prize balls are used to calculate the base value, the maximum and minimum prizes are averaged to indicate the number of prize balls and out balls that represent the operation of the entire pachinko machine. A base value can be indicated.

  In addition, although demonstrated with the pattern of 3 types of prize balls, it is not restricted to 3 types, The pattern of the number of other types of prize balls, such as 5 types and 7 types, may be sufficient.

  In addition, if a prize of the number of award balls of a specific type (one minimum value, three intermediate values, five maximum values, etc.) is not used for calculating the base value, All winnings in the gaming state when detected may not be used for calculating the base value. For example, if a winning at a winning opening that gives five prize balls is not used for calculation of the base value, in the gaming state in which a winning at the winning opening is detected, the winning until the end of the gaming state. Don't use winning mouths or other winning mouths to calculate base values. In addition, after the start of the gaming state, winnings to the winning award and other winning awards are not used retroactively for calculating the base value.

  Also, the winning when the gaming state when the winning is detected again does not have to be used for calculating the base value, and the gaming state when the winning is detected transitions to another gaming state. Up to winnings may not be used to calculate the base value. This is because the pachinko machine is normal (for example, whether it is in accordance with the set play rate) by not using the number of prize balls and out balls in the gaming state where the change of the calculated base value is large in the calculation of the base value. This is to eliminate the possibility of delaying the determination.

  In addition, when the number of winning balls changes depending on the gaming state, the winning ball that is maximum (or minimum or intermediate) for one winning ball may not be used for calculating the base value.

  Next, specific processing in which the number of winning balls and the number of out balls are not used for calculating the base value according to the number of game media (principal balls) described above will be described.

  In the switch input process (step S74), when a detection signal from each winning opening sensor is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 may determine whether to use the winning for calculation of the base value. . For winnings that are determined not to be used for calculating the base value, the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls for calculating the base value are not updated, or the calculation process of the base value is not executed. To do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls to calculate the base. In the process 2 (step S98), the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value may be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Further, when all the detected winnings are not used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation process 1 (step S97) and the base calculation process 2 (step S98) in FIG. 75 may not be executed.

  In the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 80, in the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In this case, it is preferable that the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Further, when all the detected winnings are not used for calculation of the base value, the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the base calculation process 4 (step S94) and the base display process (step S95) in FIG. 80 are not executed. May be.

  As a method of excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used for the calculation of the base value from the number of out balls, the same method as the correction of out balls due to abnormal winning described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74 may be adopted.

  In this case, since it is determined from the number of winning balls whether the detected winning is used for calculating the base value, the base calculating process 1 (step S97), the base calculating process 2 (step S98), and the base calculating process 3 ( In step S93) and the base calculation process 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether or not a special prize is in progress.

  In this way, by excluding the number of out balls and the number of winning balls for a predetermined prize from the calculation of the base value, the process is executed without skipping, so it is easy to determine whether the process is being executed accurately, particularly in the development stage. Can be confirmed. Also, by not performing the process of calculating the base value and not updating the base value, the process of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and other processes (such as a lottery process and a process for determining a variation pattern) are performed accurately. it can.

  In other words, even if there are multiple prizes with different degrees of advantage, even if the maximum prize is given to the player, it is not used for the calculation of the base value, and the base value is displayed without change by the grant of the prize. The Furthermore, the calculated base value is displayed without change until at least the gaming state to which the maximum prize is awarded is completed.

[9-12. Another configuration of gaming machine displaying base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically illustrating a control configuration of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 17, a board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is provided in the game board 5 as the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is the main body frame. 4 is provided. Either one of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both may be provided.

  As described above, the board-side discharged ball sensor 3060A is an out-port passing ball sensor 1021 that detects a game ball passing through the out port 1111 provided in the lower portion of the gaming area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the board-side discharged ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG. In this case, the number of game balls detected by the out port passing ball sensor 1021, the number of game balls detected by the start port sensors 2104 and 2551, and the number of game balls detected by the various winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, and 2557 The total with the number is the number of out balls.

  As described above, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game ball that has flowed out of the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and a connector connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5.

  When both the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B are provided, the count result of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the count result of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B are compared, and two count results are obtained. An error may be notified when a difference greater than a predetermined value occurs. In addition, an error may be notified when a difference greater than or equal to a predetermined value occurs between two count results within a predetermined time.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an essential configuration, and the display content (provisional section display and confirmed section display) of the base display 1317 is switched at predetermined time intervals as will be described later ( The base value may be displayed or the display content may be switched by operating the display switch 1318).

  The configuration other than that described above is the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

  88 and 89 are diagrams showing the arrangement of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B.

  FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls are aligned in a single row in the ball flow path 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board, and the number of out balls is counted by one frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B. . A game ball that rolls in the game area 5 a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 through the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, the big winning port 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that causes the discharged game balls to flow down to the right in front view and to be aligned in a single line. The frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls aligned in one row.

  FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls arranged in a ball flow path 960 provided on the back surface of the game board are caused to flow down by two lanes and counted by a plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. The game balls that roll in the game area 5a flow into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, the starting ports 2002 and 2004, and the big winning ports 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that causes the discharged game balls to flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and to be aligned in two. Each of the two provided frame-side discharge ball sensors 3060B counts the game balls arranged in each line.

  The frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the position shown in FIGS. 53, 88, and 89. However, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be configured so as to be detachable from the main body frame 4 together with the ball channel 960. Further, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4.

  FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a connection example between the discharge ball sensor and the main control board.

  The output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected to the connector 13101 provided on the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the output signal of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control MPU 1311. An output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected to a connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and an output signal of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU 1311.

  The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected may be provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected is the main control board 1310. It is good to be provided on the lower side.

  The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected are provided separately, but as shown by the broken line, the board side discharge ball sensor The output line of 3060A and the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

  Note that the output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without going through the relay board. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame side ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or the relay board, it connects to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) that connects the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. May be.

  Further, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030. The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311 as will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and particularly shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensors 1030 provided on the game board 5.

  The magnetic detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and is in the vicinity of the sensors that detect winnings at various winning openings 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006 (the positions of the stars in the figure). Provided. The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a broken line on the game board 5 and is partially overlapped.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided near the out port 1111. This is to prevent calculation of an incorrect base value. That is, when the player moves the discharge ball sensor 3060 by moving the magnet close to the out port 1111, the number of out balls is counted more than actual and the base value decreases. For this reason, in the amusement store, maintenance work of the pachinko machine 1 may be performed so as to return the base value to a predetermined standard value. In pachinko machines that have undergone maintenance work based on a different base value, the number of balls in the normal state increases, so that the player can play in a more advantageous state than usual and obtain many balls. In order to calculate an accurate base value and thus prevent an illegal ball from being paid out, a magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111. It should be noted that the magnetic detection sensor 1030 may be provided at a place where the discharge ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism other than in the vicinity of the out port 1111.

  The magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 preferably has a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030 as illustrated. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when the out sphere is detected by the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060, the magnetism is detected in a sufficient range that can cover the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. In addition, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out port 1111 may include other winning ports (for example, the big winning port 2005 provided above the out port 1111).

  FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control input circuit 1315. The main control input circuit 1315 includes a discharge ball sensor 3060 and a winning port sensor (general winning port sensor 3015, first starting port sensor 2104, second starting port sensor 2551, first large winning port sensor 2114, second upper large winning port. Sensor 2554, second lower grand prize opening sensor 2557, etc.) and magnetic detection sensor 1030 are received and input to the main control MPU 1311.

  The main control input circuit 1315 includes an interface circuit 1331 and a buffer circuit 1332. The interface circuit 1331 performs level conversion and shaping (for example, chattering removal) on signals input from various sensors and outputs the signals. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at a timing instructed from the main control MPU 1311.

  Specifically, an output signal from each sensor is input to any one of terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, and a signal subjected to level conversion and shaping by the interface circuit 1331 is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, and is buffered. The signal is input to any one of terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. As a result, detection results from the sensors are taken into the main control MPU 1311.

  The interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The abnormality detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the inputs of the terminals A1 to A8, and the input signal to each terminal is at a level lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 4V) or a predetermined threshold (for example, power supply voltage − When the level is higher than 0.1 V), the disconnection of the connection line to the switch or the short circuit of the switch is detected, and if the input of any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold, the abnormal signal E Are output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, regardless of the input signals at the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS. When the power supply voltage is lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 12V-20%) and a power supply abnormality is detected, an abnormality signal E is output. At the same time, regardless of the input signals at the A1 to A8 terminals, a signal of a level at which each sensor is OFF is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals. That is, even if an ON level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit corresponding to the input is OFF level. For this reason, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine that the signal output from the sensor is valid (the output of the sensor is invalidated). As a result, the main control MPU 1311 does not need to determine whether or not to execute the processing of the input signal depending on whether or not the power source of the switch has been reduced, thereby reducing the processing load and outputting the output signals Y1 to Y8. Regardless of the state of the input signals A1 to A8, a signal at a level at which each sensor is turned off can be output.

  As will be described later, when detecting an abnormal signal, the main control MPU 1311 does not calculate a base value (see FIG. 105). The interface circuit 1331 receives signals from the sensors used for calculating the base value (the number of discharged balls and prize balls) and signals from the sensors not used for calculating the base value (such as the gate sensor 2547). . The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. For this reason, even if an abnormality is detected in a sensor unrelated to the base calculation, the base calculation is not executed and the display content of the base display 1317 is maintained and does not change.

  That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signal from the sensor used for calculation of the base value and the signal from the sensor not used for calculation of the base value, and when any of the signals becomes abnormal, An abnormal signal is output to stop the base calculation.

  93, 94, and 95 are diagrams showing examples of mounting the main control board 1310. FIG. FIG. 93A illustrates an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93B illustrates that the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 have one. An example in which the driver circuit 1334 is connected is shown. FIG. 94 shows an arrangement on the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317 and the main control board 1310. 95A is a front view of main control board 1310 accommodated in main control board box 1320, FIG. 95B is a bottom view, and FIG. 95C is a right side view.

  As shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

  In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333. Then, display data is output from the different driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

  In the example shown in FIG. 93B, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into one latch circuit 1333. Then, display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

  93A and 93B, the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and the clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. The signal lines for outputting display data of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 from the main control MPU 1311 and the signal lines for the reset signal and the clock signal may be arranged so as not to intersect.

  The connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected, and is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310. The connector 13101 is connected not only to the output line from the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A, but also to other winning hole sensors 3015 and 2104 and the output line from the magnetic detection sensor 1030. The connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected, and is preferably provided below the main control board 1310. A signal from the discharge ball sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and the buffer circuit 1332.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an arrangement on the main control board 1310 of components arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the printed circuit board constituting the main control board 1310 from the back side. The solid line is the pattern on the back side, the broken line is the pattern on the component side, and the dotted line is the component mounted on the component side of the printed board. Indicates. Illustration of the ground pattern and the power supply pattern is omitted.

  The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333), and the segment on the cathode side of each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 2 (1334). Connected to the terminal.

  Further, a part of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 is input to the latch 1 (1333), and each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 1 (1334). To the common terminal on the anode side.

  The main control MPU 1311 outputs a chip select signal for controlling the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) receives the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311. Thus, data for controlling the blinking of each segment is fetched from the data lines (D1 to D8). The latch circuit 1 (1333) fetches data for controlling blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

  The main control MPU 1311 receives a reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336. The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333. The latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data by the reset signal.

  The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the signal lines for the reset signal and the clock signal are arranged so as not to intersect. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to intersect the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal.

  This is because, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base display 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting, so that a pulse signal is transmitted on the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317, and the main control MPU 1311 In the data line to the base display 1317, the level frequently changes. In particular, a large current necessary for driving the LED element flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317. For this reason, the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (particularly between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) becomes a cause of noise. When the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 intersects with the signal line of the reset signal or clock signal, noise appears on the signal line of the reset signal or clock signal, and the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions. there's a possibility that. The intersection of the signal lines can also occur at the intersection of the wiring patterns on the front surface and the back surface of the printed circuit board or between the wiring patterns of the inner layer and the surface layer (front surface, back surface).

  Specifically, when a reset signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that cannot originally occur, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset during the game, and the game may be stopped or the game state may be erased. . Note that if the gaming state is erased at a timing that cannot originally occur, the normal power-off process is reset without being executed, so the data stored in the RAM 1312 is cleared and the big hit ends or the fluctuation display The game ends in the middle, or the special symbol variation display game or the normal symbol variation display game hold is deleted.

  The main control board box 1320 is partially low and the other parts are high depending on the height of components attached to the main control board 1310 and interference with other members when assembled. It has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 95, the height of the main control MPU 1311 is high, so that the location where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted is high in the main control board box 1320, and the location where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the left region, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and components such as electrolytic capacitors that are relatively tall are mounted. On the other hand, in the area on the right side of the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low, and components such as a short IC are mounted (a tall component cannot be placed). In addition, the area | region which can mount components with the high height of the main control board box 1320 is shown by hatching. In the region where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed to have a height equal to or less than the surface (desirably the same height as the board surface) to which the mating connector is inserted and removed. It is preferable that the cable (connector) connected to the substrate is not hindered.

  In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 in accordance with the height of the parts mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress the undue action of attaching unauthorized parts (circuits) on the main control board. it can.

  In FIG. 95, the base indicator 1317 is arranged at the upper right part of the main control board 1310. However, even if the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for the sake of maintenance, the player cannot easily view the display contents at a position where it is difficult to see. A display 1317 may be provided. For example, when the player can visually check the display content of the base display 1317 when the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance during maintenance (checks whether there is a game ball in the replenishment tank) Since the player often does not correctly understand how to read the display on the base display 1317, the player may be required to explain the display content of the base display 1317. In order to prevent such complications In addition, the base display 1317 may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display contents. Further, when the base display 1317 is arranged in this way, inquiries from the player can be suppressed. That is, the base indicator 1317 displays a base value for 52,000 out-balls at the maximum, but it is different from the base value in the short-time game by the player, so that there is a complaint about the pitch rate. There is. When the base display 1317 is arranged in this way, it is possible to suppress complaints from players. The above is the same for the above-described accessory ratio display 1317, and the accessory ratio display 1317 may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display content.

  As shown in the figure, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317 has a low height, so that the main control board box 1320 is mounted in a low height region.

  FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I / O port 1314. In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base indicator 1317 are configured by light emitting diodes (LEDs) will be described, but they may be configured by lamps (light bulbs) or other light emitting elements. The main control I / O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. To do.

  As described above, the main control I / O port 1314 includes the latch circuit 1333 and the driver circuit 1334.

  The latch circuit 1333 captures the input data at the timing of the clock signal, and holds and outputs the data until the next clock signal or clear signal is input. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistor according to the input signal, and outputs the power supply voltage (+12 V) input to the VCC terminal of the driver circuit 1334, respectively.

  Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 takes in the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK and outputs the bus data to the driver circuit 1334 from the Q1 to Q8 terminals, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors in accordance with the signals input to the I1 to I8 terminals, and changes the voltages at the O1 to O8 terminals, respectively. Outputs O <b> 1 to O <b> 8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LED constituting the base display 1317 and the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400.

  For example, the driver 2 (1334) uses the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of CS1 to light the 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the first digit of the base display 1317. Output as segment data (LOW when lit). Further, the drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken in the latch 1 (1333) as common data (high during driving) at the rise timing of CS0. Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from the driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (7seg1) in the first digit of the base display 1317 is displayed. Driven.

  In addition, in order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 fetched into the latch 3 (1333) at the rising timing of CS2 are converted into the segment data (LOW when the light is turned on). ). The drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS3, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken in the latch 4 (1333) as common data (high during driving). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is the anode common type in both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, a current from the driver 1 to the driver 2 flows through the 7-segment LED. Therefore, the outputs of the drivers 1 and 4 when the segment is turned on are VCC (+12 V), and the outputs of the drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0 V).

  The latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus as they are to the terminals Q1 to Q8, but the latches 1 and 4 (1333) have a decoder function and are data buses. A signal may be output from any terminal of Q1 to Q8 in accordance with the binary data acquired from the above.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 93A and FIG. 96, signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

  The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt process. The segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt process. That is, since the common data and the segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 through different signal lines, both the display data on the base display 1317 and the display data on the function display unit 1400 are Output in one timer interrupt process.

  Then, in the next timer interrupt processing, common data for selecting the next digit (LED group) is output, and segment data for controlling the lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of the common data.

  The display data on the base display 1317 and the display data on the function display unit 1400 are generated by another process in the timer interrupt process and are output at another timing in the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation / display code 13135 outside the game control area, thereby generating and outputting display data to the base display 1317. On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 executes the game control code 13131 in the game control area, display data to the function display unit 1400 is generated and output. These data are generated by another program (code) and output at different timings.

  Next, a modified example of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

  The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt process. Similarly, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the base display 1317 may be executed at a timing different from the timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and may be subsequently executed.

  The process of outputting signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed according to programs (game control code 13131 and base calculation / display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312. Control data common to the two codes may be used so that the common signal transmission timing does not overlap so that the common signal is not transmitted at the timing. For example, a common counter commonly used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135 is provided. For example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400, and the common counter Is controlled to output a common signal to the base display 1317.

  The process for outputting the common signal and the process for outputting the segment signal may be configured separately or in one subroutine. A game control code 13131 for executing processing for outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and a base calculation / display code 13135 for executing processing for outputting data to be sent to the base indicator 1317 The subroutine may be called at a timing determined by the program, and a signal may be output to the function display unit 1400 or the base display 1317. In this case, the output of data sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of data sent to the base display 1317 are not performed in the same timer interrupt process. The game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135 are executed in one timer interrupt process, but the subroutine is called in a different timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIGS. 93A and 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, a display (function display unit 1400) provided outside the main control board 1310. Even if noise is mixed, the influence on the display (base display 1317) inside the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I / O port 1314. As shown in FIG. 93B, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. FIG. The main control I / O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. To do.

  As described above, the main control I / O port 1314 includes the latch circuit 1333 and the driver circuit 1334. Since the configuration of the circuit included in the main control I / O port 1314 is the same as the above-described circuit configuration, differences from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be described below.

  In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for turning on the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 96, but the common signal of the function display unit 1400 is the same as that of the base display 1317. It is common.

  In order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the driver 3 (1334) converts the bus data D1 to D8 taken into the latch 3 (1333) at the rise timing of CS2 as segment data (LOW when lit). Output. The drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken in the latch 1 (1333) as common data (high during driving) at the rise timing of CS0.

  In this way, by making the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 share a driver circuit, the circuit scale can be reduced. By reducing the number of parts, the failure rate can be reduced, the board size can be reduced, and the board unit (including the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320) can be easily downsized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (a printed board having three or more layers) but uses a two-layer board having a pattern only on the front surface and the back surface. For this reason, even if the components can be physically arranged on the main control board 1310 constituted by the two-layer board, an area for routing the wiring pattern cannot be secured, and the board does not have to be larger than the multilayer board having three or more layers. Therefore, downsizing by reducing the number of parts is important.

  FIG. 98 is a timing chart in the configuration example of the main control I / O port 1314 shown in FIG. In FIG. 98, a dotted line perpendicular to the time axis indicates a timer interrupt process delimiter (timer interrupt process start timing).

  In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. Latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 fetches D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS0, and driver 1 (1334) reads common data corresponding to the digit designated by D1 to D4 (during driving). Output HIGH).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment that is lit in the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. The latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 fetches D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS2, and the driver 3 (1334) receives the segment data designated by D1 to D8 (LOW when lit). The 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is turned on.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment that is lit by the base display 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS1. Latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 fetches D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rise timing of CS1, and driver 2 (1334) receives the segment data indicated by D1 to D8 (LOW when lit). The 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is turned on.

  Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1, and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in the latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in the latches 2 and 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

  In the next timer interrupt processing, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, repeats the above-described processing, and outputs the digit selection data and the display data. In this way, the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 share the common driver circuit, and output the segment data in a time-sharing manner, using the common common data and the functions of the base display 1317. The LED element with the display unit 1400 can be turned on.

  93 (B) and 97, since the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334, the circuit scale of the main control board 1310 can be reduced and high-density mounting (for example, In addition, it is possible to easily mount components on the main control board 1310 in which the use of a multilayer board or the proximity of components) is impossible.

  Further, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base indicator 1317 with common common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base indicator are output during the common data output period. The segment data is output at a timing different from 1317. For this reason, both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be displayed and controlled within one timer interrupt process while both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are controlled by a common common data line. .

  In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of the chip select (CS2, CS1) and erased at the rising timing of the chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erase data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, when the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is the display time of the base display 1317. It will be longer. This is because the lighting time in one cycle of the LED of the function display unit 1400 arranged on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is lengthened and the luminance is increased, thereby reducing the visibility due to being directly illuminated by the illumination of the hall. This is to prevent it. In addition, since the base display 1317 is arranged on the back side darker than the front side of the pachinko machine 1, even if the LED emits light with low luminance, the influence on the visibility of the base display 1317 is small. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first LED and the second LED controlled by the main control MPU 1311 are provided, and the light emission luminance of the first LED is higher than the light emission luminance of the second LED.

  Contrary to the above, the display data of the base display 1317 is output first, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output later, and the display time of the base display 1317 is displayed on the display of the function display unit 1400. It may be longer than time.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating a change in a state (section) related to the calculation of the base value.

  On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the temporary section display and the fixed section display are switched and displayed at a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) interval. In the provisional section display, the base value of the section being measured is displayed. Specifically, “bA.” Is displayed in the upper two digits to indicate that the base value A is displayed, and the base value A being measured is displayed in the lower two digits as a percentage of two digits. When the integer part of the base value A is 99, “99” is displayed, when it is 100 or more, “99.” is displayed, and when it is 0, “00” is displayed. For this reason, even if the number of digits displayed on the base indicator 1317 is two digits, it can be displayed so that the base value A is 0% or 100%.

  In the provisional section display, if the number of low-probability / non-short-time out balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the first two digits (or all four digits) are displayed blinking (for example, a period of 0.6 seconds) Thus, 0.3 second lighting and 0.3 second lighting are repeated), indicating that an accurate base value has not been measured. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability / non-short-time out balls is a predetermined number (for example, 6000) or more, the first two digits are lit to indicate that an accurate base value can be measured.

  In the fixed section display, the base value of the previous section is displayed. Specifically, “bb.” Is displayed in the upper two digits to indicate that the base value B is displayed, and the lower two digits indicate the base value of the previous section (the lower part of the previous period). The base value B), which is the final value of 2 digits, is lit and displayed as a percentage of 2 digits. When the integer part of the base value B is 99, “99” is displayed, when it is 100 or more, “99.” is displayed, and when it is 0, “00” is displayed. For this reason, even if the number of digits displayed on the base indicator 1317 is two digits, it can be displayed so that the base value B is 0% or 100%.

  Note that in the first interval, the base value is not measured because the immediately preceding interval is a test interval. For this reason, in the confirmed section display, “bb.” Blinks in the upper two digits and “-” blinks in the lower two digits.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 256 balls) whose number of out balls is less than 500 from the first power-on is set as a test section and a base value is not calculated. This is because in a predetermined number of launches from the first power-on of the pachinko machine 1, the ball may vary within the probability distribution range, the base value is not stable, and a meaningful base value cannot be measured. . For this reason, in the test section, the base value is not displayed on the base indicator 1317 and the base value is indefinite. Specifically, in the provisional section display, “bA.” Is displayed in the upper two digits, “-” is displayed in the lower one digit, and “bb.” Is displayed in the upper two digits in the confirmed section display. , “-” Is displayed in the last digit. In the test section, the total number of digits on the base indicator 1317 is flashed to indicate that an accurate base value has not been measured. Note that the base value may be determined indefinitely without calculating the base value in the test section and displaying the calculated base value on the base display 1317.

  Here, when the power is turned on for the first time, the power is turned on for the first time after the pachinko machine 1 is completed, or the base calculation work area is initialized (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108). State. In addition, the power-on time generally used in the present specification is a power-on time other than the initial power-on time.

  Further, all the LEDs of all the digits of the base display 1317 may blink at a predetermined time after the power is turned on, or at a predetermined time after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting key 971 is turned off). .

  In the inspection of data in the base calculation area 13128 described later, when an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is deleted, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test interval.

  In each section other than the test section, when the total number of outballs in all game states (during jackpot, normal game, short time, non-short time, high probability, low probability, etc.) reaches 52,000, the next section To measure the base value anew. Note that the number of out balls in one section is not 52,000, but may be any other number as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the daily operating time of the pachinko machine 1 is 10 hours, 60,000 daily operating (number of out balls) may be adopted as the number of out balls in one section. You may employ | adopt 50000 pieces and 100,000 pieces which are good numbers.

  In addition, you may make it the structure which can change the number of out balls of 1 area suitably. For example, a setting switch (DIP switch, rotary switch, or the like) may be provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out balls in one section may be set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 or another board connected to the main control board 1310. Further, when the setting of the switch is changed, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) of the RAM 1312 is initialized and the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section, or the current section is restarted from the beginning. Good. Since the pachinko machine is frequently operated immediately after being introduced as a new machine, the number of out balls in one section is set to a large number, and the number of out balls in one section is set to a small number when the business period elapses. That is, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has setting means capable of setting an operation for determining the length of a section serving as a unit for calculating the base value, and is based on the operation set by the setting means when the power is turned on for the first time. The length of one section is set.

  In addition, although the example which displays the area immediately before the temporary area currently measured is demonstrated as a fixed area display, the base value of several fixed areas (for example, the area before 1 to 3 sections) is switched and displayed. May be. At this time, even if the display is switched to the provisional section → the determination section 1 → the determination section 2 → the determination section 3 every predetermined time, the provisional section → the determination section 1 → the determination section 2 → The fixed section 3 may be switched and displayed.

  In this case, the first two digits of the base indicator 1317 in the fixed section display are not “bb.”, But “b1”, “b2”, “b3”, etc. A different display is recommended.

  In this way, the base display 1317 displays the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of one or more immediately preceding sections by switching at predetermined intervals. In addition, a display capable of distinguishing display contents is performed on a part of the base display 1317, and the measured base value is displayed on the other part.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317.

  As described above, the base display 1317 is configured by a 7-segment LED of a plurality of digits (for example, 4 digits), and displays numbers and characters by lighting or blinking the segments of each digit. Numbers 0 to 9 can be displayed, and letters A, b, c, d, E, F, L, and-can be displayed as characters. In addition, the decimal point can be displayed simultaneously with numbers and letters. The case where the number 6 is displayed simultaneously with the decimal point and the case where the number 9 is displayed are illustrated.

  101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of the initialization process of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the initialization process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the check code calculation process (step S50) and the check code storage process (step S52) are deleted as compared with the initialization process described above with reference to FIGS. For this reason, calculation of the check code for the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. The same steps as those in the initialization process described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and enables the writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates a built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and checks whether a predetermined wait time (a time necessary for the activation of the sub board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is deleted (step S30), and step S24 is performed. Proceed to On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the internal RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20).

  As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area (except for the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). The process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power shutdown and the step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

  As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. The area other than the base calculation area 13128 is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 is executed. Proceed to

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), the power failure flag abnormality in which the power failure flag is not set (step S20), The RAM check sum does not match (step S22), and the base calculation work error (step S24). Among these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected at power-on, or when the power failure flag abnormality or RAM abnormality occurs, the game control area 13126 (the game work area and the game stack area are set). The base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. In the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

  Unlike the illustrated case, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 are not guaranteed. May be cleared. If the entire RAM area is cleared when the base calculation work is abnormal, the data indicating the gaming state is lost and the normal calculation cannot be executed, and the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area It is better to initialize only. If the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is You don't have to clear it.

  When providing one or a plurality of backup areas in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using the check code, and if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 , N in order, and the data in the backup area that is initially determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Thereafter, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is erased under different conditions for each data type (the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128). To do. That is, by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 is erased, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased. If the base calculation area 13128 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be deleted at an arbitrary timing. For this reason, the backed-up base calculation area 13128 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the base calculation area 13128 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the game hall staff, and the abnormal base value is concealed. Can be prevented. For this reason, it is possible to reliably detect gaming machines that have been modified to have a high base value or a low base value.

  The main control MPU 1311 performs initial setting processing (step S28) for setting various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or RAM initialization processing is executed, and the peripheral control board. Command setting processing at power-on for transmission to 1510 (step S32) is executed, and execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S34). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal (step S36), and determines whether or not the power failure notice signal is ON (step S38). If the power failure notice signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is “No”), random number update processing is executed (step S40).

  On the other hand, when a power failure notice signal is detected (the result of step S38 is “Yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes a power-off process (power-off setting means). In the power-off process, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), the output port is cleared, and the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port is stopped (step S44). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46), and the checksum calculation result is checked in the RAM 1312. Store in the thumb area (step S48).

  Subsequently, the data in the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also copied. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, every time data is updated) in the base calculation process instead of the main board side power-off process. In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the base value in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the base and the calculated base value even when the power is turned off. The base value for long-term operation can be calculated.

  The check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. Further, in a modified example to be described later, it is calculated in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

  Further, a value indicating that the backup is normally performed is stored as a power failure flag in the backup flag area (step S56), and "01H" indicating write prohibition is output to the RAM protect register to prohibit writing to the RAM 1312 (step S56). S58) Wait until recovery from power failure (infinite loop).

  FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a base calculation area 13128 in which the accessory ratio calculation area illustrated in FIG. 26A is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

  The base calculation area 13128 includes a part of the RAM 1312 and is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game area) as described above.

  The base calculation area 13128 includes a storage area for a base value A, a base value B, a section counter, the total number of out balls, the number of low probabilities / non-time-short out balls, and the number of low probabilities / non-time-short prize balls.

  The storage area of the base value A is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value of the provisional section currently being measured. The storage area of the base value B is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value measured in the previous section of the provisional section. The storage area of the section counter is composed of 1 byte and stores a value indicating the section in which the current base value is being measured. The section counter is updated every time the section is switched, and is used to control display contents that differ depending on the section. The interval counter may be controlled so as not to be larger than any value of 0, 1, and 2, that is, 2. Specifically, the interval counter = 0 in the test interval, the interval counter = 1 in the first interval, and the interval counter = 2 in the second interval and thereafter. Further, the section counter may be controlled so as not to be greater than 255 as a value from 0 to 255, and section counter = 2 or more after the second section.

  The storage area for the total number of out balls is composed of 2 bytes, and stores all the number of out balls not depending on the gaming state (that is, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine). The total number of out balls is used to determine the switching of the interval which is the base measurement unit. In the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the base value in each section is measured with one day of operation as one section. For this reason, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area for the total number of out balls. As described above, the total number of out balls is a storage area for counting the number of all out balls not depending on the gaming state for each section, and the total number of out balls (the number of out balls in a special prize) in the above-described embodiment. The total value from the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1) is different.

  The low-probability / non-short-time outball storage area is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of outballs for calculating the base value (the number of outballs in the gaming state other than during the special prize) Store. The low-probability / non-short-time short-term prize ball storage area consists of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value (the number of game balls other than during the special prize) Store. Note that the storage area for the low probability / non-time-short out ball count and the storage area for the low probability / non-time short-number-out ball count need only be 2 bytes or more. Is preferable.

  The storage capacity (number of bytes) of each storage area described above is merely an example, and may be determined according to the number of out balls in one section.

  Further, when the main area and the backup area of the base calculation area 13128 are provided, a storage area having the same configuration is provided in the RAM 1312.

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is different from the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. 23 in that a base calculation process (step S801) is provided instead of the accessory ratio calculation area update process in step S81. The object ratio calculation / display process is deleted. The same steps as those of the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. 23 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the gaming value to an area corresponding to the current gaming state, and then adds a base calculation area 13128 ( 103) is updated, and a base value is calculated (step S801). Details of the base calculation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80). .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S86). Step S88), output data setting processing (Step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission processing (Step S92) are executed.

  Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process is completed, the timer interrupt process is terminated and the process before the interrupt is restored.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is measured by the timer interrupt process, so that the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

  105 and 106 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the base calculation process.

  The base calculation process (step S801) is called from the timer interrupt process and is executed by the main control MPU 1311.

  The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011). For example, as described above, a winning mouth sensor (general winning mouth sensor 3015, first starting mouth sensor 2104, second starting mouth sensor 2551, first big winning mouth sensor 2114, second upper big winning mouth sensor 2554, second If there is an abnormality in the lower prize winning sensor 2557 or the like) or the discharge ball sensor (board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A, frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B), the base value is accurately calculated based on the abnormality signal output from the interface circuit 1331. Judge that there is an error that cannot be done. Also, if it is determined that fraudulent activity is being performed (for example, the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, the vibration detection sensor detects vibration, or the radio wave detection sensor detects radio waves), the base value is accurate. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be calculated. When it is determined that there is this error, the display on the base display 1317 may be turned off. In step S8011, an error that accompanies a game stop (eg, magnetism, vibration, radio wave error, etc.) is determined to be an error (YES), and an error that does not accompany the game stop (eg, prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.). In addition, failures that are not directly related to the calculation (such as running out of supply, full tank error) may be determined as not errors (NO). That is, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process even if there are some abnormalities among a plurality of types of abnormal states and to perform the base calculation process if there are other abnormalities.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of out balls (step S8014). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the like. In the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal of the sensors, the number of out balls is out. Get the number of balls = 1. When out balls are detected by the plurality of discharged ball sensors 3060, a total value of the numbers detected by the sensors is acquired as the number of out balls. That is, a plurality of out balls may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of prize balls (step S8015). As described above, the number of prize balls is obtained based on the input information in the prize ball control process in step S80. The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent out payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives the reception confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951, and the number of prize balls (the number of payout prize balls) received from the payout control board 951 of the payout completion report may be used. This variation is as described with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not an out sphere is detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If the out ball is not detected, the process related to the out ball is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S8022. On the other hand, if an out ball has been detected, the number of out balls detected is added to the total number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 to determine whether it is currently a test section (step S8018). The test section is a section where the number of out balls is a predetermined value less than 500 from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (or initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is 0, which is an initial value. It has become. For this reason, if the section counter value is 0, it can be determined that it is a test section. If it is a test interval, there is no need to calculate a base value, and the process advances to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not the test section, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a special prize (step S8019). The determination of whether or not a special prize is being made can be made in the same manner as in step S810 in FIG. The game state is in a special prize. The big prize opening 2005, 2006 is open due to the big hit, and the player can acquire many prize balls, but it includes the opening and ending time of the big hit game. May be. When the big winning opening 2005, 2006 repeats opening and closing in one big hit, the time from closing of the big winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810 means that the condition device is in operation, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Moreover, all the times during the right-handed instruction may be included.

  Further, in the start ports 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include time reduction, probability change (during ST), and electric support. Furthermore, in game states other than time saving, during probable change (during ST), and during electric support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting port 2004 is closed (for example, until a ball won at the starting port is detected as an out ball) The required number of seconds may be included in the special prize. The so-called “latent gaming state” that is a high-probability gaming state but does not become short-lived (during electric support) is not included in the special prize, and in the gaming state as in the normal state (low probability / non-short-time state) The base value may be calculated using the number of winning balls or the number of out balls. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state, and the base value may be displayed so that it is possible to identify which base display is being performed.

  If the latent game state is a game state that does not allow the player to recognize that it is a high probability state even if it has a high probability, but if the latent game state is excluded from the calculation of the base value, the frame is released during business Further, the player may recognize that the player is in the latent gaming state (that is, high probability) by looking at the base display 1317. That is, when an employee in the hall cleans a ball at the winning opening or throws a ball into the out opening with the frame open, the player can know the gaming state depending on whether the base display changes. Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state.

  On the other hand, there is a case where management of the base value in the low probability / non-short-time state is necessary for the business of the hall, and if the base value is calculated including the latent game state, the management according to the business form of the hall may not be possible. . Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value excluding the latent gaming state. By calculating the base value separately for the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state, the same problem can be avoided. In other words, the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state are originally different gaming states, so depending on the business form of the hall, it may be desired to manage (inspect) the base value separately for each gaming state. .

  When calculating the base value separately for the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state, the base value is calculated using a common calculation process even if the base value is calculated using a dedicated calculation process for each gaming state. May be. By calculating the base value using a common calculation process, the processing load on the CPU can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

  The electric operating tool provided in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is classified into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, during the special prize relating to the big prize opening 2005, 2006 is operating the condition device (for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated based on the number of winning balls and out-balls other than during the special prize, a normal (so-called big hit) winning in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, in the start port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening / closing member, winning balls and winning balls other than during the special prize (when the probability is low or when the time is short) are used for calculating the base value. That is, some of the electrically-operated actors (large winning awards 2005 and 2006) use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls to calculate the base value regardless of the gaming state (whether or not a special prize is being awarded). The other bonuses (starting port 2004) are not used, and whether the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls are used for calculating the base value or not are switched according to the gaming state (whether or not a special prize is being given). It will be.

  In addition, the special winning opening 2005, 2006 may be opened (so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. Generally, a small hit occurs in a short time, and since it is less likely to win a game ball because it is opened for a short time, it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, it is also possible to generate a small hit other than during the special prize (normal time) and to release it for a time when the possibility that the game ball will win is high. In this case, the winning ball and the winning ball to the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 in the small hits other than during the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of small hits other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly cope with the standard of the base value, and to improve the degree of freedom of design.

  If the gaming state is a special prize, it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the low probability / non-short-time out ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in step S8014 should be used for the base calculation, so the low number of non-time-short out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 are detected. The number of out balls that have been added is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 when an out ball or a prize ball other than a special prize is detected every time the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is executed, and indicates the timing at which the base value should be calculated (steps S8026 to S8027). reference).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a prize ball is detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If no prize ball has been detected, the process related to the prize ball is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S8026. On the other hand, if a prize ball is detected, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a special prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether a special prize is being performed may be the same as in step S8019.

  If the gaming state is a special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the low probability / non-short-time prize ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in a special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 should be used for base calculation, so the number of low-probability / non-short-time prize balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 is detected. The number of awarded balls is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the update flag is 1 (step S8026). When the update flag is 1, an out ball or award ball other than the special prize is detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process). The base value is calculated by dividing by the number and stored in the storage area of the base value A in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter to determine whether it is in the test section (step S8028). If the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is a test section, it is determined whether it is time to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section where the number of out balls is a predetermined value less than 500 from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (including initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the section counter indicates the test section, If the total number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is time to end the test section.

  As a result, if it is not the timing to end the test interval, the base calculation area 13128 is not updated to continue the test interval, and the process proceeds to step S8034. On the other hand, if it is in the test period and the timing is to end the test period, the process proceeds to step S8032 in order to shift from the test period to the first period. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The section counter changes from 0 representing the test section to 1 representing the first section. Then, the total number of out balls, the low probability / non-time-short out ball number, and the low probability / non-time / short time-out ball number are initialized to 0 (step S8033). With this process, the test section is ended and the process proceeds to the first section.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8028 that the section counter value is not 0 and is not in the test section, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the total number of out balls is 52,000 or more (step S8030). If the total number of out balls is smaller than 52,000, the process proceeds to step S8034 to continue the current section.

  On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is 52,000 or more, the section is ended, and processing for starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area and writes it in the base value B storage area in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8031). Thereafter, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As described above, the interval counter is controlled so as not to be larger than either 0, 1, or 2, that is, 2, so that when the interval counter value is 2, 1 is added to the interval counter. The section counter value does not increase and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out balls, the low probability / non-time-short out ball number, and the low probability / non-time-short out-ball number are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process proceeds to the next section.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the update flag is 1 (step S8034). When the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch and display the provisional section display and the fixed section display described in FIG. 99 at a predetermined time interval (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time for switching between the provisional section display and the fixed section display is a period of blinking display (flashing display controlled in step S8051 in FIG. 107) when the number of low-probability / non-time-short out balls in each section is less than 6000. A sufficiently long time is recommended. This is because if blinking and display switching have the same period, blinking display (that is, low probability / non-short-time outball count is less than 6000) becomes difficult to understand. This is in order to make it easy to understand whether the change is made.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). The check code calculation method uses the same calculation method as the check code calculation processing in step S50 of the initialization process (FIG. 22). Further, when a fixed value is obtained without calculating the check code, it is preferable to use a multi-byte value in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value (for example, A55AH (1010010101011010B) if it is 2 bytes). ). Further, instead of setting fixed values in continuous areas, they may be arranged separately. For example, the first fixed value is stored at the top of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value is stored in the middle, and the third fixed value is stored at the end. When the check code is a fixed value, it may be configured with a larger number of bytes than the check data calculated by the checksum to improve the possibility of RAM abnormality determination.

  As described above, according to the base calculation process of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so that the base value is not delayed at every timing of winning balls or out balls ( (In real time) and can determine whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay. Since the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is a storage area used for base calculation, is extremely small compared to the capacity of the game control area 13126, a check code is given at the end of each execution of the base calculation process. Even if it is calculated, the influence on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311 is small.

  In addition, when the base value is calculated and displayed for the winning ball using the expected number of winning ball payouts based on the generated winning signal, the timing for calculating and displaying the base value and the timing for paying the winning ball Is different. In other words, an abnormality occurs in the payout device, and the prize ball is not paid out (replenishment of the payout device due to out of replenishment, the upper plate is full, the payout number sensor provided in the prize ball passage, the trouble of the payout motor, etc. The base value is calculated and displayed even if it is stopped).

  In the base calculation process described above, every time the base calculation process is called from the timer interrupt process, the base value is calculated using the number of out balls detected in the timer interrupt process and the calculated number of prize balls. The base value may be calculated every time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and every time various winning opening sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called a plurality of times, and the base value is calculated a plurality of times. In this way, it is possible to distinguish between the preceding and subsequent sections of the base value even when the above-described section switching (the number of out balls is 52,000) in one base calculation process. , Accurate base value can be displayed in real time.

  Further, as in steps S815 to S817 of the above-described base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and a prize ball abnormality notification is issued. May be stopped.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base display data generation process.

  The base display data generation process is called and executed from step S8035 of the base calculation process.

  The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt process described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, the time of 5 seconds has elapsed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, when the display switching counter reaches 2499, the display switching counter is initialized to 0. Therefore, the processing of steps S8042 to S8045 is executed while the display switching counter is between 0 and 1249, and the display switching counter is between 1250 and 2499. Performs the processing of steps S8046 to S8049. For this reason, in the base display data generation processing of the present embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every 5 seconds.

  If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying “bA.” In the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8042). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 to determine whether it is currently a test section (step S8043). Since the base value is not calculated in the test section, data for displaying “-” in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not the test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section is generated (step S8045).

  If it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is 1250 or more, data for displaying “bb.” In the first two digits of the base indicator 1317 is generated (step S8046). Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 to determine whether the current section is the test section or the first section (step S8047). In the test section or the first section, since the base value is not measured in the past determined section, data for displaying “-” in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the latest determined section is generated (step S8049).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the low probability / non-time-short out ball count stored in the base calculation area 13128 to determine whether the low probability / non-time-short out ball count is smaller than 6000 (step S8050). ). And if the low probability / non-short-time out ball number is smaller than 6000, the base value may not be stable because the number of workings (out ball number) after starting the measurement of the base value in the section is small, Control is performed so that the display on the base display 1317 blinks (step S8051). On the other hand, if the low probability / non-short-time out-ball number is 6000 or more, control is performed so that the display on the base indicator 1317 is lit without blinking (step S8052).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the display switching counter is not initialized and the process proceeds to step S8055. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is 2499 or more, since one repetition is completed, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

  Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are specified (step S8055).

  In this way, in the timer interrupt process (base calculation process) executed at predetermined time intervals, the display content on the base display 1317 is switched using the display switching counter that is periodically updated, so that the current state is displayed in the temporary section. The base value A being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the determined section can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, since the blinking display is performed in the range where the base value is not stable in each section, it can be easily confirmed by the display of the base display 1317 whether the base value is in the stable range or the unstable range.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the base calculation process. The modification shown in FIG. 108 is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105 except that a base calculation work check process (steps S8012, S8013) is added. In FIG. 108, the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) in the base calculation process will be described. However, the processes in steps S8028 to S8038 are the same as those in FIG.

  The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S8012). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

  When providing one or a plurality of backup areas in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using the check code, and if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 , N in order, and the data in the backup area that is initially determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Thereafter, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

  In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012). Conversely, the base calculation area After determining whether 13128 is normal (step S8012) and performing necessary processing based on the determination result, it may be determined whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

  Subsequent processing (steps S8014 and subsequent steps) is the same as that shown in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the base calculation process shown in FIG. 108, it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal every timer interrupt (that is, every 4 milliseconds). The display of a simple base value can be suppressed.

Next, an abnormality determination method for the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The value used for the calculation of the base value and the calculated base value are the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the “object ratio calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 26 is the “base calculation area 13128”. It is determined whether the data is normal at a predetermined timing. There are the following variations in which processing (timing) the normal / abnormal determination step and the check code calculation step are performed.
101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
FIG. 21 and FIG. 22: The check code calculated when the power is turned off is determined when the power is turned on (initialization process).
106 and 108: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(Check code is calculated for each timer interrupt, and judged at power-on)
First, a process for determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS.

  When the initialization process is as shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 and the base calculation process is as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the base calculation area 13128 is obtained in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 105 and 106). The check code (for example, checksum) is calculated from the data.

  In step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 101 and 102), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

  When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased, the state relating to the calculation of the base value is initialized, so the calculated base value is cleared and the calculation of the base value is started from the test period.

  When providing one or a plurality of backup areas in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using the check code, and if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 , N, and the data in the backup area 13128 may be restored by copying the data in the backup area first determined to be normal to the main area. Thereafter, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

  In this case, the frequency of check code determination is low, and the consumption of computing resources (main control MPU 1311) for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and judged when the power is turned on)
Next, a process for determining the check code calculated at the time of power-off when the power is turned on (initialization process) will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

  When the initialization process is as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 and the base calculation process is as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S50 of the power-off process of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), A check code (for example, checksum) is calculated from data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

  In step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), it is determined using the check code whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

  In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

  In this case, the frequency of check code calculation and determination is low, and the consumption of calculation resources (main control MPU 1311) for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Check code is calculated and determined by timer interrupt processing)
Next, a process for determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 108.

  If the base calculation process is as shown in FIGS. 108 and 106, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation area 13128 in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106).

  In step S8012 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), it is determined using the check code whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

  In this case, the initialization process is as shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the step of determining whether the base calculation work area in steps S24 and S26 is normal may be omitted.

  In this case, an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

  When a fixed value is used for the check code instead of the checksum, the check code setting and determination timing may be the same as the checksum calculation and determination timing. Further, determination may be made by using both a checksum and a fixed value as a check code.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating calculation of a base value when a gaming state is switched.

  One game ball won a prize while the starter 2004 (electric tulip) was opened, and then the predetermined number of fluctuation display games ended, the time-short state ended, and the normal state was restored. Thereafter, in the normal state, a case is assumed where a game ball wins the opening start opening 2004.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display according to the winning at the start port 2004. In other words, the variable display game in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to any winnings at the starting port 2004 shown in the drawing is performed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the out ball in the special award is not used for the base calculation, so the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is not added to the low probability / non-short-time out ball number, The second winning ball is added to the low probability and non-short-time out ball count.

  In the above description, the end of the short-time state has been described, but the same applies to the end of probability change by ST.

  The same phenomenon occurs when the special symbol variation display game is a big hit in addition to the above-mentioned short time end. In the normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins during opening of the start port 2004 (electric tulip), and then a big hit state starts, and further, a game ball wins in the open start port 2004.

  In this case as well, a variable display game in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to winning in any starting port 2004 is performed. On the other hand, since the out ball in the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is added to the low probability / non-short-time out ball number, but the second winning ball has a low probability.・ It is not added to the number of non-short-time out balls.

  Furthermore, the same phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. In a normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins during opening of the start port 2004 (electric tulip), a specific error occurs after that, and a game ball wins in the open start port 2004. . As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error in which the base value cannot be accurately calculated based on the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), Do not use sphere for base calculation.

  In this case as well, a variable display game in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to winning in any starting port 2004 is performed. On the other hand, since the out ball in which a specific error has occurred is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is added to the low probability / non-short-time out ball number. Is not added to the low probability / non-short-time outball count.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of game balls won during the operation of the electric accessory under specific conditions (when the time is finished, when a special symbol variation display game is hit or when a specific error occurs). The base figure may be used for calculating the base value or may not be used for the base calculation, and the special figure can be changed in any winning.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with regard to the pre-reading effect of the special symbol variation display game that is on hold, the first winning that is won in the short time state to the start opening 2004 is not the target of the pre-reading effect, but in the normal state. The second winning prize may be a target of a pre-reading effect. On the other hand, the first prize that is won in the short time state at the start port 2004 may be a target of the pre-reading effect, and the second prize that is won in the normal state may not be the target of the pre-reading effect.

  The timing for changing from the short-time state to the normal state has been described, but the same applies to the timing for changing from the probability change state (ST) or the electric support state to the normal state.

[10. Memory switching in processing outside the game control area]
Next, switching of the memory used by the CPU in processing outside the game control area (for example, base calculation processing) will be described.

  FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating a configuration relating to a storage area in the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311.

  The main control MPU 1311 is configured as shown in FIG. 18 as a whole, but FIG. 110 shows the configuration related to the storage area in detail.

  In the main control MPU 1311, a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, and an in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 are provided as storage areas for storing data. The CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 temporarily temporarily stores data when the CPU 13111 executes a program (for example, a flag indicating a state of an operation result, a program execution state, data input to and output from the CPU 13111, and the like). The auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU temporarily stores, for example, a random value updated in the random number update process (step S40 in FIG. 22) or an intermediate value in the random value update calculation. Further, the address of the subroutine to be executed and the jump destination address are temporarily stored in the CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 so that the processor core 13141 executes processing corresponding to the stored address. Further, values input to the ports from various switches connected to the main control board 1310 (for example, values in the middle of creating edge information of signals input from the switches and detection results of edge information) are temporarily stored. To store.

  In addition, when a random number is acquired and stored in the reserved storage area when winning the start opening prize, the random number value is temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the temporarily stored random number value is stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 1312. To remember. In addition, when acquiring a random number at the time of winning the start opening and making a pre-reading determination (winning determination at the time of starting opening winning) based on the value of the random number, the random storage temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU The prefetch determination may be performed based on the numerical value, or the random number value stored in the reserved storage area may be read (re-) to any storage area of the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU and the prefetch determination may be performed.

  The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 is provided separately from the memory space configured by the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313 and designated by an address, and is specified by the name of each storage area included in the in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 (for example, Area0). . The CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 includes a switching unit 13143, a switching register 13144, and a plurality of auxiliary storage regions 13145A to 13145C.

  The auxiliary storage areas 13145A to C are configured by a plurality of storage areas (Area 0 to 6) having a predetermined number of bits (for example, 1 byte or 2 bytes), and a group is provided for each predetermined number (seven in the figure) of storage areas. It is configured, and access from the processor core 13141 becomes possible for each group. That is, when the auxiliary storage area 13145A is selected, the processor core 13141 can access only the auxiliary storage area 13145A, and cannot access the other auxiliary storage areas 13145B and C.

  As described later, the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be selected by switching a plurality of storage areas for each group at a time with one CHANGE instruction. For example, the instruction CHANGE 0 selects the auxiliary storage area 13145A of the group 0, and the auxiliary storage area accessible to the processor core 13141 is switched to the group 0.

  The auxiliary storage area 13145 is composed of three groups in the illustrated example, but may be any number as long as it is two or more. That is, at least two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided with the same configuration.

  The storage area (Area 0 to 5) of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is a storage area provided separately from the RAM 1312 for temporarily storing data at the time of program execution, and even one (1 byte = 8 bits) can be used. Even if a plurality of sets are set (for example, 2 bytes = 16 bits in which Area0 and Area1 are paired) can be used. For this reason, 8-bit data and 16-bit data can be stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 without generating an excessive capacity in the storage area. The storage area (Area 6) is set as a storage area used with a capacity that is an integral multiple (for example, 2 bytes) of other storage areas, and cannot be divided into 1-byte storage areas. As described above, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is configured by a plurality of storage areas, and a storage area that can be used in any combination is provided. Therefore, the storage areas are selectively used according to the use in the arithmetic processing (for example, the data length). be able to. For example, when the address space is represented by 16 bits, the address can be specified by one (or a set of combined) storage areas. For this reason, the number of arguments of the instruction can be reduced, and the instruction can be executed with a small number of clocks.

  The switching unit 13143 switches a group of storage areas that can be accessed by the processor core 13141 according to the value stored in the switching register 13144.

  The switching register 13144 is a storage area for storing data for determining an accessible auxiliary storage area 13145, and is an area that can be accessed by the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. The switching register 13144 includes, for example, data for identifying the selected auxiliary storage area 13145 (for example, 2-bit data for switching the four areas), and an abnormal flag indicating that switching has not been performed normally. (When the abnormality flag is set, the switching instruction is executed again), and an unauthorized access flag that is set when an abnormality occurs in which the value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 that has not been selected changes is stored. Good.

  Further, the switching register 13144 may store a flag (for example, a carry flag, a parity / overflow flag, a zero flag, a sign flag, etc.) indicating the state of the operation result.

  In addition to the switching register 13144, a storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 without depending on the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be provided. For example, a program counter indicating the address at which the program is being executed and a stack pointer indicating the top address of the stack area provided in the RAM 1312 may be provided.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program for the timer interrupt process and the base calculation process, and shows a specific example of a part that calls the base calculation process from the timer interrupt process and returns from the base calculation process.

  In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but interrupt is prohibited by the DI instruction before the process proceeds to the base calculation process. The base calculation process can be performed without interrupting the process from the DI instruction to the EI instruction due to an interrupt.

  Thereafter, the PUSH instruction saves the data in the switching register 13144 to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113). Thereafter, the program is executed from the start address xxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

  In the base calculation process, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is used in the callee base calculation process from the group 0 used in the caller timer interrupt process by the CHANGE instruction before starting the processes shown in FIGS. Switch to group 1. As described above, a plurality of storage areas can be switched for each group by one CHANGE instruction, and a plurality of storage areas can be switched at once by one instruction (that is, a small number of steps).

  Further, the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt process is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzz) in the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction, and the stack pointer value is saved. After that, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer by the LD instruction to change the stack area.

  After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 of FIG. 105 or FIG. After the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzz in the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction. After that, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched from the group 1 used in the callee base calculation process to the group 0 used in the caller timer interrupt process by the CHANGE instruction, and then changed to the caller timer interrupt process by the RET instruction. Return. In general, an instruction to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 and an instruction to restore the data saved in the stack have different roles, but in this embodiment, after returning from the base calculation process to the timer interrupt process, By returning the data saved in the stack to the switching register 13144, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched. For this reason, in this embodiment, the auxiliary storage area 13145 does not have to be switched to the group 0 by the CHANGE instruction after the base calculation process is completed, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be surely switched by the CHANGE instruction.

  As described above, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 by changing an argument (operand), but a different instruction may be provided for each auxiliary storage area 13145.

  After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the data of the switching register 13144 saved in the game control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144 by the POP instruction. For saving and restoring the data in the switching register 13144, other instructions (for example, the data transfer instruction LD and the exchange instruction EX) may be used without using the PUSH and POP which are stack operation instructions.

  Thereafter, after the interrupt is permitted by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt process is continued, the timer interrupt process is terminated by RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main process (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

  The interrupt may be prohibited by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt process, and the interrupt may be permitted by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt process. Further, by directly manipulating the interrupt permission flag regardless of the DI instruction or the EI instruction, the interrupt is prohibited when the timer interrupt process starts, and the interrupt may be permitted at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

  Further, since the timer interrupt process is originally executed in a state in which the interrupt is prohibited, there is no need to further prohibit the interrupt or permit the interrupt in the timer interrupt process. In the illustrated program example, the interrupt prohibition by the DI instruction is to set the interrupt disabled state to interrupt prohibition for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt process, the EI instruction should be performed at the end of the timer interrupt process, not immediately after the POP instruction.

  In the above-described example, saving of the switching register 13144 is executed by the caller timer interrupt process, and switching of the auxiliary storage area 13145 and switching of the stack area are executed by the callee base calculation process. One process may be executed by either the caller or the callee when the process moves out of the game area and when the process returns to the game area. An example of switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the caller timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating another example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a part that calls the base calculation processing from the timer interrupt processing and returns from the base calculation processing.

  In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but interrupt is prohibited by the DI instruction before the process proceeds to the base calculation process. The base calculation process can be performed without interruption by the interruption between the DI instruction and the EI instruction.

  Thereafter, the PUSH instruction saves the data in the switching register 13144 to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113). Thereafter, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched from the group 0 used in the caller timer interrupt process to the group 1 used in the callee base calculation process by the CHANGE instruction. As described above, a plurality of storage areas can be switched for each group by one CHANGE instruction, and a plurality of storage areas can be switched at once by one instruction (that is, a small number of steps).

  Thereafter, the program is executed from the start address xxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

  In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt process is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzz) of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction to obtain the stack pointer value. Evacuate. After that, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer by the LD instruction to change the stack area.

  After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 of FIG. 105 or FIG. After the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzz in the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction.

  Thereafter, when returning from the base calculation process, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched from the group 1 used in the callee base calculation process to the group 0 used in the caller timer interrupt process by the CHANGE instruction, and the game is executed by the POP instruction. The data of the switching register 13144 saved in the control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144. For saving and restoring the data in the switching register 13144, other instructions (for example, the data transfer instruction LD and the exchange instruction EX) may be used without using the PUSH and POP which are stack operation instructions.

  As described above, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 returns to the state before the base calculation process is called by returning the switching register 13144, the auxiliary storage area 13145 need not be switched by the CHANGE instruction. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched reliably by the CHANGE instruction.

  Thereafter, after the interrupt is permitted by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt process is continued, the timer interrupt process is terminated by RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main process (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

  As described above, the interrupt may be prohibited by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt process, and the interrupt may be permitted by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt process. Further, by directly manipulating the interrupt permission flag regardless of the DI instruction or the EI instruction, the interrupt is prohibited when the timer interrupt process starts, and the interrupt may be permitted at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

  Further, since the timer interrupt process is originally executed in a state in which the interrupt is prohibited, there is no need to further prohibit the interrupt or permit the interrupt in the timer interrupt process. In the illustrated program example, the interrupt prohibition by the DI instruction is to set the interrupt disabled state to interrupt prohibition for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt process, the EI instruction should be performed at the end of the timer interrupt process, not immediately after the POP instruction.

  In FIG. 111, the example of switching the timer interrupt process, the base calculation process, and the auxiliary storage area 13145 has been described. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched in the inspection process executed by the debug (inspection function) code 13133. In this case, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched to the auxiliary storage area 13145 for inspection processing by the CHANGE instruction at the head of the debug (inspection function) code 13133. Also, initialization processing (step S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG. 22), main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21), power-off processing (steps S42 to S58 in FIG. 21), The auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched between timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23, FIG. 75, FIG. 80, etc.), and different auxiliary storage areas 13145 may be used for each process.

  Furthermore, when only two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided, processes executed in the game control area (for example, main control side main process, timer interrupt process, etc.) and outside the game control area (for example, debug ( The auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched between processes executed in the inspection function) area, base calculation area, etc. (for example, debugging process, base calculation process, etc.), and different auxiliary storage areas 13145 are used separately inside and outside the game control area. Also good.

  In this case, the same auxiliary storage area 13145 is used for the main control side main process and the timer interrupt process. However, since the main control side main process being executed is interrupted and the timer interrupt process is started, the timer interrupt process is started. The value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 at the start of the process (for example, at the beginning of the timer interrupt process), and at the end of the timer interrupt process (for example, at the end of the timer interrupt process) The value temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 may be returned to the auxiliary storage area 13145.

  For example, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 has a plurality of (byte) storage areas, saving one unit (byte or word) to the stack area increases the number of instructions for saving. Similarly, the number of instructions for restoring data from the stack area increases. Also, in this case, if the processing order is incorrect for saving data to the stack area and restoring data from the stack area, different data is read from the stack area, so the subsequent processing may not be performed accurately. . For this reason, by providing an instruction to collectively save all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area and to recover all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the stack area, The above problem can be solved.

  Furthermore, if all the storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 are saved in the stack area, the stack area overflows, and data outside the area planned as the stack area (such as a stack area for other purposes) may be rewritten. is there. Therefore, in addition to an instruction for storing all the storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the stack area at once, an instruction for collectively saving a plurality of arbitrarily specified storage areas in the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area An instruction for batch recovery may be provided and executed in a plurality of arbitrarily specified storage areas in the auxiliary storage area 13145 saved in the stack area.

  As described above, when moving to the process outside the game control area, the process is switched to another auxiliary storage area 13145, and when moving to the process within the game control area, the original auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched. Therefore, the process is stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145. The processing can proceed without saving the processed data in the RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area).

  Further, the switching register 13144 is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area) when moving to the processing outside the game control area, and the switching register 13144 is restored from the RAM 1312 when moving to the processing within the game control area. The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched when moving to the processing in the game control area, and the data in the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be restored without being restored from the RAM 1312.

  Also, when switching to processing outside the game control area, it switches to another stack area, and when switching to processing within the game control area, it switches to the original stack area, so the stack area used for processing within the game control area The processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely divided without being updated in the processing outside the game control area.

  Further, the value stored in the switching register 13144 is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area) when the process is shifted to the processing outside the game control area, and the value saved when the process is shifted to the process within the game control area is used for switching. Since the value is restored to the register 13144, the value related to the execution result of the program in the game control area is not updated in the process outside the game control area, and the processes inside and outside the game control area can be completely divided.

  FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. In the arrangement on the memory shown in FIG. 113, the stack area omitted in the arrangement on the memory described above with reference to FIG. 26 is shown in the RAM 1312. However, the RAM 1312 shown in FIG.

  The ROM 1313 contains game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debug (inspection function) code 13133, debug (inspection function) data 13134, base calculation / display code 13135, and base calculation / display data 13136. The area to store is included. In the ROM 1313 of this embodiment, a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as a game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133 are stored. Debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134 In addition, a base calculation area (third storage area) for storing programs used for calculating base values, such as the base calculation / display code 13135 and the base calculation / display data 13136, is allocated.

  When an empty area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, and displayed in a dump list format In addition, the game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, a free space (unused space) of a predetermined length is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the base calculation / display code 13135. If the predetermined length is 16 bytes or more, it is desirable that the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished when displayed in the dump list format, but the predetermined length may be shorter than 16 bytes. Note that the value stored in the free area may be a fixed value that is the same value, and may be set to a value that is different from the value set in the game area or the debug area or a value that is less frequently. The value stored in the free area may be an instruction that the CPU does nothing, such as a No Operation code. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished.

  Further, the base calculation / display code 13135 and the base calculation / display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without dividing the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area. That is, it is only necessary that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, the debugging area (debug (inspection function) code, debug (inspection function) data, which is a process not directly related to the control of the progress of the game) ) And base calculation area (base calculation / display code 13135 and base calculation / display data 13136) are arranged separately from the game control area, and defects (bugs, etc.) of the base calculation / display code 13135 are used for game control. Avoiding the risk of impact.

  The debug (inspection function) area stores target programs and data that are not directly related to the game. For example, various functions used only when the pachinko machine 1 is debugged in addition to the game control of the pachinko machine 1 A code 13133 for outputting the inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) codes 13133 are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. The base calculation area stores a program for calculating a base value that is not directly related to the progress of the game.

  The game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The game control code 13131 can be read from and written to the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code 13133. Is configured to be executable, and writing to the area cannot be performed. In this manner, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. The process based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the game control code 13131 can be executed from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be increased, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. .

  The base calculation / display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311. The base value calculated by the base calculation / display code 13135 is stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown in the figure, the base calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, the base calculation / display code 13135 is designed separately from the game control code 13131 and stored in a separate area, whereby the base calculation / display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 are inspected. This can be performed separately, and the labor of inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the base calculation / display code 13135 can be used in common by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

  The RAM 1312 is provided with a game control area 13126, a debug area, a base calculation area 13128, a game control stack area 13137, a debug stack area, and a base calculation stack area 13138.

  The game control area 13126 is an area in which data used by the game control code 13131 is stored, and the game control area 13126 can be read and written. Further, the game control area 13126 cannot write data from the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation / display code 13135, but can be read-accessed, and the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation. The display code 13135 can refer to data stored in the game control area 13126.

  The debug area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is stored. The debugging area can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135, but only data reading is permitted and data writing is prohibited. The base calculation area 13128 is an area for storing data used by the base calculation / display code 13135. The base calculation area 13128 can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the debug (inspection function) code 13133, but only data reading is permitted and data writing is prohibited.

  The game control stack area 13137 is an area in which data used by the game control code 13131 is saved. The debug stack area is an area where data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is saved. The base calculation stack area 13138 is an area in which data used by the base calculation / display code 13135 is saved. Each stack area is exclusively used for temporarily saving data stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU. Each stack area can be switched by changing the value of the stack pointer managed by the CPU 13111. The stack pointer is a storage area for designating the start address of the stack area.

  FIG. 113B is a diagram showing details of the base calculation area 13128. The base calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to a main area in which a base calculation result is stored. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, set every time the data in the main area is updated in the base calculation / display process, or the main control side power-off process (see FIG. 22). It may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined that the initialization process is normal or data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power-off process (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. If a predetermined value is set for the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

  When it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it is determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data of the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). In the main control side power-off process, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). In the base calculation / display process, the value of the main area may be copied to the backup area at the end of the base calculation / display process. It suffices if at least a part of the main area is updated so that the entire main area or only the updated value area is copied to the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

  Unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digits of the address.

[11. Game history recording]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine that records and outputs a game history will be described.

[11-1. Basic configuration of gaming machine that records gaming history]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines a plurality of effects that are suitable for the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the determined effects are displayed on the main liquid crystal display. Display on the device 1600. At that time, if the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that a specific effect (for example, two types of specific effects among the three types of super-reach) is to appear, a switching of the gaming state is started. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 indicates how many times the special symbol variation display game has been performed and the specific effect has appeared (in other words, at what rotation the effect appeared) along with the progress of the game. To display.

  Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 114, Super Reach 1 appears at 34:10:25, and the result of the special symbol variation display game is lost, at 10: 54: 127. Super Reach 2 appeared, and the result of the special symbol variation display game was lost, Super Reach 2 appeared at the 428th rotation at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol variation display game was a probable big hit. Is displayed.

  The display of the jackpot history (for example, the history of jackpot at the 15th rotation and the jackpot at the 50th rotation) can be confirmed by the data display provided in the hall, but the specific effect that has appeared until the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players determine whether the pachinko machine 1 is performing well or not from the extent that a specific performance appears (for example, if Super Reach 2 appears within 50 rotations after the end of the jackpot, it will be won in a short time). In order to meet such a player's expectation, the degree of appearance of the effect is displayed so as to be visible. In addition, when the player confirms the degree of appearance of the production, the game ball is not fired. Therefore, if the display showing the degree of appearance of all of the plurality of productions is displayed, the player It takes time to confirm the level of the appearance of the game machine, which may reduce the operation of the game machine. For this reason, it is good to display only the specific reach production (reach production with high expectation degree with respect to jackpot) among reach productions. Further, the appearance history for each effect may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 220C).

  As a specific process, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 stores information on the number of variations and the produced effect. Further, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the information on the number of changes and the displayed effects based on the received change pattern command. When a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 220C) is operated, the number of changes required until a limited specific effect appears, instead of all the effects that appear, is displayed. What is necessary is just to process.

  Further, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 in operation, error information is output from the pachinko machine 1 to notify the employees in the hall. In this notification form, the error screen shown in FIG. 115 (A) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the detailed error screen shown in FIG. 115 (B) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Is output, an alarm sound is output, and an error signal shown in FIG. 116 is output from the external terminal board 784. Further, typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 include those shown in FIGS. 117, 118, and 119. An error occurring in the pachinko machine 1 is notified outside the pachinko machine 1 so that the employee of the hall can know the cause. For example, a code determined for each error type may be displayed on a status display LED included in the function display unit 1400. Specifically, when the cable connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is poor, “0” is displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400, and the LED in the right side of the door is Lights blue.

  However, the error occurs due to various causes such as a minor failure of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, disconnection of a connector), a serious failure requiring replacement of parts, or a result of fraud.

  The pachinko machine 1 in which an error has occurred must search for the cause of the error, recover from the error, and operate. The search for the cause of the error requires time and cost, and the stoppage of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error causes a decrease in sales. Therefore, if the hall can know the detailed information of the error that has occurred, the error can be resolved at an early stage, and the operation stop time of the pachinko machine 1 can be shortened.

  More specifically, the hall uses a hall computer to determine the state of the pachinko machine 1 based on a signal output from the external terminal board 784. However, in order to search for the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal board 784, it is desirable that “the number of winning in the general winning opening”, “the number of winning in the large winning opening”, “the number of passing through the gate”, “normal symbol variation” Game history information such as “number” is required. If the pachinko machine 1 is faulty, it will be solved by repairs and parts replacement, so there will be no major problem. However, if a game ball is acquired by fraud, the chance for a normal player to gain profits will be reduced. The business may be hindered and eventually the hall may become difficult to manage.

  When such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of terminals of the connector used for the external terminal board 784 increases, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 increases. In addition, events such as “winning at the general prize opening”, “winning at the big prize opening”, “passing through the gate”, and “changing the normal symbol” occur frequently, so if all data is output from the pachinko machine 1, In order to analyze this, a high-performance hall computer is required, which increases the burden on the hall.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores data that is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal board 748 inside the pachinko machine 1, and makes it possible to refer to the stored data later. This makes it possible to confirm the details of how the error occurred.

  In addition, since the time of occurrence of events that occurred in the course until the occurrence of the error (general prize opening number of prizes, number of big prize winning prizes, number of gate passes, number of normal symbol fluctuations, etc.) is recorded, how much time You can see how many events occurred in For example, it can be seen that there is an abnormality such that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is 50 per minute.

  If the date and time of occurrence is recorded for each event, the amount of data used to search for the cause of the error increases, and it takes time to search for the cause of the error. For this reason, when a predetermined number or more of events have occurred in a predetermined time (for example, one minute), the error information may be output and notified.

  For example, in any gaming state, it is possible to win a general winning opening, so if there are more than a predetermined number of winnings in a predetermined time, it is good to output error information and notify, but the winning prize opening will only win during a big win game Therefore, it is preferable to set a predetermined time from the start to the end of the big hit game, and to output and notify error information when there are a predetermined number or more of winning prizes in the predetermined time.

  In the pachinko machine described below, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history and outputs it in a predetermined format.

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when the peripheral control unit is turned on according to the present exemplary embodiment. In the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 120, a game history recording process (step S1023) is added to the peripheral control unit power-on process described above with reference to FIG.

  In the game history recording process, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory when the received command is a predetermined command based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310. The game history is recorded as the event occurrence date and time, for example, in the format shown in FIG. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be a DRAM, but it may be recorded in an SRAM that does not require a refresh operation and has low power consumption in consideration of retaining stored contents even when the power is turned off.

  The game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed before the process related to game control (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing the game history recording process at an early stage of the peripheral control unit steady process, the game history can be accurately recorded even if the process related to the game control is stopped halfway and some effects are not executed. In other words, even if some effects are not executed (even if all effects are not executed), the result of the lottery already performed on the main control board 1310 does not change, and the privilege given to the player also changes. Since there is no game history, the game history is recorded in preference to the production. Further, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process related to the game control, the game history recording process can be shared by a plurality of types of pachinko machines.

  Next, processing when the memory capacity of the recorded game history reaches the upper limit will be described. When the data amount of the recorded game history has reached the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory may not be updated. That is, the information recorded in the memory does not change. As described above, even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history by executing the game history recording process. Can be reduced.

  When the memory capacity of the recorded game history has reached the upper limit, the game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and the oldest game history may be erased to record the latest game history. Even in this case, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing each time the peripheral control unit 1511 can be reduced.

  Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed, and thus other processes (effect control, ramp, etc.) performed by the peripheral control unit 1511 are prevented. Control and sound control) can be executed reliably, and a new process (for example, a process executed over a plurality of times of peripheral control unit steady processes because there is no room in the process time using the available processing time) Or, since it is not necessary to execute it every time, a process (for example, a process of switching the selection table) executed once in several peripheral control unit steady processes may be executed.

  The received command may be analyzed immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010) (step S1022), and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table.

  In the game history recording condition setting table, among the commands received by the peripheral control unit 1511 from the main control board 1310, the type of the command recorded as the game history, that is, the event recorded as the game history is registered.

  For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the generation conditions of the command and the purpose of recording as a game history are as follows.

  For example, the start port 1 winning command and the start port 2 winning command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a winning of a game ball at the starting port 2002 and the starting port 2004 is detected, respectively. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each starting port. In addition, the special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the special symbol variation, respectively. The number of fluctuations can be counted.

  The power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the power is turned on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire a ram clear operation or the like. The change start state command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the start of the change of the special symbol. The states that can be distinguished by the state command at the start of change are the four states of low probability / short time, low probability / non-time short, high probability / short time, high probability / non-short time, and the state change can be acquired and started in each state. The number of changes made can be counted. Here, the low probability is a state in which the probability that the jackpot is derived in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game is a normal probability, and the high probability is a jackpot in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game. Is a state where the probability of deriving is higher than usual. The time is shorter from the time when the second start-up door member 2549 is in the open (or enlarged) state as compared to the non-temporal time, or the time until the normal symbol starts to change until it is fixed. The frequency of the second start port door member 2549 being in an open (or enlarged) state is higher than that in the non-time-short state, such as being shortened. Along with this, the probability that an effect with a short time for one special symbol variation display game is selected increases.

  The grand prize winning 1 winning command (every prize) and the big winning prize 2 winning command (every prize) are respectively sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins the big winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening 2006. The command is transmitted, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls in each big winning opening.

  The winning prize 1 winning command (regular winning or less) and the winning prize 2 winning command (less than the prescribed winning) are awarded only for a predetermined number or less of game balls at the winning prize opening 2005 and the winning prize opening 2006, respectively, by the end of the round. If not, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time elapses (for example, from 1 second to before the next opening) from the close of each prize winning opening, and the peripheral control unit 1511 It is possible to acquire the winning status in one round to each big winning opening. The winning prize 1 winning command (larger than the specified winning prize) and the winning prize 2 winning command (greater than the specified winning prize) are rounds when the game balls exceeding the specified number win at the winning prize opening 2005 and the winning prize opening 2006, respectively. Is completed, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time elapses from the closing of each prize winning opening (for example, from 1 second to before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 It is possible to obtain the status of winning in one round to each big winning opening. Note that this command is transmitted when a predetermined time has elapsed since the closing of each of the winning prize openings 2005 and 2006, by detecting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls determined in one round. This is because there is a possibility that an undetected game ball may exist in the big winning opening when the box is closed, so that the winning situation can be accurately grasped even in such over winning.

  The jackpot OP command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the jackpot occurs (that is, when the condition device is operated or the accessory continuous operation device is operated), and the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires the change to the jackpot state. Yes, you can count the number of jackpots. When the jackpot operation ends, the destination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the jackpot state ends, and the end of the jackpot state and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the situation after the jackpot.

  The small hit OP command is a release in which the winning opening is opened for a relatively short time (for example, one opening time is 1.8 seconds, or the total opening time is less than 1.8 seconds). Thus, when the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (so-called small hit), a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small hits.

  The normal symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the normal symbol is stopped, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the normal symbol stop symbol and can count the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol. When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, a command for passing the gate is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003.

  Even if a special symbol or a normal symbol is not drawn even when winning at the start opening or passing through the gate (such as when there is no overflow or no memory), the main control board 1310 receives the start opening 1 winning at the peripheral control unit 1511. Hour command, start port 2 winning time command and usual gate passing command are transmitted. For this reason, the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to the starting port and the number of balls that have passed through the gate unit.

  The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, so that the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the occurrence timing of the error and can count the number of error occurrences.

  The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a game ball wins at each general winning opening 2001, respectively. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening 2001. Note that the number of general winning award winning commands may be determined by the number of general winning award ports 2001 provided in the game area 5a, and the case where three general winning award ports 2001 are provided is illustrated above. As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 16, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with four general winning ports 2001. Therefore, four types of general winning port winning commands, from the general winning port 1 winning command to the general winning port 4 winning command, are provided. Commands are defined.

  FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recorded in the memory.

  The game history includes a history number, an event, and an event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in the memory in order of event occurrence time. The event occurrence date / time may be recorded as the event occurrence date / time when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command from the main control board 1310, and notifies the peripheral control unit 1511 of the time when the main control board 1310 detected the event occurrence. The peripheral control unit 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310. In the illustrated game history, the event occurrence date and time is recorded with a granularity of up to minutes, but may be recorded up to seconds.

  By analyzing the game history in the form shown in FIG. 122, it is possible to know details of events (for example, changes in gaming state, results of a variation display game, etc.) that have occurred in connection with a command transmitted from the main control board 1310. . For example, the power-on command with history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, and the RAM was cleared from the command contents, and the game started with a low probability and non-short-time state. I understand. That is, the hall started operation at 15:30, the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, and the player started to beat for a while (for example, after igniting the cigarette) and won the general prize opening 2001. I understand. Also, the special symbol 1 change start event of history number 4 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol change from the content of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol) You can see the result of the displayed game. The special symbol 1 variation start event of history number 6 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and from the received special symbol 1 symbol type command content (stop symbol type), the special symbol variation display game You can see the result. Although the result of the special symbol variation display game is not shown in FIG. 122, each special symbol variation display game is indicated by a numerical value indicating the result of the variation display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the variation of the special symbol. The result of the variable display game (losing, usually per 4 rounds, per high probability 4 rounds, per high probability 16 rounds, etc.) may be recorded as a game history.

  Next, a method for referring to information (game history) recorded in the memory by the hall will be described.

  First, a history output interface 1590 for outputting information recorded in the memory from the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided. When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a history reference command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs a game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590.

  Further, when a data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a history reference command from the data collection terminal, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs a game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590. The history output interface 1590 may be configured by a history output terminal provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 or may be provided separately from the peripheral control unit 1511. The data collection terminal may be owned by the hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1.

  The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a cable connection via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via a short-range wireless (for example, Bluetooth (registered trademark)).

  The command that triggers the peripheral control unit 1511 to output a game history is a command that is not transmitted when a normal game is played after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 even if the history reference command is dedicated to game history output (FIG. 121). A command when a special condition (operation) is performed with a command that is not defined in () may be a history reference command. Special conditions (operations) include, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Also, a history reference command may be transmitted on the condition that an event that does not occur (or is unlikely to occur) is a command transmitted when a normal game is played. For example, this may be the case when 50 wins are made in the start opening or general winning opening in one minute. In addition, a game history may be output when commands used for game control are received in a special order that would normally not be possible.

  Note that an operation panel (keyboard) and a display (liquid crystal display device) may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (a place that cannot be seen by the player) to display the game history.

  FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing the peripheral control board and the peripheral configuration.

  Peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from main control board 1310, and provides effect display drive board 4450 and control commands and various information (various data) via frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. A liquid crystal display that performs drawing control of the peripheral control unit 1511 to be exchanged, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the door frame side effect display device 460, and controls sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has a control unit 1512 and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information specifying date and time and time information specifying hour, minute, and second.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program for controlling the effect operation to be executed, peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various data, various control data and various schedule data, and a V blank from a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a signal is input (for example, schedule data for defining a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and light emission modes such as various LEDs) Information for managing schedule data, etc.) Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing and peripheral control for storing various information continued across days (for example, information for managing history of occurrence of jackpot gaming state, information for managing special effect flag, etc.) It has an SRAM 1511d and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when the power is interrupted for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a large capacity (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931. When the backup power is supplied by the electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”), the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. Since the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board 931, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the game board 5 is detached from the pachinko machine 1, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d holds the stored contents. You can't do it and lose its contents.

  In addition, power is supplied to a partial area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d by a backup power supply 1513 different from the backup power supply supplied from the power supply board 931. A game history is recorded in the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to which power is supplied by the backup power supply 1513, and the stored contents can be retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. The backup power source 1513 is composed of a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, and preferably has a power supply capability capable of holding data of at least a part of the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for several weeks to about one month.

  FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing a peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

  In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, an area for storing the game history may be configured in a package different from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured in the peripheral control CPU package together with the peripheral control MPU.

  FIG. 124A shows a peripheral configuration of a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that configures an area for storing a game history in a package different from the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, the effect control area where power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the game history storage area supplied with power from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. It is done.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage) outside the peripheral control CPU is cleared. The data in the (use area) 1511d is not cleared.

  FIG. 124 (B) shows a peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d that configures an area for storing a game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the drawing, both the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

  Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 124B, when the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (production control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control The data in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. For this reason, the effect control area and the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are preferably physically separated.

  In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, an area for storing the game history may be configured by a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the pachinko machine 1 to which power is not supplied can be maintained without providing the backup power supply 1513.

  124A and 124B, the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d can be anything as long as the procedure is different from the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. Good. For example, a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch, and when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. The history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch and the RAM clear switch is continuously operated for a predetermined time after the power is turned on, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. May be used.

  When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits a command different from the normal power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The main control board 1310 continues to transmit a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 while the RAM clear switch is operated, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives a predetermined number of power-on commands within a predetermined time. In the case where the power-on command is continuously received, the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By providing means for initializing data in the game history storage area in this way, for example, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed even if the gaming machine continues to operate in the hall for one year.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 1511e restarts the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data to be sent to the drive board 4170 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. A drive signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit or a drive signal to the electrical drive source provided in the door frame 3 Door side motor drive data to be transmitted from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, or door frame 3 Peripheral control output circuit for sending door side emission data for outputting lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board from serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board Or transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 220. Is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized presentation operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the rendering operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, an event that occurred during the game is recorded as a game history in accordance with a command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and thus occurred during the game. You can analyze the event later (for example, after the hall is closed) to understand the performance or failure of the gaming machine. In addition, since the game history is stored in a non-volatile memory (SRAM to which a backup power supply is input), the game history can be confirmed even after the gaming machine is restarted.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121, 122, etc., various information is recorded together with the time of occurrence. Also, for example, when winning at the starting port 1, (1) the fact that the starting port 1 was won, (2) the time at which the starting port 1 was won, (3) the event that occurred before winning the starting port 1 Thus, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 748 shown in FIG. 116 is stored in the pachinko machine 1. This is because the necessary minimum information (information indicating the fact that (1) the winning at the starting port is mentioned above) is output from the external terminal board 784 in a special case (for example, the cause of the error). This is because the information stored in the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed. This is because if all of the information stored internally at the time of winning a prize at the starting port is output from the external terminal board 784, the amount of information related to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 increases, which may be a burden on the hall. It is. That is, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded in the pachinko machine 1, and a part of the information recorded in the inside is recorded via the external terminal board 784. The information stored in the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed in a special case.

[11-2. Compact plan 1]
Next, a modified example of a pachinko machine that records and outputs a game history will be described. In addition, some modified examples described below change a part of the above-described embodiment, and form a part of the embodiment.

  In the above-described embodiment, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the event that occurred (command type) and the event occurrence date and time were recorded for a predetermined command. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d for recording the game history is finite, and it is difficult to record all the enormous amount of events that occur during the game for a long time. For this reason, in the modification 1 (compact plan 1), the change in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events that occurred in the state are recorded.

  FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table according to the first modification.

  In the game history recording condition setting table of the modified example 1, the command recorded as the game history is defined separately for the command to be counted and the command that triggers the state change, and the command for which both attributes are set There is also. Note that the countable information column and the acquirable status change column are provided for convenience of explanation, and when the game history recording condition setting table is implemented in the pachinko machine 1, only the command type column is sufficient. .

  When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute to be counted is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events triggered by the command issuance as a result of command analysis. In addition, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is received, the peripheral control unit 1511 renews the state of the game history recorded in the memory as a result of command analysis, and records the number of events Add

  For example, a power-on command, a change start status command, a jackpot OP command, a jackpot operation end transition destination command, and an error display command are commands issued according to a state change, and power on, special symbol change display start, It can be grasped as a change in the status of jackpot status start, jackpot status end, error status occurrence.

  In addition, the count command is used to count the number of events that triggered the issue of the count command. Specifically, the number of winning balls to each starting port can be counted by the starting port 1 winning command and the starting port 2 winning command. The special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of fluctuations of each special symbol. The grand prize winning 1 winning command (for each winning prize) and the grand winning winning prize 2 winning command (for each winning prize) can count the number of winning balls to each big winning prize opening. The large winning opening 1 winning command (below the prescribed winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (below the prescribed winning) can count the number of rounds finished with less than the prescribed winning number. The large winning opening 1 winning command (greater than the prescribed winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (greater than the prescribed winning) can count the number of rounds that have finished exceeding the prescribed winning number (ie, over winning).

  The small hit OP command can count the number of small hits. The normal symbol stop command can count the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol. The usual gate passing command can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate. The error display command can count the number of error occurrences. The general winning slot 1 winning command, the general winning slot 2 winning command, and the general winning slot 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each general winning slot.

  FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the first modification.

  The game history of the modified example 1 includes the state change event triggered by the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time at which the state change event occurs, and the predetermined start point. And the cumulative number of count events detected until the end of (until the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (between the previous state change event and the state change event). The predetermined starting point is the initialization time of the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The states that count events are recorded separately are assumed to be five states: low probability / non-short-time state, low probability / short-time state, high probability / non-time-short state, high probability / short-time state, jackpot state. The state may be further subdivided.

  Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 1 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 126, as the counting event, the start opening 1 winning number, the starting opening 2 winning number, the special symbol 1 fluctuation number, the special symbol 2 fluctuation number, the general winning opening 1 winning number, the general winning mouth 2 winning number, The number of general winning entries 3 winning, the number of winning 1 winning prizes, the number of winning 2 winning prizes, the number of passes through the gate, and the number of normal symbol variations are recorded. Note that the number of events other than those illustrated may be counted.

  A storage area for the cumulative number of count events is sufficient if it is 2 bytes. In particular, data that does not derive so frequently and does not increase the cumulative number (for example, the number of general winning award winnings) may be 1 byte, and other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, 1 byte data and 2 byte data may be arranged in the order of 2 bytes and 1 byte (or in the order of 1 byte and 2 bytes) without mixing them.

  When a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the event occurs, the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. Then, the count event after the state change is recorded in a new record.

  The count result of the count event in the current state may be recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state change. Note that a new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created in response to a state change, but a new record may be created at the start of a period in which a counting event is counted. In this case, while the counting event is counted, 0 may be stored as an initial value even if data is not stored in the created new record. In addition, a new record may be created at the end of the period in which the counting event is counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting result of the counting event for the period is stored in the new record.

  When the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) with the changed game state is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read from the game history storage area and the data recorded in the work area is recorded. The numerical value is added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, when the number of count events detected during the state (between the previous state change event and the state change event) is recorded as a game history, the count value of the count event is stored in the game of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in the history storage area.

  That is, every time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs. It will be initialized by the normal ram clear operation. Specifically, for example, in the low probability / non-time-saving state, the game history information in which the number of winnings to the starting port 1 is recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko machine of the first modification. In 1, the game state is recorded and then recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. In other words, if the gaming state does not change, the gaming history is not recorded in the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. For this reason, if the ram clear operation is performed by turning off the power supply in the low probability / non-time-short state, the 50 winning prizes are initialized to 0.

  Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a count event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the above-described game history initialization operation.

  Even when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process may be executed. In this case, recording of the game history in the peripheral control RAM 1511c is continuously executed in the current state, and the cumulative number of counting events may not be stored from the peripheral control RAM 1511c to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the state changes. Further, the game history (accumulated number of counting events) in the oldest state may be erased and the cumulative number of counting events in the immediately previous state may be recorded. In this case, a ring buffer may be configured in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

  By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced each time. it can. Further, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the most recent game history can be confirmed.

  Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the capacity of the memory, execution of useless processing can be prevented and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the first modification, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (the number of winnings, the number of changes, etc.) in each state during the change is recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the first modification is characterized in that more information is recorded internally than information output from the external terminal board 784.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the first modification, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state. If the game state does not change, the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d Information (game history) is not written. In other words, if fraud is performed in a state where a new record is not created in the game history storage area (while the same game state is continuing), it may be difficult to find fraud. As described above, the hole can confirm the information written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in order to analyze the information (game history) written in the memory, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification, As long as the game state does not change, no information is written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, even if information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the current state information (game history) cannot be confirmed. In such a case, a check function that can detect fraud early may be provided.

  Specifically, the first record (the latest record in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the most recent game history is recorded and the second record (in the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the current game history is recorded. If the comparison result satisfies the predetermined condition, an error may be notified.

  For example, in a high probability / short time state or a jackpot gaming state, in a pachinko machine 1 that fires a game ball to roll on the right side of the game area 5a, so-called right-handed pachinko machine 1, transition from a high probability / short time state to a jackpot gaming state However, if the state changes to a high-probability / short-time state after the jackpot gaming state ends, since the player is usually right-handed even if the state is switched, there is a possibility of winning in the general winning opening on the left side of the gaming area 5a. Very low. In this case, an error may be notified when a difference is detected by comparing the number of wins to the general winning opening in the jackpot gaming state and the subsequent high probability / short time state. The allowable value of the difference in the number of winning balls to the general winning opening between the states is one, and an error may be notified when two or more differences occur. This is because if the hand is released from the firing handle, the firing force becomes uneven and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

  Instead of error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. The early fraud detection check function described above detects an error from the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, it will hit right because of a high probability / short time state), so an unfamiliar player There is a possibility of detecting an error when making an unexpected hit. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error but only output the security signal from the external terminal board 784 and may not notify the player. In this way, the hall clerk can confirm the possibility of an error without being noticed by the player from a location away from the pachinko machine 1, and troubles with the player can also be prevented.

  Thus, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1.

[11-3. Compact plan 2]
In the first modification described above, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change event of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded by the state change event, and the number of counting events in each state during the changeover Was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient if the number of events for each type of state that occurs repeatedly is known. For this reason, in the modification 2 (compact plan 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

  In the second modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating a game history recorded in the memory of the second modification.

  As shown in FIG. 127, the game history of Modification 2 is composed of a history of state events and a cumulative number of count events for each state. The history of state events includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, and the time when the state change event occurred. In the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 2, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in five states of low probability / non-time-short state, low probability / time-short state, high probability / non-time-short state, high probability / time-short state, jackpot state. The The counting event (and the command related to the event) recorded in the modified example 2 includes the start opening 1 winning number (start opening 1 winning command), the starting opening 2 winning number (start opening 2 winning command), special Number of symbols 1 variation (special symbol 1 symbol type command), number of special symbols 2 variation (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning mouth 1 winning number (general winning mouth 1 winning command), general winning mouth 2 winning number (general Winning mouth 2 winning command), General winning mouth 3 winning number (General winning mouth 3 winning command), Large winning mouth 1 winning number (Large winning mouth 1 winning command), Large winning mouth 2 winning number (Large winning mouth 2 winning command) ), The number of gate passages (ordinary symbol gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol stop command).

  Note that the number of counting events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the counting events are recorded separately may be further subdivided.

  Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 2 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 127, when a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the occurrence of the event, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by the state change event, the cumulative number of count events counted in the state before the change is recorded in the nonvolatile memory, and the above-described count event corresponding to the state after the change is recorded. Start recording the cumulative number of.

  The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the accumulated value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Therefore, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up when the power failure occurs, but is initialized by a normal ram clear operation.

  Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the accumulated value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the above-described game history initialization operation.

  As described above, in the second modification, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the count event (each winning number, variation number, etc.) for each type of state is recorded, so the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity.

[11-4. Compact plan 3]
In the second modification described above, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded by the state change event, and the cumulative number of count events for each state is recorded. However, the timing at which the state is switched may not be important, and it may be sufficient if the number of events for each type of state is known. For this reason, in modification 3 (compact plan 3), the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, and the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

  In the third modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

  In Modification 3, the same event as that recorded in Modification 1 is recorded using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the third modification.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the game history of Modification 3 is configured by the cumulative number of counting events in each state. Furthermore, the game history of the modified example 3 includes the accumulated time of each state. The reason for including the accumulated time is to allow the hole to estimate the number of event occurrences (for example, the number of jackpot occurrences) from the accumulated time. There are five states that count events are recorded separately: low probability / non-time-short state, low probability / time-short state, high probability / non-time-short state, high probability / time-short state, jackpot state. A counting event may be recorded.

  The counting event (and the command related to the event) recorded in the modified example 3 includes the starting port 1 winning number (starting port 1 winning command), the starting port 2 winning number (starting port 2 winning command), special Number of symbols 1 variation (special symbol 1 symbol type command), number of special symbols 2 variation (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning mouth 1 winning number (general winning mouth 1 winning command), general winning mouth 2 winning number (general Winning mouth 2 winning command), General winning mouth 3 winning number (General winning mouth 3 winning command), Large winning mouth 1 winning number (Large winning mouth 1 winning command), Large winning mouth 2 winning number (Large winning mouth 2 winning command) ), The number of gate passages (ordinary symbol gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol stop command). Note that the number of counting events other than those described above may be counted.

  Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 2 will be described. In the gaming history shown in FIG. 128, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative number of count events described above is recorded corresponding to the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

  The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the accumulated value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up when the power failure occurs, but is initialized by a normal ram clear operation.

  Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the accumulated value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the above-described game history initialization operation.

  As described above, in the second modification, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the count event (each winning number, variation number, etc.) for each type of state is recorded, so the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity.

  As described above, in Modifications 1 to 3, when the event is generated by the game history recording process, it is temporarily recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c), and the condition for writing to the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is satisfied. In addition, the data of the work area is written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. In the normal ram clear operation, information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

  Here is a brief description of the hall sales. In many cases, the business hours of the hall are fixed, for example, the opening time is 10:00 and the closing time is 23:00. For this reason, it may be difficult for the store clerk to monitor whether the player is playing an illegal game during a time zone in which there are many players, such as a time zone shortly after opening the store or a time zone in the evening. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of players decreases, and if there is a pachinko machine with a high probability and a short time just before closing, the high probability and short time pachinko machine will be initialized for the next day's sales, It may be in a non-time-short state. In this case, since there are few players, it is possible to monitor a pachinko machine with a high probability and a short time, and thus it is possible to know whether or not the latest game is fraudulent. In other words, in consideration of the situation that there are some pachinko machines that do not require the latest gaming history, it is possible to provide an efficient gaming machine by allowing the store clerk to select whether to leave the latest information.

  Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by the ram clear operation, the game history stored in the work area for the event that occurred after the most recent event is erased, and the game history is stored for the event that occurred before the most recent event The game history stored in the area remains. That is, the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, but information recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and information recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The game history is recorded separately. By doing this, if you want to keep a record of all the events recorded in the work area, the store clerk only needs to cause a change in the state of the pachinko machine, and if you want to erase the event record recorded in the work area, The store clerk may perform a ram clear operation. As described above, the game history stored in the work area related to the event that occurred after the most recent event is deleted by the ram clear operation. This is because the store clerk has not seen the events that have occurred so far (it cannot be seen because there are many players).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, not only the information indicating that the start opening has been won, but also the general winning opening not related to the lottery is once recorded in the work area. Even if the symbol that starts changing due to winning the starting opening and the symbol indicating the winning lottery result is not changed with this symbol's stop mode), the game is played while the game ball is being launched into the game area 5a. It is characterized by collecting history. In other words, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process that is executed in response to the winning lottery, but is a process that may be always executed while power is supplied to the pachinko machine.

  In the low probability / non-time-short state, the game ball is fired so that the game ball wins at the start port 2002 like so-called left-handed or slightly hit. In such a case, the start opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 should be won appropriately. However, there is no winning (or very few) at the general winning opening 2001, but there are a lot of game balls winning at the starting opening 2002, or conversely there is no winning (or very few winnings at the starting opening 2002). However, when many game balls have won the general winning opening 2001, there is a possibility that fraud has been performed. Therefore, the first winning port and the second winning port that the game ball wins at the same time are set as monitoring targets, and the number of winnings in the first winning port is a predetermined magnification of the number of winnings in the second winning port. An error may be notified when the value exceeds.

  Further, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784 instead of the error notification. In the above detection method, there is a possibility that an error is detected when an unfamiliar player makes an unexpected hit. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error but only output the security signal from the external terminal board 784 and may not notify the player. In this way, the hall clerk can confirm the possibility of an error without being noticed by the player from a location away from the pachinko machine 1, and troubles with the player can also be prevented.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is also characterized in that information accumulated in a plurality of games is collected as a game history. Since there is an upper limit on the recordable amount of game history data, if one game (one change) is recorded, a large number of games (long time) cannot be recorded. Yes.

[12. Game performance setting function]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of a present Example has the setting function which changes the operation | movement ratio of a condition apparatus, for example as game performance.

[12-1. Basic configuration of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 129 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine having the setting unit, and FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having the setting unit viewed from the back side in the opened state. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 viewed from the back side in the closed state, and FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a setting unit of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 129 has a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974.

  As shown in the front view of FIG. 132 (A), the setting board 970 has a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting for changing the setting value. A change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, and a setting indicator 974 for displaying the setting value selected or selected are provided. The setting board 970 functions as a setting change operation unit that accepts a setting change operation.

  In this embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the payout control unit 952. The setting indicator 974 is controlled by the payout control unit 952. The determined setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310. As will be described later, the main control board 1310 may control components on the setting board 970.

  The setting key 971 is used to change to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode by inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion part) and maintaining the contact short circuit or open state by turning the key to the setting position. It is a switch that outputs a signal that triggers. The setting key 971 may not be provided and another switch may be used. In this case, by operating the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change switch 972 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started. The setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode may be ended by long pressing.

  Further, the setting change mode may be started and ended by operating the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continued operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be terminated by long pressing the RAM clear switch 954 during the setting change mode.

  In this way, even an employee who does not have a key for the setting key 971 can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, the operation may be detected at the falling edge of the setting change switch 972.

  The setting change switch 972 includes, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select setting values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the setting value increases by 1, and when the setting change switch 972 is operated when the setting value = 6, the setting value = 1. The setting value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. The set value is not limited to six levels, and may be a smaller number (for example, two levels) or a larger number (for example, eight levels).

  The setting key 971 may also serve as the setting change switch 972 without providing the setting change switch 972. In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in three stages, and the key can be inserted / removed at the neutral position (normal position). When the key is turned counterclockwise, the setting change mode is started. This is an operation for selecting a value (when it is turned to the right, it functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternative operation that can hold the left position and the neutral position, and performs a momentary operation that does not hold the right position (returns to the neutral position when the hand is released from the key).

  The set value changes the operating rate of the condition device (that is, the probability of hitting a special symbol). The set value = 1 has a low hit probability and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability variation jackpot ratio, the ratio of the short time after the jackpot (ST), the number of hourly times, the number of rounds and counts of the jackpot, the probability per base figure, the general winning opening, starting opening and winning prize opening Various parameters related to the game such as the number of prize balls may be changed to change the number of prize balls that the player can acquire.

  The setting confirmation switch 973 is constituted by, for example, a momentary switch, and is a switch for confirming a setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972 and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. The setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be configured with switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so that the switches are not operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be constituted by a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be constituted by a momentary toggle switch.

  The setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position may be confirmed without providing the setting confirmation switch 973. Moreover, you may determine the setting value selected in response to operation | movement of the other switch and sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 when the handle lever 504 is touched, operation of a stop button of the handle unit 500, operation of the operation button 220C, ball rental button The selected setting may be confirmed by the operation of, the operation of the return button, the winning detection of the game ball at the start ports 2002 and 2004, or the like. The operation unit that substitutes the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for gaming) or a switch that is not operable by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

  That is, in the illustrated example, three switches (including setting keys) are provided on the setting board 970 in order to set the gaming performance in the pachinko machine 1, but one or two switches are provided on the setting board 970. It is enough if it is provided.

  Furthermore, none of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be provided, and the setting change operation may be enabled only by the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continued operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch 972, the setting value can be selected by an operation for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) of the RAM clear switch 954 during the setting change mode, and the RAM clear switch is replaced with the setting confirmation switch 973. The set value can be determined by an operation (long press) of 954 for a predetermined time or longer. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by long pressing the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is confirmed.

  The setting display 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, displays the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operation of the setting key 971). . Note that the setting indicator 974 may be configured by LEDs of a settable number of values instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value is turned on to display the set value.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an error type indicator using a 7-segment LED for displaying the type of payout error is provided on the payout control board 951. The error type indicator and the setting indicator 974 are combined, The selected setting value and the current setting value may be displayed on the error type indicator. In this case, the display mode may be changed so that the error type display and the set value display can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off in the error type display, and the dot may be turned on in the set value display. Also, the error type may be lit (not blinking) and the set value may be blinked.

  In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, but may be connected to a power board (not shown) in the power board box 930. By providing the setting board 970 alongside the power board (or inside the power board box 930), the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 operated at the time of setting change are arranged in the vicinity so that the operability of the setting change is set. Can be improved.

  Further, as will be described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310.

  As yet another form, the setting board 970 may be configured as a part of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310, instead of being an independent board. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on any one of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, and the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side of the lower part of the main body frame 4 constituting the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the frame side instead of the game board 5). When the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting substrate 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. In the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, and in this state, it is difficult to operate keys and switches on the setting board 970. Thus, the right frame member 40 conceals the setting key 971, obstructs the insertion of the key into the keyhole of the setting key 971, and makes the setting change difficult to make the operation of the setting board 970 (setting changing operation unit) difficult. Functions as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting key 971 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval as at least a part of the setting board 970 with the main body frame 4 being accommodated in the outer frame 2. However, all of the setting substrate 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the setting substrate 970 is set during operation of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, with the main body frame 4 accommodated in the outer frame 2). It is possible to make it difficult to operate the substrate 970, and to suppress an illegal act in which the player changes the setting of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the illustrated example, the member (setting change difficulty means) that faces the setting substrate 970 in a state where the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but may be another member. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be disposed at a position facing the setting substrate 970 at a narrow interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. In addition, a cover that moves in conjunction with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 is provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be disposed at a position facing the setting substrate 970 at a narrow interval. .

  The setting change difficulty unit configured by a member provided to face the setting board 970 may be a cover that covers the setting board 970. In this case, the setting key 971 that triggers the start of the setting change mode may be covered with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Further, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting substrate 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is accommodated in the setting board case, and the setting board case includes a first cover that prevents an inadvertent operation of the setting key 971 and the switches 972 and 973 (at least the setting key 971). A body (for example, a door-shaped lid that can be opened during operation) is provided. Further, a second cover body that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 is provided on the outer frame 2. The second cover body may be provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 to cover various control boards. If it does in this way, the start of the setting change mode by careless operation can be prevented, and the fraudulent act which an unauthorized player changes the setting of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  The distance at which the setting substrate 970 faces the member such as the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be held during operation). ) Should be shorter.

  The setting board 970 may be arranged in the vicinity of the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 operated when changing the setting are arranged in the vicinity. If it does in this way, the operativity at the time of starting setting change mode can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 131, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1 is initially set in the payout control board unit 950. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side. The power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are provided from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be viewed and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. Since the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, they are provided at positions where they can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden during operation of the pachinko machine 1 so as to make it difficult to operate, so that an illegal act of operating the setting board 970 during a game to change the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switch on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

  Similarly, since the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for selection of the player's base, it is desirable that the player does not know it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 131, like the setting key 971, the setting indicator 974 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting indicator 974 is turned off so that the player cannot know the set value. It is desirable. Thus, the right frame member 40 functions as a visual difficulty complicator that conceals the display content of the setting indicator 974 and makes it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting indicator 974 (setting state display unit).

  FIG. 132B is a view of the setting substrate 970 as viewed from above in a state where the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. In this state, since the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, the head of the key 975 inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, and the setting key 971 The key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the right frame member 40 is not positioned in front of the keyhole of the setting key 971, and the key 975 can be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

  Further, the display surface of the setting indicator 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 and faces the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, so that the player can see from the front. Checking the current settings of the pachinko machine is difficult.

  FIG. 133 is a view showing a modified example of the setting substrate 970.

  Also in this modified example, the setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974, as in the above-described example. However, in the present modification, the setting key 971 is disposed sideways on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

  For this reason, the setting board 970 of this modification is installed not on the side surface side of the main body frame 4 but on the back surface side so that the keyhole faces the side surface. Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (B), when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the side surface (that is, the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. Since the head of the key 975 inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 133, even if the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as the other boards and the difficulty of board arrangement is reduced, the setting board 970 is operated during operation of the pachinko machine 1, It is possible to suppress fraud that changes the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

  Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine having the setting unit will be described. In this modification, the setting board 970 is provided not on the main body frame 4 but on the game board 5 and is connected to the main control board 1310.

  FIG. 134 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of the present modification, FIG. 135 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 136 is shown in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown from the back.

  The setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. The setting substrate 970 may be the one shown in FIG. 132 (A) or the one shown in FIG. 133 (A).

  In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, the setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch, and the main control MPU 1311. Controls the display of the setting display 974.

  The function and configuration of the setting board 970 and each component on the setting board are the same as those in the above-described embodiment, and common description is omitted.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317 composed of 7 segment LEDs. For this reason, the base indicator 1317 and the setting indicator 974 may be used together to display the selected setting value or the current setting value on the base indicator 1317. The base display 1317 normally displays the base value of the provisional section (section currently being measured) and the base value of the fixed section (straight section) by switching at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, the selected (next set) set value is displayed in the setting change mode, and the current set value is displayed during setting confirmation (see FIG. 152).

  In this case, the display mode may be changed so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, four digits are used to display the base value, but only one predetermined digit (for example, the rightmost digit) may be used to display the set value, and “-” may be displayed. Other digits, characters, and symbols may be displayed in digits not used in the display of the set value, as long as they are not used in the display of the base value, instead of “−”. Moreover, when displaying a set value, you may display the character which is not used by the display of a base value. For example, the set value is displayed in six levels of alphabets A, b, C, d, E, and F.

  Further, it is preferable that the setting value is blinked while the setting value is selected in the setting change mode, and the determined setting value is lit. In addition, the current set value may be lit. In the base display, the first two digits indicate the type of display data, and numbers are not displayed. For this reason, the set value may be displayed using the most significant digit. When the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used in common, the setting value is displayed with priority during the setting change mode and setting confirmation. Therefore, although the base value is calculated, the base value is displayed. Not. Thereafter, when the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set value are completed, the base display 1317 resumes displaying the base value.

  When the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the display content is displayed to the base display 1317. The output process is executed by the base calculation / display code 13135 outside the game control area. However, a part of the base calculation / display code 13135 (for example, a process of outputting display data to the driver circuit) may be provided in the game area. By sharing the processing, the capacity of the program can be reduced and the memory can be saved.

  On the other hand, the process of outputting display contents to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the process of outputting display contents to the base display 1317 is for base calculation / display outside the game control area. When executed with the code 13135, processing inside and outside the gaming area can be completely separated, and security can be improved.

  Further, setting change and setting confirmation processing may be executed outside the game control area.

  In other words, whether the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or shared with the base display 1317 is included in the scope of the invention described in this specification. As described above, during the confirmation of the setting change mode and the setting value, by displaying the plurality of displays provided on the main control board box 1320 so as not to be confused, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation at the time of setting change or an erroneous recognition of the setting value.

  Even when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not used together, the display on the base display 1317 may be turned off or all the lights may be turned on while the setting display 974 is displaying the set value. Even in this case, when the confirmation of the setting change mode and the setting value is completed, the base display 1317 resumes displaying the base value. By not displaying a plurality of displays on the main control board box 1320 during confirmation of the setting change mode and the setting value, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation at the time of changing the setting and an erroneous recognition of the setting value.

  In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310. However, the setting board 970 may be formed on a part of the main control board 1310 instead of an independent board. That is, a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting indicator 974 may be mounted on the main control board 1310.

  The setting board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 includes holes and cutouts for operating the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970. Is provided.

  When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the structure of the main control board box 1320, that is, the opening / closing direction differs depending on the direction of the key hole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970. Specifically, when the key 975 is inserted vertically into the board from the front side of the board, the main control board box 1320 is separated vertically into the setting board 970 on the front surface and the back surface of the setting board 970 or the front side box ( Alternatively, the cover) and the back side box may be configured to be openable and closable with one side as a hinge. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted in the direction in which the board extends from the side, the main control board box 1320 has the front side box (or cover) and the back side box of the setting board 970 extending in the extension direction of the setting board 970. It is preferable to have a structure that slides in the direction of inserting the key 975 and separates it.

  In this modification, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the main control MPU 1311. The setting indicator 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311.

  As shown in FIG. 135, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface (the left side in FIG. 135) of the gaming board 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1, and the gaming board 5 is attached as shown in FIG. When the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting substrate 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow. Therefore, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, Operation of the switch is difficult. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting key 971 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval as at least a part of the setting board 970 with the main body frame 4 being accommodated in the outer frame 2. However, all of the setting substrate 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the setting substrate 970 is set during operation of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, with the main body frame 4 accommodated in the outer frame 2). It is possible to suppress an illegal act of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the substrate 970.

  In the illustrated example, the member (setting change difficulty means) that faces the setting substrate 970 in a state where the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but may be another member. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be disposed at a position facing the setting substrate 970 at a narrow interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. In addition, a cover that moves in conjunction with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 is provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be disposed at a position facing the setting substrate 970 at a narrow interval. .

  The distance at which the setting substrate 970 faces the member such as the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be held during operation). ) Should be shorter.

  As shown in FIG. 136, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1 is initially set in the payout control board unit 950. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side. The power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are provided from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be viewed and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. Since the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, they are provided at positions where they can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden during operation of the pachinko machine 1 so as to make it difficult to operate, so that an illegal act of operating the setting board 970 during a game to change the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switch on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

  Similarly, since the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for selection of the player's base, it is desirable that the player does not know it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, like the setting key 971, the setting indicator 974 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting indicator 974 is turned off so that the player cannot know the set value. It is desirable. Thus, the right frame member 40 functions as a visual difficulty complicator that conceals the display content of the setting indicator 974 and makes it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting indicator 974 (setting state display unit).

  In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, when the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, the setting substrate 970 viewed from above is as shown in FIGS. 132 (B) and 133 (B). . In this state, the key holes of the setting board 970 and the setting key 971 are opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, so that the head of the key 975 inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

  Further, the display surface of the setting indicator 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 and faces the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, so that the player can see from the front. The current setting value of the pachinko machine can no longer be confirmed.

  Next, processing related to setting change will be described.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 137 is different from the initialization process described above with reference to FIG. 21 in that the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key is operated (step S17, step S30) and the CPU initial setting process (step The difference is that the setting change process is performed in S28). The same steps as those in the initialization process described above with reference to FIG. 21 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and enables the writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates a built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and checks whether a predetermined wait time (a time necessary for the activation of the sub board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, the data of the set value and the game state (for example, probability change state, short time state, special symbol or normal symbol hold storage, prize ball, among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 Data) and the other data are deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

  On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is deleted (step S30), and step S24 is performed. Proceed to On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the internal RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20).

  As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area (except for the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). The process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power shutdown and the step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

  As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. The area other than the base calculation area 13128 is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 is executed. Proceed to

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the setting key 971 operation (step S17), the RAM clear switch operation (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There are a power failure flag abnormality that has not been made (step S20), a RAM abnormality that does not match the RAM checksum (step S22), and a base calculation work abnormality (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the gaming state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area). (For example, the probability change state, the short time state, the special symbol or ordinary symbol hold memory, information regarding the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected at power-on, or when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared to calculate the base. The area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. In the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

  Unlike the illustrated case, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 are not guaranteed. May be cleared. If the entire RAM area is cleared when the base calculation work is abnormal, the data indicating the gaming state is lost and the normal calculation cannot be executed, and the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area It is better to initialize only. If the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is You don't have to clear it.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is used for base calculation for each data type (game control area 13126 (setting value, game state data)). Area 13128) Erasing under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value every time the RAM is cleared, and the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall becomes complicated. Therefore, the set value is prevented from being erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

  For the processing after step S28, either one of FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) for calculating and storing a check code from data in the base calculation work area (base calculation region 13128) when the power is turned off.

  FIGS. 138 and 139 are flowcharts showing an example of the setting change process and the setting display process. FIG. 138 shows that the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 (or configured integrally with the payout control board 951). FIG. 139 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or configured integrally with the main control board 1310).

  First, setting change processing in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138A cooperate with each other will be described.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Whether the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch. In view of the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main body frame 4 may be omitted. .

  If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 starts the setting change mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permission state generation unit. Other setting change mode start conditions other than those described above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 when the handle lever 504 is touched, and a prepaid card inserted in the CR unit (prepaid The setting change mode does not have to be started when there is a balance in the cash sand). Moreover, it is better not to start the setting change mode even when the pachinko machine 1 detects a possibility of some fraud (for example, a magnetic error). These conditions may be determined after the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change start command instead of the payout control unit 952. In such a case, it is presumed that it is not the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is going to perform a setting change operation, so it is better not to enter the setting change mode. .

  (2) When the setting change mode is started, the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change start command to the main control board 1310.

  (3) When receiving the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear process before the setting change. The RAM clear process before the setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), and the game state (for example, the probability change state, the short time state, the special symbol or the normal symbol is reserved and stored) , Information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. Since the set value is set to the initial value later in step (6), it does not have to be cleared in this step.

  (4) Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  (5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that it is in the setting change mode. The notification in the setting change mode performs an initial operation of the accessory or performs a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 may not perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure and state of setting change on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is partially hidden, and the setting is changed. This is because it disturbs the change work.

  The main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special manner that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all the special symbol display LEDs are turned off or on) to stop the progress of the game. . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping detection of winning balls or out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the launch permission signal, stops the launch of the game ball controlled by the launch control device, and functions as a launch disabling unit to notify the setting change mode. Also good. When stopping the launch of the game ball during the setting change mode, it is possible to detect the error when the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period is an error and the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. .

  (6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As described above, the set value can be selected from 1 to 6, and the set value = 0 is a state in which the setting is not set. If the set value = 0, the setting change mode cannot be terminated, and the game (game ball) Launching, variation display game, etc.) does not start.

  (7) Thereafter, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

  (8) The payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Note that although the procedure (1) described above determines whether the main body frame 4 is opened, it may be determined at least once before determining the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973. In this manner, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permission state generating unit that determines whether the setting change condition is satisfied before the setting change is confirmed.

  (9) Further, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

  (10) If the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected setting value and confirms the setting value. Is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as the set value (for example, 8), or may display the confirmed set value blinking for a predetermined time.

  (11) Thereafter, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

  (12) If the setting key 971 is operated to be turned off, the setting change mode is ended, and the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change end command to the main control board 1310. By this setting change end command, the determined setting value is notified to the main control MPU 1311.

  (13) When receiving the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  (14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification that the setting is being changed. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 is informing that the setting is being changed, this is also terminated.

  Note that the notification (including game stop and launch stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered as a notification to the outside (players, hall employees), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode. However, if the notification performed in step (5) is caught from the viewpoint of finding an illegal act, the notification may be canceled after the setting change mode ends and a predetermined time elapses. This is because when a setting change is made, a predetermined display is performed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to discover that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. is there.

  When stopping the launch of a game ball in a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, an error is detected when the handle ball 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during that period, as an error in the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period. May be.

  (15) Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear process after the setting is changed. The RAM clear process after the setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) and the game value (for example, the probability change state, the short time state, the special symbol, and the normal symbol). Data on the reserved storage, information regarding the winning ball), the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clear process after the setting change, unlike the RAM clear process before the setting change, the set value is not initialized.

  Then, the setting change mode ends.

  As described above, when the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the payout control board 951). The main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate to execute the setting change process.

  In the above-described processing, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may determine it. In this case, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 is transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a predetermined number of pulses of a predetermined frequency) is transmitted, or the power supply voltage Alternatively, an intermediate potential signal that is not a ground voltage may be output. In order to prevent an illegal act of starting the setting change mode by short-circuiting the terminal of the setting key 971, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 is issued from the payout control unit 952 by a signal that cannot occur when the terminal is short-circuited. This is because transmission to the substrate 1310 is preferable.

  Next, a setting display process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138B cooperate will be described.

  When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

  (1) In the setting display mode, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In view of the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main body frame 4 may be omitted. .

  (2) When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 transmits a set value request command to the main control board 1310.

  (3) Upon receiving the set value request command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and transmits a set value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

  (4) The payout control unit 952 displays the setting value notified from the main control MPU 1311 by the setting value notification command on the setting display 974.

  In the above description, the set value stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) is displayed on the setting display 974. However, the payout control unit 952 stores the set value and stores it in the payout control unit 952. The set value may be displayed on the setting display 974.

  Next, setting change processing by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 139A will be described.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as a setting change permission state generation unit. Whether the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch. The detection signal of the main body frame opening switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The payout control board 951 may transmit a main body frame opening detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch. Also, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal of the body frame open detection switch to the main control board 1310 as it is. In view of the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main body frame 4 may be omitted. .

  If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting change mode. Other setting change mode start conditions other than those described above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 when the handle lever 504 is touched, and a prepaid card inserted in the CR unit (prepaid The setting change mode does not have to be started when there is a balance in the cash sand). Moreover, it is better not to start the setting change mode even when the pachinko machine 1 detects a possibility of some fraud (for example, a magnetic error). In such a case, it is presumed that it is not the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is going to perform a setting change operation, so it is better not to enter the setting change mode. .

  (3) When the setting change mode is started, when the main control MPU 1311 receives a setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear process before the setting change. The RAM clear process before the setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), and the game state (for example, the probability change state, the short time state, the special symbol or the normal symbol is reserved and stored) , Information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. Since the set value is set to the initial value later in step (6), it does not have to be cleared in this step.

  (4) Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  (5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that it is in the setting change mode. The notification in the setting change mode performs an initial operation of the accessory or performs a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 may not perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure and state of setting change on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is partially hidden, and the setting is changed. This is because it disturbs the change work.

  The main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special manner that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all the special symbol display LEDs are turned off or on) to stop the progress of the game. . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping detection of winning balls or out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the launch permission signal, stops the launch of the game ball controlled by the launch control device, and functions as a launch disabling unit to notify the setting change mode. Also good. When stopping the launch of the game ball during the setting change mode, it is possible to detect the error when the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period is an error and the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. .

  (6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As described above, the set value can be selected from 1 to 6, and the set value = 0 is a state in which the setting is not set. If the set value = 0, the setting change mode cannot be terminated, and the game (game ball) Launching, variation display game, etc.) does not start.

  (7) Thereafter, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

  (8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Note that although the procedure (1) described above determines whether the main body frame 4 is opened, it may be determined at least once before determining the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973. As described above, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting change condition is satisfied before the setting change is confirmed (in particular, whether the detection signal of the main body frame opening switch is input from the payout control board 951). It functions as an allowable state generating means.

  (9) Further, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

  (10) If the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the main control MPU 1311 confirms the selected setting value and confirms that the setting value has been confirmed. This is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as the set value (for example, 8), or may display the confirmed set value blinking for a predetermined time.

  (11) Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

  (13) If the setting key 971 is operated to be off, the setting change mode is ended, and the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  (14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification that the setting is being changed. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 is informing that the setting is being changed, this is also terminated.

  Note that the notification (including game stop and launch stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered as a notification to the outside (players, hall employees), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode. However, if the notification performed in step (5) is caught from the viewpoint of finding an illegal act, the notification may be canceled after the setting change mode ends and a predetermined time elapses. This is because when a setting change is made, a predetermined display is performed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to discover that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. is there.

  When stopping the launch of a game ball in a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, an error is detected when the handle ball 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during that period, as an error in the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period. May be.

  (15) Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear process after the setting is changed. The RAM clear process after the setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) and the game value (for example, the probability change state, the short time state, the special symbol, and the normal symbol). Data on the reserved storage, information regarding the winning ball), the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clear process after the setting change, unlike the RAM clear process before the setting change, the set value is not initialized.

  Then, the setting change mode ends.

  As described above, when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a child board of the main control board 1310 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the main control board 1310). The main control board 1310 acquires the detection signal of the main body frame opening switch from the payout control board 951. Therefore, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate with each other because the main control board 1310 cannot execute the setting change process. The setting change process is executed.

  Next, a setting display process in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 illustrated in FIG. 139B cooperate will be described.

  When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

  In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In view of the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main body frame 4 may be omitted. .

  When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays it on the setting display 974.

  In the setting change processing described with reference to FIGS. 138 (A) and 139 (A), when the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting change mode, the setting change mode is invalidated and the setting change mode is temporarily stopped. Then, by stopping the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 and turning it on again, the stopped setting change mode is resumed. The setting change mode may be restarted from the stage where the setting change mode is stopped due to error detection or from the beginning of the setting change mode (setting value in a state where no setting value is selected = 0).

  The setting value may be changed by recording a history a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the setting is confirmed and the set value that is confirmed are stored in the main control RAM 1312 or the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511. When storing the history of setting values in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store it in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. Furthermore, the recorded history of changes in set values can be output. For example, the history of changes in the recorded setting values may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by a predetermined operation.

  The base value measurement interval may be changed when the set value is changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total number of out balls in the section in which the current base value is being measured is less than 52,000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the gaming performance of the gaming machine is changed according to the setting value, by changing the section by changing the setting value, it is possible to calculate a base value that does not mix different gaming performance, and to grasp the transition of the base value due to the setting value change .

  Further, when the set value is changed, the section in which the current base value is being measured may be continued without changing the section in which the base value is measured. Although the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, a design in which the base value does not change greatly by changing the set value is also possible. In such a case, it is not necessary to change the interval for calculating the base value by changing the set value.

  In addition, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may be activated. When the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are turned on, the setting key 971 is less likely to be erroneously operated in consideration of the operation method and the arrangement of the operating means. This is because the operator's intention is considered. Further, in the setting change mode, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 other than the gaming state and the base value are cleared. Therefore, it is considered sufficient to activate the setting change mode even when RAM clear is desired. .

  On the other hand, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM may be cleared without starting the setting change mode. This is because when both are operated, it is considered that the operator desires at least RAM clear. Further, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, neither the setting change mode activation nor the RAM clear may be performed. This is because it is preferable not to accept an operation whose operator's intention is not clear from the viewpoint of file safety against an erroneous operation.

  In the RAM clearing of the procedures (3) and (15) described above, the game state data is maintained, but the special symbol hold memory may be erased. Where the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, the random number determination result of the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to delete the special symbol hold memory and perform a new lottery.

  On the other hand, special symbol lottery (extraction of random numbers per game) is performed when a game ball is won at the start opening, but the lottery result is determined at the start of the variable display game. What is necessary is just to determine the random value stored on hold. For this reason, you may maintain the reserve memory of a special symbol.

  Further, in the RAM clear in the above steps (3) and (15), the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area to be erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. That is, in the RAM clear process in the setting change mode, the backed-up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased (game state data is also erased), and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. Normally, the settings are changed between the closing of the hall and the opening of the next day, so the game state data (probability change state, short-time state, special symbol and ordinary symbol hold memory, information on prize balls, etc.) is deleted. It is not necessary to maintain without.

[12-2. Production on pachinko machine with setting function]
[12-2-1. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described below. First, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in step S86 in the main control timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are collectively referred to as a start port. In addition, the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are collectively referred to simply as a big prize opening. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as a special symbol.

  In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the game ball is accepted into the starting port, that is, triggered by a winning award (establishment of the start condition), and a big hit for each start memory information (start information) that satisfies the start condition A determination random number is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Based on the lottery result, it is determined whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state. When the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value (predetermined winning conditions are met) Transition from the gaming state to the big hit gaming state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won the big winning opening (step S100). When the game ball B has won a big winning opening (the result of step S100 is “yes”), a big winning opening winning designation command is set (step S102).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a game ball has won a winning opening (step S112). Whether or not a game ball has won at the start port is determined by the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 or the second start port sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control timer interrupt process. This is performed based on the input information read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  The main control MPU 1311, when a game ball wins the start opening (the result of step S114 is “yes”), executes the start opening winning process (step S116). In the start opening winning process, a start opening winning command to be transmitted when a new game ball wins at the starting opening is set, a random number for jackpot determination is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, or a special design For example, processing for executing a pre-reading effect is executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a corresponding process based on a special symbol / electrical accessory action number, which is a game progress state variable in which the type of branch process to be executed in accordance with the progress of the game is specified (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed in accordance with the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to a branch process designated based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area. The process ends. The value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information, and is therefore backed up in the main control side power-off process.

  In the process of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, special symbol variation waiting processing (step S130), special symbol variation processing (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination processing (step S134), as branch processing, Special symbol loss stop processing (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), interval processing before opening a big prize opening (step S140), special winning opening release processing (step S142), processing during closing a big prize opening (step) S144) or the special winning opening opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

  In the special symbol fluctuation waiting process (step S130), based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the starting port, a process of starting the special symbol fluctuation display on the special symbol display is performed.

  In the special symbol variation processing (step S132), processing for controlling variation display of the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), based on the fact that a game ball has entered the start port, it is determined whether or not the special symbol that has been confirmed and stopped generates a jackpot gaming state.

  In the special symbol losing stop process (step S136), when the big hit gaming state is not generated, the special symbol variation display is stopped and a process for notifying the fact is performed. In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when the big hit gaming state is generated, the special symbol variation display is stopped and a process for notifying the fact is performed.

  In the interval process before opening the big prize opening (step S140), a process for notifying that the big hit gaming state is generated and the big hit operation is started is performed. In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), processing relating to a big hit operation that makes it easy for a game ball to enter each big winning opening by performing the opening of the big winning opening is performed.

  In the big winning opening closing process (step S144), processing relating to a big hit operation that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter each big winning opening by performing the closing of the big winning opening from the open state is performed. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the big hit operation is finished, a process for notifying that is performed.

[12-2-2. Special symbol waiting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol variation waiting process. The special symbol variation waiting process is executed in a state where the special symbol variation display is not being executed, and when the variation display is suspended, preparation for starting the special symbol variation display is performed.

  The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of special symbol actuated balls is not zero. Note that the number of special symbol actuated balls is stored for each starting port when a plurality of starting ports are provided. If the special symbol variation is not suspended (the result of step S420 is “no”), the special symbol variation display is not started, and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the variation display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 sets a retained ball number designation command as command data (step S438).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a jackpot determination random number obtained at the time of winning the start opening.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, as the command value, the upper byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area is set as lower command data (step S458). Further, the variable type classification value is acquired from the variable type classification area (step S460), and the upper byte of the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation type is obtained by adding the variation type category value to the command value set in the process of step S452. Is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, a variable state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

  Each command created by the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control timer interruption process.

[12-2-3. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of special symbol operation reservation balls (step S530). The special symbol operation reservation ball number is stored in the special symbol operation reservation ball number buffer. Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets a big hit flag from the big hit flag area (step S538).

  Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the number of special symbol actuated balls and the big hit flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern value extracted by the variation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, the data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value is searched from the special symbol variation time data (step S546).

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation type determination process for selecting a variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The variation type type value acquired by the variation type determination process is set (step S550).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 searches the fluctuation time addition value data corresponding to the fluctuation type type value from the fluctuation time addition value data (step S552). The variation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time corresponding to the number of pseudo consecutive times. The main control MPU 1311 then adds the variation time addition value retrieved in step S552 to the reference variation time value retrieved in step S546 to obtain the final variation time (step S554). . Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol / electrical accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is terminated.

[12-2-4. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment process]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol.

  The main control MPU 1311 first acquires a fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (step S340). The fluctuation table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the fluctuation information source table from the fluctuation information source address table. Fluctuation information source table is hit (win fluctuation selection information state table), out of date (outside fluctuation selection information state table), reach (reach fluctuation selection information state table), reach probability (special symbol reach probability) Table) and table information for referring to the variation type (variation type determination data table).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). It is determined whether or not the jackpot is won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the jackpot value (step S350). When the big hit is won (the result of step S350 is “yes”), the big hit flag and the big hit symbol type are acquired (step S354).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation information number search process based on the big hit flag and the big hit symbol type (step S358). In the fluctuation information number search process, a fluctuation information number for determining a hit fluctuation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the big hit fluctuation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the jackpot variation selection information type table based on the obtained variation information number (step S360).

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not to generate reach in the variable display corresponding to the start winning when the big win or the small win is not won (the result of Step S350 is “no”) (Step S350). S372).

  When the reach is not generated in the variation display (the result of step S372 is “no”), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the variation variation selection information reservation table based on the number of reserved balls (step S372). S376).

  On the other hand, when the reach is generated in the variation display (the result of step S372 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the reach variation selection information state table based on the state flag. (Step S382).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation information number search process based on the variation pattern random number 1 acquired in the process of step S360, step S378, or step S382 (step S388). Then, the fluctuation pattern selection value data table is obtained by the fluctuation information number search process, and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is obtained from the fluctuation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, the variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two stages by using two types of random numbers: variation pattern random number 1 (steps S360, S372, and S378) and variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, the type of variation pattern (a variation pattern group such as XX system reach) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 1. Further, a variation pattern (a value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally displayed is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2. The method of lottery is not limited to the method of lottery in two steps, and a method of lottery in three or more steps may be used, or the variation pattern may be directly selected by one random number for variation pattern.

[12-3. Explanation of production on pachinko machine with setting function]
Hereinafter, effects in the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be described. Specifically, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 having a setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the greater the number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of special lotteries. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability in the uncertain change state (for example, setting 1: 1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, setting 4: 1/270). , Setting 5: 1/250, setting 6: 1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play a game with the pachinko machine 1 set as high as possible, the setting suggestion effect is installed, so that the game motivation increases.

  Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the main control MPU 1311 directly selects a variation pattern with one variation pattern random number in the variation pattern selection determination processing in step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, the main control MPU 1311 performs the following processing in step S542.

  In step S542, the main control MPU 1311 is in the current gaming state (whether it is in the short-time state (the state in which the short-time control is being executed) or in a normal state other than the short-time state), and the result of the special lottery (winning the big hit The variation pattern table is selected in accordance with whether or not When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number for the variation pattern, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number and the distribution of each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table, A variation pattern is selected from the selected variation pattern table. Further, if the result of the special lottery is out of place, it is further determined whether or not reach has occurred, the random number for the fluctuation pattern is obtained, the obtained fluctuation pattern random number, and the distribution of each fluctuation pattern in the selected fluctuation pattern table, Based on the above, it is assumed that the variation pattern is selected from the selected variation pattern table.

  FIG. 144 (A) is an example of the variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out of play. FIG. 144B is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

  The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding effect content column, and a variation pattern determination random number distribution column. The variation pattern type field stores information for identifying the type for identifying the variation pattern in the table. The change time column stores information for specifying the change time in the corresponding change pattern type. The corresponding effect content column stores information for specifying the effect content executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

  The distribution pattern determination random number column stores the distribution for which the corresponding variation pattern is selected for each setting. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern determining distribution random number column of the fluctuation pattern table selected when the special lottery result is out of place (that is, the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144A and FIG. 149A described later) is when the reach occurs. For each of the cases when no reach occurs, the distribution in which the corresponding variation pattern is selected is stored for each setting.

[12-4. Setting suggestion effect executed after temporary display of special lottery results]
First, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern stored in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A) will be described. First, effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 24 to 29 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects executed in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In the fluctuation of the deviation variation pattern 20, after displaying the temporary display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is out of place after the SP reach 1 is executed, the special lottery result is subsequently removed. Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, in the fluctuation of the deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, after displaying the temporary display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be out after the SP reach 1 is executed, A setting suggestion effect is executed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out of place is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  Thus, even if the temporary display is executed by executing the setting suggestion effect after performing the temporary display indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is out of place in the variation patterns 25 to 29. The player can expect a subsequent setting suggestion effect and maintain his expectation. In addition, when a setting suggestion effect occurs due to a deviation, even if the special lottery result is off, the disappointment of the player due to the result of the special lottery can be suppressed, thereby enhancing the feeling of uplifting.

  In the fluctuation of the deviation variation pattern 24, after displaying the temporary display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result will be out after the SP reach 1 is executed, Although the display effect suggesting the execution is executed, the final indication indicating that the special lottery result is out of place is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without performing the setting suggestion effect itself.

  Note that the SP reach is a reach effect that has a high ratio that is selected when the result of the special lottery is a big win and a low ratio that is selected when the result of the special lottery is out of place. That is, the big hit expectation degree of the fluctuation | variation in which SP reach is performed is high.

  Hereinafter, the effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24-29 will be specifically described. In each effect, in addition to the contents described below, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, operation of various movable bodies, and / or display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are executed simultaneously. May be.

  In the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, first, the pre-reach effect is executed. In the pre-reach effect, all the decorative symbols in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 vary. Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, a normal reach effect is developed. In the normal reach production, the decorative pattern is in the reach state in the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, for example, among the three decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol), the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol is in a changing state.

  Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24-29, the SP reach 1 is developed and the first half effect of the SP reach 1 is executed. In the SP reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a game is played. In the first half effect of SP reach 1 in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24-29, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 executes an effect in which the main character loses against the enemy character in a match. It should be noted that during the SP reach, the decorative symbols may be displayed at positions close to the periphery of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, as compared with the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

  Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the latter half of the SP reach 1 is developed. In the second half effect of SP reach 1 in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, for example, a so-called resurgence effect is executed. For example, at the start of the second half effect, the voice of the hero such as “Still More!” Is output from various speakers. On the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect is performed in which the hero character and the enemy character are again challenged. In the second half effect of SP reach 1 in the deviation variation patterns 24 to 29, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 executes an effect in which the hero character loses again against the enemy character due to a game.

  Subsequently, a temporary display in which the special lottery result is out is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one combination of the decorative symbols in the detached state (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol are the same symbols as the symbols stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is The symbol different from the same symbol) is displayed in such a manner that it swings with a small width.

  Subsequently, in the detachment variation pattern 20, after the temporary display, a final display indicating that the special lottery result is irrelevant is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without performing other effects. In the deviation variation pattern 24, a setting suggestion effect is executed after provisional display, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, a setting suggestion effect is executed after provisional display, and then a finalized display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In the fixed display, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the same combination as the combination of decorative symbols displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped manner. In the temporary display and the final display, the decorative symbols are displayed in the center of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the same size as the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect, for example.

  In the setting suggestion gaze effect in the deviation variation pattern 24, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect in which one hero character finds two enemy characters and chases the enemy character but cannot catch it is executed. Like the distribution of the out-of-range variation pattern 24 in FIG. 144 (A), it is desirable that the distribution of the variation pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is executed is uniform or approximately equal in all settings. This is because if the distribution is not uniform, the setting suggestion effect suggests the setting.

  In addition, it is desirable that the ratio of the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 24 to the total of the distribution of the variations for which the SP reach 1 is executed is low (for example, 20% or less). This is because if the distribution is high, the setting suggestion gasse effect frequently occurs when the SP reach 1 is developed, which may reduce the player's expectation for the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect.

  In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one main character finds two enemy characters, chases and catches the enemy characters, and then the three players play the game. An effect is performed.

  In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 25, an effect that makes a goo with all three people playing in the Janken game with three people is executed. In FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 25 is determined so as to be distributed only at the low setting (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 25 is an effect in which the low setting is confirmed.

  In the example of FIG. 144 (A), the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 is the same value as the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 26 and the like in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6), but the low setting finalization effect is generated. If it occurs, the player may stop the game at an early stage. Therefore, the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of other setting confirmation effects in other settings, or the variation variation pattern. 25 itself may not exist.

  In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 26, an effect that is confused when all three players play a chorus in a game of three players. In FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 26 is determined so as to be distributed only at the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 26 is an effect in which the high setting is confirmed.

  In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 27, an effect that plays a par with all three players in a Janken game with three people is executed. In FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 27 is determined so as to be distributed only in the even setting (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 27 is an effect in which the even setting is confirmed.

  In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 28, an effect is performed in which three people take different hands in a match between three people. In FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 28 is determined so as to be distributed only in the odd number setting (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 28 is an effect in which the odd setting is determined.

  For example, when the odd setting and the even setting have different characteristics, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect by installing the odd setting confirmation effect or the even setting confirmation effect as described above. .

  Specifically, for example, in the order of settings 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1, the normal state big hit winning probability is high (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest), and the settings 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, In the order of 2, the percentage of probability variation jackpot winnings is high (5 is the highest, 2 is the lowest), and the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 in the order of the settings 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 It is assumed that the jackpot winning probability and the probability variation ratio are determined in each setting so that the ratio of the total number of game balls paid out to the number of winning game balls to is high (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest).

  In this case, compared to the odd setting, the even setting has a high probability of winning big hits in the normal state, but the probability variation rate is low, i.e., the number of game balls required to win the so-called first win is likely to be small. The total amount of game balls that can be obtained from a single villa from the beginning tends to be small. On the other hand, odd-numbered settings have a higher probability of change, that is, the number of game balls required to win the first win is higher than the even-numbered setting, although the probability of winning big hits in the normal state is low. The total amount of game balls that can be obtained in a single recreational resort from is likely to increase. In such a case, there is a possibility that a certain player may prefer an even-numbered appearance tendency and another player may prefer an odd-numbered appearance tendency. The player's interest in the production increases. Further, the even setting may have a feature such that a big hit with a small number of rounds is easily selected instead of a high probability of winning a big hit in a normal state as compared with an odd setting.

  In the above-described deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, the production until the setting suggestion production starts is the same, but the contents of the setting suggestion production are different (results in the Janken game with three people are different). In addition, it is desirable that the Janken game effect with three people is used only with the deviation variation patterns 25-29. As a result, at the point when the Janken game effect is started with three players, the player can recognize that the setting suggestion effect has started, and the feeling of uplifting is further increased.

  For example, the deviation variation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an effect in which a high setting is confirmed is executed, but may be a variation pattern in which an effect suggesting that the possibility of a high setting is high is executed. Specifically, for example, if there is a distribution of the variation pattern 25 even at a low setting, and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the variation pattern 25 at a high setting (for example, 50% or less), the effect in the out-of-range variation pattern 25 Is not an effect in which a high setting is confirmed, but an effect that suggests that the possibility of a high setting is high.

  In addition to the variation pattern in which the effect that confirms the high setting is executed, a variation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the possibility of the high setting is high as described above may be defined. The same applies to the low setting confirmed effect, the odd setting confirmed effect, the even setting confirmed effect, the highest setting confirmed effect, and the like.

  In addition, according to the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (B) (variation pattern table at the time of normal and big hit winning), when the special lottery result is a big hit in the normal state, other than the hit fluctuation pattern 34 in which the highest setting is determined. The setting suggestion effect is not executed. In addition, the distribution of the variation pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is higher than the case where the special lottery result is out of place. Thereby, the setting suggestion effect is an effect that is executed mainly when the special lottery result is out of place, and the player can obtain a sense of expectation even when the special lottery result is out of place.

[12-5. Setting suggestion effect using shortening variation]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A).

  In the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, the shortening variation is executed. The shortening variation is, for example, a variation having a short variation time compared to other variation patterns, and after the variation of the decorative pattern is started on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, all the decorations are not developed. This is the fluctuation that the symbol stops. In the normal variation, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbols stop in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. However, in the shortened variation, all the decorative symbols may stop at the same time.

  Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, after performing a temporary display indicating that the possibility that the special lottery result is out is high, a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out is performed. The description of the temporary display and the fixed display is the same as that described above, and will be omitted.

  The deviation variation pattern 30 has a variation time different from the variation times of all other variation patterns in which the shortening variation such as the deviation variation patterns 1 and 2 is executed. In the example of FIG. 144 (A), the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. . In FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 30 is determined so as to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 30 is executed, the highest setting is determined.

  In addition, the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 30 that is the variation pattern in which the shortening variation is executed and suggests the setting is extremely low compared to the distribution of the other variation pattern in which the shortening variation is performed (for example, the other variation pattern). Is preferably 10% or less of the minimum allocation of Further, in each variation pattern in which the shortening variation is executed, it is desirable that the execution time of the temporary display and the fixed display is the same and only the shortening variation time is different. Further, it is desirable that the difference between the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern in which another shortening fluctuation is executed is such that the player can recognize (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). .

  Thereby, when the shortening variation is executed, the player assumes a variation time such as the variation variation patterns 1 and 2 that are often distributed, but when the variation variation pattern 30 is performed, the assumed variation time and You can recognize the difference and enjoy the effect that the highest setting is fixed. In particular, in the example of FIG. 144 (A), since the variation pattern including the shortening variation is selected only when the reach is out of reach, the player loses his expectation when the shortening variation is executed, and is interested in the shortening variation. I can't hold it. However, by executing the setting suggestion effect using the shortening variation in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation even for the shortening variation that is selected only when the reach is out of reach, and the decrease in interest is suppressed. can do.

  In the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, the content displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is the same, but only the shortening variation time is different. Thereby, the player can be concentrated on the production so as not to miss the highest setting finalization production.

  The deviation variation pattern 30 is a variation pattern in which the highest setting is confirmed and the shortening variation is executed. However, for each setting other than the highest setting, the variation in which the setting is confirmed and the shortening variation is executed. There may be a pattern. In this case, for example, the variation time of each variation pattern is preferably different from the variation times of other outlier variation patterns in which the shortening variation is executed.

[12-6. Setting suggestion effect executed before temporary display of special lottery results]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects executed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In FIG. 144, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are determined so as to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are executed, the highest setting is determined.

  In the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, for example, the special movie 1 flows in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 simultaneously with the start of the variation. The special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, that is, an effect in which the highest setting is determined.

  In the deviation variation pattern 31, after the special movie 1 is finished, a temporary display indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is out is performed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out is performed. In the winning variation pattern 34, after the special movie 1 is finished, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a winning is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a winning is performed.

  Unlike the deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 30 and the like, the deviation fluctuation pattern 31 and the hit fluctuation pattern 34 start the setting suggestion effect before the temporary display (specifically, for example, simultaneously with the fluctuation start). Thereby, the player can obtain an exhilaration feeling waiting for notification of the big hit lottery result in a state where the highest setting is confirmed. In particular, when the display time of the special movie 1 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is the highest setting, and as a result, the player Can feel a sense of superiority with respect to the other player, and it is easy for the hall to appeal that the highest setting is used for the other player.

[12-7. Setting suggestion effect that wins big hit or high setting is decided]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects executed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 32 is determined to be distributed only at the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 32 is executed, the highest setting is determined.

  In the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35, for example, the special movie 2 flows in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 simultaneously with the start of the variation. The special movie 2 is an effect generated only by the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34.

  In the deviation variation pattern 32, after the special movie 2 is finished, a temporary display indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is out is performed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out is performed. In the winning variation pattern 35, after the special movie 2 is finished, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a winning is performed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a winning is performed.

  Accordingly, when the special movie 2 occurs, one of the high setting or the big hit in the change is determined. In other words, if the special lottery result is out of play after the special movie 2 occurs, the high setting is confirmed, so the player can suppress the discouragement that the special lottery result was out, and thus high An uplifting feeling can be obtained by confirming.

  In particular, when the display time of the special movie 2 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player can feel a sense of superiority with respect to other players and the special movie 2 is generated. When the result of the special lottery is out of the way, it becomes easier for the hole to appeal to other players that the high setting is used.

[12-8. Setting suggestion effect in a short time state]
Hereinafter, the variation pattern selected when the gaming state is the short state will be described. FIG. 149 (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the short-time state and the result of the special lottery is out of play. FIG. 149 (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is a short-time state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

  In the example of FIG. 149 (A), the higher the setting is, the larger the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 3 and the smaller the variation of the deviation variation pattern 2 at the time of detachment without reach. Further, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 is shorter than the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 3. For example, if the higher the setting is, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot, assuming that the distribution of each variation pattern is the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a shorter time, and the per unit time The number of game balls to be paid out increases, which may lead to a burden on the hall.

  However, as shown in the example of FIG. 149 (A), the higher the setting is, the more variation patterns with a longer variation time are allocated, so that the number of game balls paid out by jackpot per unit time in each setting can be made equal. it can. Also, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of the deviation variation pattern 3 having a long variation time among variation patterns including shortening variation, and therefore the variation variation pattern 3 also functions as a variation pattern that suggests a high setting. Can do.

  Similarly, when the reach is off, similarly, the higher the setting, the greater the distribution of the out-of-fluctuation pattern 11 with a long variation time, and the small distribution of the out-of-variation pattern 12 with a short variation time. Similarly, at the time of winning the big hit, the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the hit variation pattern 2 with a longer variation time, and the smaller the allocation of the hit variation pattern 3 with a shorter variation time.

  As described above, for example, if the higher the setting is, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot, and if the distribution of each variation pattern is the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a shorter time. In other words, the lower the setting, the longer it takes to win the jackpot, and the greater the number of game balls fired before winning the jackpot. For example, if the setting is low, the distribution of the variation pattern with a long variation time becomes large, and if the selection rate of the variation pattern with a short variation time becomes small, each player who stops the launch of the game ball during the variation The number of game balls fired per unit time in the setting can be made uniform.

  It should be noted that a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light emission effect may be executed at the timing when the setting is suggested in the various setting suggestion effects described in this chapter. Note that the predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emission effect may be dedicated only to be executed only during the setting suggestion effect. In particular, in the setting suggestion effect in which the high setting or the highest setting is confirmed, it is preferable that a predetermined sound effect output or a predetermined light emission effect, which is executed only by the setting suggestion effect, be executed.

  It should be noted that it is desirable that the distribution of the variation pattern in which the high setting or the highest setting is fixed or the effect suggesting that there is a high possibility is performed is extremely low compared to the distribution of other variation patterns. If the fluctuation pattern is high, the player loses his expectation if the high setting suggestion effect or the highest setting suggestion effect is not executed even though the player has played a small amount of game time. This is because there is a risk of discontinuation.

  In addition, it is desirable that the distribution of the variation pattern in which the effect that suggests that the low setting or the minimum setting is confirmed or that the possibility is high is executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of other variation patterns. This is because if the variation pattern is highly distributed, the low setting suggestion effect and the minimum setting suggestion effect are frequently executed, so that the player may lose his expectation and eventually stop the game at an early stage.

  Moreover, although the setting suggestion effect which suggests the group of settings, such as a high setting, a low setting, the highest setting, an odd number setting, and an even setting, was demonstrated, the group of the setting in a setting suggestion effect is not restricted to these. A setting suggestion effect for an arbitrary group of one or more settings may be executed. For example, the settings 1 and 2 may be grouped as a low setting, the settings 3 and 4 may be set as an intermediate setting, and the settings 5 and 6 may be set as a high setting.

[12-9. Other forms of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In the drawing, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a dotted line.

  In the above description, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting indicator 974. The setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974.

  FIG. 150A shows a main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without being broken once closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

  FIG. 150B shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 150B, a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310 in addition to the main control MPU 1311 and a driver circuit (not shown). The RAM clear switch 954 may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board) without being mounted on the main control board 1310. In this case, the hole 954A is not provided in the main control board box 1320.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, two operation units (a RAM clear switch 954 and a setting key 971) are provided in the main control board box 1320 as an opportunity to clear the RAM. As will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 from which data is erased is different when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

  The setting board 970 is provided in the vicinity of the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be connected to each other directly by a connector or by an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting indicator 974 for displaying a setting value selected or selected are mounted. A setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

  Outputs of various switches 971, 972, and 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to a port of the main control MPU 1311.

  Further, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970.

  Since the main control board box 1320 is arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting indicator 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position where it can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, an authentication code for each manufacturer of the pachinko machine is set on the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads and collates the authentication code set on the setting board 970. If the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from starting a game. That is, a game ball can be launched toward the game area, but even if a prize is entered in the prize opening, the prize ball is not paid out and the variable display game is not executed. The authentication code may be set for each model of the pachinko machine, or a serial number for each pachinko machine may be set. For example, the authentication code can be set using a DIP switch, jumper wire, jumper pin, pattern short circuit, or the like provided on the setting board 970, or a logic circuit (for example, an authentication code is set). A small capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) may be mounted on the setting board 970.

  Further, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. For example, when the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 output different signals to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. To do. Specifically, the setting board 970 outputs + 5V, and the dummy board 979 outputs 0V (ground level). Signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 are input to specific ports of the interface circuit 1331 circuit of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 determines a connected board based on an input signal to the port.

  In this way, by changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (for each model), it is possible to prevent erroneous setting board 970 from being mounted on the main control board box 1320. Further, by setting an authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, unauthorized replacement of the setting board 970 can be prevented.

  FIG. 150C shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG.

  As described above, in recent years, some pachinko machines 1 have a game performance setting function. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine related to a prize ball that the player acquires, such as a big hit probability in a special symbol variation display game, and the setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine 1 according to the business policy of the hall. On the other hand, there are halls that think that conventional pachinko machines that do not have a setting function are sufficient, and that no setting function is required. For this reason, the manufacturers of pachinko machines need to design and produce both pachinko machines that do not have a setting function and pachinko machines that have a setting function. There is a demand for efficient design and production of pachinko machines.

  For this reason, in the pachinko machine 1 having no setting function, the pachinko machine 1 can be produced in the same manner as when the dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970 and the setting board 970 is mounted. To. Further, the main control board 1310 can be shared by a pachinko machine having no setting function and a pachinko machine having a setting function.

  The dummy substrate 979 is not mounted with devices such as the setting key 971 and the setting display 974 mounted on the setting substrate 970, but may have a pattern for mounting these devices. That is, a pattern for mounting a device is provided on the dummy substrate 979, but the device is not mounted on the pattern.

  The dummy substrate 979 may be a member (for example, a unit configured with a resin case) that can be attached to the main control substrate box 1320 at the same position as the setting substrate 970 without being configured with a printed circuit board.

  Further, since the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is terminated by a dummy resistor in the dummy board 979, not open or ground. Good. This can prevent the driver circuit from being damaged due to overcurrent. When the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate serial communication with the main control board 1310.

  When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 971A. A small door that can be moved so as to close the hole 971A can be operated from the inside of the main control board box 1320 and cannot be operated from the outside, so that a setting function is provided. The pachinko machine having no setting function, the pachinko machine having the setting function, and the main control board box 1320 may be shared.

  An authentication code for authenticating the main control board 1310 may also be set on a dummy board 979 described later. The dummy board 979 does not require authentication by the main control board 1310, and an authentication code may not be set. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

  The variations of the operation means mounted on the setting board 970 described above are summarized as follows.

(1) With setting change switch 972 and setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after the setting change switch 972 is operated to select a setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(2) With setting change switch 972 and without setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after the setting change switch 972 is operated to select a setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without setting change switch 972, with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select a setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned to the right to select a setting value to be set.

(4) Without setting change switch 972, without setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select a setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned to the right to select a setting value to be set.

  151 and 152 are diagrams showing another mounting example of the main control board 1310. In the drawing, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a dotted line.

  The mounting example shown in FIGS. 151 and 152 differs from the mounting example shown in FIG. 150 in that a small door 1321 is provided in the main control board box 1320.

  FIG. 151 (A) shows a main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. As described above, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without being broken once closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A for operating 976 is provided.

  The hole 976A is normally covered with a small door 1321. The small door 1321 is provided with a key unit 1322, and by operating the key 975 inserted into the key hole of the key unit 1322, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, and the hole 976A is exposed and set. The mode switch 976 can be operated.

  As shown in FIG. 152A, in a normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the hook 1323 is at the maximum projecting position from the key unit 1322, the hook 1323 is inserted into the receiving seat 1324, and the hook 1323 and the receiving seat 1324 are inserted. And the small door 1321 is fixed in the closed position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 152 (B), when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the collar 1323 is retracted from the maximum projecting position, and the engagement between the collar 1323 and the seat 1324 is released. The small door 1321 can be opened with the hinge 1325 as an axis. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 152B), the hole 976A is exposed and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

  FIG. 153 is a diagram showing still another example of mounting the main control board 1310. In the mounting example shown in FIG. 153, a key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980 that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, by inserting and operating the key 975 in the keyhole of the key unit 1322, the back cover 980 is opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 (setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It becomes possible.

  That is, in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 is fixed by closing the back side of the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 is housed in the back cover 980. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the back cover 980 can be opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the back cover 980 is exposed to the back side. The setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

  When the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have the configuration shown in FIG. 151 (C). Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without being broken once closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. Is provided with a hole 976A. The main control board box 1320 accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970. On the main control board 1310, a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted in addition to a main control MPU and a driver circuit (not shown). The RAM clear switch 954 may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board) without being mounted on the main control board 1310. In this case, the hole 954A is not provided in the main control board box 1320.

  The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be connected to each other directly by a connector or by an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying the setting value selected or selected are mounted. A setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

[12-10. Details of setting change process]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 154 is different from the initialization process described above with reference to FIG. 101 in that the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key 971 is operated (steps S17 and S30). The same steps as those in the initialization process described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 101 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and enables the writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates a built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and checks whether a predetermined wait time (a time necessary for the activation of the sub board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S18).

  The RAM clear switch 954 may be detected immediately after the power is turned on (for example, before step S12), the detection result is stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value is determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after the power is turned on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after the power is turned on.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated and the output is ON (step S17). If the setting key 971 is not operated, it is a normal RAM clearing operation, so the process proceeds to step S30, and a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is operated, that is, when the power is turned on while both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the mode shifts to the setting change mode. That is, since it is necessary to operate the two switches and the power switch in order to start the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation that erroneously starts the setting change mode.

  In the setting change mode, first, the setting value is displayed (step S60). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for reading the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and displaying it on the setting display 974. And a security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal that is output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is extremely rare to put the pachinko machine 1 into the setting change mode during the game, and it is possible for fraud This is because the hall computer should be notified when it changes to the setting change mode during business hours.

  Whether the security signal is output for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode, or output from the start to the end of the setting change mode, or until a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode It may be output. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the period during which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer and the security can be further improved.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting change operation has been performed based on whether or not the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S62), changes the setting value in accordance with the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes it to the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is configured by a push button switch, the setting value is changed by one step when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once. When the setting key 971 also serves as the setting change switch 972, the setting value is changed by one step when the setting key 971 is turned right once. Then, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for displaying the changed set value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether to end the setting change mode and confirm the set value (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects an operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting change mode is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S30. Further, the setting change mode may be ended by an operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position. Moreover, you may complete | finish a setting change mode in response to operation | movement of the other switch and sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1.

  In the process described above, after the setting change mode is completed or when it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30, but may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting change mode is finished, it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20), it is determined whether the checksums match (step S22), the power failure flag is not set, and the check is performed. If the thumbs do not match, a predetermined area of the internal RAM 1312 is initialized. If it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30.

  After the end of the setting change mode, in step S30, the set value data, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) and the game state (for example, the probability change state, The data of time saving state, special symbol or ordinary symbol hold storage, information regarding prize ball is left, and other data is erased, and the process proceeds to step S24. Note that the game state data may be erased without remaining. In this case, the storage area erased by the RAM area erased after the setting change operation is the same as the storage area erased by the RAM clear operation.

  On the other hand, if an operation for ending the setting change mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62, and further a setting change operation is detected.

  If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected in step S17, the setting value data and the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 in step S30. ) And the other data are deleted, and the process proceeds to step S24.

  If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected in step S18, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the power failure flag is set without erasing data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 (step S20). .

  As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 erases the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128). (Step S30), the process proceeds to Step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and uses the checksum calculated at the previous power shutdown to check the data calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312. The sum and the checksum stored in step S48 are compared (verified) (step S22).

  As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up to the work area. The stored data (except for the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 is executed. Proceed to

  In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 deletes the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There are a power failure flag abnormality that is not set (step S20), a RAM abnormality that does not match the RAM checksum (step S22), and a base calculation work abnormality (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the gaming state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area). (For example, the probability change state, the short time state, the special symbol or ordinary symbol hold memory, information regarding the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, or when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack) The base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. In the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

  Unlike the illustrated case, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 are not guaranteed. May be cleared. If the entire RAM area is cleared when the base calculation work is abnormal, the data indicating the gaming state is lost and the normal calculation cannot be executed, and the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area It is better to initialize only. If the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is You don't have to clear it.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is used for base calculation for each data type (game control area 13126 (setting value, game state data)). Area 13128) Erasing under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value every time the RAM is cleared, and the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall becomes complicated. Therefore, the set value is prevented from being erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

  For the processing after step S28, either one of FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) for calculating and storing a check code from data in the base calculation work area (base calculation region 13128) when the power is turned off.

  In the initialization process described above, the setting check process is not executed, but is executed in a setting check process called from a timer interrupt process described later (FIGS. 155 and 156). May be executed. By executing the setting confirmation process in the initialization process, the setting confirmation can be permitted only when the power is turned on, and the confirmation of the setting value due to an inadvertent operation during the operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented.

  In this case, a setting confirmation operation unit (for example, a push button switch) is provided separately from the setting key 971 (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of the setting confirmation operation unit). When the setting confirmation operation unit is operated, data for reading the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and displaying it on the setting display 974 is generated, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 974. Good. Also in this case, it is preferable to output a security signal along with the display of the set value.

  The main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment may not immediately execute the RAM clear process even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and the power is turned on with the setting key 971 turned on, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clear process, and executes the RAM clear process after a predetermined condition is satisfied (end of the setting change mode). In the setting change mode, it can be said that the main control MPU 1311 is controlled to store the execution of the RAM clear process. On the other hand, if the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting change mode (step S30).

  The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described in detail above. Next, the clearing of the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be described.

  After the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control unit may be cleared at the same time. Further, the RAM of the payout control unit 952 need not be cleared. Further, whether to clear the RAM of the payout control unit by an operation may be switched. For example, when the setting key 971 is turned on and the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 and the payout control unit 952 are cleared, and the setting key 971 is turned on. When the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared. In this way, by changing the operation method, a part of the main control RAM 1312 is cleared, and a process in which the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared can be executed.

  Further, when clearing the RAMs of the main control RAM 1312 and the payout control unit 952, there is a difference between the timing at which the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the timing at which the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared depending on whether or not the setting key 971 is operated. May occur. That is, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, when the payout control unit 952 detects an operation of the RAM clear switch 954, it immediately clears the RAM. For this reason, depending on the conditions (operations), the RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared, but the main control RAM 1312 may not be cleared.

  In addition to the case where the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310, the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 also operates the RAM clear switch 954 when changing the set value. When the power is turned on, the RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared. That is, the payout control unit 952 does not clear the RAM by the RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, but the payout control unit 952 detects the level of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. And whether to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is determined. Providing a RAM clear switch on the payout control board 951 has the effect of being compatible with various models without changing the frame side control program.

[12-11. Details of setting confirmation process]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 155 is different from the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. The object ratio calculation / display process is deleted. In addition, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a setting value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operation ratio of the condition device) is added. The same steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 23 and 104 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the gaming value to an area corresponding to the current gaming state, and then adds a base calculation area 13128 ( 103) is updated, and the base value is calculated (step S801, refer to FIGS. 105 and 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80). .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S86). Step S88) is executed.

  Thereafter, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a setting value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation process, the employee in the hall performs a predetermined operation to display the current setting value on the setting display 974. Details of the setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) are executed.

  Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process is completed, the timer interrupt process is terminated and the process before the interrupt is restored.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting check process of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called and executed from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 155).

  In the setting confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting confirmation operation is being performed (step S8061). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated. When the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is triggered (step S17 in FIG. 154). When the setting key 971 is operated during the operation, the setting confirmation operation is performed and the current setting can be displayed.

  If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, so that data for not displaying the setting value is generated and the setting value is hidden (step S8065).

  On the other hand, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062).

  As a setting display condition, it is determined whether the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 based on the output of the frame opening switch. Since the setting key 971 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is opened. However, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected even though the outer frame 2 is closed, it is estimated that some abnormality (failure or fraud) has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and in this case the setting is made. It is better not to display. Since the setting indicator 974 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting indicator 974 cannot be seen unless the outer frame 2 is opened, and there is no need to display the setting.

  The set value may be displayed at any time during operation of the pachinko machine 1. Moreover, you may provide the setting display conditions which can be displayed in specific time. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer that measures the elapsed time from power-on (or the CPU initial setting in step S28) and display the set value until the timer expires.

  Moreover, you may provide the setting display conditions which can display a setting value in a specific gaming state. For example, the setting display condition cannot be displayed during the special symbol variation display or the big hit game. That is, a setting display condition is provided that enables the set value to be displayed in a period other than during special symbol fluctuation and jackpot. The set value may not be displayed in a gaming state other than those described above. In this case, when the setting key is operated during the special symbol variation game or the big hit game, the set value may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation game or the big hit game ends.

  If it is determined that the setting display condition is satisfied, a security signal is output (step S8063). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal that is output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is rare that the pachinko machine 1 confirms the setting during the game, which is a prelude to fraud. This is because if a setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours, the hall computer should be notified.

  The security signal may be output for a predetermined time from the start of the set value display, output from the start of the set value display to the end, or output for a predetermined period after the set value display ends. Good. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the display of the set value, the period during which the abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be further improved.

  In the illustrated setting confirmation process, the security signal is transmitted when the setting display condition is satisfied. However, even if the setting display condition is not satisfied, the security signal is transmitted when the setting confirmation operation (operation of the setting key 971) is detected. Good.

  Thereafter, the set value is displayed (step S8064). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for reading the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and displaying it on the setting display 974.

  If the setting display condition is not satisfied, the condition is checked until the setting display condition is satisfied. However, there is a possibility that the loop cannot be escaped from the loop for a long time. The confirmation process may be terminated. For example, if it is determined that the set value is not displayed because the special symbol variation display is in progress, and the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the setting display condition may be satisfied when the special symbol variation display ends. The setting value is displayed. Further, when the setting condition is not satisfied, the setting confirmation process may be terminated immediately without repeating the confirmation of the setting condition.

  At this time, it may be included in the special symbol fluctuation display start condition that the set value is not being displayed. In this way, a new special symbol variation display is not started while the set value is being displayed, and a new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is not displayed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the set value can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, the set value can be confirmed without disturbing other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the setting value is displayed with priority during the setting confirmation. Therefore, although the base value is calculated, the base value is not displayed. In a gaming state in which a lot of prize balls are paid out in a short time, there is a case where it is desired to confirm a change in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without hindering the real-time display of the base value.

[12-12. Security signal output when setting is changed or checked]
FIG. 157 is a timing diagram of security signals output in accordance with setting change and setting confirmation.

  As described above, the security signal is output during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation (S61 in FIG. 154, S8063 in FIG. 156).

  In the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157 (A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be longer than the time that the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be one second or shorter or several tens of seconds long.

  Further, the security signal may be output during a period from the start to the end of the setting change mode, not the predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode.

  Further, in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157 (B), a security signal may be output for a predetermined time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clear process executed in accordance with the setting change mode.

  At the time of setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157 (C), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of setting confirmation. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be longer than the time that the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be one second or shorter or several tens of seconds long.

  Further, the security signal may be output during a period from the start to the end of the setting check (a period during which the set value is displayed) instead of a predetermined time from the start of the setting check.

  When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time (T seconds) from the detection of the error, as shown in FIG. 157 (D). When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157 (E), a security signal is output for a predetermined time from the detection of the error. That is, the security signal resulting from the setting confirmation and the security signal resulting from the error detection are continuously output over a predetermined time (T seconds) (a predetermined time from the error detection). Even when an error is detected during setting confirmation, it is not necessary to extend the output time of the security signal. That is, even if an error is detected during the security signal output, the security signal resulting from the error detection is not output and is absorbed by the security signal being output.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 does not detect an error during the setting change mode, the security signal resulting from the setting confirmation and the security signal resulting from the error detection do not overlap. In other words, in the setting change mode, the output time of the security signal is not extended even if an error occurs, but the output time of the security signal is extended if an error occurs during setting confirmation.

[12-13. Another example of setting check processing]
Hereinafter, another example of the setting confirmation process will be described. In the above description, the example in which the setting check process is performed in the timer interrupt process in the peripheral control unit steady process has been mainly described. However, in the following, the setting check process is performed in the initialization process when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. An example will be described.

  Specifically, for example, when the setting key is on when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the process proceeds to the setting confirmation process. Details of the process will be described below. Note that the timer interrupt process executed by the peripheral control MPU in this chapter is the timer interrupt process in FIG. 23 (that is, the timer interrupt process not including the setting confirmation process in step S802).

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the initialization process. Differences from FIG. 154 will be described. When the main control MPU 1311 determines in step S18 that the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (step S18: No), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step). S29).

  If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is on (step S29: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 proceeds to the setting confirmation processing in step S807, and then proceeds to step S20. The setting confirmation process in step S807 will be described later. If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is OFF (step S29: No), the main control MPU 1311 proceeds to step S20.

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the setting check process (the setting check process in step S807). Differences from FIG. 156 will be described. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting display condition is satisfied without performing the process of step S8061 (step S8062). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 outputs a security signal (step S8063) and displays the set value (step S8064). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the setting display condition is not satisfied (step S8062: No), the main control MPU 1311 executes the process of step S8062 again.

  The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting key 971 has been operated following the process of step S8064 and the output is OFF (step S8071). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is on (step S8071: No), for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the determination in step S8071 again. If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is OFF (step S8071: YES), the main control MPU 1311 hides the setting value (step S8075) and ends the setting confirmation process. That is, when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the setting confirmation state is entered.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation, the number of reserved storage managed by the main control board 1310, the remaining variation time in the special symbol, and the like are stored as they are. After that, when the setting confirmation processing is performed at the next power-on (when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 turned on), after the setting confirmation processing is completed (setting without turning off the power) The special symbol variation resumes after the key 971 is returned to the initial position. At this time, for example, the effects that have been executed together with the special symbol variation (the effect using the display device, the effect using the lamp, the sound effect using the speaker, the effect using the movable body, etc.) Nothing will happen after the change resumes.

  In addition, if the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, the special symbol variation is performed when the special symbol variation is resumed after the setting confirmation process is completed. The production that was being performed together may be resumed. For example, the effect using the display device, the lamp, and the speaker, which has been interrupted, is resumed. In addition, for the effect using the movable body, for example, after the special symbol change is resumed or after the movable body is returned to the initial position when the power is turned on, the movable body is set to operate in the effect production pattern. If so, the movable body is operated according to the effect pattern.

  In other words, when the movable body is not in the initial position, if the setting confirmation state is entered, it is returned to the initial position once when the power is turned on or when the setting confirmation processing is completed, and then based on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. If the effect that moves (moves) the movable body is included in the determined effect, the movable body may be operated (moved). When the movable body is moving (moving), if the setting confirmation state is entered, the operation (movement) movement pattern may not be executed, or the movable body may be returned to the initial position once. The movable body may be operated as long as the pattern is operable even from the beginning.

  In addition, if the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, the special symbol variation is performed when the special symbol variation is resumed after the setting confirmation process is completed. Among the effects performed together, the effects using the display device, the effects using the lamp, and the sound effects using the speaker are resumed, and the movable body is set to the initial position after the special symbol variation is resumed or when the power is turned on. There is no need to perform the effect using the movable body.

  Further, when the setting check process is performed when the power is turned on next time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change, the main liquid crystal display device is used when the special symbol change is resumed after the completion of the setting check process. The decoration pattern displayed in 1600 may be resumed (originally scheduled resumption is resumed), or until the symbol is confirmed in the decoration pattern variation (or until the fluctuation fluctuation just before the symbol is confirmed). ) High-speed fluctuation with the decorative symbol made transparent may be performed, or the decorative symbol may be hidden until the symbol is determined (or until the fluctuation fluctuation just before the symbol is determined). Further, at the time of symbol determination, for example, a combination of decorative symbols scheduled before turning off the power is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Also, in this case, at the end of the special symbol variation after resumption, a combination of a predetermined decorative symbol, a decorative symbol combination that is displayed when the initial power is turned on, or a special decorative symbol that is not displayed during normal special symbol variation. A combination (for example, “xxx” or the like) may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  Note that the setting key 971 is turned off when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol fluctuation and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, and the setting confirmation process is completed and the normal state is restored. The same initial operation as when the power is turned on (that is, when the power is normally turned on) (for example, a predetermined operation of the movable body, a predetermined light emission of the LED, etc.) may be performed. (After performing this initial operation, the above-mentioned effects may be resumed).

  In addition, when the pre-reading effect is performed during the special symbol change and the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special confirmation after the setting confirmation process is completed. When resuming the symbol variation, the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect on the special symbol variation that was put on hold immediately before turning off the power are not executed (specifically, for example, before the power is turned off). The special zone that was displayed during the fluctuation of the special symbol that had been displayed (for example, a special stage that shows the player that the expectation of jackpot is high across multiple fluctuations, from the rival horse production described later to the horse racing production) Evolving zones (horse racing productions have a higher expectation level (for example, special zones set with higher expectations than the dialogue production described later)) Clearing or display effect in zones such, when aspects of the hold display was blue rather than for example conventional white, or return to normal white). However, a pre-reading effect may be executed for the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning after the setting confirmation process.

  In addition, when the pre-reading effect is performed during the special symbol change and the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special confirmation after the setting confirmation process is completed. When the symbol change is resumed, the pre-reading effect during the special symbol change is canceled (specifically, for example, the special zone displayed during the special symbol change that was performed before the power was turned off) The standby display or the display effect in the special zone is erased, or when the display of the hold display is blue instead of normal white, for example, it is returned to normal white) The pre-reading effect may be resumed from the special symbol change (the erased display may be restored, or if it is an effect pattern that promotes the pre-reading effect at the start of the change, it may be restored in the display mode after promotion. Good . In this case, the prefetching effect executed from the next special symbol variation is resumed, for example, as the prefetching effect during the special symbol variation has not been canceled. That is, before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1, the pre-reading effect that is scheduled to be executed after the next special symbol change is executed. In addition, a new prefetch effect pattern may be set and the new prefetch pattern effect may be executed from the next special symbol variation.

[12-14. Another example of setting suggestion]
Hereinafter, an example of processing in which execution of the setting suggestion effect is restricted will be described. In the following description, it is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of setting 1 to setting 6 in normal times are 1/240, 1/230, 1/220, 1/210, 1/200, 1/190, respectively, Assume that the jackpot probabilities of setting 1 to setting 6 at the time are 1/48, 1/46, 1/44, 1/42, 1/40, and 1/38, respectively. In addition, it is assumed that the probability variation rate at the time of winning the big hit is 50%.

[12-13-1. Fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 160 is another example of the variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. In the description of FIG. 142 and the like, the example in which the variation pattern table exists for each winning type of the special lottery result has been described. However, in the example of FIG. 160, the variation pattern for each winning type of the special lottery result in one variation pattern table. Is defined. In the example of FIG. 160, it is assumed that a common variation pattern table is used for all settings.

  The variation pattern table of FIG. 160 shows the correspondence between the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, the outline of the effect of the variation pattern, and the selection rate. As described above, in the example of FIG. 160, information on the variation pattern of each special lottery result is stored in one variation pattern table. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 selects the variation pattern corresponding to the winning type corresponding to the winning according to the selection rate indicated by the variation pattern table. Note that, as in the example of FIG. 144, the variation time of each variation pattern may be defined in the variation pattern table.

  Note that the movie reach listed in the summary column means that a high percentage is selected when the special lottery result is a big win, and a very low percentage is selected when the special lottery result is off. It is. That is, the big hit expectation degree of the fluctuation in which movie reach is executed is high. In addition, when movie reach occurs, a predetermined movie is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  In addition, “+1 symbol” when the winning type is “out of” described in the summary column means that after the decorative symbol stops in the reach state, the decorative symbol that has changed to the end is in the reach state. Indicates that the decoration stops after passing one decorative symbol. Specifically, for example, after reaching the reach state with the decorative symbol “7”, the decorative symbol that has changed to the end stops at “8”. “+1 symbol” when the winning type is “big hit” means that after the decorative symbol has stopped in the reach state, the decorative symbol that has changed to the end has stopped once past the decorative symbol in the reach state After that, the decorative design stops as the same design as the reached decorative design. Specifically, for example, after reaching the reach state with the decorative symbol “7”, the decorative symbol that has changed to the end appears to have stopped once at “8”, and then the decorative symbol stops at “7”. And announce the jackpot.

  In addition, in the summary column in the example of FIG. 161, “+1 symbol” is selected only when the winning type is “big hit (non-probable change)” of the big hit, but in the case of “big hit (probable change)” May be selected, or may be selected in the case of “big hit (non-probability change)” and “big hit (probability change)”. In addition, “+1 symbol” may be selected only when the winning type is “out”.

  Further, “+ pseudo 1” and “+ pseudo 2” described in the summary column indicate that two series of pseudo continuous effects and three series of pseudo continuous effects are executed, respectively. The pseudo continuous effect is an effect of executing the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the variation of the decorative symbol multiple times during one change of the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator. . “Ending the decoration symbol variation” means, for example, a mode in which a part or all of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player recognizes the variation of the decoration symbol once, and the decoration symbol For example, there is a mode in which a pseudo-continuous symbol (a symbol in which the pseudo-continuous is fixed if this symbol stops) stops. Note that a pseudo continuous effect in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is referred to as N consecutive pseudo continuous effects. The following natural number) is called the Mth quasi-continuous production. In addition, during a single change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, the player may actually perform the operation again, while actually performing the operation again. An effect that is not performed is called a “pseudo-gase effect”. Hereinafter, the pseudo continuous effect is also simply referred to as “pseudo continuous effect”.

  The pseudo-continuous effect occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the variation of the decorative symbol is executed again during one change of the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator. When it is determined to do so, the peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo continuous symbol in at least one of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops a character such as “continue!” As a quasi-continuous symbol in the medium decoration symbol. Note that, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, all of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are odd or even numbers and no reach) may be used as the pseudo-continuous symbol. The pseudo-gase effect can be executed, for example, when the outline of the effect is “normal fluctuation” or the like. Further, for example, even if the variation pattern is that “+ pseudo 1” is executed, a pseudo gaze effect that suggests the occurrence of the third pseudo run in “+ pseudo 2” may be executed.

[12-13-2. Last reserved color table]
FIG. 161 is an example of the final reserved color table. For example, the final reserved color table is stored in the peripheral main control ROM. The final reserved color table is, for example, a display color (hereinafter, final reserved color) of the hold display at the end of the change for each change pattern (a winning type of the special lottery result, an identifier of the change pattern, and an outline of the effect of the change pattern). (Also called).

  The main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes a reserved display area indicating the numbers of the first special random number and the second special random number that are being held. In the start opening winning process in step S116 of FIG. 142, a hold number designation command for designating the hold numbers of the first special random number and the second special random number is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU performs a display indicating the number of holds indicated by the hold number designation command in the hold display area.

  Specifically, when a game ball wins a prize at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (start condition is established), the hold number (hold storage number) specified by the hold number designation command increases. Then, one hold display is added and displayed in the hold display area. On the other hand, when the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) based on the hold display is started (start condition is satisfied), the hold number (holding memory number) specified by the hold number designation command is decreased. The hold display in the hold display area is deleted.

  A plurality of display modes may exist in the hold display. For example, as the plurality of display modes, there is a display mode of hold display with a plurality of colors (white, blue, green, red, rainbow). In the following, it is assumed that the jackpot expectation of the special lottery result corresponding to the hold display increases in the order of the colors of the hold display: white, blue, green, red, and rainbow. In particular, in the example of FIG. 161, the rainbow-colored hold display is selected only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU selects the final reserved color corresponding to the selected variation pattern according to the selection rate indicated by the final reserved color table. In addition, the peripheral control MPU responds to the hold display by changing the display mode of the hold display during the display period from when the hold display is displayed in the hold display area until the hold display is erased, for example. It is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot for the decorative symbol variation display to be performed (special symbol variation display).

  Further, in this embodiment, during the display period of the hold display, it is possible to execute the hold change effect that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes. The hold change effect and the hold notice effect during the display period of the hold display and before the start of the change corresponding to the hold are also referred to as a hold prefetch effect.

  For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a hold notice table (not shown) that defines the change timing of the display mode of the hold display. Specifically, for example, the hold notice table defines the change timing of the display mode of the hold display and the display mode (display color) of the hold display at the time of winning and at each change timing for each final hold color. The start, during and end of the special symbol change after the winning and before the special symbol change corresponding to the winning is an example of the change timing.

  Note that the display mode of the hold display at each change timing is preferably a hold color having a big hit expectation degree equal to or less than the big hit expectation degree of the final hold color. In addition, it is desirable that the big hit expectation indicated by the hold display is not demoted at each change timing (for example, it is preferable that the blue hold display does not change to the white hold display). Note that there may be a different hold notice table for each hold storage number at the time of winning.

  In addition, for example, at the start of the special symbol variation held before the hold display is an example of the change timing of the display mode of the hold display described above, for example, also during the special symbol variation corresponding to the hold display In addition, a change timing of the display mode of the hold display may be provided.

  Note that the prefetching effect including the hold prefetching effect is executed based on a predetermination command transmitted from the main control MPU 1311 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the predetermination process performed in the start opening prize winning process of step S116 of FIG. The

  Hereinafter, the prior determination process in the start opening winning process for the first special symbol will be described. In addition, since it is the same also about the prior determination process in the start opening prize process about a 2nd special symbol, only a 1st special symbol is demonstrated here. In the pre-determination process, the main control MPU 1311 compares the pre-determination table (not shown) with a special random number, a design random number, a reach random number, and a variable random number. In the case of a big hit type, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified.

  And the specified prior determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, if the big hit, the type of big hit, if not big hit, whether to execute the reach effect as a game effect executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, Depending on the type of game effect to be executed, etc., the type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories stored (the value of the number of pending counters) corresponding to the acquired special random number Set a prior judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process related to the first special symbol, the first special symbol pre-determination command corresponding to the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved memory number is set. .

  Then, by transmitting a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a special symbol based on the start winning that is generated in addition to the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the start opening where the start winning has occurred. Whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, if the big hit is made, the type of big hit, if not, the reach effect is executed or executed as the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 The peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp prior determination information such as the type of game effect to be performed before starting the variable display according to the start winning.

  FIG. 162 shows the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 1 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reservation color table of FIG. It is an example of the table which shows. FIG. 163 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3 in the same case. FIG. 164 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 5 in the same case. 162 to 164, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of the display mode of the pending display of the higher jackpot expectation level. Moreover, the big hit expectation degree of each color is higher as the setting is higher. Note that these appearance rates and expectations are calculated based on the jackpot probability of each setting described above, and the final reserved color table of FIG. 161 is used for all the reserved color tables. It is supposed to be.

  The peripheral control ROM may hold a final reserved color table that is different for each setting. In this case, for example, the selection rate of the final reserved color table for the final reserved color is set so that the higher the setting, the higher the expected degree of jackpot in the same display mode of the reserved display. Thereby, for example, when a big win is won in a special symbol variation corresponding to a red hold display, the expectation for a higher setting is further increased, so that the player can obtain a sense of excitement.

  Further, for example, in the display mode of the hold display other than white that is selected most frequently, the display mode of the same hold display is such that the lower the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation, the higher the expected value of the final hold color table. The selection rate may be set (specifically, for example, when the hold display mode is red, the big hit expectation is 50% in the setting 1 which is a low setting, and 30 in the setting 6 which is a high setting. %). As a result, for example, even if a big win is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red hold display, the expectation to the high setting becomes high, so the player's discouragement is suppressed and the game is continued. Can be promoted.

  Further, for example, in the display mode of the hold display other than white that is selected most frequently, for the display mode of the same hold display, the final hold color of the final hold color table so that the jackpot expectation is substantially common in all settings. May be set. Thereby, for example, it becomes difficult to estimate the setting from the combination of the final reserved color and the special lottery result, and the player can concentrate only on the expectation for the special lottery result from the display mode of the hold display. In addition, for example, when the big win is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red display mode, it is possible to prevent the situation that the possibility of the low setting increases.

[12-13-3. Notice effect table]
FIG. 165 is an example of a notice effect table. The notice effect table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The notice effect table holds, for example, the selection ratio of the notice effect for each variation pattern (specified by the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, and the outline of the effect of the variation pattern).

  In the example of FIG. 165, the notice effect includes a line effect, a weather change effect, and a rival horse effect. The line effect is an effect in which, for example, a predetermined character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the change and the line is expressed. The weather change effect is, for example, an effect in which the weather in the background of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes in the change. The rival horse effect is an effect in which the rival horse of the horse raised by the hero character appears on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the variation.

  Note that the setting suggestion effect using the notice effect can be executed, and the selection rate of each notice effect according to whether the setting suggestion effect is executed is stored in the notice effect table. “No set” in the example of FIG. 165 indicates that the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and “with set” indicates that the setting suggestion effect is executed. The peripheral control MPU determines the notice effect to be executed based on the variation pattern and the selection rate of the notice effect table.

  In addition, in each notice effect in each variation pattern of the notice effect table, it is desirable that the selection rate without the setting suggestion effect is sufficiently higher than the selection rate with the setting suggestion effect. If the selection rate with the setting suggestion effect is high, the setting suggestion effect frequently occurs. This is because, in this state, when the occurrence frequency of the setting suggestion effect that suggests the high setting is low, the player is likely to stop the game in a short time. That is, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 which is set low is significantly reduced, and there is a possibility that an excessive burden is imposed on the hall. On the other hand, for example, when the occurrence frequency of the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting is high, the number of players who guess that the setting of the other pachinko machine 1 in the hall is low increases and the operation of the other pachinko machine 1 is performed. There is a risk that the rate will drop and place an excessive burden on the hall.

  In addition, the selection rate of the variation pattern in the variation pattern table is determined so that the big hit expectation improves as the number of pseudo-continuations increases. For example, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect does not substantially change depending on the number of pseudo-continuations. The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table is determined. That is, for example, for the variation patterns whose outline is “SP reach + pseudo 1”, “SP reach + pseudo 2”, the pseudo suggestion effect is set so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is substantially the same. The selection rate of whether or not to execute is determined. As a result, for a variation pattern with a small number of pseudo-continuations, the expectation of jackpot is low, but the occurrence rate of the setting suggestion effect is not low compared to a variation pattern with a large number of pseudo-continuations. You can be interested in the fluctuations of a few fluctuation patterns.

  In addition, the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases as the number of pseudo consecutive times increases. The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is high. In addition, when the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased as the number of pseudo-continuations decreases, the above-described problem may occur. Therefore, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased as the number of pseudo-continuations decreases. However, it is more desirable to set the values to be almost equivalent (specifically, for example, there is a set of 15/256 dialogue effect when the variation pattern 5 is selected at the time of deviation, and there is a set of dialogue production when the variation pattern 6 is selected) 16/256, etc.).

  Also, a fluctuation pattern with a high degree of expectation of jackpot (or an effect that is not a fluctuation pattern with a high degree of expectation of jackpot but has a relatively high expectation degree of the produced effect (for example, an effect in which the expectation degree of jackpot is a predetermined value or more) ), The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes higher. Specifically, for example, in order of “normal fluctuation”, fluctuation including “normal reach”, fluctuation including “SP reach”, and fluctuation including “movie reach”, the appearance rate of the setting suggesting effect increases. The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined.

  In the example of FIG. 165, there is a possibility that the setting suggestion effect may occur in all the notice effects (the line effect, the weather change effect, and the rival horse effect). May be present.

  In addition, if the outline of the variation pattern is the same, the special lottery result is a big hit without certain change, so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the special lottery result is a big hit without certain change, The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined. As a result, in the case of winning the big hit with no probability change, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased, and the disappointment of the player with respect to the fact that the probability change is not given can be reduced. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, although three kinds of notice effects, a line effect, a weather change effect, and a rival horse effect, were described, it goes without saying that it is not limited to three types.

[12-13-3. Dialogue]
Hereinafter, details of the dialogue effect among the notice effects will be described. When the peripheral control MPU selects a dialogue effect without a setting suggestion effect as a notice effect, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change (for example, after 2 seconds), the character A appears on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. , “Today, how many days?” Is displayed as the dialogue of character A. Then, the peripheral control MPU, for example, causes character B to appear on main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the display of character A's dialogue, and “Come ...” as the character B's dialogue. Is displayed. For example, the lines of character A and character B may indicate the jackpot expectation of the change.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU selects a line effect with a setting suggestion effect as the notice effect, the peripheral control MPU selects the character B's line (a line that suggests setting) from a line effect table to be described later. For example, the peripheral control MPU controls the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change (for example, two seconds later, that is, the same timing as when the character A appears when there is no setting suggestion effect). Character A appears and displays “Today, how many days?” As the character A dialogue. The peripheral control MPU, for example, causes character B to appear on main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the display of character A, and displays the selected character B's dialogue. Note that the line of character A may be a line that directly expresses a set value such as “Do you know the setting of this table today?”, For example.

  FIG. 166 is an example of a dialogue effect table. The dialogue production table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The dialogue production table holds the production type of dialogue production and the selection rate of the content of dialogue of character B for each setting. In addition, the production types include “same pattern to the middle” and “pattern that suddenly branches”, and there are “kanet” line and “deterministic” line for each of the two patterns. .

  Each line that belongs to the “same pattern until halfway” includes the same line until halfway, and then branches to a different line. In the example of FIG. 166, all the lines belonging to “the pattern that is partway together” start with “Now ...” and then branch to different lines. On the other hand, dialogues belonging to “a pattern that suddenly branches” branch to different dialogues from the beginning. Note that it is desirable that the selection rate of dialogues belonging to “a pattern that is halfway together” is higher than the selection rate of dialogues that belong to “a pattern that suddenly branches”. This is to pull a sense of expectation.

  Dialogues belonging to “Kakane” are dialogues that suggest the current setting but do not definitively announce the setting. For example, “But I feel like it was an even day ...” is a line of “Kane-kei” that suggests an even setting. “But I feel like it was an even day ...” is a line of “Kane” series, so the selection rate is determined so that it may appear even in an odd setting. However, the selection rate of the dialogue in the odd setting is sufficiently lower than the selection rate of the dialogue in the even setting. Similarly, for other “Kanene” dialogues, the selection rate of the dialogue in the setting suggested by the dialogue is sufficiently higher than the selection rate of the dialogue in the other setting.

  On the other hand, dialogues belonging to “deterministic” are dialogues for definitive notification of settings. For example, “Ah! I remembered! It ’s an even day!” Is a “deterministic” line that definitely announces the even setting. Therefore, the selection rate of the dialogue in the odd setting is 0, and the selection rate exceeds 0 only in the even setting.

  Note that it is desirable that the selection rate of dialogues belonging to “Kane-kei” is higher than the selection rate of dialogues belonging to “definite”. If the selection rate of lines belonging to “deterministic” is high, there is a possibility that the player will be notified of the high setting definitely in a short time after starting the game. This is because there is a certain number of players who guess that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is not good, and there is a possibility that the operation of other gaming machines may be reduced.

  In dialogue production when executing a specific reach production such as SP reach or movie reach, or in the dialogue production when performing a pseudo-ream, the dialogue for suggesting the setting of character B is a red character (a jackpot expectation suggestion production etc.) The normal production line may be displayed in white characters). This makes it easy for the player to distinguish between the dialogue of the expected suggestion and the dialogue of the setting suggestion, so two types of production (setting suggestion and expectation suggestion) coexist without making the player feel unnatural. Can be made. The expectation suggestion effect is an effect indicating that the degree of jackpot expectation in the special symbol variation is a predetermined value, and specifically, a notice effect that suggests an expectation for the jackpot within one variation, Includes pre-reading effects that imply expectations for jackpots across changes.

  The peripheral control MPU may determine the setting suggestion effect by a lottery table similar to the dialogue effect table, although the weather change effect and the rival horse effect are not shown. For example, in the setting suggestion effect in the weather change effect, a thundercloud is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a number such as “246?” Is displayed by the lightning light (an effect of “Kane-kei” suggesting an even setting), In the setting suggestion production in the rival horse production, the combined horse production by the horse that the hero character is raising and the rival horse is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, a number such as “135?” Is displayed on the bib of the rival horse Do (“Kanene” production suggesting odd setting).

  In the above example, “Today, how many days?” Is displayed as the dialogue of Character A in the dialogue production. In addition to this dialogue, Character A is “What was the test last week?” Character B is "66 points! (" Confirmed system "where setting 6 is confirmed)" and "I feel like it was 55 points" ("Kamone system" suggesting setting 5) " You may make it provide a some variation with respect to production (for example, dialogue production). In this case, it is preferable to improve the credibility of the setting suggestion in the B effect (for example, the effect of listening to the test score) rather than the A effect (for example, the effect of listening to the date). Specifically, for example, the expectation level of setting 6 when “I feel like it was a day with 6” in production A is only 30%, but in production B, “ The expectation, which is setting 6 when it is said that “I feel like 66 points…” may be 50%.

[12-13-5. Another example of notice effect table]
FIG. 167 is another example of the notice effect table. In the example of FIG. 167, the notice effect table 173 holds the selection ratio of the notice effect for each variation pattern. Unlike the example of FIG. 165, the notice effect table of FIG. 167 does not hold information on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. That is, the peripheral control MPU selects only the type of the notice effect according to the selection rate corresponding to the variation pattern of the notice effect table in FIG.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU determines whether to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the variation pattern and the type of the selected notice effect. FIG. 168 (A) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of presence / absence of setting suggestion effect when the outline of the change pattern is “normal change” and “line effect” is selected as the notice effect. is there. FIG. 168 (B) shows an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of presence / absence of setting suggestion effect when the outline of the variation pattern is “normal reach + 1 symbol” and “line effect” is selected as the notice effect. It is. A setting suggestion effect table for all combinations of the variation pattern and the notice effect as shown in FIG. 168 is stored in the peripheral control ROM in advance.

  In the above example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect after determining the content of the notice effect, but determines the content of the notice effect after determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. May be. By using such a method, although the data amount is larger than that of the table as shown in FIG. 165, it is possible to set the appearance rate and reliability of the effect in detail. Further, the table shown in FIG. 165 and the processing shown in this example may be combined.

[12-13-6. Specific examples of setting suggestion effects]
FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an outline of the setting suggestion effect. 169 (A), (B), and (C) are directed in the order of the setting when “4, 5 or 6 is a day with 4!” Is selected as the dialogue of character B in the dialogue production. It is an outline of the production.

  In FIG. 169 (A), special symbol variation starts. In FIG. 169 (B), after the start of the special symbol change, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays the character B's line “day with 4 or 5 or 6!”. In FIG. 169 (C), the dialogue is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 until the end of the special symbol variation.

  169 (A), (D), and (E) are produced in the order shown in the outline of the setting suggestion effect in the case where “day with 6” is selected as the character B's dialogue in the dialogue production. is there. 169 (A), (D), and (E), the setting suggestion effect starts at the start of the special symbol variation, and the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect is during the end of the special symbol variation. has been edited. Specifically, in FIG. 169 (D), after the start of the special symbol change, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays the character B's line “It is a day with 4 or 5 or 6!”. In FIG. 169 (E), at the end of the special symbol variation, the character B's line “Day with 6!” Is displayed. That is, the setting suggested by the line of character B is promoted.

  Specifically, for example, for each line (finally displayed line) in the line effect table, one or more scenarios indicating the line change timing and lines at each timing, and the selection rate of each scenario are set. It may be defined for each. The peripheral control MPU displays the dialogue at the timing at the dialogue change timing according to the selected scenario.

  In this case, it is desirable that the dialogue production table does not hold a scenario in which the suggested setting may be demoted. Specifically, for example, the dialogue production table may not hold a scenario in which the dialogue “even days!” Is displayed after the dialogue “day with 4 or 5 or 6!”. desirable.

  In the example of FIG. 169, only the setting suggestion effect is performed in the special symbol variation, but other effects (for example, an effect suggesting the big hit expectation degree) may be executed in parallel. In addition, although the example in which the character B's dialogue is promoted at the end of the special symbol variation has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this. The character A appears before the dialogue of the character B, and the character A performs an effect of speaking to the character B, which is omitted in the drawing.

  FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect. In FIG. 170 (A), the game ball B has won a prize at the first start port 2002 during the special symbol variation in a state where the special symbol variation is not suspended. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (B), immediately after the game ball B wins the first starting port 2002, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays the line “4, 5 or 6 is the day that the character B is attached!”. Is done. In this case, since the remaining time of the special symbol that has already fluctuated becomes indefinite, Character B may be displayed immediately without displaying Character A, or Character B may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since winning the prize. Alternatively, character B may be displayed after character A is displayed. In FIG. 170B, the number of holds indicated by the display in the hold display area is increased by one.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (C), all the decorative symbols are stopped, and the special symbol variation ends. Also, the character B's line “4, 5 or 6 is a date!” Is still displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (D), a special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is started. Simultaneously with the start of the special symbol variation, the line of the character B displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to “day with 5 or 6 attached!”. That is, the setting indicated by the character B's dialogue is promoted.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (E), all the decorative symbols are stopped, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is completed. At the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the winning, the character B's line displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to “day with 6!”. That is, the setting indicated by the character B's dialogue is promoted.

  For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a dialogue prefetch effect table (not shown) that defines the dialogue of the character B and the change timing of the dialogue. Specifically, for example, the dialogue prefetching effect table defines the change timing of character B's dialogue and the dialogue of character B at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start, during and end of the special symbol change after the winning and before the special symbol change corresponding to the winning is an example of the change timing. It is desirable that the setting suggested by the dialogue is not demoted at each change timing. Note that there may be different dialogue prefetch effect tables for each number of reserved memories at the time of winning a prize. When the peripheral control MPU determines to execute the prefetch effect based on the prior determination command, for example, the peripheral control MPU executes the dialog prefetch effect with reference to the line prefetch effect table at a predetermined ratio. In addition, in the case of promotion, in FIG. 170, it is promoted one step at a time (“the day when 4 or 5 or 6 is attached!”, “The day when 5 or 6 is attached!”, “The day when 6 is attached) May be promoted in multiple stages at once. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 170, the dialogue (E) may be displayed without displaying the dialogue (D).

  Note that the setting suggestion effect may be executed under specific circumstances other than those described above. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the condition of the reservation sequence is satisfied. The term “holding ream” means that the next big hit is realized by a special random number held before the end of the big hit game. In this case, for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the holding is performed and before the jackpot game is ended. For example, when a specific variation pattern continues for a predetermined number of times, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times.

[12-15. Restriction of setting suggestion production]
Hereinafter, the limitation of the setting suggestion effect under specific conditions will be described.

[12-15-1. Limitation of setting suggestion effect after special state]
First, the limitation of the setting suggestion effect after the special state will be described. Hereinafter, both the setting confirmation mode and the occurrence of an error are examples of special states. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for displaying a setting value, which is started when it is determined in the setting confirmation processing that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes).

  FIG. 171 (A) is an example of an effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. 171 (B) is an example of an effect generation table when an error occurs. The setting confirmation mode production restriction table and the error occurrence production restriction table are stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM.

[12-15-1-1. Limitation of setting suggestion effect after setting confirmation mode]
First, the production restriction table in the setting confirmation mode will be described. In the setting check mode, the effect restriction table shows the fluctuations when the setting check mode is started during execution or on hold of a change determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as setting suggestion change in this chapter). A restriction flag indicating whether or not to limit the setting suggestion effect is stored.

  In the setting confirmation mode, the production restriction table is displayed in the setting confirmation mode before the start of the setting suggestion effect (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is not executed (displayed) although it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is performed). After the start of the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion fluctuation (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is executed (displayed) is determined) And a record 1702 for storing a restriction flag when the setting confirmation mode is started.

  When the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 159 is performed, the game is stopped when the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 156 is performed, the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode. . Therefore, the setting confirmation mode effect restriction table stores a column 1703 for storing a restriction flag when the game is stopped when the setting confirmation mode is started, and a restriction flag when the game is advanced even during the setting confirmation mode. Column 1704.

  Further, when a game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, there is a possibility that a new setting suggestion change is put on hold by winning a game ball at the starting port during the setting confirmation mode. Accordingly, the column 1704 includes a column 1705 for storing a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion change corresponding to a winning at the starting port in the setting confirmation mode. In addition, each restriction flag in the production restriction table in the setting confirmation mode is set by, for example, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall (an operation medium that cannot be operated by the player). It can be set by an operation medium that can be operated. In addition, when a game ball enters the starting port during the setting confirmation mode, acquisition of lottery information and prize balls may not be performed for the entrance ball. However, even in such a case, the special symbol variation that is already suspended is executed during the setting confirmation mode or after the setting change mode is finished.

  When the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, one value of the field 1706 and the field 1707 is 1 and the other value is 0, the values of the fields 1708 to 1711 are 0, the field 1712 and the field 1713 One value is 1 and the other value is 0, and the values of the fields 1714 to 1717 are 0.

  When the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the values of the fields 1706 and 1707 are 0, one of the fields 1708 and 1709 is 1 and the other is 0, and the field 1710 And one value of the field 1711 is 1 and the other value is 0, the value of the field 1712 and the field 1713 is 0, one value of the field 1714 and the field 1715 is 1 and the other value is 0, One value of the field 1716 or the field 1717 is 1 and the other value is 0.

  The peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect restriction pattern according to the restriction flag in each state defined in the setting confirmation mode start effect restriction table and the error occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) A case where the setting confirmation mode starts before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

  (1-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed after the game is resumed (the value of the field 1706 is 1 and the value of the field 1707 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting confirmation mode is executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed, and there is a sense of security that there is no effect on the game result. Can be given.

  (1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is resumed (the value of the field 1706 is 0 and the value of the field 1707 is 1). For example, when a sound or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 during the setting confirmation mode, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in this way, However, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation that the high setting may have been changed.

(2) About the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when the setting confirmation mode starts before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode.

  (2-1) A setting suggesting effect is executed (the value of the field 1708 is 1 and the value of the field 1709 is 0). Since the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not reduced. In addition, when the sound and image indicating that the setting check mode is being performed are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sound and image are given priority over the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being displayed is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in order to avoid discomfort to the player. . Also, in order to provide the player with the expectation that “when the setting suggestion effect was displayed” and “the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed”, An image may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to hide the setting confirmation mode.

  (2-2) The setting suggesting effect is not executed (the value of the field 1708 is 0 and the value of the field 1709 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as “may be a high setting?”) When the suggestion effect occurs), the player may have distrust with the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not performing the setting suggestion effect.

(2 ′) A new setting suggestion change corresponding to a winning at the start opening in the setting check mode when the setting check mode starts before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game progresses even during the setting check mode About setting suggestion production.

  (2'-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1710 is 1 and the value of the field 1711 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode is executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that there is no influence on the game result.

  (2'-2) The setting suggesting effect is not executed (the value of the field 1710 is 0 and the value of the field 1711 is 1). For example, when the hall is in doubt about the set value and the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the set value may be changed thereafter. In such a case, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, the setting suggestion effect is changed to a different setting while the even setting is confirmed to be displayed). There is a possibility that an odd setting will be confirmed in a later setting suggestion effect), and trouble may occur between the hole and the player. By not performing the setting suggestion effect, occurrence of such a situation can be avoided.

  It should be noted that the image, sound, light, and the like indicating the above-described setting confirmation state are desirably displayed regardless of the above-described field values. In addition, when the game is stopped after the transition to the setting confirmation state, it may be assumed that a new winning is made valid, and in this case, a process similar to the process of proceeding with the game may be performed.

(3) The setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect is started (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect ends). And when the game stops at the start of the setting confirmation mode.

  (3-1) The setting suggestion effect is resumed after the game is resumed (the value of the field 1712 is 1 and the value of the field 1713 is 0). If a setting suggestion effect that has been started is canceled, the player may be distrusted that the setting has been changed, and by restarting the setting suggestion effect after resuming the game, The occurrence of a situation can be avoided.

  (3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not resumed after the game is resumed (the value of the field 1712 is 0 and the value of the field 1713 is 1). For example, when a sound or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 during the setting confirmation mode, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in this way, However, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation that the high setting may have been changed.

(4) The setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect is started (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect ends). And about the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode.

  (4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1714 is 1 and the value of the field 1715 is 0). Since the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not reduced. In addition, when the sound and image indicating that the setting check mode is being performed are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sound and image are given priority over the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being displayed is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in order to avoid discomfort to the player. (Displays so that the image indicating the setting suggestion effect and the image indicating the setting confirmation mode do not overlap, or the image indicating the setting suggestion effect and the character indicating the setting confirmation mode such as “in setting confirmation mode” do not overlap. ). This display and the like can be performed in the same way even when an error occurs, which will be described later. Here, “does not overlap” indicates that the appearance from the player does not overlap, not the image data actually set in the RAM.

  Also, in order to provide the player with the expectation that “when the setting suggestion effect was displayed” and “the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed”, An image may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to hide the setting confirmation mode.

  (4-2) The setting suggesting effect is stopped (the value of the field 1714 is 0 and the value of the field 1715 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as “may be a high setting?”) When the suggestion effect occurs), the player may have distrust with the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not performing the setting suggestion effect.

(4 ') A new setting corresponding to a winning at the starting port in the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect starts and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode. About setting suggestion effects of various setting suggestion fluctuations.

  (4'-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1716 is 1 and the value of the field 1717 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode is executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that there is no influence on the game result.

  (4'-2) The setting suggesting effect is not executed (the value of the field 1716 is 0 and the value of the field 1717 is 1). For example, when the hall is in doubt about the set value and the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the set value may be changed thereafter. In such a case, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, the setting suggestion effect is changed to a different setting while the even setting is confirmed to be displayed). In the later setting suggestion effect, an odd number setting is displayed), and a trouble may occur between the hole and the player. By not performing the setting suggestion effect, occurrence of such a situation can be avoided.

  In addition, when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, when the setting confirmation mode spans a plurality of variations, for example, the peripheral control MPU, for example, after starting the setting confirmation mode based on a notification from the main control MPU 1311 When the first symbol is confirmed or at the start of the next fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation mode is set. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the setting confirmation mode is set, if the newly won hold is a setting suggestion change, the peripheral control MPU performs a setting suggestion effect together with a change corresponding to the hold. By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting confirmation mode is executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed, and there is a sense of security that there is no effect on the game result. Can be given.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect in this case. When the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as “may be a high setting?” Is suggested. When an effect occurs), the player may have distrust with the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not performing the setting suggestion effect.

  As described above, when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed, the effect is exerted on both sides. We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of business styles.

[12-15-1-2. Limitation of setting suggestion when error occurs]
Subsequently, an error occurrence time limit table will be described with reference to FIG. The error occurrence direction restriction table is a setting suggestion effect of the change when an error occurs during execution or on hold of a change determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as a setting suggestion change in this chapter). A restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict is stored.

  In the error occurrence effect restriction table, a record 1801 for storing a restriction flag when an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion effect, and an error occurs during the setting suggestion change change and after the setting suggestion change start in the setting suggestion change And a record 1802 for storing a restriction flag in the case of the above.

  The error includes a strong error that is notified when the game is stopped and a weak error that is notified while the game is in progress. An error in which illegal magnetism is detected in the launch ball sensor 1020 and the game area 5a is an example of a strong error. A full tank error (an error indicating that the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535) is an example of a weak error.

  Accordingly, an error occurrence effect restriction table, a column 1803 for storing a restriction flag corresponding to an error that is notified when the game is stopped, and a column 1804 for storing a restriction flag corresponding to an error that is notified while the game is in progress ,including.

  In addition, when a game progresses even when an error occurs, there is a possibility that a new setting suggestion change may be put on hold by winning a game ball at the starting port during the occurrence of an error. Accordingly, the column 1804 includes a column 1805 for storing a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion change corresponding to a winning at the starting port in which an error has occurred.

  It should be noted that the restriction flag in the error occurrence effect restriction table is, for example, that the player can operate the operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like (operation medium that the player cannot operate). It can be set according to the operation medium.

  In the error occurrence rendering restriction table, one value of the field 1806 and the field 1807 is 1 and the other value is 0, one value of the field 1808 and the field 1809 is 1 and the other value is 0, One value of the field 1810 and the field 1811 is 1 and the other value is 0, one value of the field 1812 and the field 1813 is 1 and the other value is 0, and one value of the field 1814 and the field 1815 is The value of 1 and the other is 0, one value of the field 1816 and the field 1817 is 1 and the other value is 0.

  The peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect restriction pattern according to the restriction flag of each case defined in the error occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) A case where an error starts before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game stops (strong error) when the error occurs.

  (1-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed after the game is resumed (the value of the field 1806 is 1 and the value of the field 1807 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, when the error is canceled by the hall clerk, the player can be informed that the setting has not been changed, and can give a sense of security that there is no effect on the game result. it can.

  (1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is resumed (the value of the field 1806 is 0 and the value of the field 1807 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, there may be a disadvantageous situation for the player that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. Therefore, the player advances the game without generating an error, and the game Can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

  (2) About the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game proceeds (weak error) even after the start of the error occurrence.

  (2-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1808 is 1 and the value of the field 1809 is 0). As a result, the game proceeds even during the occurrence of an error, so that the operation of the gaming machine is not dropped. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even during the occurrence of an error, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. When sound and images indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sounds and images are output in preference to the sound and images in the setting suggestion effect. To do. At this time, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in order not to give the player an unpleasant feeling. Also, in order to provide the player with the expectation that “when the setting suggestion effect was displayed” and “the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed”, An image indicating that an error has occurred may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

  (2-2) The setting suggesting effect is not executed (the value of the field 1808 is 0 and the value of the field 1809 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, there may be a disadvantageous situation for the player that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. Therefore, the player advances the game without generating an error, and the game Can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

  (2 ′) A new setting suggestion corresponding to a winning at the starting point when the error occurs when an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game proceeds even during the occurrence of the error (weak error) About setting suggestion effect of fluctuation.

  (2'-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1810 is 1 and the value of the field 1811 is 0). As a result, the game proceeds even during the occurrence of an error, so that the operation of the gaming machine is not dropped. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even during the occurrence of an error, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  (2'-2) The setting suggesting effect is not executed (the value of the field 1810 is 0 and the value of the field 1811 is 1). Thereby, since the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the winning in which an error has occurred, the player cancels the launch of the game ball and releases the error at an early stage.

  (3) A case where an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game stops (strong error) when the error occurs.

  (3-1) The setting suggestion effect is resumed after the game is resumed (the value of the field 1812 is 1 and the value of the field 1813 is 0). If a setting suggestion effect that has been started is canceled, the player may be distrusted that the setting has been changed, and by restarting the setting suggestion effect after resuming the game, The occurrence of a situation can be avoided.

  (3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not resumed after the game is resumed (the value of the field 1812 is 0 and the value of the field 1813 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, there may be a disadvantageous situation for the player that the setting suggestion effect is canceled, so the player proceeds with the game without causing an error. Can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

  (4) About the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change in the case where an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game proceeds even during the error occurrence (weak error).

  (4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1814 is 1 and the value of the field 1815 is 0). As a result, the game proceeds even during the occurrence of an error, so that the operation of the gaming machine is not dropped. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even during the occurrence of an error, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. When sound and images indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sounds and images are output in preference to the sound and images in the setting suggestion effect. To do. At this time, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in order not to give the player an unpleasant feeling. Also, in order to provide the player with the expectation of “when the setting suggestion effect is displayed” and “when the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting is displayed”, hide all the setting suggestion effects Thus, an image indicating that an error has occurred may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  (4-2) The setting suggesting effect is stopped (the value of the field 1814 is 0 and the value of the field 1815 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is canceled may occur, so that the player proceeds with the game without causing an error, and the game is It can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(4 ') A new one corresponding to a winning at the starting point where an error has occurred when an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and an error occurs after the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game progresses even during the error occurrence (weak error) About setting suggestion effects of various setting suggestion fluctuations.

  (4'-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1816 is 1 and the value of the field 1817 is 0). As a result, the game proceeds even during the occurrence of an error, so that the operation of the gaming machine is not dropped. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even during the occurrence of an error, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  (4'-2) The setting suggesting effect is not executed (the value of the field 1816 is 0 and the value of the field 1817 is 1). Thereby, since the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the winning in which an error has occurred, the player cancels the launch of the game ball and releases the error at an early stage.

  As described above, when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed, the effect is exerted on both sides. We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of business styles.

[12-15-2. Limitation of production in new start prizes]
Hereinafter, description will be given of the limitation of effects in the variation corresponding to the new start winning in the state where the special symbol variation and the new variation can be held. FIG. 172 is an example of a new start winning effect restriction table. The new start winning effect restriction table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM.

  The new start winning effect restriction table includes, for example, a condition column, a reference processing table column, and a flag column. The conditions in the condition column are defined by the assumption about the effect of the previous change and the effect restriction on the effect in the new start winning in the assumption. The previous change in this chapter is the change immediately before the change corresponding to the new starting prize. As a condition for the effect of the previous fluctuation, there are a case where only an expectation suggestion effect indicating whether the special lottery result corresponding to the change is a big hit or a case where an expectation suggestion effect and a setting suggestion effect are performed.

  In addition, as the production restriction of the pre-reading effect in the new start winning prize, only the setting suggestion effect in the pre-reading effect is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect is not executed), and both the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect in the pre-reading effect are restricted (that is, set) The suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are not executed), and the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect in the prefetch effect are not limited (that is, the setting suggestion effect and the prefetch effect are executed).

  The reference processing table column stores an identifier of a processing table to be referred to when executing a pre-reading effect restriction in a new start winning prize included in the corresponding condition. The flag column stores a flag indicating which condition is executed and which process table is used to determine the process for the pre-reading effect in the new start winning prize.

  Note that 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 1 to 3, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 1 to 3. Further, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 4 to 6, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 4 to 6. The flag in the new start winning effect restriction table may be, for example, an operation medium provided to the pachinko machine 1 (such as an operation medium that cannot be operated by the player or an operation medium that can be operated by the player at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall). Can be set.

  When the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a new start prize in a state where the special symbol change and the new fluctuation can be held, and only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change, the new start prize effect restriction table The condition indicated by the condition column corresponding to the flag column corresponding to “expected suggestion only” and the flag column storing 1 as the value is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU refers to the processing table corresponding to the flag field, and determines the content of the pre-reading effect in the variation corresponding to the new start prize.

  Similarly, the peripheral control MPU has a new start prize when there is a new start prize in a state where a special symbol change and a new fluctuation can be held, and the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change. Refer to the processing table corresponding to the flag field corresponding to “expectation suggestion + setting suggestion” in which the value of the “previous change effect” field of the effect restriction table is “1” as a value, and The content of the pre-reading effect in the variation corresponding to the start winning prize is determined.

  Hereinafter, each condition indicated in the condition column will be described. The first condition (condition for selecting the processing table 1) is that, when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation, only the setting suggestion effect is limited as the prefetch effect limitation of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. It is to be done. In the first condition, since the expectation suggestion effect is performed in the previous variation, the player has an uplifting feeling due to the expectation for the big hit. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect is executed as the change look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning prize, the player's consciousness is also directed to the setting suggestion effect. There is a risk that the feeling of elevation will be reduced. In addition, the player may confuse the setting suggestion effect with the expectation suggestion effect, which may make the player delighted. Therefore, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed by executing the first condition.

  In addition, in the first condition, an expected suggestion effect is performed in the previous change, but in this state, if the setting suggestion effect is executed as a change look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning prize, Even if it is assumed that there is a shift in the previous fluctuation, it is possible to expect the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize, so that a sense of security can be provided to the player.

  For example, when selecting an effect from the notice effect table in FIG. 165, for example, the peripheral control MPU determines an effect based on the table, and then the flag in the condition column indicating that the setting suggestion effect is limited is 1 or not. (If it is restricted or not), if it is 1 (restricted), even if the presence of set is selected, the setting suggestion effect is restricted by performing a process of rewriting and displaying without set. To do. In other words, the peripheral control MPU can execute the determination process after determining the effect, thereby limiting the setting suggestion effect using the notice effect table shown in FIG. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 does not need to hold an effect table for each effect restriction type, and thus the data amount can be reduced. Similarly, in the case of the expected suggestion effect described later, the peripheral control MPU uses the final reserved color table in FIG. 161 to limit the expected suggestion effect even when the prefetch hold display is selected other than white. The selected hold display is displayed in white.

  The second condition (condition for selecting the processing table 2) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change, the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion are used as the prefetch effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning prize. It is to restrict both the production. In the second condition, since the expectation suggestion effect is performed in the previous variation, the player has an uplifting feeling due to the expectation for the big hit. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect and the attitude suggestion effect are executed as the pre-reading effect of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, the player's consciousness is also directed to these effects, There is a risk that the feeling of uplift in the production of the pre-change will be reduced. Therefore, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed by executing the second condition.

  The third condition (condition for selecting the processing table 3) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change, the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion are used as the prefetch effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning prize. Do not limit any of the productions. In the third condition, since the expectation suggestion effect is performed in the previous variation, the player has an uplifting feeling due to the expectation for the big hit. In such a state, the setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect of fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize, so that in addition to the exhilaration feeling for the big hit, the exhilaration feeling for the setting suggestion effect (particularly, the high setting fixed suggestion effect Or, when a high setting finalizing effect or the like is executed).

  The fourth condition (condition for selecting the processing table 4) is that when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion effect is used as a prefetch effect limitation of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Is only limited. In the fourth condition, the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous variation, so that the player may win a big hit in the previous variation, and (especially the high setting suggestion effect or the high setting finalization effect) Feels uplifted by setting suggestions), if executed. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect is executed as the prefetching effect of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, there is a possibility that the feeling of excitement to the expectation for the big hit in the holding of the previous fluctuation may be reduced. .

  Specifically, for example, when setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation, and setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect as the prefetching variation corresponding to the new start winning prize, The setting suggestion effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (it also suggests the possibility of setting 4 although it is originally set 5 or more). In such a case, the player estimates that not only the setting suggestion effect in the previous change but also the expected suggestion effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (specifically, for example, the display mode is red) It is estimated that the degree of expectation of jackpot is not high), and there is a possibility that the feeling of excitement with respect to the expectation suggestion will be reduced. By executing the fourth condition, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

  The fifth condition (condition for selecting the processing table 5) is that when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion effect is used as a prefetch effect limitation of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. And restricting both expectations and suggestions. In the fifth condition, since the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, if the setting suggestion effect is performed in the pre-reading effect corresponding to the new start winning prize, a plurality of setting suggestion effects are performed in a short period of time. As a result, the player may guess the set value with high accuracy (for example, when an odd setting suggestion effect and a high setting suggestion effect are performed, there is a high possibility of setting 5). In such a state, if it is determined that the player is set low, there is a risk that the game on the pachinko machine 1 will be stopped. If it is determined that the player is set high, other pachinko machines in the hall The operation of the machine 1 may be reduced. By executing the fifth condition, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

  In particular, if the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous fluctuation, and if the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed as the look-ahead effect even in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize, many effects are generated in a short period of time. However, the player may be confused. By executing the fifth condition, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

  The sixth condition (condition for selecting the processing table 6) is that when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion effect is used as a prefetch effect limitation of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. And neither expectation suggestion production is restricted. In the sixth condition, since the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, the player assumes the expectation degree of the expectation suggestion effect in the setting suggested by the setting suggestion effect. In this state, when the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are performed in the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize, there is a possibility that the degree of expectation due to these two expected suggestion effects is raised.

  Specifically, for example, when a setting suggestion effect that suggests setting 4 or more is executed in the previous change, and a setting suggestion effect that suggests setting 5 or more is executed as a look-ahead effect in a new start prize, The expectation degree in setting 4 or more is assumed for the expectation suggestion effect in the previous fluctuation. However, since the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect in the new start-up prize is suggested after that, the expectation degree of the expectation suggestion effect is assumed to be an expectation degree of the setting 5 or more. The feeling of uplifting increases.

  In this way, each pre-reading production restriction content corresponding to a new start winning prize is effective, so by making it possible for halls to set such pre-reading production restriction content, the needs of sales styles such as halls It is possible to provide a gaming machine tailored to the game.

  Hereinafter, each processing table and the prefetching effect executed with reference to each processing table will be described. Each processing table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM.

  FIG. 173 is an example of the processing table 1. First, contents common to each processing table will be described. Each processing table stores a winning type in the special lottery result of the previous change, a processing content related to a new start winning corresponding to the winning type, and a processing number that is an identifier of the processing content.

  In addition, the processing content about each pre-reading effect which is not a restriction | limiting object is defined as the processing content which each processing table hold | maintains. More specifically, for example, the processing contents of the processing table 1 which is a table referred to when limiting only the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect change of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize includes the expectation suggestion effect. Processing details are defined. Similarly, the processing contents of the processing table 3 which is a table to be referred to when both the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are restricted as the prefetch effect change of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize include the expected suggestion effect and The processing content about the setting suggestion effect is defined.

  Therefore, the peripheral control MPU determines the pre-reading effect to be restricted in the new start winning effect and the processing table to be referenced based on the flag of the new start winning effect restriction table, and is not the restriction object based on the processing table. The processing for the pre-reading effect is determined.

  The processing table 3 and the processing table 6 to be described later store a flag for selecting a processing content related to a new start winning prize from a plurality of processing content. The flag in the processing table may be, for example, an operation medium provided to the pachinko machine 1 (an operation medium that cannot be operated by the player or an operation medium that can be operated by the player at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall). ) Can be set.

  Hereinafter, the processing content related to a new start winning defined by the processing table 1 will be described. The processing table 1 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation and only the setting suggestion effect is limited as the prefetch effect limitation of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Hereinafter, an example in which a hold prefetch is performed as a prefetch effect for performing an expectation suggestion will be described.

  The process of process number 1 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with a short time. In the process of process number 1, the peripheral control MPU, for example, when the new start winning hold display mode is a specific mode with a high expectation of jackpot (for example, blue, green, red, etc.) At the start of the jackpot opening screen won in the previous variation, the new start winning hold display mode is returned to the default (white display mode in the final hold color table in FIG. 161). However, if the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the big hit opening screen, the hold display in the specific mode is deleted in the same manner as other hold displays. In addition, the peripheral control MPU does not return the new start winning hold display mode to the specific display mode (that is, keep the default display) at the time-shift after the big hit. In addition, the peripheral control MPU does not return the new start winning hold display mode to the specific display mode even when the new winning hold is not completed at the end of the short time (ie, Leave the default display).

  The process of process number 2 is a process related to a new start prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit without time saving. In the process of process number 2, the peripheral control MPU, when the mode of the new start winning hold display is a specific mode with high expectation of jackpot, for example, at the start of the jackpot opening screen won in the previous variation, The mode of the new start-pick-up hold display is returned to the default. However, if the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the big hit opening screen, the hold display in the specific mode is deleted in the same manner as other hold displays. In addition, even when the normal state is controlled after the jackpot game is over, the new start winning hold display mode is not returned to the specific display mode (that is, the default display is left).

  The process of process number 3 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. In the process of process number 3, the peripheral control MPU does not change the hold display mode of the new start winning prize (that is, continues the hold display, specifically, for example, if it is a blue hold display mode, blue Will continue to display the hold display mode. In addition, the peripheral control MPU may return the new start winning hold display mode to the default at the start of the small hitting opening screen won in the previous variation. However, if the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the small hitting opening screen, the hold display in the specific mode is deleted in the same manner as other hold displays.

  The process of process number 4 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is out of place. In the process of process number 4, the peripheral control MPU does not change the hold display mode of the new start winning prize (that is, continues the hold display, specifically, for example, if it is a blue hold display mode, blue Will continue to display the hold display mode.

  FIG. 174 is an example of the processing table 2. The processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation and both the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are limited as the prefetch effect limitation of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. is there. The processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when restricting both the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect limitation of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize, so regardless of the type of jackpot of the previous variation, It is defined that no special process is executed for the pre-reading effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

  FIG. 175 is an example of the processing table 3. The processing table 3 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expected suggestion effect is restricted as a prefetch effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. is there.

  The processes of process numbers 5 to 6 are processes related to a new start prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with a short time. One of the processes of process numbers 5 to 6 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 5 to 6, the process for the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

  In the process of process number 5, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the short time accompanying the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation It is during the digestion of the reservation of the second special symbol. By the process of process number 5, when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous change, etc., the player may not forget that the setting suggestion effect is performed. it can.

  In the process of process number 6, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize. It should be noted that since the previous change has won the jackpot with a short time, the change corresponding to the new winning is likely to start after the short time has ended (the game ball is placed at the second start port 2004 during the short time). (If there is a high-winning prize and the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are suspended, the second special symbol variation is executed in preference to the first special symbol variation). Therefore, since the setting suggestion effect is executed after the time reduction by the processing of the processing number 6, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the end of the time reduction.

  The processes of process numbers 7 to 8 are processes related to a new start prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit without time. One of the processes of process numbers 7 to 8 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 7 to 8, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

  In the process of process number 7, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the jackpot game won by the previous change. Although the player feels discouraged when he wins the jackpot but does not win in a short time, the processing of processing number 7 causes the discouragement to start when the setting suggestion effect starts during the jackpot game at the latest. You can enjoy big hit games in a reduced state.

  In the process of process number 8, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize. By the process of process number 8, since the setting suggestion effect starts immediately after the end of the big hit, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player for not being given a short time.

  The processes of process numbers 9 to 10 are processes related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. One of the processes with process numbers 9 to 10 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 9 to 10, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

  In the process of process number 9, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggesting effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the opening of the small hits won by the previous fluctuation, or during the small hits. At the small hit, only a small privilege is given to the player, so the player may be discouraged, but the processing of processing number 9 is disappointing by starting the setting suggestion effect at an early timing. Can be reduced.

  In the process of process number 10, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. When the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous fluctuation, etc., because the series of digestion times related to the big hit is shorter than the series of digestion times related to the big hit, the setting suggestion effect Otherwise, the player may feel distrust. The process of process number 10 can prevent such distrust from being given to the player.

  The processes of process numbers 11 to 13 are processes related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is out of place. One of the processes of process numbers 11 to 13 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 11 to 13, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

  In the process of process number 11, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize.

  In the process of the process number 12, the peripheral control MPU performs the new start only when the hold display mode in the pre-change hold pre-reading effect is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation degree of jackpot. During the fluctuation corresponding to the winning, the setting suggesting effect is executed as the pre-reading effect in the new start winning. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but control is performed so that the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is different (for example, a dialogue that suggests setting by character B appears). The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or advanced by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds). By the processing of the processing number 12, such disappointment can be reduced for a player who feels disappointment with respect to the fact that a hold display mode having a high jackpot expectation level appears in the previous change. it can. In FIG. 175 and FIG. 178 described later, the old hold is a hold corresponding to the previous change, and the new hold is a hold corresponding to the new start winning.

  In the process of process number 13, the peripheral control MPU indicates a setting suggestion as a pre-reading effect in the new start winning when the hold display mode is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation level of jackpot Do not execute the production. The processing of processing number 13 is not performed despite the appearance of a hold display with a high jackpot expectation level in the previous change, and the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect does not appear even in the change corresponding to the new start winning prize. , It is possible to suppress the player's immersing in the game.

  FIG. 176 is an example of the processing table 4. The processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous variation, and only the setting suggestion effect is limited as a prefetch effect limitation of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. .

  The process with the process number 14 is a process related to a new start prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with a short time. In the process of process number 14, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

  The process of process number 15 is a process related to a new start prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit without time saving. In the process of process number 15, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the pre-read effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

  The process of process number 16 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. In the process of process number 16, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

  The process of process number 17 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is out of place. In the process of process number 16, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the pre-read effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

  Since the processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when only the setting suggestion effect is limited as the prefetching effect limitation of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, the new start regardless of the big variation type of the previous variation. It is defined that no special processing is executed for the setting suggestion effect in the variation corresponding to the winning.

  FIG. 177 is an example of the processing table 5. The processing table 5 is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous variation, and both the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are limited as the prefetch effect limitation of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. It is a table to be. The processing table 5 is a table that is referred to when restricting both the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect as the prefetching effect limitation of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize, so regardless of the jackpot type of the previous variation, It is defined that no special process is executed for the pre-reading effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

  FIG. 178 is an example of the processing table 6. The processing table 6 is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous variation, and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expected suggestion effect is limited as a prefetch effect limitation of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. It is a table.

  The processes of process numbers 18 to 21 are processes related to a new start prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with a short time. One of the processes of process numbers 18 to 21 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 18 to 21, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

  In the process of process number 18, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the short time accompanying the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation It is during the digestion of the reservation of the second special symbol. By the process of process number 18, when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous change, etc., the player may not forget that the setting suggestion effect is performed. it can.

  In the process of process number 19, the peripheral control MPU is set to be suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation. If it is better (specifically, for example, it is informed that setting 4 or more is confirmed in the previous variation setting suggestion effect, and setting as a pre-reading effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize) Only when it is notified that setting 5 or more is confirmed in the suggestion effect), the setting suggestion effect as the pre-read effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the short time accompanying the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation It is during the digestion of the reservation of the second special symbol.

  By the processing of the processing number 19, the player can see the high setting suggestion effect during the big hit with the short time at the latest, so that the double uplifting feeling by the big hit with the time reduction and the high setting suggestion can be obtained. Further, for example, it is notified that setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation, and setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. Is notified, the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning is a useless effect that does not provide new information to the player, Such useless effects can be omitted by the process of No. 19. On the other hand, for example, when it is notified that setting 4 or more is confirmed in the pre-change setting suggestion effect, setting 5 in the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize is made. Even if the fact that the above is confirmed is not notified, the player is likely to continue the game, and therefore the setting suggestion effect is likely to be a useless effect. The production can be omitted.

  In the process of process number 20, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize. By the process of process number 20, since the setting suggestion effect often starts immediately after the time reduction ends, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player with respect to the end of the time reduction state.

  In the process of process number 21, the peripheral control MPU is set to be suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning than the setting suggested in the previous variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. By the process of the process number 21, the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the process of the process number 19 can be omitted, or the disappointment of the player for the end of the time-saving state can be reduced.

  The processes of process numbers 22 to 25 are processes related to a new start prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit without time saving. One of the processes with process numbers 22 to 25 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 22 to 25, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

  In the process of process number 22, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the jackpot game won by the previous change. Although the player feels discouraged for winning the jackpot but not winning in a short time, if the setting suggestion effect starts during the jackpot game at the latest by the processing of the processing number 22, the disappointment is given. You can enjoy big hit games in a reduced state.

  In the process of process number 23, the peripheral control MPU is set to be suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the jackpot game won by the previous change. If the setting suggestion effect is started during the big hit game at the latest by the processing of the process number 23, the big hit game can be enjoyed with the discouragement being reduced.

  In the process of process number 24, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize. By the process of process number 24, the setting suggestion effect starts immediately after the end of the big hit, so that the disappointment of the player for not having entered quickly can be reduced.

  In the process of process number 25, the peripheral control MPU is set to be suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning than the setting suggested in the previous variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 21, it is possible to omit a useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19, or to reduce the disappointment of the player for not having entered in a short time. Also, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect is not better than the setting suggested in the previous change setting suggestion effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize, If a setting suggestion effect is executed as a pre-reading effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize, a player who is discouraged not to enter in a short time will be shown a more useless setting suggestion effect. There is a risk of traversing the person.

  The processes of process numbers 26 to 29 are processes related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. One of the processing numbers 26 to 29 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 26 to 29, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

  In the process of process number 26, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the opening of the small hits won by the previous fluctuation, or during the small hits. At the small hit, only a small privilege is given to the player, so the player may be discouraged, but the processing of the processing number 26 is disappointing by starting the setting suggestion effect at an early timing. Can be reduced.

  In the process of process number 27, the peripheral control MPU is set to be suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize, rather than the setting suggested in the previous change setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the opening of the small hits won by the previous fluctuation, or during the small hits. By the processing of the processing number 27, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19, or to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the small merit given to the small hit.

  In the process of process number 28, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize. When the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous fluctuation, etc., because the series of digestion times related to the big hit is shorter than the series of digestion times related to the big hit, the setting suggestion effect Otherwise, the player may feel distrust. By the process of process number 28, such distrust can be prevented from being given to the player.

  In the process of process number 29, the peripheral control MPU is set to be suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. By the process of process number 29, the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the process of process number 19 can be omitted, or the disappointment of the player when only a small merit is given at the small hit can be reduced. Also, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect is not better than the setting suggested in the previous change setting suggestion effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize, Executing a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning will give a more disappointing setting suggestion effect to a player who is disappointed that only a small merit is given at the small hit You will be shown, and you may struggle the player.

  The processes of process numbers 30 to 34 are processes related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is out of place. One of the processing numbers 30 to 34 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 30 to 34, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

  In the process of process number 30, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. The processing of processing number 30 can reduce the discouragement of the player due to the fact that the previous fluctuation is lost.

  In the process of process number 31, the peripheral control MPU performs the new start only when the hold display mode in the pre-change hold pre-reading effect is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation degree of jackpot. During the fluctuation corresponding to the winning, the setting suggesting effect is executed as the pre-reading effect in the new start winning. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but control is performed so that the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is different (for example, a dialogue that suggests setting by character B appears). The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or advanced by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds). By the processing of the processing number 31, such disappointment can be reduced for a player who feels discouraged from having missed despite the appearance of a hold display with a high expectation of jackpot in the previous fluctuation. it can.

  In the process of process number 32, the peripheral control MPU is a case where the mode of the hold display in the pre-change hold pre-reading effect is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation degree of jackpot, and the setting of the pre-change Only when the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect is better than the setting suggested in the suggestion effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, the new start prize During the variation corresponding to, the setting suggestion effect is executed as the prefetching effect in the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 32, the disappointment of the player for the previous change that was a mode of holding display with high expectation level of jackpot can be reduced by the setting suggestion effect.

  In the process of the process number 33, the peripheral control MPU only applies the new start prize when the hold display mode in the pre-change hold pre-reading effect is not a specific mode (for example, green or red) with high expectation of jackpot. During the variation corresponding to, the setting suggestion effect is executed as the prefetching effect in the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 33, such disappointment can be reduced by the setting suggestion effect for the player who has been disappointed without obtaining the degree of expectation for the big hit in the pre-change pending look-ahead effect.

  In the process of process number 34, the peripheral control MPU is a case where the mode of the hold display is not a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation degree of jackpot, and is suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation More, when the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect is better before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, only during the variation corresponding to the new start winning, A setting suggestion effect is executed as a pre-reading effect in the new start winning. A situation in which the processing of process number 34 amplifies the frustration of the player that the pre-change hold display mode suggests a low setting in the setting suggestion effect in the change corresponding to the new start winning prize Can be suppressed.

  Note that, in the above-described processing, the peripheral control MPU performs the setting suggestion in the following cases even when the setting suggestion effect is not restricted as the prefetch effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. There is no need to perform the production. For example, when the new start winning is performed during the big hit, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect. This is because immediately after the big hit game, there is a high possibility that the player will continue the game without giving an incentive by the setting suggestion effect.

  As shown in the example of the processing table 3 and the processing table 6, since the effect is exhibited in each of the processes related to the new start winning defined by each process number, the process related to the new start winning can be set in the hall or the like. Therefore, it is possible to provide gaming machines that meet the needs of sales styles such as halls.

  In addition, for example, the new start winning is just before the end of the ST state (probability change state that continues until a big win is won or a predetermined number of special symbol changes are executed) (specifically, for example, special until the end of the ST state) The state in which the number of remaining symbol variations is 4 or less, the maximum number of reserved special symbols, or the state in which the number of remaining special symbol variations until the end of the ST state is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600) In the case where it is broken, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately before the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not to win a jackpot in the ST. In this state, when a setting suggestion effect is started as a look-ahead effect related to a new start winning prize, the player misunderstands the setting suggestion effect as an effect with a high expectation degree of big hit, and a situation that makes the player delighted There is a risk. Occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed by the processing described above.

  Also, for example, a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations after the ST state ends and shifts to the normal state (specifically, for example, four special symbol fluctuations, which are the maximum number of special symbols held, or from the ST state) The second start port 2004 may be opened immediately after the transition to the normal state, and the new symbol change is performed until a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) (a special symbol variation) is performed. When the start winning is performed, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately after the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not to win a big hit immediately. In particular, immediately after the end of the ST state, there is a high possibility that a change corresponding to the hold of the second special symbol that is likely to be won in the type of big hit that has great merit for the player is executed. In this state, when a setting suggestion effect is started as a look-ahead effect related to a new start winning prize, the player misunderstands the setting suggestion effect as an effect with a high expectation degree of big hit, and a situation that makes the player delighted There is a risk. Occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed by the processing described above.

  In addition, when it is determined that a setting suggestion effect that is completed independently in each of the plurality of holds is executed, a single setting suggestion effect across the changes corresponding to the plurality of holds is executed. The setting suggestion effect may be changed.

[12-16. Another example of setting change / confirmation process]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. The initialization function of the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954, In order to distinguish and describe the setting change function, an operation related to changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

  179 and 180 are flowcharts of the power-on process executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on. The power-on process shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 is another example of step S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 fetches the level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the level of the setting key 971 from the input port, and stores the fetched level data in the register (step S201). Whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated is determined by the main control MPU 1311 in steps S212 and S214 after the peripheral control board 1510 is reliably activated. For this reason, if a hall employee accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start, the RAM employee clears the RAM in an unintended state. The switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the start of the power-on process, and after the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is finished. By determining the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in the temporary storage means such as a register, even if the employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, Operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the input operation is reliably detected.

  Note that the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON level of the setting key 971 may be different. For example, the logic clear may be changed between the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 so that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON at the High level and the setting key 971 is ON when the Low key is at the Low level. In addition, the voltage for determining ON by the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be changed. By doing in this way, the signal level is changed by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with the radio wave, and an illegal act of starting the setting change mode can be made difficult. Further, as described later, it is not necessary to monitor the level of the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the set value is within a predetermined range (step S202). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 that can be selected in the stage of setting 1 to 6, the value of the workpiece in which the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = 5) In the case, if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within a predetermined range.

  If the set value is not within the predetermined range, a value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H) is recorded in the set state management area, and the initialization by the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is awaited (step S203). Since the set value is not within the range in which the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, the abnormal set value is not corrected. For this reason, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value when the power is turned on, and if there is an abnormality, the processing related to the normal game such as a special figure or a general figure is not executed.

  Note that the set value is not only determined when the power is turned on, but also when winning the start opening, starting the variable display game, or when the game state is switched (from the normal state to the big hit state, from the low probability state to the high probability state) The determination is also made when a predetermined condition such as a non-time-saving state to a time-saving state is established. As a result, even if the set value is mistakenly abnormal, it is prevented that the lottery is performed based on the wrong set value.

  When it is determined that the set value is abnormal, the game is stopped and the power is turned on again or the set value is abnormal (RAM abnormal) until the setting value is changed. . When it is determined that the set value is abnormal, a predetermined value may be set. As the predetermined value, the setting value storage area may be updated using a value corresponding to setting 6 indicating the highest setting or a value corresponding to setting 1 indicating the lowest setting.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the RAM abnormality can be solved only through the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality is not solved only by turning on the power again. This is because the RAM abnormality may be caused by an illegality in addition to the malfunction. If the RAM abnormality caused by the illegality can be solved by the power-on operation, the RAM abnormality can be easily eliminated. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated without going through the setting change mode, the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated unless the power switch 932, the setting key 971, and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated. Since the operation of the setting key 971 that can be operated only by employees in the hall having the key is included, security performance against fraud can be improved.

  In addition, in order to cope with a go-to action that illegally changes the setting value to an indefinite value, if it is determined that the setting value is abnormal, it is updated to a value corresponding to setting 1 indicating the minimum setting, and the security of the gaming machine It can improve the performance and is effective.

  As shown in FIG. 201 (B), the setting state management area is a storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the normal gaming state (game startable state), the setting confirmation mode, and the setting change mode The abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is recorded.

  On the other hand, when the set value is within a predetermined range, the peripheral control board 1510 is awaited for activation (step S204).

  Then, the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 at the previous power shutdown is compared (verified) with the checksum calculated at the previous power shutdown and stored in step S48. Instead of the checksum, a fixed value check code may be used. Further, it is determined whether the value of the backup flag area is normal. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup was successful is stored in the backup flag area, the RAM data is backed up normally when a power failure occurs (step S205).

  As a result of the determination, if either the checksum or the backup flag area value is abnormal, a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S206), and all areas (settings) of the main control RAM 1312 are recorded. (Including the area in which the value is stored) is initialized (step S207), and the process proceeds to step S216. Note that erasing data stored in the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 or a predetermined area is referred to as “initialization”, but “RAM clear” is also used in the same meaning.

  On the other hand, if the values of the checksum and backup flag area are normal, a setting change operation (the RAM clear switch 954 is ON and the setting key 971 is ON) is performed based on the value (contents) of the setting key stored in the register. Judge whether it is. When the setting change operation is not performed (both or either of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are OFF), the setting is set in the setting state management area in order to determine whether the state is being changed before the power is turned on. It is determined whether a value (02H) indicating that the change is in progress is recorded (step S208).

  As a result, if the setting change operation is stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are set to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and the setting change operation should be started. It can be determined that it is in a state. If a value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is recorded in the setting state management area, it can be determined that the power has been turned on after a power failure during the setting changing operation. When it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the register or the value stored in the setting status management area, a value (02H) indicating the setting change status is recorded in the setting status management area (step In step S209, the clear area of the main control RAM 1312 to be initialized when the RAM is normal is initialized (step S210), and the process proceeds to step S216.

  In step S208, when shifting to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, a value indicating the setting change state (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area in step S209. At this time, since it is not necessary to set the same value (setting change state (02H)) again, when it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, the setting is changed to the setting state management area. The value (02H) indicating the state may not be recorded.

  On the other hand, if the setting change operation is not set in the register and the value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting changing operation should not be started. In order to determine whether or not the state of RAM is abnormal, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S211).

  As a result, if a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined that the state before power-on is abnormal in RAM (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the process proceeds to step S216. On the other hand, if a value indicating RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the state before power-on is not RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the ON level of RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S212).

  As a result, if the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on, so the RAM area in the game area excluding the setting value and setting state management area In order to initialize (clear area when the RAM is normal), the process proceeds to step S210.

  On the other hand, if the level of the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated when the power is turned on, so the power-on state buffer is set (step S213). The contents set in the power-on state buffer are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a power-on state command for notifying the gaming state managed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is restored.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register (step S214). As a result, if the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register, the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, and the setting confirmation operation should be started. Therefore, the setting confirmation mode is displayed in the setting state management area. The value (01H) is recorded (step S215).

  Thereafter, initialization of the devices built in the main control MPU 1311 is performed (step S216), and a power-on operation command for notifying the operation of each unit when the power is turned on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S217). The power-on operation command is one of the power-on commands described in step S32 in FIG. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized to the power-on state (step S218).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game start possible state is recorded in the set state management area (step S219). If a value indicating a game start possible state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, and the process proceeds to step S220 and the initial setting is continued. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game start possible state is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game cannot be started, so the initial setting is terminated and the process proceeds to step S224.

  In step S220, initial setting at the start of the game or initial setting at the time of power failure recovery is performed. Thereafter, a power-on state command for notifying the state of each unit at the time of power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S221). Then, a power-on return destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol at the time of power failure recovery is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S222). The power-on state command and the power-on return destination command are one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. Various commands stored in the buffer are transmitted in the timer interrupt process.

  Further, a setting value command for notifying the setting value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S223), the interruption is permitted (step S224), and the process proceeds to a normal main loop (for example, step S36 in FIG. 22).

  181 and 182 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. Unlike the timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 24, 75, 80, 104, and 155, the timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 executes setting change processing within the timer interrupt processing.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 updates the LED common counter (LED_CT) (step S230). The LED common counter is a counter that determines which common terminal of the base display 1317 is turned on, that is, a digit to be displayed. In this embodiment, an example in which the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together will be described. However, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be provided separately. In this case, LED common counters may be provided as many as the number of displays.

  Thereafter, switch input processing is executed (step S231). The switch input process is the same as step S74 in FIG.

  Next, it is determined whether or not an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the set state management area (step S232). If an initial value (a value indicating a game start possible state) is recorded in the setting state management area, it is not necessary to execute the setting change / confirmation processing (after step S234) in the timer interruption processing, so that the normal timer interruption processing is performed. (For example, after step S76 in FIG. 23) is executed (step S233). In the normal timer interrupt process in step S233, a performance display process (FIG. 183) described later is executed. On the other hand, if the initial value (value indicating a game start possible state) is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game process is not executed in the timer interruption process, and the setting change / confirmation process is executed.

  In the setting change / confirmation process, first, OFF is output from the LED common port, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784, and the game interruption signal is set to ON (step S234). By turning off the LED common signal at the early stage of timer interrupt processing, the ghost phenomenon that the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED turn-off time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching is mixed is seen. This prevents LED flickering.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S235). If a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S245 without executing the process of changing / checking the setting value. On the other hand, if a value indicating RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether an operation for changing / checking the setting value is performed (steps S236 and S237). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S236).

  If the setting change switch 972 is operated, the set value is incremented by 1 (step S238), and the process proceeds to step S245. If the set value is added and the upper limit is exceeded, the initial value is restored. On the other hand, if the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (the value indicating the setting confirmation is recorded in the setting state management area) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting key It is determined whether an OFF edge having an output level of 971 has been detected (step S239). When the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is detected, since the setting key 971 has been operated to the normal position, setting change / confirmation mode end processing is executed (steps S240 to S244). On the other hand, if the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting change / confirmation mode is not terminated and the process proceeds to step S245.

  In the setting change / confirmation mode end process, as shown in FIG. 182, an initial value (a value indicating a game start possible state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S240), and the initial setting at the start of the game or at the time of power failure recovery Is set (step S241), and a power-on state command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying the state of each unit at the time of power-on (game state such as low probability / high probability, short time / non-short time). Is stored in the buffer (step S242). Then, a power-on return destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol at the time of recovery after a power failure is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S243). Specifically, the counter value indicating the processing state relating to the special symbol / special electric accessory (the state of each processing relating to the special symbol / special electric accessory (standby, changing, judgment, big hit, etc.)) is transmitted as a command. . Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine the gaming state relating to the special symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory when the power is restored. Then, the setting value command for notifying the setting value is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S244), and the process proceeds to step S245.

  It should be noted that the command for notifying the set value may be transmitted not only at the setting change / confirmation mode end process at the time of power-on, but also at the start of change or at the switching of the gaming state. At this time, the command of the set value that is transmitted when the power is turned on and the command that is transmitted during the normal game such as at the start of fluctuation may be the same command or different commands (for example, the value of the higher byte is different).

  When the set value commands are different between when the power is turned on and when the normal game is played, the peripheral control board 1510 sends a series of commands (variation pattern commands, symbol commands, etc.) including the set values at the start of the special symbol variation display game. When received, it is determined whether a command is missing. By changing the contents of the command at the timing when the command is transmitted (when the power is turned on, during normal games, etc.), the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether the setting value is correctly received when the power is turned on or other than the setting value when the fluctuation starts. It is possible to determine whether a variation pattern command or a symbol command is missing.

  In step S245, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area. If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, a setting for displaying an error on the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 in the case of a separate body) is performed (step S246). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, a setting for displaying the current setting value on the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 in the case of a separate body) is performed (steps). S247).

  Thereafter, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED of the base display 1317, and the base display 1317 is turned on by the segment signal output according to the setting in step S246 or S247 (step S248). As described above, after the timer interrupt process is started, the setting value change operation is determined (step S237), and then ON is output to the common terminal of the LED for each timer interrupt to display the setting value (setting value display). Switch). The set value is displayed without using the setting operation as a trigger. Specifically, the setting change / confirmation process is not being performed as a process at power-on, but is performed within the same timer interrupt process as when a normal game is started. Even if the power is restored after the setting key 971 is restored to its original state, the setting when the power failure occurs can be set without operating the setting key 971 or the setting change switch 972 to the same position as when the power failure occurred. It is possible to return to the state of change / confirmation processing. Furthermore, in the setting change / confirmation process, a process executed in a normal game process such as a command transmission process and a dynamic LED lighting control can be shared.

  Then, a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S249), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. That is, in step S249, the command stored in the buffer in steps S242, S243, S244, etc. is actually output from the main control board 1310 as serial data.

  In the timer interrupt process described above, the process branches depending on whether the normal game is executed or the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S232 in FIG. 181). And different timer interrupt processes may be started in the normal gaming state and the setting change mode and / or the setting change mode. The plurality of timer interrupt processes may partially include a common process (for example, even if a common subroutine is called in each timer interrupt process), or all may be configured by different routines. In other words, timer interrupt process 1 (for setting change / confirmation) is called in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, and timer interrupt 2 (for normal game) is called in the normal gaming state. A process (module) to be executed and a dedicated process (module) to be executed only by one timer interrupt process are provided. Commonly executed processes include, for example, a switch input process that captures the output of various detection switches such as a prize opening sensor, and a peripheral board command process that transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, the register bank may be shared between the process executed in the normal game and the process executed in the setting change mode. When bank 0 is used in the main process on the main control side, bank 1 is used in both timer interrupt processes. Since two timer interrupt processes do not start simultaneously, one register bank can be shared. That is, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 has two or more registers that can be switched depending on the bank. The main control side main process that is repeatedly executed and the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed 1 (during normal game) and periodically executed timer interrupt process 2 (setting change mode), common to at least two of the main control side main process, timer interrupt process 1 and timer interrupt process 2 Use the bank registers.

  The timer interruption process executed in the normal game and the timer interruption process executed in the setting change mode may have the same execution period, but may be executed in different periods. Since the sampling of the switch in the timer interruption process executed in the setting change mode is only the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the execution period of the timer interruption process in the normal gaming state is 4 ms, and is executed in the setting change mode. The timer interrupt processing execution cycle may be early (for example, 2 ms) or slow (for example, 8 ms). In addition, if the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode is delayed, the dynamic lighting control cycle of the LED that displays the setting value is delayed, and the display mode of the setting value is different from the base display during the normal game. become. When there are 8 common LEDs, if the timer interrupt processing execution cycle is 8 ms, the display cycle is 64 ms (display ON is 8 ms, OFF is 56 ms), and the timer interrupt processing execution cycle is 4 ms. The period is 32 ms (display ON is 4 ms, OFF is 20 ms), the OFF time is increased in proportion to the execution period of the timer interrupt process, and the flickering of the LED is increased, so that the display mode with the base display during normal gaming Can be recognized differently.

  When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is activated at the time of power activation, the timer interruption process 1 for setting change / confirmation is permitted and the timer interruption process 2 for normal game is prohibited. On the other hand, when the power supply is started in the normal gaming state (does not shift to the setting change / confirmation mode), the setting change / confirmation timer interrupt processing 1 is prohibited and the normal game timer interrupt processing 2 is permitted. At the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the timer interruption process 1 for setting change / confirmation is prohibited, and the timer interruption process 2 for normal game is permitted.

  FIG. 183 is a flowchart of the performance display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the performance display process, the performance (for example, base value) of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the base display 1317.

  The performance display process is executed in the above-described timer interruption in the normal gaming state. Specifically, it is executed in the normal interrupt process in step S233 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 181 and the base display output process in step S2087 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 saves the stack address in the game control area, sets the stack address outside the game control area (step S260), and saves the register used in the game control area in the register save buffer (step S260). S261). The save destination of the register used in the game control area in step S261 may be a work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. Note that the save destination of the registers used in the game control area may be a stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the initial power-on flag is normal (step S262). The initial power-on flag is a flag indicating whether an area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (that is, whether the power is turned on for the first time). When the area outside the game control area is initialized, 5AH is set. Is done. That is, if the value of the initial power-on flag is 5 AH, it can be determined that the main control RAM 1312 at the first power-on is initialized (that is, the area outside the game control area is also initialized).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the parameter value used for displaying the base value is within a predetermined range (step S263). For example, if the value of the LED common counter for switching the display digit of the base indicator 1317 is other than 0 to 3, it is determined that the parameter value is abnormal, and the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is stored in step S264. initialize.

  If the power failure flag is not normal or the value of each parameter is not within the predetermined range, the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialized, set to the power failure flag 5AH (step S264), and the process proceeds to step S265. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is normal and the value of each parameter is within a predetermined range, the various winning opening sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557 and the discharge ball sensor 3060 are detected and the base value is calculated ( Step S265).

  Then, it is determined whether it is the switching time of the section for calculating the base value (step S266). If the switching time has come, the display mode is switched (step S267). Then, display data is created according to the display mode and stored in the buffer (step S268). And a display is controlled for every area. For example, the display control for each section includes display of a test section with less than 500 out balls, and blinking display when the number of low-probability / non-time-short out balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000) ( Step S269).

  Thereafter, the register value is restored from the register saving buffer (step S270), the stack address in the game control area is restored (step S271), and the performance display process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the alerting | reporting aspect of the pachinko machine 1 of a present Example is demonstrated. As described above, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal when the power is turned on, during the setting change mode or during the setting confirmation mode, the pachinko machine is notified to the hall employees. Inform the condition clearly.

  Note that the notification mode described below (for example, the display mode of the function display unit 1400) is output in a mode selected in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. These notifications are controlled by selecting a notification pattern together with display settings on the base display 1317 in steps S246 and S247 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). Specifically, it is executed in the setting display process in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Note that a dedicated module for displaying the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided to execute the processing.

First, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). In addition, the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with priority over other abnormality and state notifications.
Function display unit 1400 All LEDs are extinguished or all LEDs blink at high speed in the same cycle. Main liquid crystal display device 1600 “RAM error” character display sound (sound effect) RAM abnormality notification sound is output (RAM abnormality notification sound is a setting change (It may be the same as the notification sound other than mode and setting confirmation mode)
Sound (sound) “RAM error” sound output volume Maximum volume frame decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player A predetermined frame lamp (top lamp is installed on the door frame 3) Including LED, including ball breakage and stock notification LED) Flashing in red Display panel decoration LED All extinguished external output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Output re-notification release condition Main control board 1310 RAM is cleared or power is turned on again to peripheral control board 1510

Next, the setting change notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting change mode will be described. The setting change notification is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights up or all LEDs blink at medium speed in the same cycle Main liquid crystal display device 1600 “Setting change” is displayed as sound (effect sound) Setting change mode notification sound is output sound (voice) “ “Settings are being changed” sound is output a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). Output volume Maximum volume frame decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player A predetermined frame lamp provided on the door frame 3 ( Display lamp decoration white LED blinking in white, including top lamp, excluding ball breakage and stock notification LED) External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Output re-notification condition Peripheral control board 1510 Received “A001H” as an operation command at power-on

Next, a setting confirmation notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The setting confirmation notification is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights up or all LEDs blink slowly at the same cycle. Main liquid crystal display device 1600 “Setting confirmation” is displayed as sound (effect sound) Setting confirmation mode notification sound is output (setting confirmation mode notification) The sound may be the same as the notification sound in the setting change mode)
Sound (sound) “Setting is being confirmed” sound is output a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Output volume Maximum volume frame decoration LED independent of volume control board box 1520 volume or player volume setting Provided on door frame 3 Predetermined frame lamp (including top lamp, excluding out of ball and stock notification LED) blinks in white Display panel decoration LED All extinguished external output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Cancel condition for output re-notification The peripheral control board 1510 receives “A001H” as an operation command at power-on, and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed.

In the notification of the three states described above, the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with the highest priority, and the notification is preferably given with priority in the order of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. More specifically, the priority may be determined in the order shown in FIG. Note that priority 1 has a high notification priority, and priority 9 has a low notification priority. That is, when a plurality of notifications are to be performed, notification with a high priority (small number) is performed. In addition, when a plurality of notification conditions with the same priority are established and notifications compete, even if switching between a plurality of competing notifications is performed, the established notification is performed and the notification is released. If the competing notification satisfies the condition, the competing notification may be performed. Specifically, at priority 3, the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation notification do not occur at the same time, so the notification does not compete. At priority level 4, an excessive ball award notification and a normal electric accessory winning abnormality notification may occur simultaneously, and the two notifications may conflict.
Priority 1: RAM error notification priority when RAM abnormality is detected 2: Setting change notification priority in setting change mode 3: RAM clear when main control RAM is initialized by operation of RAM clear switch 954 Notification (excluding RAM clearing by setting change)
Priority 3: Setting confirmation notification priority in setting confirmation mode 4: Prize ball excess abnormality notification priority when a large number of award balls are paid out Priority 4: When a normal electric accessory is not operated, continuously over a predetermined number When a winning is detected or when more than a predetermined winning is detected at the time of one ordinary electric pottery operation, normal electric prize winning abnormality notification priority 5: difference between the number of winning prizes and the number of discharged prizes Discharge abnormality notification priority 6 when vibration exceeds a predetermined number: Vibration sensor abnormality notification priority 7 when vibration is detected: Door opening abnormality notification priority when opening of the door frame 3 or the body frame 4 is detected 8: Magnetic sensor abnormality notification priority when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism 9: When a predetermined number of consecutive winnings are detected when the big winning opening is not operating, or when a single winning is made, Anomaly notification of a big winning entry when detected

  Next, details of the above-described power-on processing (FIGS. 179 and 180) will be described. 186 and 187 are flowcharts of the power-on process executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

  First, when the reset signal is canceled by turning on the power, the main control MPU 1311 starts from the process at address 8000, which is the start address of the program code. Protection invalidity and prohibition area invalidity of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protection register (step S2000). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of determining an abnormality and resetting when an access to a prohibited area other than the specified area is made by designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312. For this reason, the reset function by accessing this prohibited area is canceled to allow access to all areas. Note that when the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the designated prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset. Good.

  Next, a simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set as a watchdog timer (step S2001), and the watchdog timer is cleared after elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 300 milliseconds) (step S2002). Thereafter, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2003), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2004). Once the power failure clear signal is set to ON and then set to OFF, the power failure clear signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

  Next, the levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2005). Whether the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated is determined by the main control MPU 1311 after the peripheral control board 1510 is reliably started. Therefore, during the standby until the peripheral control board 1510 starts, Of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are erroneously interrupted, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. For this reason, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like as a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is terminated. By determining the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 that are stored in a register or the like that is a temporary storage means later, even if the employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the power-on operation is reliably detected.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the power failure notice signal is during a power failure (step S2006). If a power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and the system waits until the power supply voltage is stabilized in step S2006.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2007). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 that can be selected in the stage of setting 1 to 6, the value of the workpiece in which the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = 5) In the case, if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the name is a predetermined range name.

  If the set value is not within the predetermined range, the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2023), a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the set state management area (step S2024), and the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. Wait for initialization by. Since the set value is not within the range in which the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, even if the set value is an abnormal value, it is not corrected. For this reason, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the set value when the power is turned on. If there is an abnormality, the normal game is not started. In a hall where pachinko machines are installed, you want to initialize the game state while maintaining the set value (for example, you want to clear the latent probability change (high probability non-short time) and return to the normal state with low probability time short) In some cases, a RAM clear operation may be performed. When the setting value is initialized by the RAM clear operation during business, the setting value is reset and the power is turned off to start the setting change mode and the original setting value is reset to continue operation. There is a need. In order not to generate such trouble, the set value is maintained without being cleared by the RAM clear operation.

  On the other hand, if the set value is within a predetermined range, a sub-activation waiting timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 Is awaited (step S2008). The waiting for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time period after the power is turned on until the first command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 even after the set value is determined.

  Thereafter, it is determined again whether the power failure warning signal is during a power failure (step S2009). If a power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the process stands by in step S2009.

  Further, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, and the determination result is stored in a register (step S2010). Specifically, a checksum calculated and stored from data used as a game control area (excluding data saved in the stack) among the areas backed up in the internal RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power shutdown, The checksums calculated using the same area are compared, and if they are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal. Also, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been normally performed (the process at the time of power failure has been normally performed) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is successfully backed up when the power failure occurs It is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal.

  If there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the information in the setting state management area is saved (step S2011), and a value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2012). .

  Then, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked out of the register value in which the value of the PF port is recorded (step S2013). After that, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON (step S2014). If the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

  On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode is set when a power failure occurs (step S2015). For example, when the value of the setting state management area saved in S2011 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

  When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2030 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2016). Specifically, the determination can be made using the determination result stored in the register in step S2010 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2031 in FIG.

  On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality process (step S2017). For example, when the value of the saved setting state management area is a value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality process.

  If it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality process, the process proceeds to step S2036 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality process, a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2018). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2012 is returned to the normal state. Also, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2016 and S2019 to step S2031 is different. The size can be reduced.

  Thereafter, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2019). If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that the RAM clear operation is being performed, and the process proceeds to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 08H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 08H is maintained until the power is turned off, so the normal game process cannot be executed. At this time, if the power is turned off and then the setting is changed and the power is turned on, the RAM abnormality can be canceled. That is, if it is determined in step S2014 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area is a value indicating a setting change from a value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H). (02H) is updated (step S2030), and the RAM abnormal state ends. As described above, the return from the abnormality of the RAM always passes through the setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of the power failure is a RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the setting value is changed.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, the game state information at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power failure occurred (step S2020).

  Thereafter, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2021). If the setting key 971 is operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation is performed, and a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2022). The process proceeds to step S2036. That is, if only the setting key 971 is operated (if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the setting at the time of the power failure is being confirmed, the setting confirmation mode is entered.

  Since steps S2018 to S2022 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is not operated, the operation determination of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2019) and the setting key 971 are performed. Any of the determination of the operation (step S2021) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021) after determining the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2019), or after the operation of the setting key 971 is determined (step S2021). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019).

  Next, FIG. 187, which is a continuation of the power-on process (FIG. 186), will be described.

  If YES is determined in step S2014 or step S2015, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2030). Then, the area other than the set value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2031). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2032). Specifically, since the determination result in step S2010 described above is stored in the register, it can be determined in step S2032 based on the determination result stored in the register.

  When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2033), and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by the RAM abnormality initialization process. The RAM (work area and stack area) used outside is initialized (step S2034). Details of the RAM abnormality initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2035).

  Thereafter, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2036), and a hardware random number (for example, a winning random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2037). Then, a power-on setting process is executed (step S2038). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2039), and the process proceeds to the main process on the main control side (FIG. 188).

  FIG. 188 is a flowchart of main control-side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main process on the main control side is executed after step S2039 of the power-on process.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2040). If the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so the random number update process 2 is executed (step 2041). Details of the random number update processing 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. In the random number update process 2, a random number other than the random number for performing the winning determination mainly in the special lottery or the normal lottery is updated.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is detected, the power off process (steps S2042 to S2046) is executed. In the power-off process, a process for backing up data for returning to the state before the occurrence of the power failure is executed. Specifically, first, interruption is prohibited (step S2042). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, data writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312 is prohibited, and rewriting of game information is protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2043). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, an output port for controlling a solenoid or motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce power consumption until the main board side power-off process is completed, and to reliably end the main board-side power-off process.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, and stores it in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2044). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. The area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting status management or backup that may be changed between the work area in the game control area and the execution of the main process on the main control side after the power is turned on. Flags and checksum area values should be excluded.

  Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off process has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2045). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed. Finally, RAM protection is enabled (write prohibition), and the prohibition area is disabled is written to the RAM protection register, writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2046), and the system waits until recovery from a power failure. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of determining an abnormality and resetting when an access to a prohibited area other than the specified area is made by designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312. For this reason, the reset function by accessing this prohibited area is canceled to allow access to all areas. Note that when the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the designated prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset. Good.

  FIG. 189 is a flowchart of a RAM abnormality initialization process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The RAM abnormality initialization process is executed in step S2034 of the power-on process.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the game control area (step S2050), sets the stack pointer value outside the game control area as the stack pointer (step S2051), and all the registers. The value is stored in a register saving buffer outside the game control area (step S2052).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the initialization at the first power-on is based on the value of the initial power-on flag at the time of power-on (step S2053). The first power-on means when the power is first turned on as a pachinko machine, and when the power is turned on after the backup power is interrupted and the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 is erased. For example, if the connection line between the main control board 1310 and the backup power supply (for example, installed in the main body frame 4) is disconnected, the supply of the backup power to the main control RAM 1312 is cut off and the data in the main control RAM 1312 cannot be retained.

  If it is initialization at the first power-on, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the initialization is not performed when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined whether the discharge ball to be calculated is out of the predetermined range (step S2054). If the base calculation target discharge ball is out of the predetermined range, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the discharge ball as the base calculation target is within a predetermined range, it is determined whether the display parameter of the performance display monitor is within the normal range (step S2055). If the display parameter of the performance display monitor is within the normal range, the RAM abnormality initialization process is terminated and the process returns to the caller process.

  On the other hand, if the display mode of the performance display monitor is outside the normal range, 00H is written and initialized in all work areas outside the use area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2056), and 00H is written in all stack areas outside the use area. Is initialized by writing (step S2057), a predetermined value (for example, 5AH) is set in the initialization flag at the time of power-on (step S2058), and the process returns to the caller process.

  190 and 191 are flowcharts of the timer interrupt process executed by the main control MPU 1311.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, and switches the register bank (step S2060). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for computation, one is used as a register group for bank 0, and the other is usable as a register group for bank 1, and performs bank switching. Therefore, the registers of both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in the main process on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt process. For this reason, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt process, but it is not necessary to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt process. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt, and RET Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored. When a configuration in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register is adopted, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt process, and the bank 0 is returned.

  Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not interrupts are possible, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting the interrupt permission. Note that the flag for controlling interrupt availability is set to the interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of the timer interrupt process. For this reason, the interrupt is not permitted unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. When the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2061).

  Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2062). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

  Note that the switch input process 1 in step S2062 is a process related to a winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080 described later is a process related to input of a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). For this reason, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, NO is determined in step S2604, so that winning detection is performed, but fraud is not detected. Even if a winning is detected, award ball payout, change display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by employees in the hall, and no fraud is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and it is considered that fraud detection is unnecessary.

  Even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected by the switch input process 1 and monitored for specific types of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which the person who intends to cheat (Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves.

  Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2063). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the initial values of the big hit symbol determination random number and the small hit symbol determination random number updated in the random number update processing 2 of the main process on the main control side shown in FIG. Update the random number for initial value determination.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game start is recorded in the set state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game start is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065). By turning off the LED common signal at the early stage of timer interrupt processing, the ghost phenomenon that the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED turn-off time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching is mixed is seen. This prevents LED flickering.

  Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output (step S2067). In step S2067, only the gaming state error signal may be turned on, and the others may be turned off.

  Then, the setting process is executed (step S2068). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, a setting display process is executed (step S2069). Details of the setting display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2070). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission buffer to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2071). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  Next, FIG. 191 will be described. If it is determined in step S2064 in FIG. 190 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the main control MPU 1311 detects the state of the sensor (switch) for fraud detection. Is executed (step S2080). Specifically, when a detection signal or the like from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects a fraud using a magnet is read and a predetermined level (ON level or OFF level) continues for a predetermined time, the input information storage area Remember. Based on the detection state of each fraud detection sensor generated in the switch input process 2, it is determined whether fraud has been detected in the fraud detection process in step S2084. In the fraud detection process (step S 2084), in addition to fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor, a prize winning abnormality such as a large winning mouth and excessive prizes of ordinary electric accessories is also determined.

  Thereafter, timer update processing is executed (step S2081). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol indicator 1185 is turned on according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the normal symbol fluctuation determined in the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process In addition to the time during which the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the display pattern, a payer ACK signal is input to inform that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). Time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when the determination is made. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  Subsequently, a prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written in the main control RAM 1312. Further, based on the result of calculating the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created, and a self-check for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data.

  Subsequently, a frame command reception process is executed (step S2083). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error canceling navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status display by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to that effect is sent to the payout control board 951 and stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, the main control MPU 1311 shapes the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame status display command, an error release notification command, etc.), and the transmission information storage area described above To remember. Specifically, in the frame command reception process, the command received from the payout control board 951 is adapted to the command system for sending the command received from the payout control board 951 to the notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951. In this way, it is stored in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit (SIO) in the same manner as other generated commands. When the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly from the output port to the payout control board 951, not the serial communication circuit.

  Subsequently, an illegal act detection process is executed (step S2084). In the fraud detection process, an abnormal state (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormality, etc.) related to the fraud is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the game is not in the big hit gaming state, when it is detected by the count switch that a game ball has entered the big winning holes 2005 and 2006, the main control program Creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequently, a command output process at the time of passing the switch is executed to create a command corresponding to the detection of the passage of various switches related to the winning switch and the start opening switch and set it in the transmission information storage area (step S2085).

  Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), and base display output processing is executed (step S2087). Unlike the other processes, the base display output process is a process that is executed using the second area outside the game control area, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output process, before and after the execution of the base display output process, predetermined data such as a flag register is saved to the stack area in the game area, and the base display output It is not updated by processing. Thereafter, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2088).

  Subsequently, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed (step S2089). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, it is determined whether or not the random number value for big hit matches the hit judgment value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, and the probability variation state is set based on the big hit symbol random number value. It is determined whether or not to migrate. Then, when the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not to open / close the big winning openings 2005 and 2006. In the case where the winning a prize opening 2005, 2006 is opened and closed by this determination, a gaming state in which a game ball can be received in the winning a prize opening 2005, 2006 when the winning a prize opening 2005, 2006 is opened (or expanded). Thus, the game state shifts to an advantageous game state for the player. In addition, when the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the state subsequently shifts to the probability variation state. On the other hand, when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the state shifts to a gaming state other than the probability variation state. Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

  Subsequently, the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process is executed (step S2090). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches with the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (“ Normal lottery ”). Then, it is determined whether to open / close the second start door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second start port door member 2549 is in an open (or enlarged) state, and a game state in which a game ball can be received in the start port 2004 becomes a game advantageous to the player. Transition to the state.

  Subsequently, an output data setting process is executed (step S2091). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or a big hit game When it is in a state, it outputs a drive signal to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start port (second start port door member 2549), as output information to the hall computer, information output signal during probability change, special symbol display information Output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time and medium information output information, start Various information regarding the game, such as a winning information output signal to output the (game information) signal to the external terminal board 784.

  In the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process 2 (step S2080) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal having a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 for every predetermined number of out balls (such as 10 balls).

  In the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a gaming state, a signal indicating a stop symbol of a normal symbol, and a special symbol.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2070 in FIG.

  FIG. 192 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2068 of the timer interrupt process when the setting state management area is not a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, and mainly executes a setting change process.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2100). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting process is not executed, and the process returns to the caller process.

  If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the process relating to the special symbol and the normal symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be performed at all. This RAM abnormality is caused by the operation of starting the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off and the power failure process is executed. The RAM abnormality is resolved. Then, the setting change mode is ended by the operation of returning the setting key 971, and the normal game can be started.

  Further, when the power is turned on again, if a setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are used to perform an operation other than starting the setting change mode, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained. The abnormal RAM state continues and normal games cannot be started. That is, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and enter the normal gaming state, it is necessary to always go through the setting change mode.

  On the other hand, if a value indicating RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2101). Specifically, it detects whether the setting key 971 has an edge from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the setting key 971 has changed from ON to OFF.

  If it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2102), the setting state management area is initialized (step S2103), and the power-on setting process is executed. (Step S2104), the process returns to the caller process.

  When an operation to end the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned OFF), the delay time until the security signal is turned OFF after the setting change mode is ended by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer. Provide. For this reason, even if the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), only the shortest output signal of the security signal is set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. And the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

  If fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, the security signal may be output for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

  In addition, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, a hot start in the normal gaming state when the power is restored will output a security signal for the remaining time, and when the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch Alternatively, when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM abnormality, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the security signal output timer value is reset by the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 and the output of the security signal is stopped.

  When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during security signal output, there are five patterns: hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation.

  When transitioning to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is output until the activated mode ends and the delay time elapses. When the RAM abnormal state continues, since the setting change operation is not performed even when the power is restored, a security signal due to the continued RAM abnormality is output. In the case of hot start, a security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt process is performed after a predetermined time (for example, during the startup waiting time of the peripheral control board 1510). Security signal output resumes after migration. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, a period for stopping the output of the security signal is provided for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
・ When a power failure occurs during security signal output due to fraud detection, etc., and the power is restored by hot start. ・ After a power failure occurs during security signal output due to a RAM failure, the power returns and the RAM failure continues. When the power is restored after a power failure occurs during security signal output in the setting change mode, and the setting change mode continues.- After the power failure occurs during security signal output in the setting confirmation mode, the power is restored. If the setting check mode continues

  In this way, even when a security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during security signal output, the security signal is output on the hall computer side by stopping the output of the security signal for a predetermined period after the power is restored. It is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality or whether the state accompanying the output of the security signal has been canceled.

  Further, in the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time during which the security signal is output. The security signal output is stopped after a lapse. In the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode may be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2105), and the setting change switch 972 is operated. It is determined whether it has been done (step S2106). Note that the setting change switch 972 may also be configured to be used as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, when it is determined that a value indicating setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1. When the set value exceeds the upper limit 6, it is set to 1 (step S2107). Thereafter, the process returns to the caller process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (that is, the setting check mode) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Without returning to the caller process.

  When determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or immediately after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 is operated to be ON. As described above, when the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change mode is set when the power failure occurs, and even if the setting key 971 is not turned ON when the power failure is recovered, It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by the operation.

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart of the setting display process. The setting display process is executed in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2110). If a value indicating RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED segment terminal output is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111), while setting state management is performed. If a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112).

  Thereafter, an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter is output (step S2113), and the driver is driven to output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display 1317 (step S2114). Return to the caller process.

  FIG. 194 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is called and executed in step S2038 of the power-on process and S2104 of the setting process.

  First, the main control MPU creates a power-on operation command and sets the created command in the transmission buffer (step S2120). As shown in FIG. 202A, the power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

  Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 in the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 are set to 1 which is an initial value. The other bits may be set to 0 (step S2121). The bit corresponding to the setting key 971 in the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 are set to 1 because the bit of the switch is detected by 1 at the next timer interruption, and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent them from being made.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game start possible state is recorded in the set state management area (step S2122). If no value indicating the game start possible state is recorded in the setting state management area, either the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM is abnormal, the power-on setting process is terminated, and the calling source Return to processing.

  On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a game start possible state is recorded in the set state management area, the work area in the game control area is initialized according to whether or not the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (step S2123). ).

  Thereafter, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2124). As shown in FIG. 202 (B), the power-on state command is a command for notifying whether the normal game start possible state is in accordance with the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

  Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2125). The power-on return destination command is a command for notifying a gaming state related to a special symbol, as shown in FIG. 202 (C).

  Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2126). The set value command is a command for notifying the set value as shown in FIG.

  It is to be noted that a special symbol hold number command indicating the number of special symbol variation display games held is transmitted together with a power-on state command, a power-on return destination command, and a set value command, and the function display unit 1400 and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are transmitted. The number of hold display may be restored to the state before the occurrence of the power failure. The special symbol hold count command is sent in the middle of sending these commands either after sending the power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and set value command, or before sending these commands. May be.

  Thereafter, the process returns to the caller process.

  Since the power-on setting process is executed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not in effect when the power is restored, or when the setting change mode ends or the setting confirmation mode ends, the above-mentioned commands (power-on operation commands) , A power-on status command, a power-on return destination command, and a set value command) are transmitted at the time of a power failure recovery that is neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, at the end of the setting change mode, or at the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  FIG. 195 is a flowchart of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step S2041 of the power-on process, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for performing the winning determination in the special lottery or the normal lottery.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets interrupt prohibition (step S2131), updates the initial value random number (step S2132), and sets interrupt permission (step S2133). Since the initial value random number is also updated in the random number update process 1 of step S2063 of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt is prohibited before the initial value random number update process so that the initial value random number update process is not interrupted by the timer interrupt process, Interrupts are permitted after the initial value random number update process. Initial value random numbers are random numbers for determining big hits for special symbols, random numbers for random winning normal symbols, types of symbols for special symbol big hits (low probability / high probability / short time / non-short time, etc.) ) Is a random number for changing an initial value for each cycle such as a random number.

  Thereafter, random numbers other than the winning random numbers (excluding the initial random number) are updated (step S2134), and the process returns to the caller process.

  FIG. 196 is a flowchart of another example of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. It should be noted that the same processing steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In another example described below, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the setting confirmation mode as in the setting change mode. In this alternative example, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected at the time of power recovery, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode and the setting check mode, so that the RAM clear switch 954 is in the setting change mode. It does not switch the mode, but has only a function as an operation to change the setting value.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets a register bank selection flag to 1, switches a register bank (step S2060), and executes switch input processing 3 (step S2141). Details of the switch input processing 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. To do. In step S2141, the switch input process 1 of S2062 may be applied instead of the switch input process 3 described in FIG.

  Then, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2063), and setting change / confirmation processing is executed (step S2142). Details of the setting change / confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, a switch input process 2 is executed (step S2080), a timer update process is executed (step S2081), and a prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). Subsequently, frame command reception processing is executed (step S2083), fraud detection processing is executed (step S2084), and switch passing command output processing is executed (step S2085).

  Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), base display output processing is executed (step S2087), and the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2086). S2088). Subsequently, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed (step S2089), the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process is executed (step S2090), and the output data setting process is executed (step S2091). Further, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed (step S2070), the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2071), the bank of registers is switched (step S2072) by a return instruction (for example, RETI), and the processing before interrupt is restored. To do.

  FIG. 197 is a flowchart of the switch input process 3. The switch input process 3 is executed in step S2141 of the timer interrupt process, reads various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311, creates an ON edge, and inputs the main control RAM 1312 as input information. Store in the information storage area.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the head address of the switch winning information data (step S2160), and obtains the number of processing repetitions from the switch winning information data (step S2161). The number of processing repetitions is the number n of blocks in the switch winning information data table. Then, the input port address specified by the switch winning information data is acquired (step S2162), and the input level data area address specified by the switch winning information data is acquired (step S2163). Further, input information is read from the acquired input port address (step S2164), and the read input information is corrected using the logical correction value specified by the switch winning information data (step S2165).

  After that, it is determined by referring to the value recorded in the setting state management area whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S2166). If it is not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value during the normal game specified in the switch winning information data (step S2167). With this mask, bits used during normal game can be acquired from the input port.

  On the other hand, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value being changed / confirmed specified in the switch winning information data (step S2168). With this mask, only the bits used in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be acquired from the input ports.

  Thereafter, input level data is generated from the bits acquired by the mask process, and the input level data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2169).

  Then, edge data of change from OFF to ON is generated from the input level data, and the input edge data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2170).

  Thereafter, the next block is set as the switch winning information data (step S2171), and it is determined whether the processing of all the switch input ports has been completed (step S2172). If it is determined that all the switch input ports have not been processed, the process returns to step S2162, and the next input port is processed. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the switch input ports have been processed, the switch input process 3 is ended, and the process before the interruption is restored.

  FIG. 198A is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table.

  The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198 is divided into n blocks (n is the number of repetitions of processing), and each block has an input port address, a logical correction value, and a normal game mask. Value, setting change / checking mask value, and input level data area address.

  FIG. 198B is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input level / edge data area.

  The switch input level / edge data area includes n sets of input level data area addresses and input edge data area addresses.

  Since the address of the input edge data area is set to the next address of the input level data area as shown in the figure, it is not specified in the switch winning information data. When the input level data area and the input edge data area are not continuously arranged, the address of the input edge data area is set together with the input level data area in the same table. The addresses of the input level data area and the input edge data area are 16 bits (2 bytes), but are set as the addresses of the input level data area and the input edge data area set in the switch winning information data table. The value may be a lower 8-bit (1 byte) value. That is, since the upper byte of the address is a fixed value that does not change depending on the value of the input level data area or the input edge data area, the upper byte is the upper byte of the address in the RAM area, and only the lower byte needs to be set. Can be reduced.

  FIG. 199 is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table. FIG. 199 (A) shows a configuration example of the switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state, and FIG. These show the structural examples of the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

  The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 199 is divided into n blocks (n is the number of repetitions of processing), and each block has an input port address, a logic correction value, a mask value, And the address of the input level data area. The switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state and the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode include ports having different logic correction values and mask values. In other words, in the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198 (A), the mask value is set to be different between the setting change mode (and setting confirmation mode) and the normal gaming state, but the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. Therefore, different switch winning information data tables can be obtained by using different switch winning information data tables in the setting change mode (and setting confirmation mode) and the normal gaming state.

  In order to cope with such a configuration, the switch input process 3 (FIG. 197) is changed as follows. For example, in step S2160, it is determined whether it is the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) or the normal gaming state, and the head address of the switch winning information data corresponding to the determination result is set. In step S2166, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch winning information data in step S2167 without determining whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set.

  FIG. 200 is a flowchart of the setting change / confirmation process. The setting change / confirmation process is executed in step S2142 of the timer interrupt process. In the setting change / confirmation processing shown in FIG. 200, the same processing steps as those of the timer interruption processing described above with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change / confirmation process is terminated, and the process before the interruption is restored. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game start is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output. (Step S2067). Then, the setting process (FIG. 192) is executed (step S2068), and the setting display process (FIG. 193) is executed (step S2069).

  FIG. 201A is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the switch input port 2.

  The switch input port 2 is one of a group of ports to which outputs of various switches and sensors are input, and is configured with 8 bits. In the example shown in the figure, at bit 7, the reception confirmation signal (ACK) from the payout control board 951 is detected at level 1. In bit 6, a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is detected at level 0. In bit 5, the signal level becomes 1 when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. In bit 4, the signal level becomes 0 when the setting key 971 is turned ON. In bit 3, the signal level becomes 1 when the door opening sensor detects the opening of the door frame 3. In bit 2, the level becomes 0 when the magnetic detection switch (magnetic detection sensor) detects magnetism. Bits 1 and 0 are not used.

  FIG. 201B is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the setting state management area.

  As shown in FIG. 201 (B), the setting state management area is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are defined. Not. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal gaming state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 08H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

  The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clear process by the operation of only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Also, the setting is updated from 01H to 00H at the end of the setting confirmation mode, and updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the next setting change operation upon power-on, the setting is updated from 08H to 02H, and at the end of the setting change mode, it is updated from 02H to 00H.

  FIG. 202A is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area. For example, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded contents of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during the normal game, and if the value transmitted as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware abnormality whose output is 0. Is set to 1.

  The power-on operation command is generated at least once in the power-on process. Specifically, it is created once during hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality, and in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, it is created twice during power-on processing and at the end of setting change / confirmation.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the operation command at power-on, the peripheral control board 1510 performs notification in the above-described manner according to the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality state (see FIG. 184).

  If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command in a normal game without receiving A001H as an operation command at power-on, the game state may be inconsistent. It is determined that the game command is invalid, and a game operation (such as production) for the game command is not started. However, since the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H) when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game command in a normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform an effect corresponding to the game command.

  In the state in which the game command is invalidated, an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition is performed among the received game commands (for example, for the operation of the symbol, the lamp, the movable body, the voice, etc., the effect corresponding to the received command) May be used to notify that a gaming state mismatch has occurred using the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp. Moreover, you may alert | report that the mismatch of a gaming state has generate | occur | produced with the small sound volume. This means that a player who cannot understand that an inconsistency in the gaming state has occurred without performing any production until the predetermined condition is met will not start the special symbol variation display game even if the player wins the starting point. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the hall because it is a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, the main control board 1310 is executing normal game processing, so that the function display such as special symbols and normal symbols in the function display unit 1400 is displayed normally. Is done.

  FIG. 202B is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the power-on state command. The power-on state command is a command for notifying whether or not a normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area. For example, if the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is 30H, and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the normal game can be started. The lower-order byte of the power-on state command may be used to notify the series code for each model of the pachinko machine. For example, when bits 6 to 4 are used, eight types of series can be identified.

  FIG. 202C is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the power-on return destination command. The power-on return destination command is a command for notifying the gaming state relating to the special symbol. For example, the power-on return destination command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is 31H, and the lower byte is the gaming state relating to the special symbol. Show. The power-on return destination command notifies the state of the special symbol when the power failure occurs and the operation state of the special electric accessory. The power-on return destination command is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 202D is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the setting value command. The set value command is a command for notifying the set value. For example, the set value command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A1H, and the lower byte indicates the set value. The set value command is transmitted at the time of power failure recovery that is neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, the end of the setting change mode, or the end of the setting confirmation mode. Also, it is transmitted at the start of special symbol change or at the time of game state change (at the start and end of big hit, probability change, short time, etc.). As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 misses the set value command transmitted when the power is turned on, it is changed to the correct set value in the subsequent game (for example, the start of variation of special symbols). The production is not performed based on the value. An effect based on a set value is an effect that suggests a set value using an effect device such as a display, a lamp, sound, or a movable body, and an effect mode that is difficult to generate (or does not occur) at a normal time with a predetermined probability. The setting value is suggested by generating. This set value suggestion effect may be an effect of another aspect of the effect exemplified below, and may include a gusset. In the main liquid crystal display device 1600, which is an example of a display device, as a setting value suggesting effect, an effect such as a notice corresponding to the setting value is displayed, or the variation mode of the symbol is changed from normal (for example, the variation of the left and right middle symbols). The timing of starting and confirming is different from the normal timing (in normal times, each symbol starts changing at the same time, and in the case of high setting, the changing starts in the order of left, middle, right)) Is used, a notification sound corresponding to the set value is generated with a predetermined probability when the start opening prize is received, or the sound being produced is different from the normal sound (normal time is male voice, high setting is female sound) Etc.).

  FIG. 203 is a diagram illustrating commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in various states. In the following description, n is a counter value indicating the processing state relating to the special symbol / special electric accessory, and m is a value corresponding to the set value.

  As shown in the figure, in the hot start in which the normal gaming state is activated, the power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on state command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (310nH) → setting value command (A10mH) Sent in order.

  When the main control RAM 1312 is initialized only by the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the set value command ( A10 mH) in this order.

  In the setting change mode, first, after an operation command at power-on (A003H) is transmitted, the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, and after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the operation at power-on is performed. The command is transmitted in the order of command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → setting value command (A10mH).

  In the setting confirmation mode, first, after an operation command at power-on (A002H) is transmitted, after confirming the set value and returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, an operation command at power-on (A001H) → Power-on state command (3001H) → Power-on return destination command (310nH) → Set value command (A10mH)

  When the RAM is abnormal, first, a power-on operation command (A009H) is transmitted, and a setting change mode is activated by a setting change operation (setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are turned on) when the power is restored after the power is turned off. A power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted. Thereafter, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the set value command (A10mH) Sent.

  When the RAM is abnormal, first, a power-on operation command (A009H) is transmitted. If the setting change operation is not performed when the power is restored after power-off, the RAM abnormal state continues and the power-on operation command (A009H). ) Is sent. Thereafter, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the set value command (A10mH) Sent.

  As described above, when the main control board 1310 is activated in a normal gaming state, a command group (combination of a plurality of commands in a predetermined order) in which a plurality of commands indicate the return of power is peripheral at a predetermined timing. It is transmitted to the control board 1510. For this reason, when it is determined that the normal gaming state can be started after the reception of all the series of commands from A001H to A10mH is completed, and some commands of the series of commands cannot be received (missed), It is determined that the normal gaming state cannot be started, and notification that the normal gaming state cannot be started is given.

  That is, in the same manner as the above-described effects in the state where the game command is invalidated, effects that satisfy a predetermined condition among the received game commands are performed (for example, symbols, movements, ramps, movable objects, voices, etc. are received). An effect corresponding to the command is performed), and a background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that the game state is inconsistent.

  If the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the set value command transmitted at the start of the special symbol variation display game supplements the set value command missed when the power is turned on to start the normal game. May be.

  If the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the set value command when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the set value command with the predetermined initial value (for example, setting 1) as the set value when the power is turned on. You may update to the setting value corresponding to a command.

  Note that the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both notify the normal game start possible state and are normally transmitted continuously, so either Sending to the board is enough.

  FIG. 204 is a diagram showing a state transition of values set after power restoration from the state before power shutdown in the setting state management area.

  The operation at power-on of the pachinko machine having the setting function differs depending on whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated or the setting key 971 is operated, and the countermeasures for fraud prevention and the user (hall employee) There are several patterns for convenience.

<Pattern 1>
An operation example in the normal gaming state (VALID_PLAY = 00H) at the time of the previous power cut-off and the main control RAM 1312 being normal at the time of power failure recovery shown in FIG. 204 (A) will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 includes a game control including all the stack areas other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area to be used as an area. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a set value that accompanies the setting change.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated at the time of power-on (OFF) and the setting key 971 is turned ON, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 01H. The base display 1317 displays the current set value for setting confirmation.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 has a game control area including all area stack areas other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the set state management area is maintained at 00H. The base indicator 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying that the display has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds).

  When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 are maintained in the state before the power failure. Even if not all the stored contents in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained, at least an area in which information for returning to the game state before the power failure is stored (a memory in which information related to the game is stored). Areas (special symbols, normal symbols, prize balls, random numbers generated by the program (variable pattern random numbers, initial random numbers, etc.)) need only be maintained and are necessary to return to the gaming state before the power failure The area where the non-information is stored may be in a state different from that before the power failure after the power is restored. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. Note that the same value (00H) may be set regardless of the original value. The base indicator 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying that the display has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds).

<Pattern 2-1>
As shown in FIG. 204 (B), in the operation example 1 in which the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of power failure recovery and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of power failure recovery, operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is performed. Regardless of whether or not the setting key 971 is operated, the main control RAM 1312 initializes an area used as a game control area including a stack area other than the setting value and the base value. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays a set value that accompanies the setting change.

  The initialization of the main control RAM 1312 in the pattern 2-1 is performed by initializing an area used as a game control area including a stack area together with a storage area initialized by an initialization process already executed at the time of a power failure. Good. For example, when the power is shut off during the initialization process of the main control RAM 1312, the remaining storage area that has not been initialized may be initialized. On the other hand, regardless of the progress of the initialization process at the time of a power failure, the area used as the game control area including the stack area of the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized after the power is restored.

  When a power failure occurs during the initialization process, an area (for example, a RAM clearing flag) that stores whether the main control RAM 1312 is being initialized is provided, and while the RAM clearing flag is set, It is preferable to prohibit writing of data to the storage area to be initialized.

  Further, the process of monitoring a power failure may be repeatedly executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. For this reason, in addition to the main loop (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22), for example, the power failure warning signal may be monitored by a timer interrupt.

  The power failure monitoring process and the power-off process can be executed in the same process in the setting change mode, the setting check mode, and the normal gaming state, or in a separate process, and the setting change mode and the setting check can be performed. In the mode, it may be executed by a common process, and may be executed by another process in the normal gaming state. That is, the power failure monitoring process and the power interruption process may be made common in at least two states among three or more states (operation modes) in the operation of the pachinko machine.

  As described above, in the case of pattern 2-1, when the power is shut off in the setting change mode and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of power failure recovery, the setting is always made regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954. Start in change mode. For example, if a power failure occurs during a setting change operation in a hall, the setting change mode may be activated when the power is restored. However, the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 for starting the setting change mode may not be operated when the power is restored. For this reason, by controlling as in the pattern 2-1, it is possible to prevent an unintended state (different from the setting change mode) when the power is restored.

  For example, when only the setting key 971 is operated when the power is restored (the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the setting check mode is started instead of the setting change mode, or only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. (When the setting key 971 is not operated), the main control RAM 1312 is initialized and the normal gaming state is activated, or when no switch is operated, the normal gaming state is activated. However, when the control is performed as in pattern 2-1, the operation always starts in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954.

<Pattern 2-2>
If the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is turned off immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of power failure recovery, even if it operates with another pattern shown in FIG. Good. When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned ON, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays a set value that accompanies the setting change.

  When the operations of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are other than those described above when the power is turned on, at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on. The stored contents of do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a game stop state, and the value of the set state management area is updated to 08H indicating an abnormality of the main control RAM 1312. In addition, the base display 1317 displays an error (for example, an error code). The game stop state may be a game stop by executing an infinite loop in the main control MPU 1311 or a game stop by not executing a normal game process.

  That is, in pattern 2-1, after the power supply is restored, the setting key and the RAM clear switch are unconditionally shifted to the setting change mode. When the key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated to start the setting change mode, the setting change mode is started. When the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are in other states, the game cannot be executed (RAM abnormality). And That is, in pattern 2-2, even if at least one of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 at the time of power recovery is operated, the normal game is not started as the RAM abnormal state, and after the setting change mode, the normal game is not started. Start playing. For this reason, when the operation for starting the setting change mode is not performed, the normal game is not executed in a state different from the setting change mode such as RAM abnormality or the setting confirmation mode, and the game stop state is notified, thereby not causing the hall. The employee may be prompted to start the setting change mode.

  If a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game control area and the stack area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized until the next setting change operation is performed. Wait while the game is stopped. The game stop state may be a game stop by executing an infinite loop in the main control MPU 1311 or a game stop by not executing a normal game process. Thereafter, the power is turned off once, the setting key and the RAM clear switch are operated in the setting change mode, and the power is turned on, so that the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H, and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 Clear the stack area in the game control area and start the setting change mode.

<Patterns 3-1, 3-2>
An operation example in the setting confirmation mode at the time of the previous power shutdown shown in FIG. 204 (D) and when the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of power failure recovery will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned ON, the main control RAM 1312 is a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area to be used. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a set value that accompanies the setting change.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated to ON when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 do not change. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. The base display 1317 displays the current set value for setting confirmation.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area to be used. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. The base indicator 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying that the display has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds).

  When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. The base indicator 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying that the display has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds). In this case, as in pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. 204 (E), the main control MPU 1311 may be activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H (original value). Regardless of whether the same value (01H) may be set), the base display 1317 may display the current setting value for setting confirmation.

<Pattern 4>
As shown in FIG. 204 (F), an operation example in the case where there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power failure recovery will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 includes a game control including all the stack areas other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area to be used as an area. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is 02H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays for setting change.

  When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at power-on is other than the above, that is, at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at power-on. The stored contents of the control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a game stop state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 08H. Note that the same value (08H) may be set regardless of the original value. In addition, the base display 1317 displays an error (for example, an error code).

  If there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power cut-off, if the main control RAM 1312 is initialized before the power is cut off, the main control RAM 1312 is not re-initialized at the time of power failure recovery (1) The initial setting of the device built in the main control MPU 1311 is performed. (2) Restart the hardware random number. (3) The main loop may be executed after executing at least one of setting interrupt permission.

  Even if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power interruption, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power before determining whether the state before the power failure is a RAM abnormality (step S211 in FIG. 179). The presence / absence of the operation is determined. When a setting change operation (the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are turned on) is detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is activated. Even when the setting change operation is not performed when the power is turned on (the setting confirmation mode is changed). The RAM abnormal state is maintained even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only or the operation for starting is performed. In other words, normally, when the setting change mode is started and when the setting check mode is started, the setting change mode process and the setting check mode process are executed in the timer interrupt process, but the power is turned on again from the RAM abnormal state. If it is, different processing is executed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In other words, when power is turned on again from a RAM abnormal state to recover, when starting in the setting change mode, processing in the setting change mode is executed in the timer interrupt processing as usual, but starting in the setting confirmation mode. When doing so, processing different from normal is executed in the timer interrupt processing.

  As described above, when the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game cannot be started even if the power is turned on again. However, since the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the main control RAM 1312 need not be initialized again.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 and its variations will be described using a time chart. The outline of the time chart described below is as follows.
-Time chart for normal setting change (Figure 205)
-Time chart for normal setting confirmation (Figure 206)
・ Time chart when the setting key 971 is OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF after the power is restored in the setting changing mode at the time of power failure (FIG. 207)
・ Time chart when the setting key 971 is ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF after the power is restored in the setting change mode at the time of power failure (FIG. 208)
Time chart when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode in the setting confirmation mode at the time of power failure and the setting key 971 is turned off and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off after the power is restored (FIG. 209).

  FIG. 205 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 205, since the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned ON, the main control MPU 1311 starts in the setting change mode.

  First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is started (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, the level of the setting key 971 and the level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at timing T4, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is awaited until timing T5.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts a customer waiting effect. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the setting key 971 and the level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, records 02H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the setting change mode. To do. The main control MPU 1311 lights all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal. The display mode of the function display unit is as described in FIG. 184 described above.

  Also, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating that the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect (notification) in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 184 according to the received power-on command.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6). Further, by the second operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972), the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N + 1 to N + 2, and the base display 1317 updates. The subsequent set value N + 2 is displayed (T7). That is, in the setting change mode, every time the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the setting value is changed within the range of 1 to 6, and when the setting value exceeds 6, it is updated to 1. The

  The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, creates a power-on operation command (A0001H), and shifts to the normal gaming state. (T8). The generated power-on operation command (A0001H) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing. By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it is possible to execute a normal game process in the timer interrupt process. Further, the main control MPU 1311 ends the lighting of the function display unit 1400 and starts display in the normal gaming state. Further, the base indicator 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Thus, by displaying the base display 1317 in a predetermined manner at the start of the normal gaming state, the end of the setting change mode can be clearly understood, and an operation error at the end of the setting change mode can be reduced. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the power-on return destination command is 01H. M in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 corresponding to the set value as shown in FIG. 202 (D). Note that both the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both notify the normal game start possible state, and are normally transmitted continuously. It is enough to send to.

  The peripheral control board 1510 knows that it is in a normal game startable state by the received power-on state command, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 cancels the notification effect during the setting change after the elapse of a predetermined delay time after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start a customer waiting effect). Note that during a predetermined delay time, a notification effect during the setting change may be performed by a part of the effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound are returned to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the decoration lamp is being changed in the setting. The notification effect is continued. Further, the notification effect by the decoration lamp is continued even if some decoration lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and other decoration lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal game state effect. Good.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T9). This is because if the setting change mode is completed in a very short time and the security signal is not output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode. This is to ensure.

  FIG. 206 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 206, the normal gaming state or setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned off immediately before, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is turned ON. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode.

  First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is started (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, the level of the setting key 971 and the level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at timing T4, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is awaited until timing T5.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts a customer waiting effect. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the setting key 971 and the level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, records 01H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the setting confirmation mode. To do. The main control MPU 1311 lights all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating that the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode in accordance with the received power-on command.

  The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after confirming the set value. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T6). When the value of the setting state management area becomes 00H, it is possible to execute the normal game process in the timer interrupt process. The base indicator 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds).

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. M in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 corresponding to the set value as shown in FIG. 202 (D). In the setting confirmation mode, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized in principle, so the state before the power failure is transmitted as the lower byte of the power-on return destination command.

  The peripheral control board 1510 knows that it is in a normal game startable state by the received power-on state command, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 cancels the notification effect during the setting change after the elapse of a predetermined delay time after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start a customer waiting effect). Note that during a predetermined delay time, a notification effect during the setting change may be performed by a part of the effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound are returned to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the decoration lamp is being changed in the setting. The notification effect is continued. Further, the notification effect by the decoration lamp is continued even if some decoration lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and other decoration lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal game state effect. Good.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after delaying a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T7).

  FIG. 207 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 207, the main control MPU 1311 starts in the setting change mode because it is in the setting change mode at the time of the previous power shutdown. As shown in FIG. 204B, in the setting change mode when the power is turned off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 is in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on. The case where it starts is shown.

  First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is started (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, the level of the setting key 971 and the level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at timing T4, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is awaited until timing T5.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts a customer waiting effect. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the setting key 971 and the level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, records 02H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the setting change mode. To do. The main control MPU 1311 lights all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

  Also, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating that the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode in accordance with the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 is reset to the initial state when the power is cut off, so that the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored and continues the setting change state.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6).

  After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes the process when the power is cut off (T7). Then, the reset circuit 1335 stops outputting the reset signal, the display of the set value by the base display 1317 disappears, and the security signal output stops (T8). In the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base indicator 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

  By turning off the output port in the power-off process, power consumption during the power-off process can be reduced, and reset due to a drop in the power supply (5V) before the power-off process is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. It should be noted that the solenoid output signal may be stopped by turning off the signal output port to the solenoid that controls the opening / closing of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the second start opening 2004, and the like.

  After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is started (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the level of the setting key 971 and the level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at timing T12, until timing T13. Wait for the peripheral control board 1510 to start.

  The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 207, 02H is recorded in the setting state management area. Therefore, regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, the setting change mode is set at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed. Migrate to When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are reinitialized in the same manner as the shift to the normal setting change mode. In addition, since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and the power failure process is executed thereafter, the RAM clear process is not interrupted by the power failure process. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the RAM control process may be executed at the time of power recovery to prevent the game control area from being initialized. After initialization again, the main control MPU 1311 lights all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting a security signal.

  Also, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating that the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode in accordance with the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 is reset to the initial state when the power is cut off, so that the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value, and sets the updated setting value as a base. Displayed on the display 1317.

  The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T14). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it is possible to execute a process in which a normal game is played in the timer interrupt process. The base indicator 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. M in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 corresponding to the set value as shown in FIG. 202 (D).

  The peripheral control board 1510 knows that it is in a normal game startable state by the received power-on state command, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 cancels the notification effect during the setting change after the elapse of a predetermined delay time after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start a customer waiting effect). Note that during a predetermined delay time, a notification effect during the setting change may be performed by a part of the effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound are returned to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the decoration lamp is being changed in the setting. The notification effect is continued. Further, the notification effect by the decoration lamp is continued even if some decoration lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and other decoration lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal game state effect. Good.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T15). This is because if the setting change mode is completed in a very short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to ensure the output time.

  FIG. 208 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in different operation modes depending on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 when the power is turned on even in the setting change mode when the power is turned off immediately before.

  First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is started (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, the level of the setting key 971 and the level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at timing T4, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is awaited until timing T5.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts a customer waiting effect. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the setting key 971 and the level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, records 02H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the setting change mode. To do. The main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

  Also, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating that the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode in accordance with the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 is reset to the initial state when the power is cut off, so that the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored and continues the setting change state.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6).

  After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes the process when the power is cut off (T7). Then, the reset circuit 1335 stops outputting the reset signal, the display of the set value by the base display 1317 disappears, and the security signal output stops (T8). In the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base indicator 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

  By turning off the output port in the power-off process, power consumption during the power-off process can be reduced, and reset due to a drop in the power supply (5V) before the power-off process is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. It should be noted that the solenoid output signal may be stopped by turning off the signal output port to the solenoid that controls the opening / closing of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the second start opening 2004, and the like.

  After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is started (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the level of the setting key 971 and the level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at timing T12, until timing T13. Wait for the peripheral control board 1510 to start.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the setting key 971 and the level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and operates according to the level of the setting key 971 and the level of the RAM clear switch 954. Change the mode. In the example shown in FIG. 208, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so that the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on again. However, the state before the power failure recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates the setting change (02H), the main control MPU 1311 restarts in the setting change mode at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Is done. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are reinitialized in the same manner as the shift to the normal setting change mode. In addition, since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and the power failure process is executed thereafter, the RAM clear process is not interrupted by the power failure process. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the RAM control process may be executed at the time of power recovery to prevent the game control area from being initialized. For example, in FIG. 186 described above, if the state before the power failure is changing the setting, YES is determined in step S2015, the process branches to RESET_P_5A (step S2030 in FIG. 187), and RAM initialization processing (step S2034) is executed. However, if the process branches to RESET_P_7 (S2036 in FIG. 187), the state before the power shutdown is continued without executing the RAM abnormality initialization process step S2034. After initialization again, the main control MPU 1311 lights all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting a security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the setting change mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not operated to be ON. In other words, with regard to the setting change mode, the setting change mode is activated when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned ON when the power is turned on, and further, the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on when the power is turned on. Even if it is not ON, the setting change mode can be activated.

  As indicated by the broken line at the timing T12, when the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF and the setting key 971 is OFF when the power is turned on again, unlike the time chart shown in FIG. 00H may be recorded and restarted in a state where normal game cannot be executed (for example, RAM abnormality) without returning to the setting change mode. That is, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 208, even in the setting change mode at the time of a power failure, if the setting change operation is not performed when the power is restored, the operation is restarted in a RAM abnormal state. That is, if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the normal game cannot be started unless the setting change mode is normally terminated at any point in time.

  Also, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating that the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode in accordance with the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 is reset to the initial state when the power is cut off, so that the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored and continues the setting change state.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value, and sets the updated setting value as a base. The information is displayed on the display 1317 (T14).

  The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it is possible to execute a process in which a normal game is played in the timer interrupt process. The base indicator 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the power-on return destination command is 01H. M in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 corresponding to the set value as shown in FIG. 202 (D). Note that the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both notify the normal game start possible state and are normally transmitted continuously, so either Sending to the board is enough.

  The peripheral control board 1510 knows that it is in a normal game startable state by the received power-on state command, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 cancels the notification effect during the setting change after the elapse of a predetermined delay time after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start a customer waiting effect). Note that during a predetermined delay time, a notification effect during the setting change may be performed by a part of the effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound are returned to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the decoration lamp is being changed in the setting. The notification effect is continued. Further, the notification effect by the decoration lamp is continued even if some decoration lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and other decoration lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal game state effect. Good.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after delaying a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode is completed in a very short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to ensure the output time.

  FIG. 209 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 209, in the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 starts in the setting confirmation mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on.

  First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is started (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, the level of the setting key 971 and the level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at timing T4, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is awaited until timing T5.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts a customer waiting effect. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the setting key 971 and the level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, records 02H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the setting change mode. To do. The main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating that the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  Peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting confirmation mode in accordance with the received power-on operation command.

  Thereafter, when the supply of power to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes a power-off process, and the main control MPU 1311 stops its operation (T7). Then, the reset circuit 1335 stops outputting the reset signal, the display of the set value by the base display 1317 disappears, and the security signal output stops (T8). In the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base indicator 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

  By turning off the output port in the power-off process, power consumption during the power-off process can be reduced, and reset due to a drop in the power supply (5V) before the power-off process is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. It should be noted that the solenoid output signal may be stopped by turning off the signal output port to the solenoid that controls the opening / closing of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the second start opening 2004, and the like.

  After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is started (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the level of the setting key 971 and the level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at timing T12, until timing T13. Wait for the peripheral control board 1510 to start.

  The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 209, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned OFF and the setting key 971 is turned ON so that the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on again. However, the state before the power failure recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates the setting confirmation (01H), it is restarted in the setting confirmation mode at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 209, the setting confirmation mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not operated to be ON. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is activated when the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned OFF, and the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is turned on. The setting confirmation mode can also be activated.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating that the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode in accordance with the received power-on command.

  Even if the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated during the setting confirmation mode, and the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, the setting value is displayed without updating the setting value. Displayed continuously at 1317.

  The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after confirming the set value. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting confirmation mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it is possible to execute a process in which a normal game is played in the timer interrupt process. The base indicator 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The peripheral control board 1510 knows that it is in a normal game startable state by the received power-on state command, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 starts an effect in the normal game state (for example, an effect of waiting for a customer) after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the power-on state command indicates that the normal game can be started. May be. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 cancels the notification effect during the setting change after the elapse of a predetermined delay time after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start a customer waiting effect). Note that during a predetermined delay time, a notification effect during the setting change may be performed by a part of the effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound are returned to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the decoration lamp is being changed in the setting. The notification effect is continued. Further, the notification effect by the decoration lamp is continued even if some decoration lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and other decoration lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal game state effect. Good.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode is completed in a very short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to ensure the output time.

  FIG. 210 to FIG. 212 are diagrams illustrating configuration examples of the big hit determination threshold value table. The big hit determination threshold value table stores the big hit determination threshold value of the big hit determination random value for drawing the big hit of the special symbol.

  The jackpot threshold value determination table shown in FIG. 210 includes a setting value table selection address table and each setting value determination threshold table. The jackpot determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 210 is an example in which a jackpot determination is made when the jackpot determination random number value is larger than the threshold value defined in the table.

  In the setting value table selection address table, the pointer address of the determination threshold value table selected for each setting value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. Each set value determination threshold value table stores a threshold value at a low probability (normal state) and a threshold value at a high probability (probability variation state).

  At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for setting value table selection is acquired, and the threshold setting table for the current setting value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, the threshold value for jackpot determination is acquired from the selected threshold determination table using the probability variation state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset. Then, when the jackpot determination random number value acquired at the time of winning the start opening is equal to or larger than the acquired threshold value, it is determined as a big hit, and when it is less than the threshold value, it is determined as a deviation.

  The jackpot determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 211 includes a set value table selection address table and each set value determination threshold table. The jackpot determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 211 is an example in which a jackpot determination is made when the jackpot determination random number value is in the range from the lower limit to the upper limit defined in the table.

  In the setting value table selection address table, the pointer address of the determination threshold value table selected for each setting value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. Each set value judgment threshold table includes a lower threshold value at a low probability (normal state), an upper threshold value at a low probability (normal state), a lower threshold value at a high probability (probability variation state), and a high probability (probability variation state). Stores the upper threshold.

  At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for setting value table selection is acquired, and the threshold setting table for the current setting value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, the probability variation state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) is used as an offset to determine whether the selected threshold determination table is a low-probability block or a high-probability block. Get the threshold. Then, when the jackpot determination random number acquired at the time of winning the start opening is equal to or greater than the acquired lower limit threshold and equal to or less than the upper limit threshold, it is determined to be a big hit, and when it is outside the range of the upper limit threshold from the lower limit threshold, it is determined to be a deviation.

  The jackpot determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 212 includes a low probability setting value table selection address table, a low probability setting value determination threshold table, a high probability setting value table selection address table, and a high probability setting. Consists of a determination threshold value table. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is composed of a low-probability table and a high-probability table, but the jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 includes a low-probability table and a high-probability table. It is configured separately.

  The low-probability setting value table selection address table defines the pointer address of the determination threshold value table that is selected for each low-probability (normal state) setting value. Defines a pointer address of a determination threshold table selected at each set value with a high probability (probability variation state). The data defined in each setting value table selection address table may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. Each setting value determination threshold value table for low probability stores a lower threshold value at a low probability (normal state) and an upper threshold value at a low probability (normal state). Each setting value determination threshold value table for high probability stores a lower threshold value at a high probability (normal state) and an upper threshold value at a high probability (normal state).

  At the time of jackpot determination, the probability variation state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) is determined and determined whether it is an address table for selecting a low-probability setting value table or an address table for selecting a high-probability setting value table. A setting value is acquired as an offset from the address table for setting value table selection, and a determination threshold table corresponding to the current setting value is selected based on the acquired offset. Then, when the jackpot determination random number acquired at the time of winning the start opening is equal to or greater than the acquired lower limit threshold and equal to or less than the upper limit threshold, it is determined to be a big hit, and when it is outside the range of the upper limit threshold from the lower limit threshold, it is determined to be a deviation.

[13. Pachinko machine with light guide plate]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine provided with a light guide plate will be described. Recent pachinko machines have a light guide plate that emits light when illuminated, on the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and together with the main liquid crystal display device 1600, produces a special symbol variation display game. In this type of pachinko machine, a complicated effect can be achieved by superimposing images, for example, using a liquid crystal display device and a light guide plate. In addition, since the light guide plate is provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, an effect with a three-dimensional effect is displayed together with an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In addition, there is a light guide plate that allows stereoscopic viewing using the parallax between the left and right eyes, and displays an effect with a greater stereoscopic effect.

  However, the production using the light guide plate has become rutted, and it is necessary to improve the interest by a new light emission production. Furthermore, there is a light guide plate that can display a plurality of patterns on a single sheet, and a variety of patterns are displayed to produce a highly interesting effect.

[13-1. Construction]
FIG. 213 is an exploded perspective view of the center combination 2500 and the front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 as seen from the front. FIG. 214 is a front view showing a state in which the first pattern is light-emitting displayed on the front effect unit. FIG. 215 is a front view showing a state in which the second design is displayed in a luminous manner in the front effect unit.

  The front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500, and a first pattern substrate 2611 and a second pattern substrate that are attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 capable of irradiating light are mounted on the right side surface of the light guide plate 2610 on the first pattern substrate 2611, and light on the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610 is mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614 capable of irradiating the light is mounted.

  The first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are arranged perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 so that light can be applied to the side surfaces of the light guide plate 2610. For this reason, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, only the side surfaces of the first design substrate 2611 and the second design substrate 2612 are visible, and the first design substrate 2611 and the second design substrate 2612 are visible from the player side. It has become hot and the appearance in the game area 5a is improved.

  In this embodiment, the light guide plate (front light guide plate) 2610 will be described, but another back light guide plate may be provided between the light guide plate 2610 and the liquid crystal display device 1600.

  The light guide plate 2610 includes a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 214) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex first reflecting portions that reflect light from above to the front side, and light from the lateral direction on the front side. And a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 215) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex second reflecting portions to be reflected. In other words, when the table effect unit 2600 causes the light guide plate LED of the first pattern substrate 2611 to emit 2613 light, the first pattern 2621 can be displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the light guide plate LED 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 can be displayed. When the light is emitted, the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2613 and 2614 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are preferably full-color LEDs, and a light emitting source (LED with a lens) having a strong directivity for irradiating light in a narrow range. Is desirable. By using the full-color LED, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 can be copied to the light guide plate 2610 by any single color or a plurality of colors (for example, seven rainbow colors).

  The light guide plate 2610 has finely formed irregularities constituting a plurality of first reflecting portions for copying the first pattern 2621 and irregularities constituting a plurality of second reflecting portions for copying the second pattern 2622. In the state where the LED 2613 for the light guide plate of the first design substrate 2611 and the LED 2614 for the light guide plate of the second design substrate 2612 are not emitting light, the light guide plate 2610 transmits light and is disposed on the rear side. The various decorative bodies of the unit 3000, the effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the like can be visually confirmed. Even if the light guide plate LEDs 2613 and 2614 are in a light emitting state, the light guide plate 2610 is polished without transmitting the light that is transmitted through the liquid crystal display device 1600 provided on the rear surface side and reflecting the light irradiated on the light guide plate 2610. A glass-like processed mat area, a lame area in which a reflection pattern for reflecting light is formed regardless of the light traveling direction in the light guide plate 2610, and a light emitting location of the light guide plate LED 2613 ( That is, a moving region in which a reflection pattern is formed is provided so that whether light is emitted or not depends on the light traveling direction in the light guide plate 2610.

  As shown in FIG. 214, the first pattern 2621 becomes part of the effect of the special symbol variation display game together with an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 as will be described later. The first pattern 2621 includes moving areas 2621a and 2621c, lame areas 2621b and 2621d, and a mat area 2621e. The outside of the first pattern 2621 is a transmission region 2621f. In the moving areas 2621a and 2621c, a part of the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the moving area 2621a emits light or the moving area 2621c emits light by switching the lighting position. For this reason, by blinking the light guide plate LED 2613, the size of the first pattern 2621 can be changed.

  In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 214, the moving area and the lame area are repeatedly arranged twice, but the repetition may be any number of times. By forming the first pattern 2621 by repeating the moving area and the lame area a plurality of times, a complicated movement can be expressed by the first pattern 2621. In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 214, the moving area and the lame area are alternately repeated. However, the characteristic (that is, the moving area emits light without sandwiching the lame area between the moving areas). Moving regions having different light incident positions) may be arranged adjacent to each other.

  By causing the light guide plate LED 2613 to emit light so that the light emission color is changed by the light guide plate LED 2613, the color can be changed for each moving region 2621a. Then, by sequentially changing the light emission color of the LED 2613 for the light guide plate (for example, repeating red → orange → yellow → green → blue → indigo → purple → red), the pattern is made to move as the color changes. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 215, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which a plurality of light streaks extend obliquely downward. The second pattern 2622 is formed so that the light stripe extending obliquely corresponds to the position of the light guide plate LED 2614 mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612. That is, when one light guide plate LED 2614 is caused to emit light, light streaks extending obliquely downward from the light guide plate 2610 are emitted from the light guide plate LED 2614 at the upper side of the light guide plate 2610 as a starting point.

  Since the second pattern 2622 is farther from the light guide plate LED 2614 as it goes downward in the light guide plate 2610, the brightness of the light streak becomes darker as it goes downward in the light guide plate 2610. Thus, when the second pattern 2622 is viewed from the front (player side), the light stripes appear to extend rearward as the light guide plate 2610 moves downward, and light is emitted three-dimensionally. As a result, it is possible to entertain the light emission effect of the light guide plate 2610.

  Furthermore, it is preferable to arrange the reflecting section so that stereoscopic viewing by parallax between the left and right eyes is possible. For example, when focusing on one light streak constituting the second pattern 2622, the second light-reflecting plate 2610 is different between the left and right eyes with respect to the second reflecting portion that emits light that forms the light streak on the player's retina. By disposing at the position, the parallax of the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and the second pattern having a depth can be shown.

  As shown in FIG. 214, the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment displays the first pattern 2621 displayed by light irradiation from one direction according to the mat area 2621 e that does not reflect the irradiated light or the light traveling direction. In addition, it is composed of lame areas 2621b and 2621d in which a reflection pattern for reflecting transmitted light is formed and moving areas 2621a, 2621c and 2622a in which a reflection pattern for reflecting light in a specific traveling direction is formed. The moving pattern area (dynamic pattern) that appears to move in the first pattern and the static pattern area (static pattern) that appears to stand still can be configured.

  In addition, a single light guide plate 2610 can project a first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 214 and a second pattern 2622 shown in FIG. 215 depending on the illumination direction. For this reason, light of a single color (for example, white having a single wavelength of red or light having a plurality of wavelengths mixed) is irradiated from the lateral direction, and light of a plurality of colors is irradiated from the upper direction (for example, adjacent LED groups) When 2614 emits light at different wavelengths, a single light guide plate 2610 can produce an effect with a rainbow pattern (rainbow beam) shining in seven colors and a single color pattern.

  In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, a stationary picture and a moving picture that appears to move in the moving areas 2621a, 2621c, and 2622a in the mat area 2621e and the lame areas 2621b and 2621d of the first picture 2621 by light irradiation from the lateral direction. Is reflected. That is, the light guide plate effect by both the still picture and the moving picture is performed by the first picture 2621 by the light irradiation from the lateral direction. In this case, the still picture and the moving picture by the first picture 2621 are projected at the same time.

  Unlike the above, the first pattern 2621 includes a mat area and a lame area, and the first pattern 2621 may not include the moving pattern. In this case, a light guide plate effect is performed with the still picture by the first picture 2621 by light irradiation from the horizontal direction and the second picture 2622 by light irradiation from the upper direction. In this case, the still picture by the first picture 2621 and the moving picture by the second picture 2622 can be projected at different timings. In other words, the moving picture may be projected after the still picture is projected, or the still picture may be projected after the moving picture is projected. In this way, various effects can be performed by projecting the still picture and the moving picture at different timings. In particular, by displaying a rainbow pattern as a moving pattern and then displaying a specific character with a still pattern, it is possible to produce an effect such that the character comes down. On the other hand, by displaying the background with the still picture and then displaying the character with the moving picture, it is possible to produce an effect that the character moves at a specific place.

  In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged to overlap each other. When light is irradiated from the horizontal direction and the upward direction, the reflection pattern of the two patterns is mixedly provided in the region where the two patterns overlap on the light guide plate 2610, so that the two patterns can be recognized together. . However, when the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that is viewed in plan and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern that is stereoscopically viewed, stereoscopic vision may be difficult in a region where two patterns are mixed. When the reflective pattern 2621f which the back side (the liquid crystal display device 1600) can be seen through is provided without the reflective pattern of the first pattern 2621 and the pattern by the reflective pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern 2622 is played. Can be easily viewed stereoscopically.

  In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged in different regions without overlapping. When the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that is viewed in plan and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern that is stereoscopically viewed, stereoscopic vision may be difficult in a region where two patterns are mixed. By dividing the area in which the reflection pattern of the pattern 2621 is provided and the area in which the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is provided and projecting the pattern based on the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622, the second pattern can be easily displayed to the player in three dimensions. Can be seen.

[13-2. Configuration of light guide plate]
Next, a specific configuration of the reflection unit will be described. FIG. 216 is a diagram illustrating the structure of the light guide plate 2610 (particularly, the arrangement of the reflecting portions).

  As described above, the light guide plate 2610 includes a transmissive region 2621f that can be seen through the back side (the liquid crystal display device 1600), a mat region 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, and the light traveling direction. Lame regions 2621b and 2621d in which a reflection pattern for reflecting transmitted light is formed and moving regions 2621a, 2621c and 2622a in which a reflection pattern for reflecting light in a specific traveling direction is formed are provided.

  FIG. 217 is a diagram illustrating the structure of the reflecting portion.

  The reflection part is formed by a concave portion provided on the back side of the light guide plate 2610, and reflects light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 by reflection of light at the boundary surface (reflection surface 2651). Then, the pattern portion of the light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light so that the player can visually recognize the pattern. Inside the light guide plate 2610, light incident from the light guide plate LED 2614 travels inside the light guide plate 2610 with a certain extent (for example, ± 30 degrees). The streak of light that constitutes the second pattern 2622 is visible when light traveling in the direction of the streak of light is reflected by a reflection unit 2650 described below.

  In the reflecting portion of the moving region 2622a shown in FIG. 217A, a plurality of reflecting portions 2650 are arranged along the streak of light. Note that the size of the reflecting portion 2650 is desirably several hundred micrometers to several millimeters, which is much smaller than the streaks of light appearing on the light guide plate 2610, but is greatly illustrated in the drawing.

  The reflection unit 2650 includes a reflection surface 2651 that reflects light, an inclined surface 2652 on the back side of the reflection surface 2651, and a side surface 2653 formed by a curved surface. The reflection surface 2651 is disposed at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610 and the perpendicular of the reflection surface 2651 and the incident direction of the reflected light are approximately 45 degrees. Therefore, light that travels inside the light guide plate 2610 and strikes the reflection surface 2651 of the reflection portion 2650 is reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG.

  Further, light traveling in the direction perpendicular to the streak of light appearing in the moving region 2622a, that is, light traveling in parallel with the reflective surface 2651 along the reflective surface 2651 does not hit the reflective surface 2651 but is reflected by the reflective portion 2650 and reflected by the light guide plate 2610. Does not exit from the surface. Similarly, the amount of light traveling in a direction having an angle with the streak of light appearing in the moving region 2622a (particularly, an acute angle) hits the reflecting surface 2651, and the reflecting portion 2650 reflects only a small amount of light. Only weak light is emitted from the surface of the light plate 2610. For this reason, the light of the wavelength which reaches | attains a lot can be seen to a player's eyes, and a picture can be shown with the color of LED2614 for light guide plates which light-emits in a specific position.

  At this time, the emission direction of the reflected light may be slightly shifted from the vertical direction to the right and left of the light guide plate 2610 by slightly tilting the reflection surface 2651. Since the light source that irradiates the light guide plate 2601 of this embodiment irradiates light with high directivity, the reflected light from the reflection unit 2650 also reaches the player as a light beam with directivity. For this reason, the parallax of a player's right and left eyes can be produced, and the 2nd pattern with a depth can be shown. That is, since the reflection unit 2650 that reflects the light reaching the right eye and the reflection unit 2650 that reflects the light reaching the left eye are in different positions, the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye There is no virtual intersection on the light guide plate 2610. That is, if the virtual intersection of the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye is behind the light guide plate 2610, the pattern appears to be in the back, and the light that reaches the right eye reaches the left eye. If the virtual intersection with the light to be transmitted is in front of the light guide plate 2610, the pattern can be seen at the front position.

  The inclined surface 2652 provided on the opposite side of the reflective surface 2651 may be provided at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610 as in the case of the reflective surface 2651, or light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610. May be formed at an angle that does not reflect to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (for example, perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate 2610).

  The side surface 2653 is processed into a curved surface. By processing the side surface 2653 into a curved surface instead of a flat surface, it is possible to prevent a pattern from being displayed by light coming from other than a specific direction without strongly reflecting light incident from one direction.

  The reflection portions 2660 of the lame regions 2621b and 2621d shown in FIG. 218 are configured by spherical concave portions provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, and travel in the light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of directions (that is, The light arriving at the reflecting portion 2660 is reflected (by a plurality of paths) and emitted to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. Since the reflection part 2660 of the lame area reflects light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614, when each of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 blinks at different timings, the lame area 2621b glitters. In addition, when the light guide plate LED 2614 emits light in different colors, the lame region 2621b shines with a mixture of a plurality of colors. Further, when the LED 2614 for the light guide plate blinks in a different color, the glitter region 2621b glitters with a mixture of a plurality of colors.

  Note that the mat region 2621e is not provided with a reflective portion, and is processed into irregular shapes having a ground glass shape so that light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is not reflected to the front side.

  So far, the light guide plate 2610 representing the first pattern and the second pattern has been described. Next, examples of the light guide plate representing different patterns will be described. FIG. 219 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LED and the reflection portion in the light guide plate constituting the pattern shown in FIGS. 220 to 222.

  A light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 219 is formed on the back surface thereof, reflects light incident from any of the plurality of specific light incident portions 2630 on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610, and emits the light to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. A plurality of fine reflecting portions 2670 are provided. The plurality of specific light incident portions 2630 of the light guide plate 2610 introduce light so that light travels through the light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of positions. Although the plurality of specific light incident parts 2630 are illustrated as the first specific light incident part 2630a, the second specific light incident part 2630b, the third specific light incident part 2630c, and the fourth specific light incident part 2630d, The specific light incident part 2630a to the seventh specific light incident part are provided. In this case, seven specific light incident portions 2630 (LED groups 2614) are repeatedly provided for a rainbow effect in which the light guide plate emits light in seven colors, and the number of specific light incident portions may be determined according to the type of light emission color. The first specific light incident part 2630a to the seventh specific light incident part (not shown) repeat the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610 in order from the left to the right in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the figure) (seventh specific light incident part Is arranged in the order of returning to the beginning to become the first specific light incident portion 2630a.

  The reflecting portion 2670 extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630 (the direction in which the light incident from the specific light incident portion 2630 travels in the light guide plate 2610) and is guided. It has a boundary surface inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the optical plate 2610. The reflection part 2670 is recessed in a pent roof-like triangle. The reflection unit 2670 reflects the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident unit 2630 and emits the light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. In addition, the reflection unit 2670 reflects the light incident from the specific light incident unit 2630 that is not supported, and emits the light in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610.

  Accordingly, as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 219, the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630 is reflected by the reflection portion 2670 to the front surface on the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (perpendicular to the paper surface). Then, the reflection part 2670 appears to emit light from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, as indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 219, the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light incident portion 2630 is reflected by the reflecting portion 2670 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate 2610, and From the player seated in front of the player, it appears that the reflecting portion 2670 does not emit light.

  In the present embodiment, the reflecting portion 2670 is shown in a state of being recessed in a triangle and extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be any one that extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630.

  The plurality of reflection units 2670 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light incident units 2630, and the plurality of first reflection units 2670a and second specific light incident units 2630b corresponding to the first specific light incident unit 2630a. The plurality of fourth reflections corresponding to the plurality of second reflection units 2670b corresponding to the third specific light input unit 2630c, the third reflection unit 2670c corresponding to the third specific light input unit 2630c, and the fourth specific light input unit 2630d. Part 2670d and the like.

  In addition, the light guide plate 2610 can display a plurality of patterns 2623 that can emit and display in different modes, by reflecting light forward from a specific reflecting portion 2670 of the plurality of reflecting portions 2670. The plurality of patterns 2623 includes a pattern 2623a composed of a plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a, a pattern 2623b composed of a plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b, a pattern 2623c composed of a plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c, and a plurality of fourth reflections. A pattern 2623d composed of a part 2670d is included.

  As shown in FIGS. 220 to 222, the pictures are arranged so as to circulate in order from the center to the outside.

  The second pattern substrate 2612 has a strip shape extending to the left and right, and LEDs 2614 are mounted at positions corresponding to the specific light incident portions 2630. The plurality of LEDs 2614 include a first LED group 2614a corresponding to the first specific light incident part 2630a, a second LED group 2614b corresponding to the second specific light incident part 2630b, and a third specific light incident part 2630c. The third LED group 2614c corresponding to the fourth LED group 2614d corresponding to the fourth specific light incident part 2630d, and the fifth LED group corresponding to the fifth specific light incident part (not shown). (Not shown), a sixth LED group (not shown) corresponding to the sixth specific light input part (not shown), and a seventh LED group corresponding to the seventh specific light input part (not shown). (Not shown). In FIG. 219, the first LED group 2614a to the fourth LED group 2614d are shown, and the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group are not shown. Each LED group divides a plurality of LEDs 2614 arranged in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the figure) on the second pattern substrate 2612 in the left-right direction of the second pattern substrate 2612, and sequentially from left to right. Are arranged repeatedly (in order of returning to the beginning and becoming the first LED group 2614a after the seventh LED group). In this embodiment, each LED group has six LEDs 2614.

  Next, the light emission effect by the front effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2614a of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the first specific light incident portion 2630a, and the first reflection portion 2670a reflects the light to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other second reflecting portion 2670b, the third reflecting portion 2670c, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, etc. reflect off the front, only the first reflecting portion 2670a appears to be shining from the player seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1. This means that a pattern composed of the plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a can be made to emit light.

  When the second LED group 2614b of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the second specific light incident portion 2630b, and the second reflection portion 2670b reflects it to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflection part 2670a, the third reflection part 2670c, the fourth reflection part 2670d, and the like reflect to other than the front, only the second reflection part 2670b appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, the pattern composed of the plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b can be made to emit light.

  When the third LED group 2614c of the second pattern substrate 2612 emits light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the third specific light incident portion 2630c, and the third reflection portion 2670c reflects it to the front of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the second reflecting portion 2670b, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, and the like reflect to other than the front, only the third reflecting portion 2670c appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, a pattern composed of a plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c can be made to emit light.

  When the fourth LED group 2614d of the second pattern substrate 2612 emits light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d, and the fourth reflection portion 2670d reflects it to the front of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, second reflecting portion 2670b, third reflecting portion 2670c and the like reflect to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting portion 2670d appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, the pattern composed of the plurality of fourth reflecting portions 2670d can be made to emit light.

  Similarly, in the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group 2614, when each LED group emits light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630, and the corresponding reflector 2670 causes the light guide plate 2610 to emit light. Reflected to the front, reflected from the other reflective part 2670 to other than the front, and only the corresponding reflective part 2670 will appear to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the corresponding reflective part 2670 is configured. The pattern that is on can be emitted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the plurality of patterns 2623 can be caused to emit light by switching the LED groups to emit light. Such a light emission effect can be performed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 220, in the light guide plate 2610 on which a similar pattern is superimposed, a moving effect that causes the pattern to emit light like an animation that moves from the center to the outside or shrinks from the outside to the center. Can do.

  FIG. 220 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pattern displayed in a moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 220, a moving effect in which the size of the pattern changes is performed by switching the position of the LED group that emits light over time.

  As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a corresponds to each of the specific light incident portions 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. In FIG. 220, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

  As shown in FIG. 220 (A), when the sixth LED group 2614f and the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on and light enters from the sixth specific light incident part 2630f and the seventh specific light incident part 2630g, they enter the light guide plate 2610. The incident light is reflected by the sixth reflecting portion 2670f and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting portion 2670f and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, and can be recognized by the player.

  Thereafter, when the fifth LED group 2614e and the sixth LED group 2614f are turned on and light is incident from the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e and the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is converted into the fifth reflective portion. 2670e and the 6th reflection part 2670f reflect, the pattern in which the 5th reflection part 2670e and the 6th reflection part 2670f are arrange | positioned light-emits, and a player can recognize.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 220 (B), when the fourth LED group 2614d and the fifth LED group 2614e are turned on and light enters from the fourth specific light incident part 2630d and the fifth specific light incident part 2630e, the light guide plate The light that has entered 2610 is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize it.

  Thereafter, when the third LED group 2614c and the fourth LED group 2614d are turned on and light enters from the third specific light incident part 2630c and the fourth specific light incident part 2630d, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is converted into the third reflective part. 2670c and 4th reflection part 2670d reflect, and the pattern in which 3rd reflection part 2670cd and 4th reflection part 2670d are arranged light-emits, and a player can recognize.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 220 (C), when the second LED group 2614b and the third LED group 2614c are turned on and light enters from the second specific light incident part 2630b and the third specific light incident part 2630c, the light guide plate The light that has entered 2610 is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the pattern in which the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize it.

  In this way, by changing the position without changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) that emit light, it is possible to change the size of the pattern and move the pattern so that it moves from the center to the outside. At this time, the LED groups may emit light in a single color, or may emit light in different colors in each group (that is, depending on the position).

  FIG. 221 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 221, a moving effect in which the size of the pattern changes is performed by changing the number of light emitting LED groups with the passage of time.

  As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a corresponds to each of the specific light incident portions 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. In FIG. 221, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

  As shown in FIG. 221 (A), the second LED group 2614b to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the second specific light incident part 2630b to the seventh specific light incident part 2630g is reflected to the second reflective part 2670b. The seventh reflection part 2670g reflects, and the pattern in which the second reflection part 2670b to the seventh reflection part 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

  Thereafter, the third LED group 2614c to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the third specific light incident part 2630c to the seventh specific light incident part 2630g is reflected by the third reflective part 2670c to the seventh reflective part 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the third reflecting portion 2670c to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 221 (B), the fourth LED group 2614d to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fourth specific light incident part 2630d to the seventh specific light incident part 2630g is fourth reflected. The part 2670d to the seventh reflection part 2670g are reflected, and the pattern in which the fourth reflection part 2670d to the seventh reflection part 2670g are arranged emits light, and can be recognized by the player.

  Thereafter, the fifth LED group 2614e to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light reflected from the fifth specific light incident part 2630e to the seventh specific light incident part 2630g is reflected by the fifth reflective part 2670e to the seventh reflective part 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 221 (C), the sixth LED group 2614f to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the sixth specific light incident part 2630f to the seventh specific light incident part 2630g is reflected by the sixth reflection. The part 2670f to the seventh reflection part 2670g reflect, and the pattern in which the sixth reflection part 2670f to the seventh reflection part 2670g is arranged emits light, and can be recognized by the player.

  In this way, by changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) to emit light, a moving effect of changing the size of the pattern (light emission range) and emitting the pattern to shrink can be achieved. At this time, the LED groups may emit light in a single color, or may emit light in different colors in each group (that is, depending on the position).

  FIG. 222 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 222, a moving effect in which the color of the pattern changes is performed by changing the light emission color of the LED group over time.

  As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a corresponds to each of the specific light incident portions 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In FIG. 222, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

  As shown in FIG. 222 (A), the first LED group 2614a lights in red, the red light incident from the first specific light incident portion 2630a is reflected by the first reflecting portion 2670a, and the first reflecting portion 2670a is arranged. The displayed pattern emits red light, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b is lit in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light incident portion 2630b is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b and the pattern emits light in orange. In addition, the third LED group 2614c is lit in yellow, yellow light incident from the third specific light incident portion 2630c is reflected by the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the pattern emits light in yellow. The fourth LED group 2614d is lit in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the pattern emits green light. Further, the fifth LED group 2614e is lit in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion 2670e, and the pattern emits light in blue. In addition, the sixth LED group 2614f is lit in indigo, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflecting portion 2670f and the pattern emits in indigo. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g is lit in purple, and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflects the violet light incident from the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the pattern emits light in purple.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 222B, the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are lit in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, respectively, and the color of the pattern changes. When the time further elapses, as shown in FIG. 222 (C), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are lit in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, respectively. The color changes.

  In this way, the emission color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye watches the pattern that emits light in the same color, a moving effect can be achieved in which the pattern emits light so that it moves inward.

  FIG. 223 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the patterns on the light guide plate 2610 and the arrangement of the LED groups 2614.

  In the present embodiment, the plurality of LED groups 2614 correspond to the reflection portion 2670 constituting one picture, and the plurality of LED groups 2614 emit light in a predetermined pattern and display one picture. Specifically, control is performed so that the light emission pattern of the LED group 2614 (specific light incident portion 2630) is repeated using seven LED groups as a repeating unit. The LED emits light with directivity, and is configured to illuminate a predetermined angle range from the front of the LED.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 223, the illumination range of the LEDs that emit light in the same pattern (which is a light emission source constituting one picture) is the range shown by the fan shape in the figure, and the second picture board 2612 In the vicinity, there is a range where light from the LED does not reach.

  For this reason, a pattern is provided at a position separated from the end where light enters the light guide plate 2610 by a predetermined distance. For example, when the illumination range of the LED is 60 degrees (full width at half maximum θ = ± 30 degrees), the range where the light from the LED does not reach is an equilateral triangle, so the length of the repeating unit of the LED group (with the same pattern) The interval between the LEDs emitting light) is set apart from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a length of 0.87 times α.

In general, when the length α of the LED unit repeat unit, the illumination angle of the LED is θ, and the distance separating the pattern from the end of the light guide plate 2610 is L, the following relationship is established.
L = tan θ × α / 2

  As described above, when a moving picture that appears to move is composed of light from a plurality of LED groups, the moving picture must be arranged at a position away from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a predetermined distance. That is, the moving picture area in which a moving picture is projected is smaller than the still picture area in which a stationary picture is projected. When the light guide plate 2610 has the same size as the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600, a moving effect by the light guide plate 2610 can be achieved in a region narrower than the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. For this reason, in the production of the variable display game, it is possible to make the player recognize the progress of the variable display game without impeding the visual recognition of the special symbol normally displayed near the end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. . Further, by performing the moving effect at the center of the liquid crystal display device 1600 that the player watches, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the excitement of the player due to the moving effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the center accessory 2500 light guide plate 2610 of the front unit 2000 is attached has been described. In this case, the inner frame of the center accessory 2500 (from the player located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1) An area in which a moving effect cannot be produced within a predetermined distance from the end of the light guide plate 2610 is created in the visually recognizable opening window, and an area in which the moving effect is impossible is visible to the player. In addition, the area where the moving effect can be performed is narrowed, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

  For this reason, unlike the above, the light guide plate 2610 may be attached to the back unit 3000. In this case, since the light guide plate 2610 can be made larger than the inner frame of the center accessory 2500, the region where the moving effect cannot be performed is hidden by the center accessory 2500, and the region where the moving effect cannot be performed is the display region of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The moving effect can be performed in the entire (or most) area of the inner frame of the center accessory 2500. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the end portion of the light guide plate 2610 is located away from the periphery of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500.

  Since the back unit 3000 includes various decorative bodies (decorative units 3050, movable effect units 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, etc.), the end of the light guide plate 2610 is positioned behind these decorative bodies. The light guide plate 2610 can be disposed, and the light emitting devices (first pattern substrate 2611 and second pattern substrate 2612) can be positioned behind the decorative body. Thereby, the board | substrate used as a light source can be arrange | positioned in the position which a player cannot see, and a decorating property can be ensured.

  Further, the LED for the light guide plate 2610 (LEDs for light guide plate 2613 and 2614) and the LED for emitting the decorative body may be mounted on one substrate.

  As described above, when the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the back unit 3000, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be made an area where the moving effect can be performed, and the player is made aware of the unnaturalness due to the limitation of the moving effect area. I can not.

  FIG. 224 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 224, a moving effect in which the color of the pattern changes is performed by changing the emission color of the LED group over time.

  As described above, the light guide plate 2610 includes the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED correspond to each specific light incident portion. A group 2614g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In FIG. 224, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

  As shown in the figure, the first LED group 2614a is lit red, the red light incident from the first specific light incident portion 2630a is reflected by the first reflecting portion 2670a, and the pattern on which the first reflecting portion 2670a is arranged is red. And the player recognizes a red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b is lit in orange, the orange light incident from the second specific light incident portion 2630b is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b, and the pattern emits light in orange. Further, the third LED group 2614c is lit in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light incident portion 2630c is reflected by the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the pattern emits yellow light. The fourth LED group 2614d is lit in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the pattern emits green light. The fifth LED group 2614e is lit in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion 2670e and the pattern emits blue light. In addition, the sixth LED group 2614f is lit in indigo, and the sixth reflecting part 2670f reflects the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light incident part 2630f, and the pattern emits light in indigo. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g is lit in purple, and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflects the violet light incident from the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the pattern emits light in purple.

  Thereafter, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g is lit in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, and the color of the pattern changes. When the time further elapses, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, and the color of the pattern changes.

  In this way, the emission color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye watches the pattern that emits light in the same color, a moving effect can be achieved in which the pattern emits light so that streaks of light of seven colors flow.

  Although detailed description is omitted, even in the light guide plate 2610 having a pattern in which two light streaks intersect as shown in FIG. 215, by changing the emission color of each LED group 2614 as described in FIG. 224, The color of the pattern (light streaks) changes, and a moving effect can be made to make the pattern emit light so that the seven color streaks flow. In addition, if the left and right eye parallax is used to make the light streak appear behind or farther away from the light source, a three-dimensional pattern can be displayed.

  Next, a stereoscopic vision pattern and a planar vision pattern by the light guide plate 2610 will be described.

  FIG. 225 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a pattern viewed in plan is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

  As shown in FIG. 225 (B), since the reflection portion 2660 provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 has a curved reflection surface, light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in a plurality of directions. The player's right eye 10R and left eye 10L are reached. The reflection unit 2660 travels in the light guide plate 2610, reflects light arriving at the reflection unit 2660 from a plurality of directions (that is, through a plurality of paths), and emits the light to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 225 (A), since the left and right eye parallax does not occur in the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portion 2660, the player can place the pattern 2621 in a planar pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610. Will be seen as.

  FIG. 226 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a pattern viewed in plan is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (B), the reflection portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 reflects light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the left eye 10L of the player, and the reflection portion 2650R The light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. However, since the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R are arranged close to each other (for example, 1 mm or less), as shown in FIG. 226 (A), the left and right sides of the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portions 2650L and R The parallax of the eye is small, and it can be said that the left-eye pattern configured by the reflection unit 2650L and the right-eye pattern configured by the reflection unit 2650R are arranged at the same position. For this reason, the player views the pattern 2621 as a planar pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610.

  FIG. 227 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a stereoscopically visible pattern is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

  As shown in FIG. 227 (B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L. The reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650R is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 227 (A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are displaced from each other by the distance between the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R. A right eye image and a left eye image with parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 227, the light reaching the player's left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at a point 2621C on the back side of the light guide plate 2610. For this reason, the player sees the pattern 2621 formed by the reflection portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern at the rear position of the light guide plate 2610.

  FIG. 228 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a stereoscopically visible pattern is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

  As shown in FIG. 228 (B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L. The reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650R is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228 (A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are displaced from each other by the distance between the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R. A right eye image and a left eye image with parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 228, the light reaching the player's left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at a point 2621C on the surface side of the light guide plate 2610. For this reason, the player sees the pattern 2621 formed by the reflection portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern in front of the light guide plate 2610.

  As described above, according to the table effect unit 2600, since a plurality of different patterns can be emitted by the single light guide plate 2610, it is necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to display an animation or the like. In other words, the thickness of the front effect unit 2600 in the front-rear direction can be reduced as much as possible. Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player side, and a large space can be easily secured on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610. it can. Therefore, since a wide space can be secured on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like can be arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610. Can improve the appearance in the game area 5a to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player, and in addition to the effect by light emission display of the pattern 2623, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and By performing a movable effect by the upper front movable effect unit 3300 or the like, a variety of effects can be provided to the player, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, by arranging the light guide plate 2610 in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600, a plurality of semi-transparent patterns due to the light emission of the plurality of reflecting portions 2670 emerge and show a light emitting decoration that moves like an animation. Can give a strong impact to players familiar with light-emitting effects using conventional light guide plates, can surprise and entertain players, and something good for players It is possible to make it seem that there is a chance, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since only the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emission display of the pattern by the light guide plate 2610 well, the light emission display of the pattern 2623 from other players away from the front is possible. However, it is difficult to notice that other players are performing using the light guide plate 2610, and it is possible to suppress other players from paying attention, You can play without bothering the player, entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front view game area 5a, the patterns 2621 and 2622 are displayed by the LEDs 2613 and 2614. However, the light-emitting display pattern does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be seen in a good state from the player side, and the game becomes difficult to see. It is possible to entertain the game in a good state by preventing distrust to the player.

  In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 is aligned with the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 and the frame of the center accessory 2500 (first pattern substrate). 2611, the second picture board 2612) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it is difficult for the player to notice the presence of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light guide plate 2610 is present when the picture is displayed by light emission. It can be surprised by giving a strong impact to the player who thought that it was not, and the light-emitting display of a plurality of pictures by the light guide plate 2610 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image behind the light guide plate 2610 is provided, the light emission display of a plurality of different patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 are combined. Since the effects can be shown to the player, various effects can be achieved by appropriately combining them, making it difficult for the player to get bored and making the player entertained by the effects of the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the light guide plate 2610 is different from the distance to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to display an effect image related to the plurality of patterns 2623 that are emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and to impart a sense of depth and stereoscopic effect to the pattern 2623 that is displayed and emitted. An effect (display effect) capable of attracting interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the LEDs 2613 and 2614 may be single color LEDs or full color LEDs. Moreover, according to the number, shape, and magnitude | size of a pattern, the number of specific light incident parts, a reflection part, and LED group can be selected suitably.

[13-3. Example of production]
Next, an example of effect display using a light guide plate in a special symbol variation display game will be described. FIG. 229 to FIG. 234 are diagrams showing examples of effects using the light guide plate.

  In the effect display shown in FIG. 229, the light guide plate 2610 emits light so that a predetermined pattern is reflected on the light guide plate 2610, and a moving effect for moving the image toward the predetermined image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. This effect display may be executed in a specific special symbol variation display game (for example, as a specific reach effect or a notice effect).

  Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 229 (A), nothing is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, and the entire screen is darkened (blacked out) to black. This blackout causes the player to watch the liquid crystal display device 1600.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 229 (B), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610. As a result, the player is caused to pay attention to the first pattern 2621. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (C), a moving effect of displaying an image moving toward the first picture 2621 on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 229 (D), in the movement effect, the image 1611 may be moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621. The image 1611 displayed by moving to the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be the same color as the first pattern 2621 or a different color. Further, the image 1611 displayed by moving to the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be the same shape (similar shape) as the first picture 2621 as shown in FIG. 229 or a different shape as shown in FIG. 230. Also, the image 1611 and the first pattern 2621 displayed by moving are the same character image (the pose and face may be the same or different), and the same character (for example, the name of the character) and the font and color. It may be the same or different. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the light guide plate 2610 is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, the back of the first pattern 2621 displayed on the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. In addition, an image may be displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1600.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 229 (E), in the movement effect, the number of images 1611 moving toward the first picture 2621 and the ratio of the moving image 1611 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 over time. It may be changed along with.

  During the movement effect, the aspect of the first pattern 2621 displayed on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 231, the color and brightness of the first picture 2621 displayed on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. The color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 may be changed continuously (gradually) or stepwise (stepwise).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 232, the size of the first pattern 2621 displayed on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. In this case, it is preferable to provide a plurality of light guide plates and project a pattern with a different size using another light guide plate. In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, a direction different from the irradiation direction (lateral direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621 of the initial size (for example, The first pattern 2621 having a different size (large or small) may be projected by light irradiation from an oblique direction.

  After performing the movement effect for a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 229 (F), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned off and the first pattern 2621 is turned off from the light guide plate 2610. Further, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is also erased, and the entire screen is darkened (blacked out) to black. By this blackout, the player is paid attention to the liquid crystal display device 1600, and a period for improving the expectation for the next effect is created.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 229 (G), an image 1612 (for example, a character with high hit reliability) different from the first pattern 2621 and the moved and displayed image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 229 (H), the size of the character image 1612 is changed. For example, if the size of the character image 1612 is increased, the player's expectation for hitting will increase, but if the size of the character image 1612 is reduced, the expectation for hitting the player will be reduced. Note that the color and expression of the character image 1612 may be changed. The character image 1612 may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the first pattern 2621. Furthermore, along with the display of the character image 1612, the light guide plate 2610 may be irradiated from above to project a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 215).

  The character image may be projected on the light guide plate 2610. As described above, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, the light guide plate 2610 can project a different direction (for example, diagonally) from the irradiation direction (lateral direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621. The character image may be projected by irradiating light from (direction). Further, a plurality of light guide plates may be provided, and the character image may be projected with another light guide plate. When a character image having a different size or expression is projected on a light guide plate provided in addition to the light guide plate 2610, an effect display with a sense of depth is possible, unlike the flat liquid crystal display device 1600.

  As described above, the moving effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621 is that the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves after the first pattern 2621 is projected, but the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves. After starting, the first pattern 2621 may be displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 233, after the blackout (FIG. 233 (A)), as shown in FIG. 233 (B), the first design 2621 is displayed before the first design 2621 is projected. A moving effect for displaying an image moving toward the projected position on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 233 (C), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 233 (D), the movement effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621 is continued.

  Thus, the time when the first pattern 2621 is projected (light guide plate effect time) and the effect time when the image 1611 moves (time when the moving image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600) are the first pattern 2621. The light guide plate effect on which is displayed may start before or after the effect that the image 1611 moves. In addition, the light guide plate production time in which the first pattern 2621 is projected may be longer or shorter than the production time for the image 1611 to move.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 234, a moving display game may be produced by switching between a moving picture that appears to move and a still picture that does not appear to move.

  In the light guide plate effect shown in FIG. 234, the expectation to the big hit is high when the moving picture appears, and the expectation to the big hit is low if only the static picture appears. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 234 (A), the still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 as the variable display game progresses, and the displayed still picture is displayed as shown in FIG. 234 (B). A moving effect is displayed in which the image 1611 moving toward 2621 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, with the progress of the variable display game, as shown in FIG. 234 (C), the still picture 2621 is switched to the moving picture. Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (D), a moving effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 234 (E), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 234 (F), the still picture 2621 is displayed. The moving effect of displaying the moving image 1611 on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (G), a moving effect in which the image 1611 is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the pattern 1613 as the variable display game progresses may be performed. Good. After that, as shown in FIG. 234 (H), the variable display game is ended without losing without switching the still picture 2621 to the moving picture.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 234, when a specific display effect (for example, a specific reach effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, or a specific prefetch effect) is selected in the special symbol variation display game, the specific display effect is displayed. The specific image 1611 performs an effect integrally with the moving effect by the first pattern 2621. In other cases, the first image may not perform the moving effect.

  In this way, in the effect of the variable display game shown in FIG. 234, the effect of selectively displaying the still picture and the moving picture by the light guide plate 2610 is performed, so that the player has a sense of expectation for the development of the variable display game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  Next, an example of an effect obtained by adding an effect by an operating body to an effect display using a light guide plate in a special symbol variation display game will be described.

  FIG. 235 and FIG. 236 are diagrams showing examples of effects using the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 235, one pattern is configured by the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601 appearing on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 235 (A), a part of the movable body 3601 appears or disappears in a short cycle from the top of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 as the variable display game progresses. Repeatedly increase the player's expectation of a big hit. Then, as shown in FIG. 235 (B), the entire movable body 3601 appears on the front surface of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 235 (C), a moving effect is displayed in which a picture 2621 superimposed on the movable body is displayed by light emission of the light guide plate 2610, and an image 1611 moving toward the movable body 3601 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Do. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 235 (D), a moving effect may be performed in which an image is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the pattern 2621. .

  The movable body 3601 may be caused to emit light at the timing when this movement effect starts or during the movement effect. The light emission mode (light emission color and light emission timing) of the movable body 3601 may be the same as or different from the light emission mode of the light guide plate 2610.

  By selectively performing either the effect display in which the movable body 3601 shown in FIG. 229 does not appear or the effect display in which the movable body 3601 appears in FIG. A pachinko machine that can be enhanced and has high interest can be obtained.

  In the above-described example, the movable body 3601 is made to appear in place of the pattern where the images are collected. However, one character may be constituted by the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601. For example, when the movable body 3601 represents the body and the light guide plate 2610 represents a face, the facial expression can be changed by switching the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610. Thus, in addition to the effects produced by the liquid crystal display device 1600, various effects produced by the light guide plate 2610 can be realized.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 236, the light guide plate 2610 is used as an effect suggesting the appearance of the movable body 3601. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 236 (A), according to the progress of the variable display game, the pattern 2621 is displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate 2610, and as shown in FIG. 236 (B), the light guide plate 2610 displays. A moving effect of displaying an image 1611 moving toward the displayed pattern on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 236C, a moving effect is performed in which the image 1611 is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first picture 2621. May be. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 236 (D), the movable body 3601 appears from the upper part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600, and stops at a position overlapping the pattern 2621 of the light guide plate 2610.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 236 (E), a picture 1613 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and toward the displayed picture 1613 as shown in FIG. 236 (F). A moving effect for displaying the moving image 1611 on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 236 (G), a moving effect that moves the image 1611 from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the pattern 1613 as the variable display game progresses may be performed. Good. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 236 (H), the movable body does not appear, and the variable display game ends with a loss.

  In this way, in the effect shown in FIG. 236, an effect suggesting that the movable body comes out can be performed using the light guide plate.

[14. Pachinko machine using main control MPU with serial communication function]
The main control MPU 1311 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a synchronous serial communication function in addition to a conventional communication function using an 8-bit parallel bus.

  In a conventional pachinko machine, input / output signals of the main control MPU 1311 in the main control board 1310 are transmitted using a parallel port in which one signal is transmitted through one signal line or an 8-bit bus. In some cases, an illegal act is performed by reading data output from the main control MPU 1311 or inputting an illegal signal to the main control MPU 1311. For this reason, a configuration in which it is difficult to detect the input / output signal of the main control MPU 1311 from the outside is required. When a serial communication function that continuously transmits data with a single signal line at a predetermined timing is used, the serial communication It is difficult to read data or input data in accordance with the timing of the line.

  The main control board 1310 is equipped with a test signal output circuit for the purpose of monitoring signals when the inspection engine inspects the pachinko machine. For example, when inspecting the operation of a special electric accessory, a signal input to a solenoid driver (transistor) (for example, ON / OFF of 5 V) is monitored to monitor an output signal of a solenoid that opens and closes the special electric accessory. Signal) was branched and used as an inspection signal. When the serial signal transmitted in the main control board 1310 described above is output as an inspection signal, the inspection engine needs a device for analyzing the serial signal, and thus it is difficult to use the serial signal as an inspection signal. It is. For this reason, in the pachinko machine which transmits a signal by serial communication within the main control board 1310, it is necessary to devise an output of the inspection signal. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, a test signal that changes the level at the same timing as the solenoid driving signal by inputting one serial signal to two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel. Was supposed to be generated. When the output transistor open collector (or open drain) of the serial / parallel conversion circuit is configured, the voltage level is different by changing the voltage (5V and 12V) applied to two serial / parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel. Two synchronized signals can be generated.

  Furthermore, it is necessary to reduce the software load by reducing the number of program steps for detecting input by serial communication. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a part of the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 is input to the parallel-serial conversion circuit and a part is input directly to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. It is necessary to devise how to accept the input signal. For example, a signal whose input level needs to be determined immediately after power-on may be input directly to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 without being input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit. This is because the level of the signal input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPUI 1311 can be detected even before the interrupt process is executed, and the signal level can be detected other than the timer interrupt process immediately after the power is turned on.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, depending on the number of signals directly input to the main control MPU 1311, an extended I / O using a chip select may not be used, and the signal is input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPUI 1311. The signal level can be taken in bit units for each clock, and the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for the reception of the serial signal.

  FIG. 237 is a block diagram of the periphery of the synchronous serial interface of the main control board 1310, FIG. 238 is a circuit diagram showing the connection between the serial / parallel conversion circuit and the LED, and FIG. 239 shows the main control MPU 1311 and the peripheral It is a diagram showing the arrangement of components on the main control board 1310. In FIG. 237, FIG. 238, and FIG. 239, thick lines indicate parallel signal transmission lines, and thin lines indicate serial signal transmission lines.

  The main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment includes an asynchronous serial communication port (asynchronous serial communication function) for communicating with other boards (peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 951, etc.), and a main control board 1310. A synchronous serial communication port (synchronous serial communication function) for communicating with the interface circuit and a control signal of another device (solenoid, etc.) are output, or output from an abnormality detection sensor such as a vibration detection sensor or a magnetic detection sensor. It has a general-purpose port to which signals are input.

  The synchronous serial communication function of the main control MPU 1311 has a plurality of transmission / reception ports and a plurality of transmission ports. The communication partner of the transmission / reception port is selected by a chip select signal output from the main control MPU 1311.

  The transmission / reception port includes a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX), a reception signal input terminal (SERRX), a chip select output terminal (SERS0 to SERS3), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCK). The transmission port includes a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTXT), a chip select output terminal (SERST), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCKT).

  As shown in FIG. 237, one parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and two serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are connected to the transmission / reception port. The number of parallel-serial conversion circuits connected to the transmission / reception port is not limited to the illustrated one.

  It should be noted that more serial / parallel conversion circuits may be connected by connecting like the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 without using the chip select terminal. In this case, the types of signals output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit do not increase.

  The parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 connected to the transmission / reception port takes in the parallel data input when CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) is 0 level, and after CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) rises to 1, a predetermined clock is obtained. The data is output from the serial port at the timing. The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 receives signals from a game ball detection switch (start prize opening, big prize opening count switch, normal prize opening, specific area switch, normal symbol gate switch, game board discharge switch) and a photo sensor. The game balls that mainly flow down the game area 5a are detected. The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 has a 16-bit input port. However, an integrated circuit having an 8-bit input port may be connected in parallel to form a 16-bit configuration.

  Specifically, since the serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX) is connected to CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341, when the serial transmission signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is 0 level. The input game ball detection switch output signal is taken in, and serial data corresponding to the level of the game ball detection switch is output from the serial port at a predetermined clock timing after the serial transmission signal (SERTX) rises to 1. Thus, since the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in the output signal of the game ball detection switch using the SERTX signal as a trigger, it can take in the data of the ball detection sensor at an arbitrary timing.

  Further, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 connected to the transmission / reception port both output signals for lighting the LEDs (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). A data transmission destination is selected by a chip select signal from the main control MPU 1311. The serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 take in the serial data input when the chip select (CS) signal is 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and output a signal from the parallel port at the timing when the chip select signal rises to 1. To do. The output level from the parallel port is latched in the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 and is maintained until the next time the chip select signal rises to 1.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 238, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1342 is connected to the LED segment side, and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 is connected to the LED common side. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 outputs a signal at a predetermined timing, thereby dynamically lighting the LED. The serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 have a 16-bit output port, but an integrated circuit having an 8-bit output port may be connected in parallel to form a 16-bit configuration.

  The main control MPU 1311 outputs a common signal at the timing of outputting 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS0), sets the display digit of the 7-segment LED of the base indicator 1317, and outputs 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS1). A segment signal is output at the timing to light the LED.

  In this embodiment, a 7-segment LED having a common terminal on the anode side of the LED is used for the base indicator 1317. When the LED is lit, a drive current is transferred from the common terminal on the anode side to the segment terminal on the cathode side. Flowing. However, since integrated circuits having the same configuration are used for the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343, the direction of the current output by the driver circuit in each of the conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 (the output transistor of the driver circuit) Polarity) is the same. For this reason, a driver circuit 1344 is provided after the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 so that a current can be supplied to the common terminal on the anode side. That is, the driver circuit 1344 has a function of outputting a driving current for lighting the LED, and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 has a function of sucking a driving current for lighting the LED.

  For the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341, and the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, an integrated circuit having only a parallel / serial conversion function and an integrated circuit having only a serial / parallel conversion function may be used. Alternatively, the parallel / serial conversion function and the serial / parallel conversion function may be switched and used in an integrated circuit capable of mutually converting a serial signal and a parallel signal.

  Further, two serial / parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 are connected to the transmission port of the main control MPU 1311. Similarly to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 described above, the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 take in the serial data input when the chip select (CS) is 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and the CS becomes 1. Output from the parallel port at the time of rising. A driver transistor is provided at the output of the parallel port, and a voltage applied to the driver transistor is switched to generate an output signal. That is, output signals of various voltages can be generated depending on the voltage applied to the driver transistor.

  An external terminal board 784 is connected to the output port (PA0 to PA7) of channel A of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345, and a signal output from the external terminal board 784 (for example, a security signal or a ball payout signal). Is output. Also, various solenoids are connected to the output port (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345, and drive signals for the various solenoids are output. Further, an inspection terminal 1348 is connected to the output port (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346, and a signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric accessory release signal, Normal electric accessory release signal etc.) is output. Also, nothing is connected to the output port of channel A of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346.

  The transmission port of the main control MPU 1311 can control only one channel (16 bits), and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 receive the same signal branched including the chip select. Therefore, the same signal is output to the parallel side. Therefore, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 generate a set of parallel signals that change at the same timing from one serial signal. That is, the solenoid drive signal output from the channel B output port (PB0 to PB7) of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the test output output from the channel B output port (PB0 to PB7) of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 The signal changes at the same timing. Therefore, the movement of the solenoid can be accurately output from the inspection terminal 1348. Note that + 12V is applied to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345, the solenoid is driven with 12V, and + 5V is applied to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346, and a 5V test signal is output. As described above, by using two serial-parallel conversion circuits to which different voltages are applied, synchronized signals having different voltage levels can be generated.

  Of the outputs from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346, the pattern on the output side of the solenoid drive signal through which a relatively large current flows is made thicker, and the output side of the inspection signal that flows only a relatively small current is thickened. The pattern may be thin. Even if the pattern is not thickened, it is sufficient to reduce the resistance of the pattern. The pattern is formed on both the front and back surfaces to increase the substantial sectional area, or the inner layer pattern is formed to increase the substantial sectional area. May increase.

  Further, since the two serial / parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 operate independently, even if the load on one conversion circuit increases, the waveform of the output signal of the other conversion circuit is not disturbed and the output signal is affected. Does not occur. That is, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 can output an inspection signal having the same waveform as the original waveform of the solenoid drive signal regardless of the operation of the solenoid connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345, which is useful for accurate inspection. .

  Next, the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 and peripheral components on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 239, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310, and various interface circuits are arranged around it. An inspection circuit arrangement area is provided on the main control board 1310, and a serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347, and an inspection terminal 1348 are provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area. Circuit components (serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346, interface circuit 1347, inspection terminal 1348, etc.) provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 to be inspected by an inspection organization, and are generally commercially available pachinko machines. 1 is not mounted (a component mounting pattern is provided). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 that is generally marketed, the connector that relays the signal output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 to the solenoid is mounted, but the inspection signal output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 is transmitted. The inspection terminal 1348 to be relayed is not mounted. For this reason, the commercially available pachinko machine 1 is configured such that the inspection signal is not detected by an unauthorized person and used for the unauthorized action.

  As described above, in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, parts are not mounted in the inspection circuit arrangement area, but a print pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided. For this reason, noise may induce on the data bus and cause malfunction, so the wiring (print pattern) in the circuit arrangement area for inspection is pulled up to the power supply (+ 5V) via a resistor (or to GND) Pull down) to reduce the effect of noise.

  Furthermore, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, a commercially available pachinko machine 1 does not use surface-mounted components, but circuit parts provided in the circuit arrangement area for inspection are not mounted on the commercially available pachinko machine 1. Surface mount components can be used. For this reason, the components of the inspection circuit can be reduced in size, the inspection circuit arrangement area can be reduced, and the main control board 1310 can be reduced in size. Similarly, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, a commercially available pachinko machine 1 has no components mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, but circuit components provided in the circuit arrangement area for inspection are commercially available. 1 can be mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310.

  Of the components of the inspection circuit, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on another board arranged in the vicinity of the main control board 1310. This separate board is mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 to be inspected by the inspection organization, and is not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is generally marketed. Also in this case, the inspection signal is not output from the pachinko machine 1 that is generally commercially available.

  In this way, by arranging and arranging circuit parts used for inspection of the pachinko machine 1 in the inspection circuit arrangement area, it is easy to find missing parts in the commercial pachinko machine 1, and additional parts for fraud Easy to find mounting. Further, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the interface circuit 1347 can be disposed near the inspection terminal 1348, and the main control board 1310 having high noise resistance can be configured.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 239, the circuit components arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area are different in direction from the same type of circuit components arranged elsewhere in the main control board 1310 (for example, 180 degrees as shown). It may be arranged in the direction of rotation). In this way, by arranging the circuit components in different directions in the circuit arrangement area for inspection and other places in the main control board 1310, it becomes possible to easily distinguish the components used for normal games and the components for inspection, In the manufacturing process of the commercially available pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent erroneous mounting by mistakenly arranging components in the circuit arrangement area for inspection.

  Further, on the main control board 1310, symbols and numbers (or combinations thereof) of circuit components mounted are displayed by, for example, silk printing, but symbols and numbers of circuit components arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area The numbers may be collectively attached with symbols and numbers following circuit symbols and numbers used for game control. For example, the integrated circuits for game control are IC1 to IC11, and the integrated circuits arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area are given symbols after IC12. If it does in this way, the symbol and number which do not fly can be given to the circuit component for game control mounted in the pachinko machine 1 marketed, and the check after mounting a circuit component on the main control board 1310 can be performed simply. it can.

  Further, if the symbol and number of the inspection terminal are different from the symbol and number of the connector connected to the game control component, the connector connected to the game control component and the inspection terminal can be easily provided. It is possible to distinguish between them, and it is possible to prevent erroneous wiring by connecting the cables by mistake. In particular, if the symbol or number of the inspection terminal is the same as the symbol or number of the connection destination of the other inspection device, it is convenient for connecting the cable at the time of inspection, and connection errors can be reduced.

  In addition, some of the general-purpose ports of the main control MPU 1311 are unused ports, and the empty ports may be arranged so as to be collected at adjacent terminals of the main control MPU 1311. That is, regardless of whether the port numbers of the unused ports are consecutive, it is preferable that the terminals of the vacant ports are arranged at the aggregated position. By collecting and arranging the empty terminals, the areas on the main control board 1310 where the print pattern is not provided are gathered, and it is easy to find missing parts and find attachment of additional parts for fraud. It has become easier.

  Further, the terminal of the empty port is arranged at a position close to the connector through which a relatively large current flows (for example, a solenoid is connected) in the positional relationship with the connector. That is, in the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, connectors for inputting / outputting game control signals are arranged on the left and right sides (up and down in the figure) on the side where the terminals of the vacant ports are located. For this reason, when adding an additional function to the pachinko machine 1, the design of the main control board 1310 can be easily changed without drawing a long pattern.

  As described above, by using serial communication for signal transmission in the main control board 1310, the wiring of the data bus can be reduced, and it becomes easy to find attachment of additional parts for fraud. In other words, a large number of data buses connected to a plurality of parallel interface circuits are eliminated, and a number of signal lines including control lines are formed, so that a circuit pattern of a large number of data buses is arranged in a complicated manner. Therefore, it becomes a neat circuit pattern. In addition, the main control board 1310 that is resistant to noise can be configured by reducing the data line routing distance.

  Further, since the number of data lines is reduced, the circuit can be arranged without being affected by the routing of the data lines, so that the I / O IC (parallel interface circuit, serial interface circuit) can be arranged near the main control MPU 1311.

  Further, by reducing the circuit pattern, the ground pattern can be increased without changing the area of the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 that is more resistant to noise can be configured.

  FIG. 240 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement of ports in the main control MPU 1311.

  The parallel output port of the address D2 (chip select SERS0) is a serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343. As shown in FIG. 238, the output ports PA0 to PA3 of the channel A are on the common side (LED anode terminal) of the function display unit 1400. The output ports PA4 to PA7 are connected to the common side of the base indicator 1317 (the anode terminal of the 7-segment LED). The output ports PB0 to PB7 of the channel B of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 are not used.

  The parallel output port of the address D3 (chip select SERS1) is a serial / parallel conversion circuit 1342. As shown in FIG. 238, the output ports PA0 to PA7 of the channel A are connected to the segment side (LED cathode of the function display unit 1400). The output ports PB0 to PB7 of the channel B are connected to the segment side of the base display 1317 (the cathode terminal of the 7-segment LED).

  The LED common side (LED anode terminal) switches the output port to be turned on at a constant cycle (for example, interrupt every 4 ms). When paying attention to the output port of channel A, only PA0 is turned on in the timer interrupt process, only PA1 is turned on in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms),..., Only PA7 in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms) Is turned ON at a constant cycle (4 ms x number of ports). That is, when 8 ports are repeatedly switched, each port is turned ON every 32 ms. Alternatively, when channel A output ports PA0 to PA3 and PA4 to PA7 are grouped, and attention is paid to the output port of channel A, only PA0 and PA4 are turned ON by timer interrupt processing, and the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms) Only PA1 and PA5 may be turned ON, and in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms), only PA3 and PA7 may be turned ON at a constant cycle (4 ms × number of ports). By making this fixed period operation serial communication, it is difficult to detect the operation timing of the main control MPU 1311.

  The parallel input port of the address D5 is a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341, and switches (ball detection sensors) for detecting a game ball are connected to the inputs PA1 to PA7 and PB0 to PB7. The outputs of these sphere detection sensors are input as serial signals to the main control MPU 1311 and read as signals at the address D5.

  Furthermore, the operation information of the setting key 971, the operation information of the RAM clear switch 954, the power failure warning signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the detection signal of the frame opening detection switch are input to the general-purpose input ports INP0 to INP4 provided in the main control MPU 1311. ing. Since these signals need to be monitored in real time (when the program requests them) or need to be monitored outside the timer interrupt processing (for example, immediately after the power is turned on), the main control is not performed via the parallel / serial conversion circuit. Directly input to the MPU 1311.

  Furthermore, the general-purpose input / output ports (also used for input / output) IOP0 to IOP3 provided in the main control MPU 1311 have detection signals from the radio wave detection sensor, detection signal from the vibration detection sensor, detection signal from the magnetic detection switch, and detection signal from the proximity error switch. Have been entered. These signals are output when the pachinko machine 1 has an abnormality (such as fraudulent activity or failure) and must be monitored in real time (at the time requested by the program). It is directly input to the main control MPU 1311 without intervention. In addition, the abnormality is notified by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or voice by the detection signals of these sensors and switches. By this abnormality notification, the employee of the hall comes to check the state of the pachinko machine, so the game is substantially stopped. If this abnormality notification is a false notification, it will make the player feel uncomfortable, so it is necessary to suppress erroneous detection. For this reason, it is preferable to input these signals to the general-purpose input / output port, detect them a plurality of times in a short time (so-called twice reading), and suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise.

  This twice-reading process is a one-time timer interrupt process in which a read instruction is continuously executed to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose input / output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, Execute multiple read instructions with several instructions in between to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose I / O port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, or read multiple with several clocks in between This is done by executing a command and determining the signal level input to the general-purpose input / output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. Therefore, when the port level is continuously determined via the parallel / serial conversion circuit, the level can be detected only at intervals of several tens of microseconds, whereas when the general-purpose port level is continuously determined, 1 microsecond. The level can be detected at the following intervals, and the signal level can be detected in a short cycle.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, signals of various switches and sensors that require real-time characteristics are directly input to the general-purpose input port and the general-purpose output port without using the extended I / O using the chip select. In addition, since the level of the signal input to the general-purpose input / output port (also used for input / output) is fetched in units of bits for each clock, the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for the reception of the serial signal.

  Although the general-purpose input / output ports (I / O) IOP4 to IOP7 are not used, some of the signals input via the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 are used as general-purpose I / O ports (I / O) IOP4 to IOP7. May be entered.

  Although not shown, the main control MPU 1311 may have a general-purpose output port.

  When the general-purpose input port is an empty terminal, it is pulled up to 5V via a resistor or pulled down to GND to prevent the terminal from becoming an intermediate potential, and the influence of noise induced on the power supply line is reduced. It is good to reduce. Further, when the general-purpose output port is an empty terminal, it may be opened, but it is preferable to pull up to 5V via a dummy resistor or pull down to GND so that the level change of the output port does not become noise.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the inspection signal is output from the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 and the signal used for game control is output via the serial / parallel conversion circuit. For this reason, the winning ball detection signals are collected and input to one port, and are easily handled by the game control program.

  Of the signals input to the main control MPU 1311, signals that need to be detected multiple times in a short time (so-called twice reading) are input to the general-purpose port, and signals that do not need to be read twice are serialized. The data is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel conversion circuit. Since the general-purpose port can check the signal level in real time, the signal level can be detected a plurality of times in a short time to eliminate the influence of noise and make a determination. If the general-purpose input port is free, the port may be assigned so that a signal that does not need to be read twice is input to the general-purpose port.

  A signal input to the main control MPU 1311 can be assigned to the general-purpose input port, but a signal input to the main control MPU 1311 and a signal output from the main control MPU 1311 can be assigned to the general-purpose input / output port (also used as input / output). Since both can be assigned, the general-purpose input / output port is highly versatile for changing specifications. For this reason, a general purpose input / output port (also used as an input / output) is preferably used as a spare port for adding a new function, and the general purpose input port is preferably assigned with priority.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the timing of data output and capture by a synchronous serial signal will be described.

  When the main control MPU 1311 outputs 0 (LOW) from the chip select terminal SERS0, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 is selected, and the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the base display 1317. In the figure, PA7 (COM4) is selected in PA7 to PA4. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the function display unit 1400 from the serial signal transmission terminal SERTX. In the figure, PA3 (LED-C4) is selected in PA3 to PA0.

  Since no output is assigned to the B channel port of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343, nothing is output at the data fetch timing of PB7 to PB0, and 1 (HIGH) is maintained. However, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the serial transmission signal SERTX output from the main control MPU 1311 is connected to the CLR / LOAD terminal that determines the data capture timing of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341, and this signal is 0 ( LOW), data is taken in from PA0 to PB7. Therefore, the serial transmission signal SERTX is set to 0 (LOW) at any timing of PB7 to PB0, and data is taken in from PA0 to PB7 of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341.

  The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in data, and after the serial transmission signal SERTX rises to 1 (HIGH), outputs serial data from the serial signal output terminal (Q8C) according to the clock signal. During this period, the serial transmission signal SERTX is maintained at 1 (HIGH), and control is performed so that new data is not captured.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, since the transmission signal of the empty output port is used as a trigger for capturing the output of the game ball detection sensor, the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at an arbitrary timing.

  Next, another arrangement of the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 242 and 243.

  The main control board 1310 is desirably used in common for a plurality of models without redesign. However, the input / output signals of the main control board 1310 may differ depending on the model and specifications. For this reason, in this embodiment, the input / output interface of the main control board 1310, which differs depending on the model, is mounted on another board (input / output board 1351), and the periphery of the main control MPU 1311 common to each model is mounted on the main control board 1310. The configuration is as follows. The main control board 1310 is shared by multiple models, that is, the performance (for example, noise resistance) is evaluated and designed by making the board size, circuit design, printed circuit board artwork, component arrangement, etc. the same. The main control board 1310 having a stable quality can be commonly used in a plurality of models without redesign.

  Further, when the input / output interface of the main control board 1310 is mounted on another input / output board 1351, there is a problem where the circuit is divided. One is a method of separating by a serial signal line, and the second is a method of separating by a parallel signal obtained by converting a serial signal. In the former case, the number of wirings between the substrates can be reduced as compared with the latter. In addition, even if the serial signal is acquired, it is difficult to know the order in which the data is transmitted, and it is unknown which data is transmitted at which timing. Further, it is output at a speed synchronized with the serial signal clock, and this synchronous clock may be different from the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. For this reason, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and even if a serial signal is acquired, it is difficult to know the contents of the transmitted data. Therefore, it is preferable to connect the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 with a serial signal line.

  As shown in FIG. 242, an input / output board 1351 attached to the main control board 1310 is provided, and the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 are mounted in the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without being broken once closed. The input / output board 1351 is provided with a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and a serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345. The main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 (the main control MPU 1311, the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345) are connected by a serial communication line, and are connected by a parallel bus or a general-purpose port. It is possible to connect between boards with a smaller number. The serial signal line may be connected by an electric wire or may be connected by an inter-board connector.

  Further, if serial communication is performed between the boards, it is difficult to analyze the data even if the signal is acquired, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the contents of the transmitted data are known to an unauthorized person. Also, the input / output board 1351 for inputting / outputting signals for game control is configured separately from the main control board 1310, and the input / output signals that vary depending on the model are set in the input / output board 1351, so the main control board 1310 is modified The number of models that can be applied without increasing is increased, and the versatility of the main control board 1310 can be improved.

  Furthermore, by accommodating the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 in one main control board box 1320, the serial communication signal line can be shortened.

  When the main control board 1310 is used for other models, the design of the input / output board 1351 may be changed, and the relationship between the connector of the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1311 does not change depending on the model. Therefore, it is possible to use the main control board 1310 whose performance (for example, noise resistance performance) is evaluated and whose design quality is stable. Further, if the size of the input / output board 1351 and the position of the mounting hole are not changed, the conventional main control board box 1320 can be used without redesigning the main control board box 1320. Further, countermeasures against noise that changes for each model may be performed not by the main control board 1310 but by the input / output board 1351.

  The serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 that output the drive signal of the base display 1317 may be arranged on the main control board 1310. When the base display 1317 is disposed on the input / output board 1351, the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are disposed on the input / output board 1351, and signals for driving the function display unit 1400 are input to the input / output board. It is good to output from 1351.

  Further, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 for generating the inspection signal may be disposed on the main control board 1310. That is, the inspection circuit arrangement area and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on the main control board 1310. This is because part of the signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 is output from the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel bus, and therefore when the inspection terminal 1348 is arranged on the input / output board 1351, input / output to / from the main control board 1310 is performed. This is because the number of connection lines with the substrate 1351 increases.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 243, the main control board 1310 may be accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and the input / output board 1351 may be attached outside the main control board box 1320.

  In the form shown in FIG. 243, since the input / output board 1351 is provided outside the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be used in common even if the size of the main control board box 1320 changes. In addition, since the input / output board 1351 and the main control board 1310 are housed in separate board boxes, the degree of freedom of board placement is improved. Further, if the main control board box 1320 in which the main control board 1310 is accommodated and the input / output board box 1350 in which the input / output board 1351 is accommodated are provided separately, each board box becomes small and the board installation position becomes free. . Further, since the main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317, an LED for displaying an error code, and a setting key 971, it is necessary to appear on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but the input / output board 1351 is a pachinko machine. Since it does not need to be visible from the back side of the machine 1, the board installation position is free. Thus, the form shown in FIG. 243 can improve the degree of design freedom.

  In the form shown in FIG. 243, the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320. The main control MPU 1311 outputs data from the data bus in addition to the serial signal. In the pachinko machine, it is desirable not to output the data bus output from the main control MPU 1311 to the outside of the sealed main control board box 1320 in order to prevent unauthorized persons from perceiving the operation of the pachinko machine. . However, even if the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320, it is unlikely that a fraudster will perceive the operating status of the pachinko machine. This is because the data bus outputs data according to the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and the data rate is constant, so the data rate can be easily estimated from the outside. As a result, the signal transmitted on the data bus is acquired. Sometimes. However, the serial signal is output at a speed synchronized with the clock for the serial signal, and the speed of the synchronous clock may be different from the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. For this reason, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and even if a serial signal is acquired, it is difficult to know the contents of the transmitted data.

  The example in which the input / output board 1351 is provided separately from the main control board 1310 and the input / output function of the model-dependent signal is mounted on the input / output board 1351 has been described above. If there is a portion where the resistance to fraud or noise does not decrease even if it is arranged, it may be mounted on the input / output board 1351. For example, output of a signal requiring a drive current such as a solenoid or a motor attached to the game board 5, output of a drive signal of the function display unit 1400, various sensors (winning ball detection, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor) This signal input is a function that may be mounted on the input / output board 1351. Also, communication with the payout control board 951, output of signals output from the external terminal board 784, power failure detection, setting key 971 input (the setting key 971 itself may be provided outside the main control board 1310), base display The output to 1317 is a function that should be mounted on 1310 on the main control board.

  Further, when the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 mounted on the input / output board 1351 input a dummy signal (0 V or 5 V) to an empty input terminal or connect a dummy resistor to an empty output terminal. Good. This is because if nothing is connected to an empty terminal, noise may be taken in and the circuit may malfunction.

  In particular, it is difficult to analyze the serial signal if some of the multiple signals that the fraudster tries to acquire are transmitted through a parallel bus or general-purpose port, and other signals are transmitted as serial signals. The fraudster needs to acquire signals from a plurality of locations including the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351, and the deterrence against fraud can be increased.

[15. Slot machine]
The arrangement of the program and data stored in the ROM of the pachinko machine has been described so far. Next, the arrangement of the program and data stored in the RAM and ROM of the slot machine (cylinder-type game machine) will be described. The outline of the pachinko machine has been described with reference to FIG. 26, but programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM as in the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[15-1. Construction]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 244 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 245 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 opened.

  As shown in FIGS. 244 and 245, the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment is provided with various devices inside a box-shaped housing 4100 whose front surface is open, and a front member on the front surface of the housing 4100. 4200 is provided to be openable and closable in a single-opening manner. An upper part of the front member 4200 is provided with an image display body 4500 for performing presentation and information display according to the progress of the game, and a speaker for performing presentation with sound. The image display body 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to the effect display related to the game. Then, various effect displays and history information display on the image display body 4500 are controlled by the effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 constitutes an effect display means capable of displaying an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 serves as a display control means capable of performing display control of the effect display means. Eggplant.

  A front panel on which a decorative pattern or the like is drawn is arranged at the center of the front member 4200 so that the rear cannot be seen, and the rear is visible at the center of the front panel (for example, transparent ) A symbol display window 4401 is formed. Note that the front panel may be configured by a display device, and the reel 4301 is visible when no image is displayed on the symbol display window 4401, and an image that produces a game is mainly displayed around the symbol display window 4401. To do. In this case, an image for producing a game can be displayed on the symbol display window 4401.

  Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), a symbol variably displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 provided in the housing can be visually recognized. The reel 4301 includes a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. A plurality of symbols are arranged in accordance with a predetermined arrangement by winding a strip-shaped sheet on which a plurality of symbols are drawn along the longitudinal direction on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c.

  Each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel drive motor 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 246) which is a stepping motor, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is independently driven to rotate and stop rotating. It is possible to do. That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c serve as drive sources for the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c increase the drive torque and the static torque by being controlled by the two-phase excitation method, similarly to the payout motor 839 of the pachinko machine 1 described above. As a result, a small motor can be employed as the drive source, and the cost can be reduced.

  Hereinafter, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are referred to as a left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c are referred to as a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c. Further, the reel drive motor 4341 corresponding to each reel is a left reel drive motor 4341a, a middle reel drive motor 4341b, and a right reel drive motor 4341c.

  Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, a plurality of kinds of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401 are varied so as to circulate from top to bottom, for example (variable display). On the other hand, in a state where the reel 4301 is stopped, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols, that is, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3, are displayed through the symbol display window 4401 for each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. And is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 4401, the effective display portions of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c for deriving and displaying the game stop result can be visually recognized.

  For a 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401, a predetermined enabling line is set. In the present embodiment, a line crossing the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c diagonally across the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c (middle line), and a line crossing the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c diagonally from the lower reel 4301a to the middle reel 4301b. A line (lower right line) that obliquely crosses each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c from the upper stage of the left reel 4301a to the lower stage of the middle reel 4301c is a line that can be activated. Then, the validable line is activated by the player's insertion of medals or input from credits (hereinafter referred to as “betting operation”), and based on the symbol combination mode (outcome) formed on this effective line. It is determined whether or not a winning (role) has been established.

  When winning is established, there are cases where three predetermined symbols are arranged on another line in addition to the case where three predetermined symbols are arranged on the effective line. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) crossing the upper symbols of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It should be noted that a line crossing the lower symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c (lower line) and a front portion (a visible portion) facing the symbol display window 4401 of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above are crossed. It is also possible to arrange the appearance symbols on the virtual lines that are positioned. Below, the lines that can be activated (middle, right-up, and right-down lines), the lines that can be arranged in the appearance when winning the prize (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) are grouped together. Line).

  The upper, middle, lower, right-up and right-down lines are enabled, and a predetermined enable line is enabled according to the number of bets, and a prize is awarded based on the symbol combination form formed on the active line ( Judgment / non-establishment of the role). For example, in the case of 1 bet, the middle line is the effective line, in the case of 2 bets, the upper and lower lines are active lines in addition to the middle line, and in the case of 3 bets, the upper right, lower and lower lines are valid lines. And Also, regardless of the bet number (even if the bet number is 1 or 2), all the lines may be valid, or three lines may be dedicated.

  A payout number display LED 4562 for displaying the number of medals to be paid out by the game is provided around the symbol display window 4401 (for example, below). A credit indicator for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count indicator for displaying the number of remaining games in the special prize may be provided.

  A stepped portion protruding forward is formed below the symbol display window 4401, and an upper surface of the stepped portion is an operation portion 4202 that is inclined downward on the front side. The operation section 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, a one-sheet insertion button 4205 and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation section for advancing the game.

  The medal slot 4203 is disposed on the right side when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000 in the operation unit 4202. When the player inserts medals into the medal slot 4203 and performs a betting operation, the game can be executed. A path through which medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass is provided with an insertion sensor 4207b for detecting the passage of medals, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on detection information by the insertion sensor 4207b.

  The one-sheet insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000 in the operation unit 4202. The single sheet input button 4205 can be input one by one from the credit by performing a pressing operation once. The maximum bet button 4206 can be input from credit to the upper limit number of bets (for example, three) by performing a pressing operation once. However, when the credit number is less than the upper limit number, the credit number is input as the bet number. It is like that.

  A payout button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided below the operation unit 4202. The payout button 4209 is paid out when a medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 4203, a single coin insertion button 4205, a medal (bet medal) input as a bet amount by the max bet button 4206, or a winning is established and stored as a credit. This is used when giving a command to return the medals (stored medals) to the medal tray 4201. It should be noted that medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 4203 after an automatic betting operation based on the establishment of a re-game winning (replay winning), or more than a predetermined number of medals that can be stored as credits are used for medal through the medal selector 4207. It is returned to the tray 4201.

  The start lever 4210 is an operation lever for starting a single game. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front member 4200 or resetting an error (for example, hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. A return button 4208 is used when a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and jammed inside the medal selector 4207 is returned to the medal tray 4201.

  The reel stop button 4211 includes a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c. In response to the stop operation, the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is stopped.

  In addition, a decorative plate (decorative panel) that constitutes a lower region of the front member 4200 is provided below a portion where these operation buttons are provided. Further, below the decorative plate and at the bottom of the front member 4200, a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout opening, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like are provided.

  A main board (game control device) 4600 (see FIG. 246) for controlling the entire slot machine 4000 is disposed in the upper part inside the housing. An accessory ratio indicator 1317 and a display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600. The accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similarly to the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device provided on the main substrate 4600.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another display (for example, the payout number display LED 4562 or the image display body 4500) provided in front of the slot machine 4000, and the payout number display LED 4562. Alternatively, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the image display body 4500.

  When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It may be displayed on the printed circuit board in the vicinity of the display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100 that it is a switch for operating the display of the ratio of the objects (printing, engraving, sealing, etc.). Note that the display switch 1318 is preferably provided in the vicinity of the accessory ratio display 1317, but even if it is not the main control unit 1300, any other board (for example, the effect control board 4700) can be used if it is easy to operate. , Power supply device 4112), casing 4100, and front member 4200. Further, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it by mistake.

  In addition, a symbol variation display device 4300 is provided almost in the center of the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are placed thereon. In addition, an external relay terminal plate 4131 for outputting a signal from the main board 4600 to an external device is provided inside the casing of the slot machine 4000.

  Further, a medal payout device (hopper) 4110 is disposed at the lower part inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 receives and stores medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination form is formed on the active line and a winning is established, Medals (payout medals) corresponding to the number of medals or medals that exceed the upper limit of credits due to the addition associated with the winning of a prize are paid out to the medal tray 4201. The medal for the credit is paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110 by operating the payout button 4209. Further, on the right side of the medal payout device 4110, the medal that overflows and flows in from the medal payout device 4110 is stored, or the received medal is sent to the medal collection mechanism on the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank for guiding is provided.

[15-2. Slot machine internal configuration]
FIG. 246 is a block diagram showing configurations of various mechanism elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game. A CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input / output interface 4604, and the like are mounted on the main board 4600.

  Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with the accessory ratio indicator 1317 for displaying the accessory ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and the display switch 1318 for switching the display of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. The display switch 1318 may be a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be another type of switch. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

  The one-sheet insertion button 4205, the max bet button 4206, the start lever 4210, the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, the payout button 4209, etc. are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are not shown in the drawing. Is operated by the player, and the detected operation signal is output to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 4300 (starting rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c) is output to the main board 4600, and the reel stop button 4211a. , 4211b, 4211c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is output to the main board 4600.

  In addition, the slot machine 4000 accommodates other devices together with the main substrate 4600, and various signals are input to the main substrate 4600 from these devices. In addition to the symbol variation display device 4300, the devices include a medal payout device 4110 and the like.

  As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right reel Reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 is a stepping motor, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c can be rotated and stopped independently. At the time of the rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed on the symbol display window 4401. Displayed continuously changing downward.

  The reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c have position sensors 4331a, 4331b, and 4331c for detecting reference positions related to rotation. The reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c have position sensors 4331a, 4331b, and 4331c, respectively. The reels are provided correspondingly (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). When detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors are input to the main board 4600, the main board 4600 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

  In the medal selector 4207, the solenoid 4207a and the insertion sensor 4207b described above are installed. The insertion sensor 4207b detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is in an OFF state, the inserted medal is detected by the insertion sensor 4207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 4207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 4207b in the medal selector 4207 is locked out so that the insertion of medals is not accepted, and even if the player inserts medals, the medal selector 4207 The medal that has flowed through the return basket to the medal returns to the medal tray 4201. At the same time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is invalidated, so that neither betting by medal insertion nor medal storage is performed.

  The medal payout device 4110 has a payout sensor 4110e for detecting the payout medal one by one in the discharge port, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 4600 from the payout sensor 4110e. . The auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a medal full sensor 4111a. When the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined number, a detection signal indicating that the number of medals exceeds a predetermined number is sent to the main board 4600. Output to. At this time, an error display for notifying abnormality of medal storage is performed by the image display body 4500, the error lamp 4554, and the like, and it is notified to the player, the hall employee, and the like that the abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 4600 to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c described above is output from the main board 4600. The medal payout device 4110 receives a drive signal from the main board 4600 according to the combination of symbols stopped on the active line, and in response to this, the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110 or there is no medal at all, the number detection by the payout sensor 4110e is delayed. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the payout sensor 4110e outputs a payout medal abnormality signal to the main board 4600. In response to this, the main board 4600 notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the medal payout. Is displayed on the error lamp 4554, the image display 4500, or the like to notify the player or hall employee that an abnormality has occurred.

  The slot machine 4000 includes an effect control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600. The effect control board 4700 includes a CPU 4701, ROM 4702, RAM 4703, input / output interface 4707, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, AMP (audio amplifier). 4705, a sound source IC 4706, etc. are mounted. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600 and controls the display of the image display body 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 4502, and the operation of the speaker 4512.

  Further, an external relay terminal plate 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the hall computer 4800 in the game hall through the external relay terminal plate 4131. The external relay terminal board 4131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

  The power supply device 4112 creates a plurality of types of DC power supplies from AC 24 volt (AC24V) power supplied from the island facility. For example, three types of power sources of DC +5 V (hereinafter “+5 V”), DC +12 V (hereinafter “+12 V”), and DC +24 V (hereinafter “+24 V”) are created. Three types of power supplies of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each component included in the slot machine 4000. For example, two types of power supplies of + 5V and + 12V are supplied to the reel 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341. Is supplied to the symbol fluctuation display device 4300.

  In addition, the power supply device 4112 includes a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000, and can be operated only when the front member 4200 is opened. The power switch 4112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing settings (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 4000. The reset switch 4112u is for canceling an error that has occurred in the slot machine 4000, and is also operated when changing the setting together with the setting change key switch 4112t.

  The main board 4600 is provided with a reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. In the case where the output torque of the reel drive motor 4341 is rotationally driven to obtain a drive torque for rotating the reel 4301, the CPU 4601 sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switch signal to set the reel drive motor voltage switch circuit 4605. Is output to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining the static torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is stopped, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switch signal (for example, LOW) and sets the reel drive motor voltage switch circuit 4605. Is output to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage.

  The above is an example of the configuration of the slot machine 4000. In the game by the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 in a state where the number of medals is determined, the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c rotate, and then the player turns the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c. Is operated, the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are controlled to stop, and when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination of symbols on the effective line, and necessary. Accordingly, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is awarded.

  As described above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel band on which a symbol is drawn. Then, when all reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are stopped, the display content displayed in the symbol display window 4401 (the combination of symbols displayed on the active line) of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. It is determined whether or not a combination mode (design combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination mode corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned active line in the symbol display window 4401. It is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of active lines. As a result, when it is determined that a plurality of symbol combinations of winning combinations are displayed, medals of a quantity that is the sum of the number of payouts corresponding to each displayed winning combination are paid out.

[15-3. Storage area configuration]
Next, a storage area provided by the ROM 4602 and the RAM 4603 provided on the main board 4600 will be described. The outline of the storage area of the pachinko machine has been described with reference to FIG. 24, but is configured similarly to the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 247 to 250. FIG. 247 is a diagram showing details of an access area in game control of the slot machine 4000 and a ROM area 5100 that is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602 in this embodiment.

  The storage area in this embodiment is provided by a medium such as the ROM 4602 and the RAM 4603, and is provided as one access area to which addresses from “0000H” to “FFFFH” are assigned. Further, the access area of this embodiment is divided into predetermined areas corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 5100, a RAM area 5200, an I / O area 5300, and a parameter information setting area 5400. It is. Note that each area does not necessarily correspond to a medium that provides an access area, and one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

  By configuring the access area of the present embodiment as described above, the CPU 4601 can access programs and data without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area by designating the address. Details of the access area will be described below.

[15-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 5100 will be described. The ROM area 5100 corresponds to the storage area provided by the ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium that retains the stored contents even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. The stored data can be read but updated or deleted. I can't do that. Note that the ROM 4602 may be a non-volatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 5100 may be updatable.

  The ROM area 5100 is assigned addresses from “0000H” to “1FFFH”. The CPU 4601 can access data stored in the ROM 4602 by designating the address “0000H” to “1FFFH”.

  The ROM area 5100 includes a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area, and a fourth isolation area. included. In each area, a start address and an end address are set.

  The first control area is a game control area, and stores a program for performing game control. The first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for performing game control is stored. That is, the game stored in the first control area is executed, and the game control is performed while referring to the data stored in the first data area. The areas used for game control (first control area, first data area) are used as game control areas (first storage areas).

  The second control area stores a program for debugging the control program (functional inspection). The second data area is an area for storing data for debugging (functional inspection). Note that the second data area is not necessarily required, and debugging data may be stored in the second control area. It should be noted that an area (second control area, second data area) for storing a program or data for debugging (functional inspection) of a game control program without being used for game control is an area for debugging (inspection function) ( Second storage area).

  The third control area stores a program for calculating and displaying an accessory ratio. In the third control area, data for calculating an accessory ratio is also stored. You may provide the 3rd data area which stores the data for calculation of an accessory ratio. Note that an area (third control area) in which a program and data for calculating an accessory ratio without being used for game control are stored is an accessory ratio calculation area (third storage area). In this way, the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 is designed separately from the game control code 13131 and stored in a separate area, thereby checking the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. The inspection of the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

  The first isolation area, the second isolation area, the third isolation area, and the fourth isolation area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas where access is prohibited. In the process by the CPU 4601, when the isolated area is accessed, the reset process is forcibly executed. The first isolation area, the second isolation area, the third isolation area, and the fourth isolation area are areas that are continuous with the preceding and following areas.For example, the start address of the first isolation area is next to the end address of the first control area. Address ("0A00H"), and the end address of the first isolated area is the previous address ("0AFFH") of the first data area. Further, the third isolation area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (function inspection) area. In FIG. 30, the third isolation area is handled as the game control area. You may make it treat as. Similarly, the fourth isolation area is arranged between the debug (function inspection) area and the accessory ratio calculation area. In FIG. 247, the fourth isolation area is treated as a debug (function inspection) area. It may be handled as an object ratio calculation area.

[15-3-2. RAM area]
Next, the configuration of the RAM area 5200 will be described. FIG. 248 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 5200 in the present embodiment. The RAM area 5200 corresponds to a storage area provided by the RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium whose stored contents are erased when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. The stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 5200 temporarily stores programs and data stored in the ROM area 5100 and stores data derived by executing the programs. Note that the RAM 4603 only needs to be able to read and write data, and may be a nonvolatile storage medium. When a power failure occurs, the data stored in the RAM 4603 by the backup power source can be retained for a predetermined period.

  The RAM area 5200 is assigned addresses from “3000H” to “31FFH”. The CPU 4601 can access data stored in the RAM 4603 by designating the address “3000H” to “31FFH”.

  The RAM area 5200 includes a game control work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, a save area, and an isolation area. In each area, a start address and an end address are set.

  The game control work area is a work area (temporary area) used when game control (first control) is executed. The work area for debugging (inspection function) is a work area used when program debug control (second control) is executed. The work ratio calculation work area is an area for storing data for calculating the accessory ratio and the calculated accessory ratio (such as an accessory ratio, a continuous accessory ratio, and an advantageous section accessory ratio). In addition, the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the ratio of an accessory need not necessarily have a dedicated work area, and may use a game control work area or a game control work area. A work area for debugging (inspection function) and a work area for calculating an accessory ratio may be allocated to the work area. In this case, the independence of the game control area, the debug (inspection function) control area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area decreases. However, if the program structure does not use the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work ratio calculation work area, the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for work ratio calculation need not be used. Also good.

  The evacuation area is an area for temporarily storing data for use in game control, debugging (inspection function) control, or for calculating an accessory ratio. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, the values of various CPU registers (calculation registers, flag registers, stack pointers, etc.) are copied to the save area before the predetermined process is executed. The value copied after the process is completed is returned to the various registers of the CPU. The evacuation area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation, but, as with the work area, the game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio You may divide by calculation separately. Thereby, independence can be maintained more with game control, debug (inspection function) control, and an accessory ratio calculation.

  The isolation area includes a game control work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, and an accessory ratio calculation work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, an escape area, and an accessory ratio calculation save area. And are continuous with each area (front and back areas). For example, the start address of the isolation area between the game control work area and the debug (inspection function) work area is the address next to the end address of the game control work area ("3076H"), and the end address is This is the previous address ("307FH") of the work area for debugging (inspection function). The isolated area is an area where access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute the reset process when accessed in the process by the CPU 4601.

  FIG. 248 shows the details of the work area for calculating an accessory ratio on the right side. The work ratio calculation work area may include a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to a main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored. . There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the slot machine 4000 is turned on, or is set every time the main area data is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, or the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 251). ) May be set. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined that the initialization process is normal or the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 251). Good. The check code may also be used as a power interruption flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power interruption flag is set. If a predetermined value is set for the power interruption flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

  In the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 251), it is determined whether or not the data in the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Further, the value in the main area may be copied to each backup area in the power-off process executed when the power is shut down.

  Unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digits of the address.

  FIG. 249 is a diagram showing a specific structure of the work area for storing each data in the work area for calculating an accessory ratio.

  FIG. 249 (A) shows the structure of the work area of the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 249 (A), the number of paid-out items, the number of consecutive paid-out items, the total number of paid-outs, the rate of bonuses, the rate of consecutively-played items, the number of advantageous zone games, the number of non-advantageous zone games and the advantageous zone Stores the percentage. The number of paid-out items is the number of medals to be paid out during the operation of the item (for example, during regular bonus). The number of consecutive combination winning balls is the number of medals to be paid out during continuous combination operation (for example, during a big bonus). The total number of payouts is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The ratio of items can be calculated by the number of items paid out divided by the total number of items paid out. The ratio of consecutive features can be calculated as the number of consecutive feature payouts divided by the total number of payouts. The number of advantageous section games is the number of games executed in a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a gaming state in which medals on hand such as ART (assist replay time) are difficult to decrease), and the number of non-advantageous section games is The number of games executed in a gaming state other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by the number of advantageous section games / (the number of advantageous section games + the number of non-advantageous section games).

  Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 249 (A), the number of items paid out, the number of consecutive items paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games are the total in FIG. 249 (B) described later. It corresponds to the total and is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. In addition, an accessory ratio, a continuous accessory ratio, and an advantageous section ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and numerical values up to 255 in decimal can be stored.

  The number of feature payouts, the number of consecutive feature payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are updated in the feature ratio calculation area update processing (step S1038 in FIG. 251). The consecutive character ratio and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the character ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 252).

  FIG. 249 (B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 249 (B), the number of re-games, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, the number of games, the rate of bonuses, the ratio of consecutive bonuses, the number of advantageous section games, The number of advantageous section games and the advantageous section ratio are stored. Each data storage area is constituted by a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games), and the number of games executed is predetermined. When the number reaches 400 (400 times), the write pointer for all data moves, and the storage area in which the data is updated changes. Then, after data of a predetermined number of games is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

  Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer for all data moves for every predetermined number of prize balls. Also, the read pointer moves as the write pointer moves. The read pointer indicates a storage area that is delayed by one from the write pointer. This is for calculating the ratio of the objects using data for 400 games.

  The total of each data is the total value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the total value of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is a value calculated from the total value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and is cleared to one storage area of the ring buffer in order to write new data, the accumulated value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past. The cumulative value of the ratio of consecutive items and the ratio of consecutive features is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Even if it is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the total accumulated value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

  Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 249 (B), the number of re-games, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of winnings, the number of consecutive winnings and the number of games in the ring buffer are each 2 bytes of storage area. Numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. The number of re-games, the number of winnings / payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, and the total number of games are each a 3-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal can be stored. Since the total is, for example, a total of data for 400 games × n (6000 games when n = 15), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of replays, winnings / payouts, bonuses payouts, consecutive bonuses payouts, and total number of games is a 3- or 4-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 can be stored in decimal numbers. Since the total total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. In addition, the cumulative total and the total cumulative of the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio are each a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. The number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games are each a 3-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal. The advantageous section ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

  By increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of continuous storage areas for storing time-series data ( Even if n) is reduced to 10, the same data for 6000 games can be stored. For this reason, the size of the storage area used as a ring buffer can be reduced.

  Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 249 (B), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, the rate of bonuses, the percentage of consecutive bonuses, the number of advantageous zone games, the number of non-favorable zone games, and the advantageous zone rate are This is the same as the description in FIG. The number of replays is the number of replayed games. The winning / dispensing number is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The number of games is the number of games executed. When this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

  The number of replays, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous zone games, and the number of non-advantageous zone games are updated in the bonus ratio calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 251). ), And the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 252).

  In the data structure shown in FIG. 249 (A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the work area for calculating the ratio of the features is erased in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 251). However, the data is not deleted at other times. For this reason, the data in the work area for calculating the ratio of an accessory may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.) Similarly, the total cumulative number in FIG. 249 (B) may be deleted every predetermined period.

  In addition, the data of the work area for calculating the feature ratio and the calculated feature ratio are abnormal values (for example, the ratio of the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed greatly from the previous calculated value. In this case, the abnormal value may be deleted. In addition to the abnormal value, all data in the work area for calculating the ratio of the features may be deleted. Moreover, when the data of the work area for calculating an accessory ratio or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that it is abnormal. In addition, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, and after the normal backup area data is copied to the main area, the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[15-3-3. Configuration of I / O area]
Next, the I / O area 5300 will be described. The input / output ports correspond to the I / O area 5300, and the CPU 4601 can access each input / output port by accessing the I / O area 5300. The input / output port corresponds to, for example, a port related to an input such as a switch, or a port related to an output such as a big prize opening solenoid or an LED drive signal. The input / output port settings (settings relating to use / unuse such as input settings and output settings) are set based on the set values in the parameter information setting area 5400.

[15-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Next, the parameter information setting area 5400 will be described. FIG. 250 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 5400 of the present embodiment. The parameter information setting area 5400 is an area in which various settings can be made. For example, as shown in FIG. 250, various settings include the start / end addresses of each control area and data area. In FIG. 250, illustration of the definition of the start address and end address of each of the third control area, the accessory ratio calculation work area, and the accessory ratio calculation save area is omitted, but the third control area start setting is omitted. And the third control area end setting are defined in the same manner as the start and end settings of the other control areas, and the work area start setting for the accessory ratio calculation and the work area end setting for the accessory ratio calculation are the start and end of the other work areas. The saving ratio start setting for the accessory ratio calculation and the saving area end setting for the calculation of the accessory ratio are defined in the same manner as the start and end settings of the other saving areas. An area other than the area set here is an unused (unset) area. Thus, when the CPU 4601 accesses an unused area, a reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601. In FIG. 250, continuous areas are set. However, the setting areas need not be continuous. For example, parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

  In this embodiment, when an area other than the setting area (the first to fourth isolation areas of the ROM 5100 and the isolation area of the RAM 5200) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, it is possible to perform the initial activation of the program when a reset occurs by intentionally accessing the isolated area. Since the slot machine executes the process sequentially, the program can be executed from the start process by accessing the isolation area after the last game process is completed, and the initial setting can be executed again. Thus, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during the game, the normal value can be reset by executing the initial setting again. Furthermore, in the initial setting process, the RAM clear is determined by the power interruption flag. However, it is possible to forcibly generate the RAM clear by accessing the isolation area without setting the power interruption flag. Become. On the other hand, since the game is performed in parallel with the pachinko machine described above, if the game itself is initialized, it becomes impossible to continue the game, but in the case of a slot machine, it becomes unnecessary after the game ends. Since it is necessary to initialize the information in the RAM, it is possible to eliminate the processing for initializing the information in the RAM by accessing the isolated area.

  The values set in the parameter information setting area 5400 are not sequentially set by user program processing such as initial setting of the CPU 4601. By setting the parameter area addresses and setting values in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. The parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601 before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at startup. Thereby, various parameters can be set when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Since the setting values of various parameters are information managed (determined) by the user, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[15-4. Game control]
[15-4-1. System reset start processing]
Next, the control of the slot machine of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 251 is a flowchart for explaining the procedure of the system reset activation process executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset activation process is a process executed when the slot machine 4000 is powered on or when a power failure occurs, and is activated when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

  When the system reset activation process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process for setting various parameters necessary for executing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 5400 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, or the address of each area assigned to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a set value, for example, a work area or a save area is assigned as a use area to the RAM area 5200, and an area not assigned as a use area (isolation area in FIG. 248) is set as an unused area. Assigned. The work area and the save area are divided into game control and debug (inspection function) (or other uses), respectively. Similarly to the RAM area 5200, the ROM area 5100 allocates an area for storing a program and data as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area is allocated as an unused area.

  Next, the CPU 4601 executes a security check process (step S1012). The security check process is a process for determining whether or not the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, the ROM 4602 may be replaced with an illegal ROM, so the activation of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check has elapsed (step S1014).

  Note that the processing from the power-on of the slot machine to the end of the security check (the processing up to step S1014) is not processing defined by the user program, but processing constituted by hardware in the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It has become.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes device initialization setting processing for initialization (step S1016). In the device initialization setting processing, processing such as activation setting of periodic processing (FIG. 252, timer interrupt processing) that executes predetermined processing periodically is executed. In the present embodiment, a function for preventing the user program from being rewritten after the security check, such as a random number function setting, is executed by the parameter setting process, and the device initialization setting process is performed for other functions. Running in. Thus, by dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into the parameter setting process and the device initialization setting process, the degree of freedom of game control is increased and fraud is not easily performed in the game.

  Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 or to perform a hot start to return to the game with the contents of the backed up RAM 4603.

  When performing a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is “Yes”), the CPU 4601 executes an initialization process for initializing the RAM 4603 (step S1020). The cold start is performed when the setting change operation of the pachinko machine 1 is performed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, or when the power interruption flag is not set.

  On the other hand, when performing a hot start for returning to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is “No”), the CPU 4601 executes a process for returning the game based on the backed-up contents of the RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the return processing returns to the processing interrupted at the time of power interruption. Specifically, the process is restored to the process interrupted at the time of the power interruption by any one of the processes from step S1024 to step S1042 of the system reset activation process to be described later or from step S1110 to step S1130 of the periodic process (FIG. 252).

  In the slot machine 4000 in the present embodiment, a checksum is calculated based on information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power failure occurs and when a recovery process is executed. At this time, only the game control work area excluding the debug (inspection function) work area out of all the areas to be used as work (game control work area and debug (inspection function) work area) It is good. The reason for calculating the checksum only in the game control work area is that the debug (inspection function) process is designed to maintain independence from the game control process, and that the game result may be affected. Because there is no processing, it is possible that some bugs may remain due to insufficient verification. In this case, a debug (inspection function) work area where information obtained by executing such processing is retained Setting the checksum to be calculated may impair the reliability of normal recovery from power interruption. On the other hand, since the game control process is directly related to the game, if it is mounted on a product with bugs remaining, it causes a big trouble in the market. In some cases, sales may be canceled and the product may need to be collected. In this case, it is extremely likely that the manufacturer and the hall will cause significant damage in terms of cost, etc. This is because the game control work area is more reliable than the debugging (inspection function) work area because the verification is performed on a case-by-case basis.

  When the initialization process ends or when a series of games ends, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process in order to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process of temporarily returning information in the RAM 4603 that is no longer necessary for performing a series of game controls to the initial setting state is executed.

  When the game initial setting process ends, the CPU 4601 executes an information signal 1 output process for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output processing, processing such as setting a debugging (inspection function) signal to an initial state is performed. Information signal output processing is defined as information signal 1 to N output processing, and a necessary module is called at the timing of outputting an information signal. For example, when a debug (inspection function) signal (information regarding reel rotation start, start lever ON, winning combination) is output in the game start process during the game start process, Debug (inspection function) signal (determined combination that is stopped and displayed on each reel, payout associated with determinant combination) in winning determination process when outputting (inspection function) signal (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.) At the time of outputting the number information, the output signal information (number of payout medals) regarding the payout number at the time of payout, etc., the “information signal N output process” module necessary for the processing is appropriately called and executed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process for performing a process in a previous stage in which the player operates the start lever 4210 (step S1028). Prior to operating the start lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether or not a replay execution instruction has been made, whether or not a medal has been inserted, or whether or not a medal has been settled. The setting value of the game is confirmed.

  When start lever 4210 is operated, CPU 4601 executes a game start process for starting a game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number for drawing a game is acquired, a winning combination is determined, and rotation of the reel 4301 is started. Thereafter, the CPU 4601 executes a wait process for waiting until the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed (step S1032).

  When the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed, the CPU 4601 makes it possible to accept input of the reel stop button 4211 and executes symbol stop processing for performing processing until all the reels 4301 stop (step S1034).

  Furthermore, when all the reels 4301 are stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process for determining a winning combination based on the stopped symbols (step S1036). In the winning determination process, a winning combination is determined, and if it is determined to be a winning combination, a setting corresponding to the winning combination is performed, and a setting for executing a payout process corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current gaming state, adds the number of award medals to be paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and calculates the work ratio for calculating the proportion of the bonus in the RAM area 5200 (FIG. 248 and FIG. 249) are updated (step S1038). The processing in step S1038 can be skipped when there is no prize medal to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

  Even when the slot machine 4000 detects fraud and stops the game, the bonus ratio calculation area update process (step S1038) is executed. Regardless of whether or not fraud has been detected, by executing these processes, it is possible to collect data for calculating the ratio of an accessory even during fraud notification.

  Finally, the CPU 4601 executes a game end process that performs a process at the end of the game (step S1042). In the game ending process, a payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if the prize is not won or the prize is not paid out, the process is skipped. When the game end process ends, the process returns to the game initial setting process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[15-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, a periodic process that is an interrupt process that is started at a predetermined cycle while the main loop process of the system reset initial activation process is being executed will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the regular process.

  When the periodic process is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all the registers (step S1110). At this time, the saved data is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. As described above, since the periodic process is an interrupt process that is started while the main loop process is being executed, it is possible to continue the process after returning by saving the CPU registers used in the main loop process. It is necessary to.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets a watchdog timer built in the CPU (step S1112). As a result, the watchdog timer can be periodically cleared.

  Next, the CPU 4601 executes switch input processing for sampling input signals from various switches (step S1114). Further, a game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check process, a process related to drive control of a driving body (stepping motor) that rotates the reel 4301 is performed. Specifically, stepping motor pulse output, origin position detection, and the like are performed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes timer measurement processing for updating various timers used in game control (step S1118). Since the periodic process is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic process × the set number of times.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not the display switch 1318 is operated. If the display switch 1318 is operated, the CPU 4601 calls an accessory ratio calculation / display process and stores the medal stored in the accessory ratio calculation work area. The bonus rate is calculated with reference to the number of payouts. The calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The accessory ratio calculation / display process is the same as the accessory ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the specific method for calculating the accessory ratio and the specific display method for the accessory ratio are the same as those described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, it is possible to check the accessory ratio (the gambling nature of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data.

  Note that, when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (a combination ratio, a continuous combination ratio, a total, and a total total) may be calculated, but each time the display switch 1318 is operated, a display is performed. Only calculated values may be calculated. Further, it is also possible to calculate the accessory ratio regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and display the calculated accessory ratio on the accessory ratio display 1317 when the display switch 1318 is operated.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes LED output processing for controlling the LEDs (step S1120). The control target LEDs are those controlled by the main board 4600, for example, a payout number display LED 4562. Moreover, the data for displaying an accessory ratio on LED are output.

  The CPU 4601 executes information output processing for outputting a signal to the external relay terminal board 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to the hall computer 4800 via the external relay terminal plate 4131. Furthermore, CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to effect control board 4700 (step S1124).

  The CPU 4601 executes a random number update process for updating a random number used in the game (step S1126). In the random number update process, update of the random number to be generated by the software process is executed. Here, in addition to a random number generated only by software, a soft random number update process built in the CPU is executed. In the soft random number built in the CPU, the count itself is executed by hardware, but the trigger for the update is determined by this processing. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce program processing related to random number update.

  When the random number update process ends, the CPU 4601 performs a process for returning to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Further, the execution of the interrupt is permitted (step S1130). During execution of periodic processing (timer interrupt processing), even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is pending, and the timer interrupt processing executed immediately before has ended normally and the interrupt has been permitted. It is supposed to be executed. For this reason, the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is not executed in a multiple manner.

[15-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Subsequently, an information signal output process executed in a system reset activation process or the like will be described. The information signal output process is provided for each function (1 to N) of the output signal, and is constituted by a plurality of modules. For example, “for condition device output signal (signal output related to condition device operation)” “lottery determination process (signal output related to lottery)”. Although the output signals are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so the description of each flow is omitted. FIG. 253 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the information signal output process of the present embodiment.

  When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all the registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the value set in the register from being destroyed by executing the information signal output process (to ensure that the value is restored even if it is destroyed), and the values of all registers are saved in the stack area. It is supposed to let you. Further, the stack area used at this time is allocated to a debug (inspection function) save area, and is assigned to a different area separated from the game control save area.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires information to be referred to in order to select (ON / OFF) the information signal to be output (debugging (inspection function) signal) from the RAM 4603 (step S1212). In each information signal output process, only information stored in the RAM 4603 is referred to, and data is not written to the RAM 4603 within the process. If writing is necessary, information is output to a work area for debugging (inspection function). A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured not to be used (including reference) in processes other than the information signal output process. As a result, the independence from the other game control programs can be ensured without using a common area even if the program for executing the information signal output process is arranged at a different location from the other game control programs. .

  Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Further, it waits until an information signal output time, which is a time for maintaining the output signal, has elapsed (step S1218). The information signal output time is determined in advance, and the debugging (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the transmission destination by setting a sufficient time. Thereafter, the values of all the registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process ends.

  As described above, the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output through the processing from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processing from step S1210 to step S1220 is executed for the output debug (inspection function) signal. Different types and numbers of signals are output for each function (1 to N) of the output signal. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of information signal output processes are defined for each function. However, a table defining output signals corresponding to functions is stored in the debug (inspection function) area. Information signal output processing may be made common by preparing in two data areas and selecting and outputting a signal corresponding to a function designated by the caller.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a program (signal output program) for executing an information signal output process or the like is stored in an area clearly distinguished from an area for storing a game control program (game control area). By providing an area (debug (inspection function) area), a program intended for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged independently. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspecting function) of the pachinko machine 1, and is a process that does not affect the game result and does not impair the fairness of the game. For other purposes (for example, to arrange a game control program or general-purpose program to compensate for the lack of capacity in the game control area), the program should not be placed in the debug (inspection function) area. It has become.

  The signal output program is executed after being statically called from the game control program, and at this time, the address of the call destination is specified. Furthermore, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and when called, protects all registers used in the game control area. In addition, as described above, when the program processing of the game control area is being executed, access to the debugging (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and the debugging (inspection function) area is executed. In such a case, only reference to the game control work area is permitted, and writing is prohibited. In addition, it is also prohibited to call a module (including a subroutine) arranged in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area. The program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area including the signal output program is always called in a subroutine format, and after the subroutine ends, it returns immediately after the call by the return instruction. The modules stored in the debugging (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the game control program is not affected by the execution of the signal output program (the program arranged in the debugging (inspection function) area).

  In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (game control work area, work ratio calculation work area) may be the same as steps S18 to S26 of FIG. 21 of the pachinko machine 1 embodiment. The slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and when the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the gaming state backup data is erased.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects described in the example of the pachinko machine described above, it is possible to accurately calculate the ratio of the objects of the operating slot machine, and to improve the gambling characteristics of the operating gaming machine. I can confirm.

  Although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such specific configurations, and various modifications and equivalents within the spirit of the appended claims Includes configuration.

  Among the inventions disclosed in this specification, the following are typical examples of aspects of the invention other than those described in the claims.

(0) A gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
A main controller that executes a program for controlling the progress of the game;
An accessory ratio display for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The accessory ratio indicator has a display device and a driver circuit that drives the display device,
The main controller is
Sending data for display on the accessory ratio indicator to the driver circuit by serial communication,
The game according to any of the preceding items, wherein after the power is turned on, a synchronization method, a communication rate, a parity, and a stop bit are used for serial communication with the driver circuit. Machine.

  (1) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than communication between the main control device and a peripheral control device.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress an inaccurate display of the accessory ratio due to garbled data during communication.

(2) The main controller is
It has a work RAM that holds data related to the progress of the game and data for calculating the ratio of items even while the power is shut off,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the setting for the serial communication is executed after clearing the work RAM.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent display of an erroneous combination ratio by using data in the RAM having an incorrect content.

(3) The main controller is
Has the function of transmitting data stored in the FIFO buffer by serial communication,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein after the power is turned on, a data storage amount for determining a timing of sending data from the FIFO buffer is set.

  Thereby, data can be transmitted from the FIFO buffer with an arbitrary number of bits.

(4) A gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
A main controller that executes a program for controlling the progress of the game;
An accessory ratio display for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The accessory ratio indicator has a display device and a driver circuit that drives the display device,
The main controller, the display device, and the driver are configured such that the length of the signal line that connects the main controller and the driver circuit is longer than the length of the signal line that connects the driver circuit and the display device. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein a circuit is arranged.

  By making the signal line connecting the main control unit and the driver circuit long, it is easy to find unauthorized modifications without arranging parts around the main control unit, and the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. Is made shorter than the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced, and the ratio of objects can be displayed more accurately.

  (5) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are accommodated in one case.

  As a result, it is possible to easily find unauthorized modification without disposing other parts around the main controller, and to reduce the influence of noise.

  (6) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are arranged on a single printed circuit board.

  As a result, it is possible to easily find an unauthorized modification without disposing other parts on the printed circuit board around the main controller, and to reduce the influence of noise.

  (7) The gaming machine machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio indicator is configured to accommodate the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

  As a result, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be reduced. In addition, a signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

  (8) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein a guard pattern (a ground pattern or a power supply pattern) is provided along a signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit.

  As a result, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit can be reduced.

  (9) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display direction of the accessory ratio display is the same as the display direction of the model number on the surface of the main controller.

  Accordingly, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the main control device is replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an excessive posture.

(10) The driver circuit does not display characters and numbers on the display device, and has a standby mode for reducing power consumption,
The game according to any of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the gaming machine ratio is in a closed state where the accessory ratio indicator cannot be visually recognized. Machine.

  This can prevent useless power consumption of the gaming machine when the display of the accessory ratio is unnecessary.

(11) A gaming machine that provides a player with a prize ball as a game value by winning a game ball launched toward a game area into a predetermined winning slot,
A main controller that controls the progress of the game;
With an accessory ratio indicator that displays information about prize balls,
The prize opening includes a general prize opening where the shape of the entrance does not change depending on the gaming state, and an electric prize opening where the entrance opens or expands depending on the gaming state,
The main control device uses the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player as a trigger for at least the number of first prize balls to be paid out when a prize is awarded to the general prize opening and a prize to the electric prize slot. Count separately from the number of second prize balls to be paid out,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio display unit displays information relating to a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main controller stores the counted number of prize balls in a memory,
The memory stores a check code for verifying the number of stored prize balls,
The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the main control device erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory when the check code is not normal.

  Thereby, an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory can be detected, and display of an incorrect combination ratio (ratio between the number of first prize balls and the number of second prize balls) can be suppressed.

(13) The main control device
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when the power is shut off,
Storing game control data in the first backup area;
Store the data of the number of prize balls for calculating the ratio of bonuses in the second backup area,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

  As a result, when at least one of the game control data and the winning ball number data for calculating the ratio of the winning combination is normal, only the abnormal data can be erased and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main control device
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when the power is shut off,
Storing game control data in the first backup area;
Store the data of the number of prize balls for calculating the ratio of bonuses in the second backup area,
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the gaming machine is turned on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. The gaming machine according to the item.

  If the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the bonus ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be deleted at an arbitrary timing. For this reason, the backed-up character ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, and the erase of the character ratio calculation / display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall staff is prevented. , It is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the ratio of the accessory is high. For this reason, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been remodeled to a state in which the accessory ratio is high, and to prevent concealment in a state in which the accessory ratio is high.

(15A) a gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates information relating to a gaming value to be displayed on the display means in response to input / output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information on the game value is a base,
The control means includes
Controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a lot of game values and a normal game state other than the special game state,
The number of winning balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state is the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the gaming area, the game discharged from the gaming machine) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing by the number of balls, the sum of the number of gaming balls that have passed through the out mouth and the number of winning balls).

  (15C) The control means receives, as the predetermined signal, a timing at which a winning detection signal, a winning ball payout command reception confirmation signal or a winning ball payout completion signal is received, The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of prize balls used for calculation of a base for display on the display means is updated at a timing at which a prize ball payout command for instructing a payout is transmitted.

(15D) The control means includes
Stores the total number of winning balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, upon receiving a signal detecting the winning of the game ball to the winning opening provided in the gaming area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Update the total number of winning balls using the calculated number of winning balls,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of winning balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15E) with payout control means for controlling payout of prize balls to the player,
The control means includes
Stores the total number of winning balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected at a winning opening provided in the gaming area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Updating the total number of winning balls using the number of winning balls instructed to the payout control means;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of winning balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15F) with payout control means for controlling payout of prize balls to the player,
The control means includes
Stores the total number of winning balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected at a winning opening provided in the gaming area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Receiving confirmation of the instruction from the payout control means,
Updating the total number of winning balls using the number of winning balls corresponding to the instruction that received the receipt confirmation;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of winning balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15G) with payout control means for controlling payout of prize balls to the player,
The control means includes
Stores the total number of winning balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected at a winning opening provided in the gaming area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Receiving from the payout control means completion of the payout of the prize ball according to the instruction;
Updating the total number of winning balls using the number of winning balls corresponding to the instruction received completion of the payout,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of winning balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

  (15H) The control means is triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal, information update means for updating information relating to the game value to be displayed on the display means, and information relating to the updated game value is indicated in the display means. The game machine according to any one of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means that can process (statistical processing) and display the result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

  According to the inventions 15A to 15H, it is possible to accurately execute processing relating to acquisition of game media.

(16A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates information relating to a game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to a game condition satisfying a predetermined condition.

(16B) The information on the game value is a base,
The control means includes
Controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a lot of game values and a normal game state other than the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated at a timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(16C) The control means includes:
Stores the total number of winning balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected at a winning opening provided in the gaming area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated and stored in a buffer,
The predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total number of winning balls at a predetermined timing, and the total number of winning balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the game area) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing by the number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming machine, the sum of the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls).

(16D) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of winning balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer, and adds the predetermined number to the total number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the predetermined number is moved to a number.

  (16E) The control means, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal, updates information relating to the game value to be displayed on the display means, and displays the information relating to the updated game value to the display means. The game machine according to any one of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means that can process (statistical processing) and display the result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

  According to the inventions of 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from game characteristics while maintaining game characteristics within the regular restrictions of the main control device.

(17A) A gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The control means includes
Count the number of balls consumed by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein information relating to a gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated in association with the counted number of balls consumed satisfying a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means includes:
Controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a lot of game values and a normal game state other than the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein information regarding the gaming value is calculated at a timing when the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

  (17C) The control means may calculate the number of consumed balls based on the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls and winning balls passed through the outlet. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the game machine is counted.

(17D) The information on the game value is a base,
The control means includes
Remembers the total number of outballs used to calculate the base,
Calculate the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state, store in a buffer,
The base is calculated by moving a predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of out balls at a predetermined timing, and dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the total number of out balls. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that:

(17E) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total out-ball number to thereby add a total out-ball from the buffer. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein a predetermined number is moved to the number.

(17F) The control means
The special symbol variation display game for deriving the special gaming state is executed in response to winning at the starting winning opening,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein when the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is an upper limit value, the winning ball number is not counted but the number of winning balls is counted.

  (17G) The control means is triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal, information update means for updating information relating to a game value to be displayed on the display means, and information relating to the updated game value is indicated in the display means The game machine according to any one of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means that can process (statistical processing) and display the result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

  According to the inventions 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from game characteristics while maintaining game characteristics.

(18A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information about the assigned game value;
A main body frame to which a game board having a game area in which the game is performed is detachably attached;
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the display means displays information related to the gaming value even when the main body frame is closed.

(18B) The main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to an island facility of a game arcade,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine that is visible when the main body frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the body frame,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided in a case of the control means so as to be visible from the back side of the gaming machine.

  According to the inventions 18A to 18C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in sales of halls.

(19A)
A gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The control means includes
Information updating means for updating information relating to a game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to satisfying a predetermined condition in the game;
Game execution means for performing a special symbol variation display game triggered by winning at the start winning opening,
In each of the preceding paragraphs, the game value is updated even when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the special symbol variation display game is being played by the game execution means. The gaming machine described.

(19B) The information on the game value is a base,
The control means, as the predetermined condition, at the timing of any one of detection of winning to a winning opening, transmission of a prize ball payout command, reception confirmation of a prize ball payout command, and reception of a prize ball payout completion signal The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of prize balls used to calculate a base for display on the display means is updated.

  According to the inventions of 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which sufficient countermeasures against fraud are taken even during a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to a player,
Main control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Production control means for controlling the production of the special symbol variation display game that is triggered by winning at the start opening,
Game value information display means for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The production control means includes
Control the transition to the low power mode where the power consumption of the gaming machine is reduced from the normal mode,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the display mode is not changed so that power consumption of the gaming value information display means is reduced during the low power mode.

(20B) An effect display means configured to display an effect of the special symbol variation display game and configured by a liquid crystal display means having a backlight,
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value information display means is configured by a light emitting diode and does not reduce luminance even during the low power mode.

(20C) provided with an effect display means for displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game;
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is consumed.
The game value information display means does not change the display mode so as to reduce power consumption even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is consumed. The gaming machine described in the preceding sections.

  According to the inventions 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a substantial energy saving mode.

(21A) A gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The control means includes
A game state control means for controlling a normal game state and any one of a plurality of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state;
The information regarding the gaming value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of winning balls in the normal gaming state by the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state. Game machines.

  (21B) The control means, according to any of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, and the sum of the number of game balls and winning balls passed through the out mouth, The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state is counted.

(21C) The control means
When the special symbol variation display game is a big hit, the advantageous gaming state is derived, and control is performed so that the player can open a winning opening from which a lot of gaming values can be obtained,
The advantageous game state is from the jackpot determination by the special symbol variation display game to the start of the next special symbol variation display game, and the number of winning balls and the number of consumed balls are excluded from the calculation of the information on the game value. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized by:

(21D) The control means includes
In the advantageous gaming state, the player controls to open a winning opening that can acquire a lot of gaming values,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the number of game balls won in the winning area is excluded from the number of game balls launched in the game area, and the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state is counted.

  According to the inventions 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output outside the gaming machine.

(22A) A gaming machine that grants a game ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information on the given game ball,
In the game area where the launched game ball rolls, there is a trigger for deriving a special game state that facilitates acquisition of a large amount of game balls, and a trigger for deriving the open state from the closed state of the start port There is at least a passage opening,
The control means includes
It is possible to control the special game state that is easy to derive the open state of the start port,
The number of prize balls awarded to the player is excluded by excluding the number of prize balls given when the player is controlled to the special game state or the special game state and the number of balls consumed by the player. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein information relating to the gaming ball is calculated and updated by dividing by a number of consumed balls consumed by the person.

  (22B) The control means, according to any of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, and the sum of the number of game balls and winning balls passed through the out mouth, The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the number of balls in the normal state is counted.

  (22C) The control means sets the expanded state from the hit determination by the normal symbol variation display game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game, and determines the number of winning balls and the number of consumed balls related to the game ball. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the gaming machine is excluded from calculation of information.

  (22D) The control means is configured to count the number of balls consumed in the normal state by excluding the number of game balls won in the start port from the number of game balls launched into the game area. The gaming machine described in each section.

  According to the inventions 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output outside the gaming machine.

(23A) a launcher that is operable by the player and that launches a game ball toward the game area;
A prize ball granting means for granting a predetermined number of prize balls when the game ball is detected at a winning opening provided in the game area;
Main control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give an advantageous gaming state to the player when the game ball is detected at a predetermined winning port among the winning ports;
Based on information transmitted from the main control means, a peripheral control means for determining an effect to appear, and a gaming machine comprising:
The main control means has an information update means capable of updating information about the given game ball to either increase or decrease,
The first state where the information related to the given game ball can be updated by the information update means, and the information update means can be used to update the information related to the given game ball while the information update means can update the information. There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information on the given game ball is updated to increase compared to the first state is suppressed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect indicating that the transition from the first state to the second state has occurred.

(23B) The information on the game value is a base,
The main control means includes
Controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a lot of game values and a normal game state other than the special game state,
The base is calculated by dividing the number of winning balls in the normal gaming state by the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect with the timing at which the base is likely to decrease as the second state.

(23C) The main control means includes:
Write information about the game ball to the storage area at a predetermined time, every predetermined number of winning balls or every predetermined number of consumed balls,
Compare the information about the game sphere written in the storage area with the information about the game sphere stored in the storage area before the write, determine the increase or decrease of the information about the game sphere,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase / decrease.

  According to the invention of 23A to 23C, even if the state where the variable display game is interrupted continues for a long time, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(24A) A gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for repeatedly executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information about the assigned game value;
Prize ball number acquisition means for acquiring the number of prize balls that the player acquires at a predetermined timing;
Consumption ball detecting means for detecting the consumption ball consumed by the player,
The control means includes
When the predetermined timing and the consumption ball detection by the consumption ball number detecting means occur within the same repetition, the award ball number acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected consumption ball number are within the same repetition. Count with
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein information relating to the gaming value is calculated using the counted number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed.

(24B) The information on the game value is a base,
The control means includes
Controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a lot of game values and a normal game state other than the special game state,
Counting the total number of winning balls in the normal gaming state and the number of gaming balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state within the same repetition,
The game according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the game value information is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls in the normal gaming state by the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state. Machine.

  According to the inventions of 24A to 24B, information on the number of game media acquired by the player can be quickly displayed.

(25A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information about the assigned game value;
Out-port detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through an out-port provided in the lower part of the game area;
A winning ball detecting means for detecting a winning ball to a predetermined winning opening;
The control means includes
It has a gaming state control means for controlling to any gaming state among at least a normal gaming state and a special gaming state in which a player can acquire more gaming value than the normal gaming state,
Count the number of game balls that have passed through the out port from the output of the out port detection means,
Count the number of winning balls from the output of the winning ball detection means,
Count the number of balls consumed by the player by the sum of the number of game balls that have passed the counted out mouth and the number of winning balls,
The information relating to the gaming value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state at a predetermined timing by the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state. The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs.

(25B) A gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information about the assigned game value;
Detecting means for counting the number of game balls launched into the game area,
The control means includes
It has a gaming state control means for controlling to any gaming state among at least a normal gaming state and a special gaming state in which a player can acquire more gaming value than the normal gaming state,
Counting the number of game balls launched into the game area from the output of the detection means, counting the consumed game balls consumed by the player,
The information relating to the gaming value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state at a predetermined timing by the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state. The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs.

(25C) a gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information about the assigned game value;
Detecting means for counting the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine,
The control means includes
It has a gaming state control means for controlling to any gaming state among at least a normal gaming state and a special gaming state in which a player can acquire more gaming value than the normal gaming state,
Count the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine from the output of the detection means, count the number of consumption balls consumed by the player,
The information relating to the gaming value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state at a predetermined timing by the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state. The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs.

  According to the inventions 25A to 25C, it is possible to accurately execute processing relating to acquisition of game media.

(26A) a gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The control means includes
A gaming state control means for controlling to any gaming state among at least a normal gaming state and a special gaming state in which a player can acquire more gaming value than the normal gaming state;
Prize ball number counting means for counting the number of prize balls excluding the number of prize balls given when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area wins a prize winning opening,
Consuming ball number counting means for counting the number of consumed balls consumed by the player excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates information relating to the gaming value by using the counted number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed.

(26B) The information about the game value is a base,
Excluding the number of prize balls given when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area wins a prize-winning entrance and counting the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state;
Excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area, counting the number of consumption balls in the normal game state,
The control means calculates the information related to the gaming value by dividing the counted number of winning balls in the normal gaming state by the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state. Game machines.

  (26C) The control means detects a passage of a game ball in a gate portion provided on the right side of the game area or a winning in a winning opening provided on the right side of the game area for a predetermined period, The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the gaming machine is excluded from counting the number of winning balls and the number of balls consumed.

  (26D) The control means determines the predetermined period according to any one of the elapse of a predetermined time from the last detection, the time for consuming a predetermined number of game balls, or the time for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized by:

  (26E) The control means excludes the passing ball number of the gate portion provided on the right side of the gaming area and the winning ball number to the winning opening provided on the right side of the gaming area, The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the number of balls consumed is counted.

  According to the inventions 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output outside the gaming machine.

(27A) A gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game;
First data setting means for setting first data according to a game result;
Second data setting means for setting second data not depending on the result of the game;
Third data setting means for setting third data according to the result of the game;
First conversion means for obtaining first conversion data from the first data set by the first data setting means and the second data set by the second data setting means;
Second conversion means for obtaining second conversion data from the first conversion data obtained by the first conversion means and the third data set by the third data setting means;
A gaming machine comprising display means for displaying the second conversion data without displaying the first conversion data.

  (27B) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the display means does not display the second conversion data when the second conversion data is a numerical value within a predetermined range.

  (27C) The first conversion means is a multiplication means, and obtains first conversion data by multiplying the first data and the second data at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in the preceding sections.

  (27D) The second conversion means is a division means, and obtains second conversion data by dividing the first conversion data by the third data at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs.

(27E) The first data is a game value (for example, the number of prize balls) given to the player,
The third data is a game value (for example, the number of out balls) consumed by the player,
The second conversion means obtains information about the assigned game value as second conversion data by dividing the first conversion data by the third data,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the display unit displays information (for example, a base) related to a gaming value obtained by the second conversion unit.

  According to the inventions of 27A to 27E, information relating to game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, the base value necessary for evaluating the gaming machine can be accurately displayed in real time. Further, by using the second conversion means (division means), information regarding the game value (for example, base value) can be accurately displayed in real time while suppressing an increase in processing load on the control means.

(28A) a gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a periodic process for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information about the assigned game value;
Conversion means for calculating information relating to the gaming value,
The control means includes
Passing an argument to the conversion means at a predetermined timing, obtaining the result converted by the conversion means based on the argument from the conversion means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the process of passing the argument and the process of obtaining the result of the conversion can be executed within one periodic process.

(28B) The conversion means includes:
An arithmetic circuit that performs a division operation.
A divisor register to which a divisor is input; a dividend register to which a dividend is input; and a result register for outputting a quotient of a division operation;
The control means includes
Write arguments to the divisor register and the dividend register,
After a predetermined time has elapsed since the argument was written, the quotient is read from the result register,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the process of writing an argument to the divisor register and the dividend register is executed before the predetermined time from the end of the repeatedly executed program.

(28C) a prize game medium number counting means for counting game media to be given to a player in a predetermined gaming state;
Consuming game media number counting means for counting the game media consumed by the player in the predetermined game state;
The control means includes
Write a value obtained by multiplying the number of prize game media counted by the prize game media number counting means to the dividend register by 100,
Write the number of consumed game media counted by the consumed game media number counting means to the divisor dista,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein a base value is read from the result register.

  According to the inventions of 28A to 28C, information relating to game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing an argument to the conversion circuit and the process of obtaining the conversion result from the conversion circuit are executed in one repetitive process (timer interrupt process), control complexity can be suppressed.

(29A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to a player,
A winning entrance where game balls can be won,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information about the assigned game value;
Consumption ball counting means for counting the consumption balls consumed by the player;
A prize ball counting means for counting prize balls to be given to the player,
At least one of the winning openings is a specific winning opening that can be switched between an open state in which winning of a game ball is easy and a closed state in which winning is difficult,
The control means includes
Based on the counted number of consumption balls and the number of winning balls, update information on the game value to be displayed on the display means,
If a winning to the specific winning opening is detected even though the specific winning opening is in the closed state, it is determined that the winning is abnormal. The game machine is characterized in that information relating to a gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29B) At least one of the winning awards is a starting award that serves as an opportunity to derive a special gaming state that facilitates the acquisition of a large amount of game balls,
The control means determines that the winning prize is abnormal when a winning to the starting prize opening is detected in a state where the starting prize opening is closed, and excludes the number of winning balls for the winning from the number of consumed balls. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein information relating to a gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29C) At least one of the winning openings is a large winning opening that is opened in a special gaming state,
The control means determines that the winning prize is abnormal when a winning to the grand winning opening is detected in the closed state of the grand winning opening, and excludes the number of winning balls for the winning from the number of consumed balls. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein information relating to a gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29D) having a consumption ball detecting means for detecting the consumption ball consumed by the player;
Each of the consumption ball counting means subtracts the number of winning balls for the winning abnormality from the number of consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detecting means, and counts the consumption balls consumed by the player. The gaming machine according to the item.

(29E) The control means stores the total number of balls used for calculation of information relating to the game value,
The consumption ball counting means adds the number of consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detection means to the total consumption ball number, subtracts the number of winning balls for the winning abnormality from the total consumption ball number, The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the game machine is counted.

(29F) The control means stores the total number of consumed balls used for calculating the information related to the game value,
The consumption ball counting means adds the value obtained by subtracting the consumption ball number related to the winning abnormality from the consumption ball number detected by the consumption ball number detection means to the total consumption ball number, and counts the consumption ball. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized by

(29G) The winning opening can be switched between an open state in which game balls can be easily won and a closed state in which winning is difficult,
In the closed state, the control means determines that a winning ball is not paid out in relation to the winning and if the winning ball is not paid out in relation to the winning, it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and the number of winning balls for the winning is determined. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein information relating to a gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated by being excluded from the number of balls consumed.

  (29H) When the winning abnormality at the winning opening is detected a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the control means excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumed balls and displays it on the display means The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein information relating to a gaming value for playing is updated.

  According to the inventions 29A to 29H, it is possible to display information relating to game results accurately and quickly. In particular, it is possible to accurately display in real time information relating to game value (for example, a base value) by excluding the number of winning balls related to winning abnormality from the number of out balls.

(30) A gaming machine that grants game media to a player as a prize,
A gaming area where a plurality of winning gates are arranged;
A prize granting means for granting a predetermined prize in advance among any of a plurality of prizes when a game medium is detected at each prize opening;
Arithmetic processing means for executing a predetermined arithmetic processing using the number of game media flowing into the game area and the number of game media given as a prize given by the prize giving means;
Processing means for processing the result of the arithmetic processing executed by the arithmetic processing means;
Display means for displaying the result of the arithmetic processing processed by the processing means on a predetermined display device,
When a specific prize among the plurality of prizes is generated in the game, the prize giving means gives the specific prize, and the display means displays the result of the arithmetic processing so as not to change. Gaming machine.

  According to the thirty inventions, information relating to game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, when a specific prize is generated, a prize (for example, a prize ball that is paid out when a prize is awarded to a prize-winning slot that receives a high-value prize (such as a general prize-winning slot or a large prize-winning slot with a large number of prize balls)). Even if it is given, the result of the calculation process (calculated base value) can be displayed so that it does not change, and it is easy to determine whether the gaming machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether it is according to the set output rate) it can.

(31A) A game comprising: main control means including lottery means for executing a lottery for winning when a specific condition is satisfied; and peripheral control means for controlling a predetermined effect based on a signal from the main control means Machine,
The peripheral control means includes
Temporary storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means;
Information storage means updated with information stored in the temporary storage means;
A first information output unit that outputs at least part of the information stored in the information storage unit to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine characterized in that a status history of the gaming machine can be grasped.

(31B) Provided with a general winning opening that allows a game ball launched into the game area to win even if it is not in a special gaming state,
The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal indicating a winning to the general winning opening,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the first information output means outputs information related to winning a prize to the general winning opening when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(31C) When a predetermined condition is satisfied, external output means for outputting information based on the predetermined condition toward the external terminal board;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, information storage means for storing more detailed information than information output toward the external terminal board;
The game machine according to any one of the preceding items, comprising information presenting means for presenting information stored by the information storage means.

(31D) comprising first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine;
The peripheral control means includes
Storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means;
The game according to any one of the preceding items, further comprising limited initialization means that does not initialize a part of the information stored in the storage means even when initialized by the first initialization means. Machine.

(31E) first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine;
Second initialization means for initializing the stored contents of the information storage means,
The information storage means can retain the stored content even when the gaming machine is powered off,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the first initialization unit does not initialize the storage content of the information storage unit, but initializes the storage content of the temporary storage unit.

  (31F) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means stores the type of signal received from the main control means and the time when the signal is received in the information storage means.

(31G) The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal related to a counting event counted as the game progresses, and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine. Including
The peripheral control means includes
Temporary storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means;
Information storage means updated with information stored in the temporary storage means;
First information output means for outputting at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
The peripheral control means includes
Counting the counting event based on the signal received from the main control means, storing the counting result in the temporary storage means,
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control unit, the state change event is stored in the information storage unit, and the count result of the count event stored in the temporary storage unit is stored in the information storage unit. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein:

(31H) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes
Count the signal related to the counting event received from the main control means, store in the temporary storage means,
When the signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the type of the signal related to the state change event, the time when the signal is received, and the information storage means are stored, and the counting event stored in the temporary storage means The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means is added to the counting result.

(31I) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes
Count the signal related to the counting event received from the main control means, store in the temporary storage means,
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control unit, the count result of the count event stored in the information storage unit is added to the count result of the count event stored in the temporary storage unit. The gaming machine described in the preceding sections.

  According to the invention of 31A to 31I, it is possible to know the background of the transition of the ball. In particular, according to the inventions of 31D and 31E, information regarding games can be stored appropriately.

(32) A gaming machine that grants a prize gaming medium as a gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing periodic processing for the progress of the game;
Consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player;
Award game medium counting means for counting award game media to be given to the player;
A calculating means for calculating information relating to a given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and award game media;
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information on a game including a variable display of symbols;
A second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information on the given game value,
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. And
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. And
The first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the third terminal of the second light emitting element group are connected to one output driving means,
Although the control means outputs a selection signal at a common timing to the first terminal and the third terminal, at least one of the first light emitting element groups during the period of outputting the selection signal. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting one light emitting element, and a signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group; Is output at different timings to display-control the first light-emitting element group and the second light-emitting element group within one periodical process.

  According to the thirty-second invention, a circuit for displaying information relating to a game value to be given (for example, a base value or an accessory ratio) can be simply configured, and information relating to a game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(33) A gaming machine that grants a prize gaming medium as a gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing periodic processing for the progress of the game;
Consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player;
Award game medium counting means for counting award game media to be given to the player;
A calculating means for calculating information relating to a given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and award game media;
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information on a game including a variable display of symbols;
A second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information on the given game value,
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. And
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. And
In response to the selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the selection signal output to the first terminal, at least one light emitting element of the first light emitting element group is selected. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting, a selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light emitting element group, and a selection signal output to the third terminal The signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals to turn on at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group corresponding to the second light emitting element group is output within the same periodic process, Processing for outputting a selection signal output to one terminal and signals output to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal, a selection signal output to the third terminal, and the selection signal Outputs the signals output to the corresponding fourth terminals That process and, depending on different processing of the same periodical in the process, game machine and outputs a signal at different timings in the periodic processing.

  According to the thirty-third invention, it is possible to simply configure a circuit for displaying information related to a game value to be given. For this reason, the information regarding game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(34A) a gaming machine that grants a prize gaming medium as a gaming value to a player,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player;
Award game medium counting means for counting award game media to be given to the player;
A calculating means for calculating information relating to a given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and award game media;
Calculation result display means for displaying information on the game value calculated by the calculation means;
The control means includes
A control device for executing processing for game control;
Timing means for generating a signal (for example, a clock signal or a reset signal) for determining the operation timing of the control device;
Controlled by the control device, and has at least output drive means for outputting a control signal for displaying on the calculation result display means,
In the board on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction as viewed from the control device, and the output driving means and the calculation result display means are arranged in another direction different from the one direction. A gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged apart from the timing means.

  (34B) A connection line between the control device and the timing means and a connection line between the control device and the output driving means are arranged on the substrate so as not to cross each other. The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph.

(34C) The timing means includes a reset circuit that generates a reset signal input to the control device, and an oscillation circuit that generates a clock signal input to the control device,
On the printed circuit board on which the control means is realized, the reset circuit is arranged in the same direction as the oscillation circuit from the processor, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged apart from the reset circuit and the oscillation circuit. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein:

  According to the inventions of 34A to 34C, interference between a signal relating to game control and a signal for displaying information relating to the game can be suppressed. For this reason, the influence on game control can be suppressed and the information regarding game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(35A) a gaming machine that grants a prize game medium as a gaming value to a player,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player;
Award game medium counting means for counting award game media to be given to the player;
A calculating means for calculating information relating to a given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and award game media;
Display means that is controlled by the control means and displays information relating to the gaming value;
The control means includes
A control device for executing processing for game control;
A memory that is accessed by the control device during execution of the process and stores at least information about the gaming value;
The gaming machine is provided with input means for instructing initialization of the memory,
The control means includes
A first initialization unit for determining whether or not the data stored in the memory is normal at a predetermined timing and initializing a predetermined first area of the memory when it is determined that the data is abnormal; ,
When the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the input means is operated, and when it is determined that the input means is operated, a second initialization means for initializing a predetermined second area of the memory; Have
The first area that is initialized by the first initialization means and the second area that is initialized by the second initialization means are the second initial value also by the first initialization means. Including overlapping areas that are also initialized in common by the conversion means,
At least the first region includes a region that does not overlap with the second region;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information related to the gaming value is stored in the first area other than the overlapping area.

(35B) In the first area, data used for calculation of information related to the gaming value is stored,
The second area stores data used for controlling the progress of the game,
The control means includes
If it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area is initialized,
If it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the second area is initialized,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input means is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35C) In the first area, data used for calculation of information related to the gaming value is stored,
The second area stores data used for controlling the progress of the game,
The control means includes
If it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized,
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input means is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

  (35D) Each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time a periodic process repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals is executed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  (35E) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal every time the information relating to the gaming value is calculated. .

  (35F) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal when the gaming machine is turned on.

  According to the inventions of 35A to 35F, it is possible to appropriately control the memory that stores information (base value and bonus rate) related to the game value to be given. For this reason, the information regarding a game can be displayed correctly and rapidly.

(36A) A gaming machine that grants a prize game medium as a gaming value to a player,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player;
Award game medium counting means for counting award game media to be given to the player;
A calculating means for calculating information relating to a given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and award game media;
Display means for displaying information relating to the gaming value;
An electric accessory operated by the control means,
In a specific condition, when a plurality of game media wins during the operation of the electric accessory triggered by one hit, among the winning game media, some of the game media include information on the game value. A gaming machine that is used for calculation and is not used for calculation of information relating to the gaming value for other gaming media, but can be a trigger for a variable display game for any gaming media.

(36B) The control means includes:
When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a variable display game is executed,
According to the result of the variable display game, a first gaming state (short time, high probability state, jackpot, etc.) advantageous to the player, and a second gaming state (normal state) less advantageous than the first gaming state. And control to either
When a plurality of game media wins during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won in the second game state is used for calculating information related to the game value, and the first game The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein a gaming medium won in a state is not used for calculation of information relating to the gaming value, but any gaming medium can trigger a variable display game.

(36C) The control means includes
Detects multiple types of errors that occur in gaming machines,
When a plurality of game media wins during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won in a state where the predetermined type of error is detected are used for calculation of information related to the game value. The game media won in a state where the error of the predetermined type has not been detected is used to calculate the information related to the game value, but any game media can be a trigger for the variable display game. The gaming machine described in the preceding sections.

  According to the inventions of 36A to 36C, it is possible to quickly and accurately display information related to the game value because the game medium is used for calculation of information related to the game value according to the state of the gaming machine.

(37A) A gaming machine including an outer frame, a main body frame that is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, and on which a game board is provided, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to the game. And
Setting change is difficult when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame, compared to when the main body frame is in an open state with respect to the outer frame. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a conversion means.

(37B) When performing a setting change operation for changing the setting state relating to the outer frame, the main body frame that is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, and is provided with a game board, the changed setting state A gaming machine comprising a setting state display unit for displaying,
A gaming machine, comprising: a viewing difficulty means for making it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting state display unit when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame.

(37C) an outer frame, a main body frame that is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, and on which a game board is provided; A gaming machine,
A game machine, comprising: a difficulty determining unit that makes it difficult to operate the setting determining operation unit when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame.

(37D) A gaming machine including an outer frame, a main body frame that is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, and on which a game board is provided, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to the game. And
The setting change operation unit includes a setting key insertion unit into which a setting key is inserted,
When the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame, the specific key of the outer frame is configured to inhibit insertion of the setting key into the setting key insertion unit. To play.

  According to the inventions 37A to 37D, it is difficult for an unauthorized person to change an unauthorized setting state, and the reliability of the gaming machine can be improved.

(37E) A gaming machine that displays a variation of a symbol based on the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming profit when a winning result is derived as a variation display result of the symbol,
A variation time determining means for determining a variation time of the symbol;
A setting information determining unit that determines predetermined setting information about a game as one of a plurality based on an operation on the specific operation unit,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the variation time determining means is capable of determining a specific variation time when the setting information is determined as the specific information based on an operation on the specific operation unit.

(37F) A gaming machine that displays a variation of a symbol based on establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined gaming profit when a winning result is derived as a variation display result of the symbol,
A variation time determining means for determining a variation time of the symbol;
A probability determining unit that determines, based on an operation on the specific operation unit, the probability that the hit result is derived to any one of a plurality of probabilities;
The gaming machine, wherein the variation time determining means can determine a specific variation time when the probability determined based on an operation on the specific operation unit is a specific probability.

(37G) A gaming machine that displays a variation of a symbol based on the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming profit when a winning result is derived as a variation display result of the symbol,
A variation time determining means for determining a variation time of the symbol;
A setting information determining unit that determines predetermined setting information about a game as one of a plurality based on an operation on the specific operation unit,
The variation time determining means may determine a common variation time regardless of the setting information, and may determine a different variation time according to the setting information,
The gaming machine characterized in that a probability that a different variation time is determined according to the setting information is set lower than a probability that the common variation time is determined.

(37H) A gaming machine that displays a variation of a symbol based on establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined gaming profit when a winning result is derived as a variation display result of the symbol,
A variation time determining means for determining a variation time of the symbol;
A setting information determining unit that determines predetermined setting information related to a game as one of a plurality based on an operation on the specific operation unit;
An effect control unit for performing a predetermined effect,
The variable time determining means can determine different variable times according to the setting information,
When the specific variation time is determined by the variation time determination means corresponding to the specific setting information in the setting information, the effect control unit displays the variation display of the symbol within the specific variation time. A gaming machine characterized by sequentially performing a result suggesting effect indicating a result and a setting suggesting effect indicating the content of the setting information determined by the setting information determining unit.

  According to the inventions from 37E to 37H, it is possible to make the player sense the setting state in a new manner, and to improve the gaming interest.

(37I) A main control board provided with a game control unit for performing control related to a game, another control board connected to the main control board and provided with a control unit different from the game control unit, and the game control A setting-related operation unit for changing a setting state related to a game performed by the unit,
The game control unit includes setting change permission state generation means for allowing an operation related to the change of the setting state with respect to the setting related operation unit,
The setting change permissible state generating means allows an operation related to the change of the setting state when information transmitted from the another control board to the main control board is specific information. .

  According to the invention of 37I, it is difficult for an unauthorized person to change an unauthorized setting state, and the reliability of the gaming machine can be improved.

(37J) a game control unit that performs control related to a game, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to control performed by the game control unit, and a game area by an operation of a predetermined launch operation unit by a player A gaming machine that grants a gaming profit by winning a game ball launched toward the predetermined prize opening,
When the setting change operation unit is operated and the setting state is changed, it has a firing disabling unit that disables the launching of the game ball by the operation of the firing operation unit over a predetermined period. Gaming machine.

  According to the invention of 37J, an act of changing the setting state illegally can be suppressed.

(38A) A gaming machine comprising a game control unit that performs control related to a game, and a setting operation unit for changing settings related to control performed by the game control unit,
A gaming machine, wherein the game control board constituting the game control unit and the setting board constituting the setting operation unit are accommodated in one case.

  (38B) In the case described above, in the case, a dummy unit that cannot perform an operation for changing a setting can be accommodated together with the game control unit instead of the setting operation unit. Gaming machine.

(38C) The setting operation unit
A first operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed;
A second operation unit for confirming the setting and ending the setting state;
A gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, comprising a setting display for displaying the contents of the setting.

  (38D) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the dummy unit does not include any of the first operation unit, the second operation unit, and the setting display.

  According to the inventions of 38A to 38D, the specifications of the gaming machine having the setting function and the gaming machine not having the setting function can be made common, and can be efficiently designed and produced.

(39A) a game control unit including a processor that executes a program for performing control related to a game, and a memory that is accessed by the processor;
A clear switch for initializing a predetermined area of the memory;
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation unit for changing settings related to control performed by the game control unit,
The setting operation unit includes a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed.
The game control unit
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the operation of the clear switch and the operation of the setting change operation unit are detected,
A gaming machine, wherein the setting state is started when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is operated.

  (39B) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit initializes the first area of the memory after the setting state ends.

  (39C) When the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is not operated, the game control unit, in the second region at least partially different from the first region, The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein a memory is initialized.

  According to the inventions of 39A to 39C, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation of setting change.

(40A) A gaming machine comprising a game control unit that performs control related to a game, and a setting operation unit for changing settings related to control performed by the game control unit,
The game control unit has a game value display means for displaying information related to a given game value,
The setting operation unit includes a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed, and a setting display unit that displays the content of the setting,
The gaming machine is characterized in that in the set state, the game value display means and the setting display means display so as not to be confused.

  (40B) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit and the setting operation unit are accommodated in one case.

  (40C) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are configured by a single display.

(40D) The game value display means displays information on the assigned game value on the display without delay according to the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information on the setting on the display instead of information on the assigned gaming value in the setting state.

  (40E) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are configured by separate displays.

(40F) The game value display means
Other than the setting state, information about the assigned game value is displayed without delay according to the progress of the game,
In the setting state, display any of letters, numbers, and figures that are not displayed in the setting state,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information related to the setting in the setting state.

(40G) The game value display means
Other than the setting state, information about the assigned game value is displayed without delay according to the progress of the game,
In the setting state, the light is extinguished or fully lit,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information related to the setting in the setting state.

  According to the inventions of 40A to 40G, it is possible to prevent a plurality of displays arranged on the substrate from being confused.

(41A) lottery means for performing a lottery for winning based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start port;
Production determining means for determining any production from a plurality of productions based on the result of the lottery,
Effect execution means for executing the effect determined by the effect determination means;
Setting information determining means for determining, when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, one of a plurality of predetermined setting information related to a game;
A setting information confirmation unit that displays the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit on a predetermined display when an operation different from the predetermined operation is performed;
The plurality of effects include a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
A gaming machine, wherein the setting suggestion effect can be executed even if the different operation is performed when it is determined by the effect determining means that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed.

(41B) lottery means for performing a lottery for winning based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start port;
Setting information determining means for determining, when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, one of a plurality of predetermined setting information related to a game;
Production determining means for determining any production from a plurality of productions based on the result of the lottery,
Effect execution means for executing the effect determined by the effect determination means;
An error detection means for detecting an error;
Error notification means for notifying an error detected by the error detection means,
The plurality of effects include a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
The gaming machine characterized in that the effect execution means can execute the setting suggestion effect during a period in which the error notification means notifies an error that satisfies a predetermined condition.

(41C) lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the start condition;
Determination means for determining whether or not the winning based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means;
Special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition;
If the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number;
Setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information related to a game as one of a plurality based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
If the start condition is newly established during the variation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect is determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is suspended, the newly established A game machine characterized by restricting execution of the setting suggestion effect in the special symbol variation corresponding to the started condition.

(41D) lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the start condition;
Determination means for determining whether or not the winning based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means;
Special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition;
If the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number;
Setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information related to a game as one of a plurality based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
If the start condition is newly established during the variation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect is determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is suspended, the newly established A game machine characterized in that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the start condition.

(41E) lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the start condition;
Determination means for determining whether or not the winning based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means;
Special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition;
If the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number;
Setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information related to a game as one of a plurality based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
When the start condition is newly established during the variation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is suspended A gaming machine that restricts execution of the setting suggestion effect in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established start condition.

(41F) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the start condition;
Determination means for determining whether or not the winning based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means;
Special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition;
If the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number;
Setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information related to a game as one of a plurality based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
When the start condition is newly established during the variation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is suspended A gaming machine that restricts execution of the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established start condition.

(41G) lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the start condition;
Determination means for determining whether or not the winning based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means;
Special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition;
If the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number;
Setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information related to a game as one of a plurality based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
When the start condition is newly established during the variation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is suspended A gaming machine characterized in that the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established start condition.

  According to the inventions 41A to 41G, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(42A) A gaming machine including main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to a player based on a result of winning lottery in a game,
The main control means includes
Program storage means for storing the first program and the second program;
Arithmetic means for performing required arithmetic processing by the first program and the second program;
First storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
Second storage means having a storage area of the same configuration as the first storage means,
The first storage means and the second storage means can be accessed or not so that one of them can be accessed,
The computing means is
Using the first storage means when executing the first program;
A gaming machine using the second storage means when executing the second program.

  (42B) The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first storage means and the second storage means are switched to be accessible by one instruction input to the calculation means.

  (42C) The instruction for switching the first storage means to be accessible and the instruction for switching the second storage means to be accessible are different in at least one of an instruction (opcode) and an argument (operand). Gaming machine.

(42D) The first program is a program (in a game control area) for performing a winning lottery in a game,
The second program is a program (outside the game control area) for calculating information related to a game value given in a game, and is called and executed from the first program.

(42E) A gaming machine including main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to a player based on a result of winning lottery in a game,
The main control means includes
Program storage means for storing the first program and the second program;
Arithmetic means for performing required arithmetic processing by the first program and the second program;
First storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
Second storage means having a storage area of the same configuration as the first storage means,
The first storage means and the second storage means can be accessed or not so that one of them can be accessed,
The computing means is
When executing the first program, the first storage means is used,
At the start of the second program, in the second program, the first storage means is made inaccessible and the second storage means is made accessible,
A game machine using the second storage means when executing the second program.

  (42F) The gaming machine, wherein at the end of the second program, the calculation means switches the access to the first storage means in an inaccessible manner to the second storage means in the second program.

(42G) A gaming machine including main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to a player based on a result of winning lottery in a game,
The main control means includes
Program storage means for storing the first program and the second program;
Arithmetic means for performing required arithmetic processing by the first program and the second program;
First storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
Second storage means having a storage area of the same configuration as the first storage means,
The first storage means and the second storage means can be accessed or not so that one of them can be accessed,
The computing means is
When executing the first program, the first storage means is used,
When starting the second program, in the first program, the first storage means is made inaccessible and the second storage means is made accessible,
A game machine using the second storage means when executing the second program.

  (42H) The computing means switches the first program returned from the second program to be inaccessible to the second storage means and accessible to the first storage means after the end of the second program. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the inventions of 42A to 42H, when processing is transferred between programs, data can be saved at high speed with a simple instruction, and precautions when creating a program can be reduced.

(43A) a gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling effects in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and displays an effect;
A display panel for displaying the production pattern;
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light so as to travel through the display panel from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel;
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in a specific path through the display panel to a front side of the gaming machine, and light traveling through the display panel through a plurality of paths. A plurality of second reflecting portions reflecting on the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern and changing the light reflected by the first reflecting portion, a dynamic pattern is displayed on the display panel,
A game machine, wherein a static pattern is displayed on the display panel by the second reflecting portion reflecting light from the light emitting device.

(43B) The light-emitting device includes a plurality of light-emitting elements that irradiate light to a side of the display panel from a plurality of positions.
The peripheral control means changes the emission color of the plurality of light emitting elements as time elapses so that light of different colors travels through different paths in the display panel. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the color of the picture projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed with the passage of time by emitting light of different colors from the portion.

(43C) The light-emitting device includes a plurality of light-emitting elements that irradiate light to a side of the display panel from a plurality of positions.
The peripheral control means switches the lighting of the plurality of light emitting elements as time elapses, controls the light path in the display panel, and emits light from at least a part of the plurality of first reflecting portions. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the color of the pattern projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed as time elapses.

(43D) The light-emitting device includes a plurality of light-emitting elements that irradiate light to a side of the display panel from a plurality of positions.
The peripheral control means switches the number of light emitting elements that emit light among the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the light path in the display panel, and controls the plurality of first reflecting portions. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the color of the picture projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed with the passage of time by emitting light from at least a part thereof.

According to the inventions of 43A to 43D, a picture that appears to move and a picture that appears to stand still can be displayed on a single light guide plate, and a decrease in the gaming interest can be suppressed.

(44A) a gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling effects in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and displays an effect;
A display panel for displaying the production pattern;
A light-emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light so as to travel through the display panel from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel;
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in a specific path through the display panel to a front side of the gaming machine, and light traveling through the display panel through a plurality of paths. A plurality of second reflecting portions reflecting on the front side of the gaming machine,
The first reflection unit includes a plurality of first right-eye reflection units that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel in a direction to reach the player's right eye, and the player's left eye A plurality of first left-eye reflecting parts that reflect in a direction to reach
The plurality of first right eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right eye pattern,
The plurality of first left-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at a position different from the right-eye pattern,
The peripheral control means includes
By causing the light emitting device to emit light so that light emitted in the same pattern reaches the first right-eye reflection unit and the first left-eye reflection unit, the right-eye pattern and the left-eye pattern Are displayed on the display panel to allow the player to recognize a three-dimensional pattern in which parallax occurs between the left and right eyes,
A gaming machine, characterized in that a planar pattern that does not cause parallax between the left and right eyes is displayed on the display panel by reflecting light from the light emitting device on the second reflecting portion.

  (44B) The second reflecting portion is a front side of the gaming machine for light traveling in a plurality of paths in the display panel, and a direction reaching the player's right eye and a direction reaching the left eye The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by being reflected on the display panel.

(44C) The second reflection unit includes a plurality of second right-eye reflection units that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel in a direction to reach the player's right eye, and the player's A plurality of second left-eye reflecting parts that reflect in a direction to reach the left eye,
The plurality of second right eye reflecting portions are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right eye pattern,
The plurality of second left-eye reflecting portions are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at the same position as the right-eye pattern,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by the light reflected by the second reflecting portion.

  According to the invention of 44A to 44C, a three-dimensional picture and a two-dimensional picture can be displayed with a single light guide plate, and a decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

(45A) a gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling effects in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and displays an effect;
A display panel for displaying the production pattern;
A light-emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light so as to travel through the display panel from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel;
The peripheral control means includes
A dynamic pattern and a static pattern can be displayed on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light,
A gaming machine characterized in that an effect suggesting the result of the winning lottery is performed by combining the display of the dynamic pattern and the display of the static pattern.

(45B) The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in a specific path through the display panel and emit the light to the front side of the gaming machine, and a plurality of paths in the display panel. A plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect the traveling light and emit to the front side of the gaming machine;
The peripheral control means includes
By causing the light-emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern, the path of light traveling in the display panel is changed, and the light reflected by the first reflecting unit is changed, thereby changing the design of the display panel. Displayed on the
The stationary pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting portion,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein an effect suggesting the result of the winning lottery is performed by combining the display of the changing pattern and the display of the stationary pattern.

  According to the inventions of 45A to 45B, the pattern that appears to move and the pattern that appears to be stationary can be displayed on a single light guide plate, and a decrease in the gaming interest can be suppressed.

(46A) a gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling effects in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
A display device controlled by the peripheral control means to display the effect image;
A display panel for displaying the production pattern;
A light-emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light so as to travel through the display panel from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel;
The display panel has a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel to the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes
By causing the light emitting device to emit light, a target pattern is displayed on the display panel,
A game machine, wherein an image moving toward the target picture is displayed on the display device.

  (46B) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the picture displayed on the display panel and the image displayed on the display device represent the same character or character.

  (46C) The game according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means displays an image moving toward the target picture on the display device after the target picture is displayed on the display panel. Machine.

  (46D) The game according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means displays the target picture on the display panel after displaying an image moving toward the target picture on the display device. Machine.

  According to the inventions of 46A to 46D, it is possible to display a plurality of patterns and patterns having different modes with a single light guide plate, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

(47A) game control means for performing a lottery of a special game that is beneficial to the player when the predetermined condition is established;
A setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means, and a gaming machine comprising:
The game control means includes
A power-on process that is executed when the game machine is powered on, and a periodic process that is executed at predetermined intervals,
A setting change in which the setting value can be changed in accordance with the operation state of the setting operation means in the power-on process when the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is operated. Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed,
After executing the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the processing corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be executed in the periodic process. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  (47B) The periodic process is common to at least two of the process related to the change of the set value, the process related to the confirmation of the set value, the process related to a normal game, and the plurality of processes. The game machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the game machine includes:

(47C) The periodic process includes at least a first repetition process for executing a process related to the normal game and a second repetition process for executing a process related to the change of the setting,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the game control means selectively executes the first repetition process and the second repetition process according to an operation mode of the gaming machine.

(47D) The memory includes a setting state management area for recording an operation state of the gaming machine in an area where the stored contents are backed up when the power is shut off.
The game control means includes
In the setting change mode, as the predetermined condition, the fact that it is the setting change mode is set in the setting state management area,
In the setting confirmation mode, as the predetermined condition, a fact that the setting confirmation mode is set is set in the setting state management area.

(48) Game control means for performing a lottery of a special game that is beneficial to the player when the predetermined condition is established;
A setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means, and a gaming machine comprising:
The game control means includes
A power-on process that is executed when the game machine is powered on, and a periodic process that is executed at predetermined intervals,
A setting change in which the setting value can be changed in accordance with the operation state of the setting operation means in the power-on process when the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is operated. Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed,
The regular process can execute a normal game process related to a normal game and a setting process related to setting change or setting confirmation.
The normal game process is configured by a plurality of processes, and a specific process among the plurality of processes is a process that can be executed in common between the normal game and the setting process.

(49A) a game control means for performing a lottery of a special game that is beneficial to the player when the predetermined condition is established;
Setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising
The setting operation means includes at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means includes
A storage means capable of storing information related to the game;
In power-on processing executed when power is turned on to the gaming machine, the output signal of the setting operation means is stored and held in a specific storage means of the storage means,
When determining whether or not the setting operation unit is operated in the power-on process, the determination is made based on the information stored and held in the specific storage unit without reading the output signal of the setting operation unit And
The second setting operation means is configured to store the storage means when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated in the power-on process. Means for initializing
In the power-on process, when the first setting operation unit is not operated and only the second setting operation unit is operated, when the storage unit is initialized, A gaming machine characterized in that the storage means is not initialized.

(49B) comprising peripheral control means for controlling the effect in the display device;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the gaming control means determines a mode for starting the gaming machine based on an output signal stored in the memory after the peripheral control means is started.

(50A) game control means for performing a lottery of a special game that is beneficial to the player when the predetermined condition is established;
Setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising
The setting operation means includes at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means includes
A storage means having at least a first storage area capable of storing information related to a game and a second storage area different from the first storage area;
The first storage area is an area for storing the setting value;
The second storage area is an area for storing various parameters used by the game,
The game control means includes
When it is determined that the set value is not a normal value, the first storage area and the second storage area are initialized,
The first storage area is not initialized when it is determined that the first setting operation means among the setting operation means is not operated and the second setting operation means is operated. A gaming machine, wherein the second storage area is initialized.

(50B) The memory further includes a third storage area,
In the preceding paragraphs, the game control means initializes the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area when the third condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described.

(50C) The third storage area is a storage area other than an area for storing various parameters used in normal games,
The game control means determines that the third condition is satisfied when the data backed up in the memory is erased when a power failure occurs, and determines that the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the storage area is initialized.

(51A) a game control means for performing a lottery of a special game that is beneficial to a player when a predetermined condition is established;
Setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising
The game control means includes
With storage means that can hold information related to games even when the power is shut off,
A power-on process that is executed when the game machine is powered on, and a periodic process that is executed at predetermined intervals,
A setting change in which the setting value can be changed in accordance with the operation state of the setting operation means in the power-on process when the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is operated. Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed,
The storage means has a setting state management area in which a value set corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is stored in accordance with the operation state of the setting operation means at least in the power-on process. A gaming machine characterized by including.

(51B) comprising setting operation means operated to start in a setting change mode for changing a setting value relating to control performed by the game control means;
The game control means includes
When an operation for starting the gaming machine in the setting change mode is performed in a state where a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area, and When an operation for initializing a predetermined area and ending the setting change mode by the setting operation means is performed, a normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area, and a game is played in a normal gaming state in which a game ball can be launched. Start the machine,
When an operation for starting the gaming machine in the setting confirmation mode is performed in a state where a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area is continued, The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein a normal gaming state is not recorded in the setting state management area even if an operation for ending the setting confirmation mode is performed by a setting operation means.

(52) Game control means for performing a lottery of a special game that is beneficial to the player when the predetermined condition is established;
Setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising
The game control means includes
A power-on process executed when the gaming machine is turned on, a first periodic process executed every predetermined first period, and a second periodic process executed every predetermined second period are executed. Made possible
In the power-on process, it is determined whether an operation associated with a setting operation is performed in the setting operation unit,
When it is determined that an operation associated with a setting operation is performed in the setting operation unit, a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed according to the operation state Execute the settings corresponding to
If it is determined in the setting operation means that an operation accompanying the setting operation is not performed, a setting corresponding to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed is performed. The normal game start process can be executed,
The first periodic process is executed after executing the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in the power-on process,
The gaming machine, wherein the second periodic process is executed after enabling normal game start processing in the power-on process.

(53A) game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
An accessory controlled according to a control signal output from the game control means;
A first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
A gaming machine that can be equipped with an inspection signal generation circuit for outputting an inspection signal used for inspection of a gaming machine,
The inspection signal generation circuit includes:
A second driver circuit that receives the same control signal as the first driver circuit and generates a test signal from the control signal;
An inspection connector for outputting the generated inspection signal;
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The gaming machine, wherein the second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the inspection signal.

(53B) The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit each include an output transistor that switches an input power supply to generate an output signal;
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit receive different voltages and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

  (53C) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein a connector connected to the first driver circuit is mounted, and a connector connected to the second driver circuit is not mounted.

  (53D) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the connector connected to the first driver circuit is a discrete component, and the connector connected to the second driver circuit is a surface-mounted component. .

(53E) Game control means for executing periodic processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game;
A first detection means for detecting an event taken in by the game control means in the regular process among events related to the progress of the game;
A game machine comprising: a second detection means for detecting an event taken in by the game control means in a process other than the regular process among events related to the progress of the game,
The game control means includes
Conversion means for converting a signal from the first detection means into a serial signal;
A serial input port to which a serial signal is input;
A general-purpose input port to which signals of the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input,
The signal of the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or the serial input port via the conversion means,
A gaming machine, wherein the signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port.

(53F) The first detection means is a ball detection means for detecting a game ball launched toward the game area,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the second detection means is setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means.

(53G) an accessory driven in accordance with a control signal output from the game control means;
A first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The serial input port is a serial input / output port capable of inputting a serial signal and outputting a serial signal,
The game control means outputs a control signal for driving the accessory from the serial input / output port,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit converts the control signal into the drive signal.

(53H) game control means for executing periodic processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game;
A gaming machine comprising first detection means and second detection means for detecting an event relating to the progress of the game,
The game control means includes
Conversion means for converting a signal from the first detection means into a serial signal;
A serial input port to which a serial signal is input;
A general-purpose input port to which signals of the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input,
The first detection means is configured to determine a signal level based on a result of detecting a signal once in the regular processing of one time,
The second detection means is configured to determine a signal level based on a result of detecting a signal a plurality of times within one periodic process.
The signal of the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or the serial input port via the conversion means,
The signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the signal level is determined by detecting the signal of the second detection means a plurality of times within one periodical process.

(53I) The first detection means is a ball detection means for detecting a game ball launched toward the game area,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the second detection means is setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means.

(53J) game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
A display device driven according to a control signal output from the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The game control means is mounted on the first printed circuit board,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the display device, and is mounted on a second printed circuit board. And
The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are connected by a serial communication line that transmits a serial signal obtained by converting a signal repeated at the predetermined cycle from the first printed circuit board side. Gaming machine.

(53K) It is possible to mount an inspection signal generation circuit for outputting an inspection signal used for inspection of a gaming machine,
The inspection signal generation circuit includes:
A second driver circuit that receives the same control signal as the first driver circuit and generates a test signal from the control signal;
An inspection connector for outputting the generated inspection signal;
The second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the inspection signal, and is mounted on the first printed circuit board. Gaming machine.

  (53L) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are accommodated in a single circuit board box.

(53M) The first printed board and the second printed board are housed in different board boxes,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the first printed circuit board is sealed by a caulking mechanism.

(53N) The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit each include an output transistor that switches an input power supply to generate an output signal;
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit receive different voltages and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 930 Power supply board box 951 Delivery control board 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1311 Main control MPU (CPU)
1312 RAM
13121 Arithmetic circuit 1313 ROM
1314 Main control I / O port 1317 Characteristic ratio display (base display)
1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Main liquid crystal display device 2002 First start port 2004 Second start port 4000 Slot machine (game machine)
4210 Start lever 4211 Reel stop button 4300 Symbol variation display device 4301 Reel 4341 Reel drive motor 4500 Image display body 4600 Main board (game control device)
4601 CPU
4602 ROM
4603 RAM
4700 Production control board 5100 ROM area 5200 RAM area 5300 I / O area 5400 Parameter information setting area

Claims (1)

In order to control the progress of the game, a game control means for executing a periodic process every predetermined period;
A gaming machine comprising first detection means and second detection means for detecting an event relating to the progress of the game,
The game control means includes
Conversion means for converting a signal from the first detection means into a serial signal;
A serial input port to which a serial signal is input;
A general-purpose input port to which signals of the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input,
The first detection means is configured to determine a signal level based on a result of detecting a signal once in the regular processing of one time,
The second detection means is configured to determine a signal level based on a result of detecting a signal a plurality of times within one periodic process.
The signal of the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or the serial input port via the conversion means,
The signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the signal level is determined by detecting the signal of the second detection means a plurality of times within one periodical process.